installation & maintenance guide for the standby server
TRANSCRIPT
Contact Center Manager ServerInstallation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server
Standard version: CS 1000, CS 2x00 NodalPreliminary version: CS 2x00 Networking
Release 6.0 Standard 10.12 January 2008
297-2183-219
Contact Center Manager ServerInstallation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server
Publication number: 297-2183-219
Product release: 6.0
Document release: Standard 10.12
Date: January 2008
Copyright © 2006-2008 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.
Information is subject to change without notice. Nortel reserves the right to make changes in design or components as progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant.
The process of transmitting data and call messaging between the Nortel Meridian 1 PBX and Contact Center Manager Server is proprietary to Nortel Networks. Any other use of the data and the transmission process is a violation of the user license unless specifically authorized in writing by Nortel prior to such use. Violations of the license by alternative usage of any portion of this process or the related hardware constitutes grounds for an immediate termination of the license and Nortel reserves the right to seek all allowable remedies for such breach.
This page and the following page are considered the title page, and contain Nortel and third-party trademarks.
*Nortel, the Nortel logo, the Globemark, CallPilot, DMS, DMS-10, DMS-100, DMS-200, DMS-250, DMS-300, DMS-500, DMS-MTX, DMS-STP, DPN, DPX, Dualmode, Helmsman, ICN, IVR, MAP, Nortel Meridian 1 PBX, Meridian Mail, Meridian SL, Norstar, Optera, Optivity, Passport, Periphonics, SL, SL-1, Succession, Supernode, and Symposium are trademarks of Nortel.
3COM, US ROBOTICS, and SPORTSTER are trademarks of 3Com Corporation.
ACCELERAID, IBM, and MYLEX are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.ACROBAT, ACROBAT READER, ADOBE, ADOBE ACROBAT, FRAME, FRAMEMAKER, and POSTSCRIPT are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.ACTIVE DIRECTORY, INTERNET EXPLORER, MICROSOFT, MICROSOFT ACCESS, MS-DOS, POWERPOINT, WINDOWS, WINDOWS NT, WINDOWS 2000, WINDOWS Server 2003 and WINDOWS XP are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
ANSI is a trademark of the American National Standards Institute, Inc.
CELERON, INTEL INSIDE XEON, INTEL XEON, ITANIUM, PENTIUM, PENTIUM II XEON, and XEON are trademarks of Intel Corporation.
CITRIX is a trademark of Citrix Systems, Inc.
COMPAQ and PROLIANT are trademarks of Compaq Information Technologies Group, L.P.CRYSTAL REPORTS is a trademark of Crystal Decisions, Inc.
DELL, OPTIPLEX, POWEREDGE, and POWERVAULT are trademarks of Dell Computer Corporation.
HEWLETT PACKARD, HP, and SURESTORE are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.
ORBIX is a trademark of Iona Technologies PLC.MCAFEE and NETSHIELD are trademarks of Networks Associates Technology, Inc.
NOVELL is a trademark of Novell, Inc.
PCANYWHERE and THE NORTON ANTIVIRUS are both trademarks of Symantec Corporation.RACORE is a trademark of Racore Computer Products, Inc.
REPLICATION AGENT, REPLICATION SERVER, and SYBASE are trademarks of Sybase, Inc.
SEAGATE is a trademark of Seagate Technology, LLC.STRATUS is a trademark of Stratus Computer Systems, S.à.r.l.
TANDBERG is a trademark of Tandberg Data ASA.
VISIBROKER is a trademark of Visigenic Software, Inc.WINZIP is a trademark of Nico Mak Computing, Inc.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server v
Contents
1 Getting started 13New in this release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18About Standby Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20How to use this guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Skills you need . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Related documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29How to get help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Part 1 General information 35
2 Contact Center Standby Server requirements 37Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Feature requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Server requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3 Licensing 51Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Nodal and Corporate licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53About the license file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Install License Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Configure the License Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Update the license file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Uninstall License Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Licensing grace period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89License Manager statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Other licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
vi Contact Center Standby Server
Contents Standard 10.12
Part 2 Install the server software 97
4 Install the Active Server software 99Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Section A: Preinstallation 103Step 1. Read the relevant documentation to perform a new installation . . . 104Step 2. Record and check for required installation information . . . . . . . . . 105Step 3. Install pcAnywhere 11.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Step 4. Copy the latest Service Update to the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Section B: Installation 125Step 5. Install the Active Server software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Step 6. Configure your CCMS settings after the installation (optional) . . . 152Step 7. Install the License Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Step 8. Install the Server Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Section C: Postinstallation 181Step 9. Install required CCMS Service Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Step 10. Change the NGenDist, NGenDesign, and NGenSys passwords . . 186Step 11. Configure the NGen user groups for remote access (optional) . . . 190Step 12. Add NGen names to pcAnywhere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Step 13. Accept the license agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Step 14. Activate the Master Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Step 15. Verify the success of the installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Step 16. Add the server to a domain (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Step 17. Create a Platform Recovery Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Step 18. Install and configure Real-time Statistics Multicast . . . . . . . . . . . 213Step 19. Install LinkPlexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Step 20. Verify your security settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Step 21. Disable the time synchronization features on the operating system 244Step 22. Complete other postinstallation tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
5 Install and configure the Standby Server 247Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Section A: Preinstallation 251Step 1. Read the relevant documentation for an upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Step 2. Gather the materials required for an installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Step 3. Copy the latest Service Update to the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Step 4. Perform a database integrity check on the Active Server . . . . . . . . 255
January 2008
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server vii
Step 5. Check the disk partition configuration on the Active Server . . . . . 258Step 6. Create a backup of the original 6.0 database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Step 7. Create a Platform Recovery Disk on the Active Server . . . . . . . . . 277Step 8. Prepare the Standby Server for Release 6.0 (optional) . . . . . . . . . . 281Step 9. Record and check for required installation information . . . . . . . . . 282Step 10. Install Windows Server 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Step 11. Ensure the computer name and DNS host name match . . . . . . . . . 301Step 12. Configure the operating system for remote access . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Step 13. Install pcAnywhere version 11.5 on the Standby Server . . . . . . . . 312Step 14. Copy the latest Service Update and Platform Recovery Disk . . . . 325Step 15. Configuring the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Section B: Migrate the Active Server to the Standby Server 333Step 16. Migrate the Active CCMS to the Standby Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Step 17. Configure your CCMS settings on the Standby Server (optional) 365Step 18. Install the License Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382Step 19. Install the Server Utility (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Section C: Postinstallation 391Step 20. Install required CCMS Service Updates on the Standby Server . . 392Step 21. Change the NGenDist, NGenDesign, and NGenSys passwords . . 396Step 22. Configure the NGen user groups for remote access (optional) . . . 400Step 23. Add NGen names to pcAnywhere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402Step 24. Add the server to a domain (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405Step 25. Install and configure Real-time Statistics Multicast . . . . . . . . . . . 415Step 26. Install LinkPlexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427Step 27. Verify your security settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444Step 28. Disable the time synchronization features on the operating system 446Step 29. Complete other postinstallation tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Section D: Prepare the Replication Server 449Step 30. Install Windows Server 2003 on the Replication Server . . . . . . . . 450Step 31. Install the Replication Server software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465Step 32. Set up the Warm Standby configuration on the Replication Server 472Step 33. Prepare the Standby Server to perform database backups . . . . . . . 489
6 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment 503
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Section A: Prepare the Replication Server 505Step 1. Install Windows Server 2003 on the Replication Server . . . . . . . . . 506Step 2. Install the Replication Server software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
viii Contact Center Standby Server
Contents Standard 10.12
Step 3. Verify Standby Server feature is enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Section B: Preinstallation 529Step 4. Read the relevant documentation for an upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530Step 5. Gather the materials required for an upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531Step 6. Install the latest Service Update and any required patches . . . . . . . 532Step 7. Perform a database integrity check on the Active Server . . . . . . . . 533Step 8. Check the disk partition configuration on the Active Server . . . . . 536Step 9. Create a backup of the original 6.0 database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538Step 10. Create a Platform Recovery Disk on the Active Server . . . . . . . . 551Step 11. Prepare the Standby Server for Release 6.0 (optional) . . . . . . . . . 555Step 12. Record and check for required installation information . . . . . . . . 556Step 13. Install Windows Server 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562Step 14. Ensure the computer name and DNS host name match . . . . . . . . . 574Step 15. Configure the operating system for remote access . . . . . . . . . . . . 578Step 16. Install pcAnywhere version 11.5 on the Standby Server . . . . . . . . 585Step 17. Copy the latest Service Update and Platform Recovery Disk . . . . 598Step 18. Configuring the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Section C: Migrate the Active Server to the Standby Server 601Step 19. Migrate the Active CCMS to the Standby Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602Step 20. Configure your CCMS settings on the Standby Server (optional) 632Step 21. Install the License Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649Step 22. Install the Server Utility (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Section D: Post-installation 659Step 23. Change the NGenDist, NGenDesign, and NGenSys passwords . . 660Step 24. Configure the NGen user groups for remote access . . . . . . . . . . . 664Step 25. Add NGen names to pcAnywhere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666Step 26. Add the server to domain (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669Step 27. Install and configure Real-time Statistics Multicast . . . . . . . . . . . 679
Section E: Set up and test Warm Standby 693Step 28. Set up the Warm Standby configuration on the Replication Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694Step 29. Test the Standby Server configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
Part 3 Switch over the servers 715
7 Switch over to the Standby Server 717Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
January 2008
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server ix
Section A: Option One switchover 725Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726Switch over the servers for a planned outage (Option One). . . . . . . . . . . . . 728Switch over the servers for a short-term failure (Option One) . . . . . . . . . . . 745Switch over the servers for a long-term failure (Option One) . . . . . . . . . . . 765
Section B: Option Two switchover 787Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788Switch over the servers for a planned outage (Option Two) . . . . . . . . . . . . 790Switch over the servers for a short-term failure (Option Two) . . . . . . . . . . 803Switch over the servers for a long-term failure (Option Two) . . . . . . . . . . . 818
Section C: Restore the Primary Server to active mode 837Restore options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838Rebuild the software on the Primary Server after a failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840
8 Restart replication 843Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844Restart replication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845Problems restarting replication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863
Part 4 Appendixes 865
A Install and uninstall patches 867Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868Install patches on the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870Uninstall SUs from the server using the Patch Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875Problems restarting replication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881
B Maintain the Replication Server 883Monitor the Replication Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884Maintain the Replication Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892Remove Warm Standby configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893Stop and resume replication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895Add Stable Queue partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898Upgrade the Standby Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901Uninstall the Replication Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902Restart replication after maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
x Contact Center Standby Server
Contents Standard 10.12
C Back up data 907Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908Backup speeds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912Requirements for backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917Checklist to perform backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920Create a Platform Recovery Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921Calculate the capacity requirements for database backups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924Backup options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927Set up tape backups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929Set up remote directory backups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932Guidelines for third-party backup software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946Prepare for third-party backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948
D Restore data 953Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954Recover a recent backup of the database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955Restore the database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958Recover the database with a third-party backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
E Manage security 977Microsoft security guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978Password guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979Change Nortel user account passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980Protect pcAnywhere settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983Check server events for suspicious activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985Configure Data Execution Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 986Use Security Configuration Wizard and enable Windows Firewall. . . . . . . 989Activate the Nortel Contact Center Security Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019
F Work with alarms and events 1025Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026Change the Windows EventLog size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028Use the Windows Event Viewer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030Configure SNMP on the server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031
G Use server features 1035Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1036Database Expansion utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037
January 2008
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server xi
H Uninstallation 1043Uninstall the database and Contact Center Manager Server. . . . . . . . . . . . 1044Reinstall the database software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057Uninstall License Manger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1058Uninstall Server Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1062
I Reserved Standby Server names 1067Reserved words. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068
J Change the names or IP addresses of servers 1071Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072Change the Contact Center Manager Server name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073Change the Contact Center Manager Server IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087Change the Contact Center Manager Standby Server name. . . . . . . . . . . . 1104Change the Contact Center Manager Standby server IP address . . . . . . . . 1124Change the co-resident server name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148Change the co-resident server IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1171Change the Contact Center Manager Administration server name . . . . . . 1182Change the Contact Center Manager Administration server IP address . . 1199Change the Communication Control Toolkit server name . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206Change the Communication Control Toolkit IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1216Change the Contact Center Multimedia server name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1220Change the Contact Center Multimedia IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232Change the Contact Center Multimedia Standby server name . . . . . . . . . . 1239
Glossary 1247
Index 1287
xii Contact Center Standby Server
Contents Standard 10.12
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 13
C h a p t e r 1
Getting started
In this chapterNew in this release 14
Overview 18
About Standby Server 20
How to use this guide 27
Skills you need 28
Related documents 29
How to get help 33
14 Contact Center Standby Server
Getting started Standard 10.12
New in this release
The following sections detail what is new in the Contact Center Manager Server Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server (297-2183-219) for release 10.12.
“Features” on page 14
“Other changes” on page 15
Features
See the following section for information about feature changes.
Organizational informationThis is a new guide that describes how to set up and initiate a switchover between the Active Server and the Standby Server. Information for this guide originally appeared as an appendix in the Contact Center Manager Server Installation and Maintenance Guide. Sections include:
“Contact Center Standby Server requirements” on page 37
“Install the Active Server software” on page 99
“Install and configure the Standby Server” on page 247
“Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment” on page 503
“Switch over to the Standby Server” on page 717
“Restart replication” on page 843
“Install and uninstall patches” on page 867
“Back up data” on page 907
“Restore data” on page 953
“Maintain the Replication Server” on page 883
“Manage security” on page 977
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 15
January 2008 Getting started
Other changes
See the following sections for information about changes that are not feature-related.
“Expanded procedure for changing the server IP address” on page 15
“Post-switchover tasks updated” on page 15
“Install Windows Server 2003 updated” on page 16
“Backup and restore subprocedures added” on page 16
“Steps added to new postinstallation sections” on page 16
“New change server name and IP address appendix” on page 16
“Added a procedure for upgrading from Nodal to Corporate licensing” on page 17
“Added new procedure for uninstalling License Manager” on page 17
“Microsoft security guidelines added” on page 17
“Updated Change of IP Address appendix” on page 17
Expanded procedure for changing the server IP addressThe procedure to change the server IP address for the Active or Standby Server is expanded to included step-by-step instructions. These instructions cover configurations using a Nortel server subnet or an ELAN subnet, a co-resident License Manager, and updating other servers in the configuration.
This change applies to Appendix B, “Maintain the Replication Server.”
Post-switchover tasks updatedThe post-switchover procedure for the Contact Center Multimedia server is updated with additional steps.
This change applies to Chapter 7, “Switch over to the Standby Server.”
16 Contact Center Standby Server
Getting started Standard 10.12
Install Windows Server 2003 updatedThe recommendation to configure the Active Server and the Standby Server with the same computer name and IP address is removed. The new recommendation is to configure the LAN network cards with the appropriate network IP configuration (for example, subnet mask and default gateway) for the subnet on which the server is located. The Standby Server must be configured with a different computer name and IP address from the Active Server.
This applies to steps in Chapter 5, “Install and configure the Standby Server” and Chapter 6, “Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment.”
Backup and restore subprocedures addedAdditional subprocedures to back up and restore a database are added to the following procedures:
Setting up the Warm Standby configuration on the Replication Server
Restarting replication
These changes apply to Chapter 5, “Install and configure the Standby Server”, Chapter 6, “Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment”, and Chapter 8, “Restart replication.”
Steps added to new postinstallation sectionsThe following steps are added to the new postinstallation sections:
Change the NGenDist, NGenDesign, and NGenSys passwords.
Configure the NGen user groups for remote access.
Add NGen names to pcAnywhere.
Add the server to a domain (optional).
Install and configure Real-time Statistics Multicast.
These changes apply to Chapter 5, “Install and configure the Standby Server” and Chapter 6, “Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment.”
New change server name and IP address appendixA new appendix, Change server name and IP address, has been added. This appendix covers changing the server name and IP address of all Contact Center servers, including co-resident and Standby Server configurations.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 17
January 2008 Getting started
Added a procedure for upgrading from Nodal to Corporate licensingA new procedure is added to cover an upgrade from Nodal licensing to Corporate licensing. The procedure covers coresident License Manager configuration, Primary and Secondary License Managers, and updates to additional Contact Center products, such as Contact Center Manager Administration, in the same configuration.
Added new procedure for uninstalling License ManagerA new procedure is added for uninstalling License Manager. This procedure is added to the License Manager chapter.
Microsoft security guidelines addedGuidelines are added to the Manager Security chapter to ensure your system has the latest Microsoft patches.
Updated Change of IP Address appendixThe Change of IP Address appendix is updated to include changes to the Contact Center Multimedia server.
18 Contact Center Standby Server
Getting started Standard 10.12
Overview
This chapter describes the Standby Server and provides guidelines for using this guide.
The Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server provides information and procedures to help you complete the following tasks:
understand the requirements for a Contact Center Standby Server Release 6.0 server platform
connect external or peripheral hardware components
configure the Windows Server 2003 (Enterprise or Standard) operating system
install and configure pcAnywhere
install the Contact Center Standby Server Release 6.0 software
configure the Active, Standby, and Replication Servers
install the License Manager software
install the Server Utility software
perform a switchover from the Active to the Standby Server
stop and resume replication
Who should read this guide
This guide is intended for:
Nortel installers and distributors who are responsible for installing and maintaining Contact Center software
administrators who are responsible for monitoring and maintaining the Contact Center Manager Server
Access rights
This guide is based on the assumption that you have the privileges and access rights required to perform the procedures in this guide. For more information, see the Contact Center Manager Administrator’s Guide.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 19
January 2008 Getting started
License Manager
Some features described in this guide are optional. The License Manager software provides access to these features. You can install License Manager on the same server on which you install the Contact Center Manager Server software. Fields and commands for features that you did not purchase are not available.
20 Contact Center Standby Server
Getting started Standard 10.12
About Standby Server
The Standby Server feature includes the following:
Active Server
Standby Server
Replication Server
The Contact Center Standby Server feature supports a Warm Standby configuration so that a Standby Server can run your contact center if the Active Server fails. You can configure the Standby Server in the same way as the Active Server, with identical scripts, agents, and so on. However, you do not connect the Standby Server to the switch.
If the Active Server fails, or if you decide to stop its service for a while, the Standby Server takes over the operation of the contact center. This avoids costly downtime for the contact center.
Contact Center Standby Server can be used with Contact Center Manager Servers in nodal or networked environments, but cannot be used with an NCC server.
The Contact Center Standby Server feature uses the Sybase Replication Server product to maintain a pair of Contact Center Manager Server databases—an Active Server database and a Standby Sever database. The Active Server database belongs to the Active Server, while the Standby Server database belongs to the Standby Server.
The Replication Server runs on a dedicated server that is separate from the Active Server and the Standby Server.
During normal contact processing, the Active Server regularly updates its database. The Replication Server copies the database updates to the Standby Sever database. The Replication Server updates the Standby Server database in the same manner as the Active Server updates its database to maintain consistency between the databases.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 21
January 2008 Getting started
Co-residency
Co-residency is not supported in Contact Center Standby Server. You cannot install a Standby Server for an Active Server containing Contact Center Manager Server and Contact Center Manager Administration, Communication Control Toolkit, or Contact Center Multimedia.
Switchover options
The following are the two switchover options:
Option One—Option One switchover is invoked manually by the user, or it is used in conjunction with the Automatic Switchover option if it is enabled. This option configures the Standby Server for use and launches the Contact Center Manager services without further user intervention.
Use Option One for Geographic Redundancy scenarios. You can also use Option One for Campus Redundancy scenarios if you are updating Nortel or third-party applications with the address of the Standby Server, and doing so does not involve significant overhead.
Option Two—Option Two switchover is invoked manually only. If you use Option Two, you must change the computer name and Nortel server subnet IP address on each server during switchover. The remaining steps are automated. Use this method for Campus Redundancy scenarios where updating Nortel or third-party applications with the address of the Standby Server involves significant overhead.
ATTENTION If the Active and Standby Servers are members of a Windows domain, the domain administrator must remove the Standby Server computer name from Active Directory Users and Computers on the domain controller. You can then change the name of the Standby Server to that of the Active Server.
22 Contact Center Standby Server
Getting started Standard 10.12
Automatic switchover
You can use the Automatic Switchover option to switch over to the Standby Server without any user intervention. The Automatic Switchover is limited to the operation of the Standby Server and does not take into account additional application servers such as Contact Center Manager Administration, Contact Center Multimedia, and CallPilot.
You configure this option on the Replication Server.
Alarms and events
A new alarm is added on the Standby Server to alert the administrator when the connection between the Active Server and the Replication Server is disrupted. For a complete list of alarms and events, see “Alarms and events” on page 888.
Agent status during a switchover
When the Active Server stops functioning, the agents remain connected to the current call presented to them through Contact Center Manager Network Skill-Based Routing (NSBR). Subsequent calls are plain Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) calls and are presented to their set default queue. The agents do not need to log on and are only aware that the Active Server is out of service based on information on their set displays. No skillset information is displayed on the telephone or desktop when calls are presented.
When the switchover occurs, the Standby Server takes the place of the Active Server. The ASM starts on the Standby Server and the Terminal Numbers (TN) are acquired. The agents continue to be connected to the current call presented to them through ACD, until the call is released. When the call is released, the agents’ sets log off, Set Busy appears on the display, and their MakeSetBusy key lamp is activated. They must log back on to handle Standby Server skillset calls.
Initializing the Standby Server database
When configuring a Warm Standby system, and before replication begins, you must initialize the Standby Server database so that it is identical to the Active Server database. Initializing the Standby Server database involves backing up the Active Server database and restoring the backup on the Standby Server
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 23
January 2008 Getting started
database. This method allows the Active Server to continue operating while you configure the Warm Standby system. Database updates continue in the Active Server database as part of normal call center operations before and after the database backup is created on the Standby Server.
You initialize the Active Server database when you set up the Warm Standby configuration on the Replication Server. For more information, see Step 32. “Set up the Warm Standby configuration on the Replication Server” on page 472.
In such a scenario, it is important that database updates included in the database backup and restore are not replicated to the Standby Server, as this can cause errors in the Standby Server database. The Replication Server has a mechanism, using a system of markers, that distinguishes between transactions that occur before the database backup is created and transactions that occur after.
When a Warm Standby system is configured, the Replication Server writes an enable replication marker into the Active Server database transaction log. When a database backup is created, the Active Server writes a dump marker into the Active Server database transaction log.
The Replication Agent on the Active Server scans transactions in the
transaction log, including the markers, and sends them to the Replication Server. The Replication Server starts replicating transactions to the Standby Server when it receives the first dump marker after receiving the enable replication marker.
Additional InformationAdditional Sybase Replication Server documentation is on the Sybase Web site (www.sybase.com).
Enable marker
Dump marker
Loggrows
Applied to thestandby data-base
Included in backup, and loaded in the standby data-base
24 Contact Center Standby Server
Getting started Standard 10.12
Network Architecture
Two main features of Contact Center Standby Server architecture are the Geographic Redundancy and Campus Redundancy solutions. Decide which solution to use based on which switchover option you will invoke. For more information, see “Switchover options” on page 21.
Switchover Option One must be used in Geographic Redundancy scenarios. With Geographic Redundancy, the Active and Standby Contact Center Manager Servers are geographically dispersed. They are likely in different network subnets. The entire setup is duplicated at the secondary site (including CS1000, CallPilot, and Contact Center Manager Administration). Therefore, you perform fewer post-switchover steps, as all of the entities that connect to Contact Center Manager Server at the secondary site are already configured with the IP address of the Standby Server.
You can also use Switchover Option One in Campus Redundancy scenarios if updating Nortel or third-party applications with the address of the Standby Server does not involve significant overhead.
Geographic RedundancyA Geographic Redundancy solution consists of a primary site and a remote secondary site. All equipment at the primary site is duplicated at the secondary site, including Contact Center Manager Server, Contact Center Manager Administration, the switch, Contact Center Multimedia, Communication Control Toolkit, CallPilot, as applicable. The primary and secondary sites are connected using the enterprise Wide Area Network (WAN). Each Contact Center Manager Server is connected to its local Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX switch. The Replication Server replicates the database transactions between the primary Contact Center Manager Server (the Active Server) and the secondary Contact Center Manager Server (the Standby Server).
The following figure shows the relationship between servers, switches, and the WAN in a Geographic Redundancy solution.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 25
January 2008 Getting started
Campus RedundancyThe Campus Redundancy solution also consists of a primary Contact Center Manager Server (the Active Server), a secondary Contact Center Manager Server (the Standby Server), and a Replication Server. However, the server are located in the same physical location and on the same network subnet. The Active and Standby Servers can be connected to the same or separate switch. The Replication Server replicates the database transactions between the Active Server and the Standby Server.
In normal operation, the Standby Server is not operational.
The Warm Standby configuration is one-to-one. The Active Server replicates to only one Standby Server.
Each Active and Standby Server is configured with a unique computer name and a Nortel server subnet IP address. Each Standby Server can be configured with a unique Embedded Local Area Network (ELAN) subnet IP address (optional).
The following figure shows the relationship between servers, switches, and the WAN in a Campus Redundancy solution.
26 Contact Center Standby Server
Getting started Standard 10.12
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 27
January 2008 Getting started
How to use this guide
This guide covers topics such as installing all components of Contact Center Standby Server, upgrading or switching the server software, backing up and restoring data, and maintaining the server.
This guide includes a detailed table of contents and an index to help you find specific information or procedures related to server installation and maintenance. The “Where to start in this guide” section focuses only on the most common tasks. If the task you want to perform is not listed, use the table of contents or index to find the information you need.
Where to start in this guide
The following table describes where to start for common procedures.
If you want to do this Start here
Install the Active Contact Center Manager Server.
Chapter 4, “Install the Active Server software.”.
Install and configure the Standby Server software.
Chapter 5, “Install and configure the Standby Server.”.
Add the Standby Server to a preexisting Contact Center Manager Server environment.
Chapter 6, “Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment.”.
Perform a switchover. Chapter 7, “Switch over to the Standby Server.”.
Install patches. Appendix A, “Install and uninstall patches.”.
Back up data. Appendix C, “Back up data.”.
Restore data. Appendix D, “Restore data.”.
Monitor and maintain the Replication Server.
Appendix B, “Maintain the Replication Server.”.
Manage security. Appendix E, “Manage security.”.
28 Contact Center Standby Server
Getting started Standard 10.12
Skills you need
This section describes the skills and knowledge you need to use this guide effectively.
Required experience or knowledge
Before you install the Contact Center portfolio, you must have the following experience or knowledge:
client/server architecture
LAN/WAN networking
network security and management
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition or Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition administration and configuration, including experience with Windows domain administration skills and privileges
partitioning server hard drives and booting servers from CD or disk
Internet Protocols (IP)
performance management
troubleshooting
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 29
January 2008 Getting started
Related documents
The following guides are available on the Contact Center portfolio DVD or on the Nortel Web site (www.nortel.com).
For information about Refer to NTP number
Planning and engineering guidelines, and server requirements
Nortel Contact Center Manager Planning and Engineering Guide
297-2183-934
Nortel Contact Center Manager CapTool User’s Guide
297-2183-935
Server requirements Nortel Contact Center Server and Operating System Requirements Guide
297-2183-263
The Contact Center portfolio
Nortel Contact Center What is New in Release 6.0
297-2183-903
Required installation and server data
Nortel Contact Center Installer’s Roadmap (see www.nortel.com/pic)
297-2183-226
Switch configuration Nortel Contact Center Communication Server 1000/Meridian 1 and Voice Processing Guide
297-2183-931
Nortel Contact Center Manager Switch Guide for Communication Server 2x00/DMS
297-2183-937
Nortel SIP Contact Center Switch Configuration Guide
297-2183-962
Server operating system configuration and requirements
Nortel Contact Center Manager Server Technical Requirements and Operating System Configuration Guide
297-2183-212
30 Contact Center Standby Server
Getting started Standard 10.12
Nortel Contact Center Manager Server Technical Requirements and Operating System Configuration Guide for the coresident server
297-2183-944
Nortel Contact Center Manager Administration Technical Requirements and Operating System Configuration Guide
297-2183-213
Nortel Communication Control Toolkit Server Technical Requirements and Operating System Configuration Guide
297-2183-215
Nortel Contact Center Multimedia Server Technical Requirements and Operating System Configuration Guide
297-2183-214
Nortel Contact Center 6.0 Security Guide
Nortel Contact Center Portfolio Service Packs Compatibility and Security Hotfixes Applicability List
For information about Refer to NTP number
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 31
January 2008 Getting started
Installation, upgrades, migration, and maintenance
Nortel Contact Center Manager Server Installation and Maintenance Guide
297-2183-925
Nortel Contact Center Manager Server Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Coresident Server
297-2183-218
Nortel Contact Center Manager Server Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server
297-2183-219
Nortel Contact Center Manager Administration Installation and Maintenance Guide
297-2183-926
Nortel Communication Control Toolkit Installation and Maintenance Guide
297-2183-946
Nortel Contact Center Multimedia Installation and Maintenance Guide
297-2183-929
Nortel Media Application Server Installation and Configuration Guide for Contact Center 6.0
297-2183-227
Scripting Nortel Contact Center Manager Scripting Guide for Communication Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX
297-2183-930
Nortel Contact Center Manager Scripting Guide for Communication Server 2x00/DMS
297-2183-936
Nortel Contact Center Manager Database Integration User Guide
297-2183-940
For information about Refer to NTP number
32 Contact Center Standby Server
Getting started Standard 10.12
Networked contact center
Nortel Contact Center Manager Network Control Center Administrator’s Guide
297-2183-932
Administering contact centers
Nortel Contact Center Manager Administrator’s Guide
297-2183-927
Supervising contact centers
Nortel Contact Center Manager Supervisor’s Guide
297-2183-928
Reporting Nortel Contact Center Historical Reporting and Data Dictionary
297-2183-914
Handling contacts Nortel Contact Center Agent Desktop User Guide
297-2183-945
For information about Refer to NTP number
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 33
January 2008 Getting started
How to get help
This section explains how to get help for Nortel products and services.
Finding the latest updates on the Nortel Web site
The content of this documentation was current at the time the product was released. To check for updates to the latest documentation and software for Contact Center 6.0, click one of the following links:
Get help from the Nortel Web site
The best way to get technical support for Nortel products is the Nortel Technical Support Web site:
www.nortel.com/support
This site provides quick access to software, documentation, bulletins, and tools to address issues with Nortel products. From this site, you can:
download software and related tools
download technical documents, release notes, and product bulletins
sign up for automatic notification of new software and documentation
search the Technical Support Web site and Nortel Knowledge Base for answers to technical issues
open and manage technical support cases
Link to Takes you directly to
Latest software The Nortel page for Contact Center is located at www.nortel.com/espl.
Latest documentation The Nortel page for Contact Center documentation is located at www.nortel.com/helmsman.
34 Contact Center Standby Server
Getting started Standard 10.12
Get help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center
If you do not find the information you require on the Nortel Technical Support Web site, and you have a Nortel support contract, you can also get help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center.
In North America, call 1-800-4NORTEL (1-800-466-7835).
Outside North America, go to the Web site below to obtain the phone number for your region:
www.nortel.com/callus
Get help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code
You can use an Express Routing Code (ERC) to more quickly route your call to the appropriate support specialist. To locate the ERC for your product or service, go to:
www.nortel.com/erc
Get help through a Nortel distributor or reseller
If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor or authorized reseller, you can contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 35
Pa r t 1
General information
36 Contact Center Standby Server
Standard 10.12
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 37
C h a p t e r 2
Contact Center Standby Server requirements
In this chapter Overview 38
Feature requirements 41
Server requirements 42
38 Contact Center Standby Server
Contact Center Standby Server requirements Standard 10.12
Overview
This chapter describes the network, hardware, and software requirements to set up and run Contact Center Standby Server.
Network layout
The Active Server, Standby Server, and Replication Server are connected to the Nortel server subnet. Each server has a unique Nortel server subnet IP address and host name.
If you are using an ELAN subnet (optional), Nortel recommends that the Active and Standby Servers have unique ELAN subnet IP addresses to allow the Standby Server to connect to the ELAN subnet. However, you can use the same ELAN subnet IP address. If you use the same ELAN subnet IP address, ensure the Standby Server ELAN subnet NIC is not connected to the ELAN subnet; otherwise, an IP conflict occurs. If your system includes entities that are configured with the ELAN subnet IP address, for example Communication Server 2x00/DMS, you must configure the Standby Server with the same ELAN subnet IP address as the Active Server. You can leave the Standby Server connected to the ELAN subnet while the server is operating as the Standby Server. Nortel recommends the Replication Server be connected to the Nortel server subnet.
When you perform an Option Two switchover, disconnect the previously Active Server from the ELAN subnet by physically disconnecting the server from or by disabling the ELAN subnet network cards from Network Connections.
ATTENTION If you change the configuration of the Active Server at any time, you must rerun the Server Setup Configuration Utility on the Standby Server to make sure the configurations match.
ATTENTION Nortel recommends that the servers be in a workgroup rather than on a domain to eliminate the process of removing the computer name and IP address on the domain controller.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 39
January 2008 Contact Center Standby Server requirements
Configure Contact Center Manager Server clients with the computer name of the Active Server for Contact Center Manager Server.
The following table describes Nortel server subnet and ELAN subnet information for each component in the Standby Server configuration.
Component Computer name
Nortel server subnetaddress
ELAN subnetaddress (optional)
Notes
Active Server Configured with unique computer name.
Configured with unique Nortel server subnet IP address.
Configured with ELAN subnet IP address. Connected only to ELAN subnet while in Active mode (dual-NIC configuration).
When switching to Standby mode, reconfigure with the Nortel server subnet IP address and the computer name of the Standby Server (Option Two switchover).
Standby Server Configured with unique computer name.
Configured with unique Nortel server subnet IP address.
Configured with unique ELAN subnet IP address as the Standby Server.
When switching to Active mode, reconfigure with the Nortel server subnet IP address and the computer name of the Active Server (Option Two switchover).
Contact Center Manager Server Server Utility Configuration
Configured with computer name of initial Active Server.
N/A N/A Server Utility continues to use the same computer name to connect to the Active Server (Option Two switchover).
40 Contact Center Standby Server
Contact Center Standby Server requirements Standard 10.12
Contact Center Manager Administration
Configured with computer name of initial Active Server.
N/A N/A Contact Center Manager Administration continues to use the same computer name to connect to the Active Server (Option Two switchover).
Replication Server
Configured with unique computer name.
Configured with unique Nortel server subnet IP address.
N/A
Component Computer name
Nortel server subnetaddress
ELAN subnetaddress (optional)
Notes
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 41
January 2008 Contact Center Standby Server requirements
Feature requirements
When you configure the Contact Center Standby Server feature, you must perform the following tasks:
1. Configure the Active, Standby, and Replication Servers with different computer names.
2. Configure the Active, Standby, and Replication Servers with different Nortel server subnet IP addresses.
3. Configure the Active and Standby Servers with the same ELAN subnet IP address if your system has other entities associated with the ELAN subnet IP address, such as Communication Server 2x00/DMS.
4. Check that the sizes of drive F, and other additional driver, in both the Active and Standby Servers are the same. This ensures that the database devices are the same size on each server.
5. Ensure that the Replication Server is a dedicated server.
The Replication Server has its own Service Updates (SUs). Follow the instructions in the readme files to install the SUs as they are made available.
6. Apply Contact Center SUs or Service Update Supplementary (SUSs) on the Active Server before the Standby Server whenever you install patches on a Standby Server configuration. Failure to do so results in critical errors in the Standby Server configuration.
42 Contact Center Standby Server
Contact Center Standby Server requirements Standard 10.12
Server requirements
Contact Center Standby Server is a software-only product. The customer supplies the server and all hardware. In this guide, the term Contact Center Standby Server refers to the software product. Standby Server refers to the physical secondary server.
Materials
Check that you have the following materials before you start the installation:
(optional) blank tape for database backup procedures (used with Contact Center Standby Server procedures)
equipment log (records the model and serial number of the system, all installed options, and other information)
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM
latest Windows Server 2003 service pack that is validated with Contact Center Manager Server
You can obtain this information from the Contact Center Portfolio Service Packs Compatibility and Security Hotfixes Applicability List available on the Partner Information Center Web site (www.nortel.com/pic)
pcAnywhere software version 11.5—supplied (provides remote access by Nortel service)
Hardware platforms
Contact Center Standby Server supports hardware that meets the minimum requirements as described in “Hardware specifications” on page 43, regardless of the manufacturer. The server must also meet the requirements of the Microsoft Hardware Compatibility List for the applicable Windows Server 2003 operating system. See the Microsoft Web site for details.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 43
January 2008 Contact Center Standby Server requirements
Platform Compliance Check (for the Standby Server)
To check whether a particular server meets these basic requirements for Platform Vendor Independence, run the Preinstall Compliancy Checker utility on that server after the operating system is installed and the drives are partitioned according to the specifications in this chapter. This utility is included in the CCMS folder on the application DVD. It generates warnings and suggestions when the server under test does not satisfy the minimum or suggested requirement.
The Preinstall Compliancy Checker utility does not check all requirements for Platform Vendor Independence. You must ensure that the server meets all of the requirements in “Hardware specifications” on page 43.
Nortel platforms no longer supportedYou cannot use any Nortel platforms for Release 6.0 of Contact Center Standby Server because they do not meet the minimum requirements for Platform Vendor Independence. These servers include:
701t servers
702t servers
1000t servers
1001t servers
1003t servers
High Availability PlatformsContact Center Standby Server is also supported on any High Availability Platform that has undergone compatibility testing with Contact Center Standby Server as part of the Nortel Compatibility Test Program. For more details about this compatibility test program, see www.nortel.com/prd/dpp/.
Hardware specifications
For the Contact Center Standby Server to run properly, the customer-supplied Active, Standby, and Replication Servers must meet the following minimum requirements.
44 Contact Center Standby Server
Contact Center Standby Server requirements Standard 10.12
Active and Standby ServerThe Active and Standby Servers must meet the platform requirements for running Contact Center Manager Server. No other platform requirements are necessary.
Replication ServerNortel recommends that the server meet the typical settings in the following table. However, the actual requirements for the Replication Server platform depends on the profile of your call center, including such factors as the number of agents and the call rate.
Hardware itemSee Note 1.
Minimum requirements
Typical configuration Additional information
CPU Intel-based CPU - Pentium III 733 Mhz
Intel-based CPU - Xeon 2 GHz
Pentium IV, Intel Xeon (32- and 64-bit), and Intel Xeon DP are supported.
Dual- and quad-CPU machines are supported with or without Hyperthreading enabled.
Non-supported processors include Intel Celeron, Intel Itanium (IA 64), and AMD processors.
RAM 256 MB 512 MB
Hard disk space
20 GB of physical disk space
40 GB of physical disk space (80 GB of physical disk space with RAID-1)
A tool for calculating the required stable queue disk space for a given installation is available from the Partner Information Center (www.nortel.com/pic).
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 45
January 2008 Contact Center Standby Server requirements
Hard disk partitioning
See “Replication Server disk partitioning” on page 47 for this information.
Hard disk type IDE, SCSI or SATA SCSI or SATA At this time, a SAN (Storage Area Network) configuration is not supported.
Hard disk speed
7200 RPM > 7200 RPM
Floppy drive Not required Not required
DVD ROM one DVD ROM drive one DVD ROM drive
Serial port
See Note 2.
one serial port (for modem access) or USB port (if using USB modem)
one serial port (for modem access) or USB port (if using USB modem)
Optional serial ports, as follows:
If you are using a modem for remote support, rather than a virtual private network (VPN), you require one serial port, configured as COM1. If you are using a USB modem, you require a USB port.
If you use a smart UPS that requires an additional serial port on the server platform, you also need the additional serial port.
Network interface
one network interface card
one network interface card
Network interface card must be 100 Mb/s Ethernet.
Hardware itemSee Note 1.
Minimum requirements
Typical configuration Additional information
46 Contact Center Standby Server
Contact Center Standby Server requirements Standard 10.12
Note 1: All hardware devices must be on the Microsoft Hardware Compatibility List for Windows 2003 Server. For a complete list of compatible hardware devices, see the Microsoft Web site (www.microsoft.com).
Note 2: For COM1, set the base I/O Port Address to 3F8 and the IRQ to 4.
Video card one video card and monitor
one video card and monitor
1024 x 768 minimum resolution
Keyboard one keyboard one keyboard
Mouse one mouse one mouse
Modem 33.6 KB/s minimum for remote technical support
33.6 KB/s minimum for remote technical support
Backup/Restore
backup system for database backup can be either tape drive or remote directory
backup system for database backup can be either tape drive or remote directory
For the tape drive option, the drive must be large enough to hold all the backup data for the complete database on a single backup tape. Hardware compression techniques can be used if necessary.
Hardware itemSee Note 1.
Minimum requirements
Typical configuration Additional information
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 47
January 2008 Contact Center Standby Server requirements
Replication Server tape drive requirements
The following paragraphs list the requirements for tape drives used with Replication Servers.
Tape drive requirements
Use a SCSI tape drive listed on the Microsoft Compatibility List for Windows Server 2003 on the Microsoft Web site. Ensure that the SCSI ID for the tape drive does not conflict with existing SCSI IDs configured for other server devices.
Use 1/4-inch cartridge, and 4-mm or 8-mm digital audio (DAT) format drives.
Use drives that are either internal or external to the server.
Use drives that are capable of operating under Windows Server 2003. All hardware devices must be on the Microsoft Hardware Compatibility List for the applicable Windows Server 2003 operating system. For a complete list of compatible hardware devices, see the Microsoft Web site.
Other hardware requirementsIf you configure additional hardware on your server, such as COM ports 3 and 4, ensure that it is configured correctly (for instance, ensure IRQs do not conflict with existing IRQs). Any further troubleshooting and hardware diagnostics are the responsibility of the hardware vendor.
Replication Server disk partitioning
The following table provides information about partitioning a server to meet the requirements of Platform Vendor Independence. The minimum partition sizes are based on the following:
2 GB = 2048 MB3 GB = 3072 MB4 GB = 4096 MB
ATTENTION You must not install any other application class software on the Replication Server.
48 Contact Center Standby Server
Contact Center Standby Server requirements Standard 10.12
The actual requirements for a call center vary depending on the number of agents, call rate, and other factors.
Primary and extended partitionsThe operating system resides on the C partition. This must be the only primary partition. All other partitions (D, F, G, and other additional partitions) must be logical drives within extended partitions. Pay close attention to this when you partition the drives. See the documentation provided with the operating system for details.
Drive letter
Minimum size
Recommended size
Maximum size Notes
A 1.44 MB 1.44 MB N/A Floppy drive A.
C 12 GB 16 GB N/A
Limited only by the operating system
NTFS partition on disk 0. This must be partitioned as the primary partition. The Windows 2003 operating system and pcAnywhere are installed here.
You can use the Remote Desktop Connection feature in Windows as an alternative for remote support access tool instead of pcAnywhere.
D 8 GB 16 GB N/A
Limited only by the operating system
Additional NTFS partition on disk 0 or an NTFS partition on a different disk.
This must be partitioned as a logical drive within an extended partition, because this partition is not used for startup.
Contact Center Standby Server software is installed here.
E N/A N/A N/A DVD ROM drive
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 49
January 2008 Contact Center Standby Server requirements
Notes:
1. Additional Stable Queue disk drive partitions can be on separate disks or on the same disk, depending on the your preference and hardware configuration. Nortel has tested Stable Queue partitions on the same drive as C and D, and on different drives.
2. Create partitions in drives F through U as logical drives within extended partitions because these partitions are not used for startup.
3. Ensure that drives F through U have the capacity to support Stable Queues of sufficient size for your contact center. The size of drives F through U is determined solely by the required size as calculated by the CapTool. These drives can be on the same or different physical disks, depending on user preference.
F 4 GB 32 GB 32 GB Drive F and any additional drives are used to store the database.
ATTENTION Do not install any other application class software on the Replication Server.
Drive letter
Minimum size
Recommended size
Maximum size Notes
50 Contact Center Standby Server
Contact Center Standby Server requirements Standard 10.12
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 51
C h a p t e r 3
Licensing
In this chapterOverview 52
Nodal and Corporate licensing 53
About the license file 58
Install License Manager 66
Configure the License Manager 72
Update the license file 75
Uninstall License Manager 85
Licensing grace period 89
License Manager statistics 94
Other licensing 96
52 Standby Server
Licensing Standard 10.12
Overview
The License Manager controls the licensing of Contact Center. The License Manager provides central control and administration of application licensing for all of the elements of Contact Center.
You can choose Nodal Licensing mode for a single Contact Center installation or Corporate Licensing mode for a network of Contact Center installations.
You can also maintain a secondary License Manager, which takes over the licensing if the primary License Manager fails.
This chapter describes the Nodal and Corporate Licensing modes, how to interpret your license file, how to install and configure the License Manager for your contact center, and the licensing grace period.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 53
January 2008 Licensing
Nodal and Corporate licensing
Before installing Standby Server, you must know whether you are going to use Nodal or Corporate Licensing. You must also decide which server would be least affected by the real-time operation of the License Manager.
Nodal licensing—The options in the license file apply to a single installation of Contact Center Manager Server, Contact Center Manager Administration, Contact Center Multimedia, and Communication Control Toolkit.
Corporate licensing—The options in the license file apply to a network of Contact Center Manager Server, Contact Center Manager Administration, Contact Center Multimedia, and Communication Control Toolkit servers.
You can install the License Manager on the Network Control Center (NCC) server or a Contact Center Manager Server, based on the following rules:
If you are installing Contact Center components in a networked environment with a NCC server, and you are using Corporate Licensing, Nortel recommends that you install the License Manager on the NCC server.
If you are installing Contact Center components in a networked environment with an NCC server, and you are using Nodal Licensing, you must install the License Manager on Contact Center Manager Server. The NCC server must point to the Standby Server node that has a license for the NCC server.
If you are installing a single Standby Server, install the License Manager on the same server.
Nodal licensing
When you choose Nodal licensing, all licensing options for the applications in the Contact Center node are in a single license file that is managed by the License Manager.
The following diagram shows an example of the Nodal licensing architecture. A single License Manager is responsible for the node. The License Manager co-resides with the Contact Center Manager Server application.
54 Standby Server
Licensing Standard 10.12
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 55
January 2008 Licensing
Corporate licensing
You can use Corporate Licensing to distribute licenses to multiple servers so they can share licenses from a single pool.
ExampleYou have two sites: Galway and Auckland. Both sites have 100 Voice Agents. The License Manager is installed co-resident with the Galway Standby Server. When the day starts, all of the voice agents in Galway request licenses from the license server. One hundred licenses are issued in Galway. As Galway closes, the Auckland day starts. As the Galway agents log off, the licenses are made available for the agents in Auckland.
In this example, you require only 100 Voice Agent licenses to share across the two sites.
Each license that the License Manager grants to the Contact Center Manager Server, Contact Center Manager Administration, Contact Center Multimedia, or Communication Control Toolkit is refreshed by the respective application. This ensures that licenses are always returned to the License Manager pool if the applications fail. The refresh mechanism requires an available network connection to the License Manager.
The following diagram shows a Corporate licensing architecture with a primary and secondary License Manager.
56 Standby Server
Licensing Standard 10.12
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 57
January 2008 Licensing
Managing two License Manager serversIn a Corporate Licensing environment, you can configure two License Manager servers: a primary License Manager and a secondary License Manager. Only one License Manager can be active at one time. The primary License Manager actively maintains the licenses.The secondary License Manager runs as a standby License Manager to provide redundancy in a corporate environment. You can configure the secondary License Manager as the Standby License Manager for the Contact Center License Manager components so that it is not actively used for licenses unless the active License Manager fails.
Configure your preferred active License Manager as the primary License Manager.
For Corporate License applications, Nortel recommends that you install the primary License Manager software on the NCC.
Install the secondary License Manager on any Contact Center Manager Server that does not contain the primary License Manager, including the NCC. You cannot install the primary and secondary License Manager software on the same server.
The following conditions apply:
You cannot configure a Standby License Manager in a Nodal licensing environment.
Do not use the Standby License Manager for load balancing issues.
58 Standby Server
Licensing Standard 10.12
About the license file
The License Manager available in Contact Center uses a new license key structure. The License Manager license file replaces all the existing Symposium keycodes. The License Manager offers flexible licensing options and supports licensing of features at the node (Nodal License) or network (Corporate License) level.
The license file provides a single point of administration for licensing and includes multiple keycodes for Contact Center Manager Server, Contact Center Manager Administration, Contact Center Multimedia, and Communication Control Toolkit. This single file reduces the number of separate keycodes that you must maintain. If you require additional features or if your requirements change, you can upload a new license file, containing the new licensing information, to the server and replace the existing licensing file.
You can find the license file in the D:\Nortel\lm\bin folder on the server. The license file is called plservrc.
Corporate license file
A license key in the product name identifies the Corporate License. For example, in LM_CCS300C, the last letter C indicates a Corporate License.
In Corporate Licensing mode you can use a secondary License Manager for redundancy. Both the primary and secondary License Managers can use the same license file.
ATTENTIONA corporate license file can only be generated from the Nortel server subnet Network Interface Card (NIC) MAC address. The nodal license file can be generated from either the Nortel server subnet NIC MAC address or the Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX serial ID.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 59
January 2008 Licensing
Nodal license file
Nodal Licensing indicates that the licenses are distributed only to that node. You cannot share licenses. A license key in the product name identifies the Nodal License. For example, in LM_CCS300N, the last letter N indicates a Nodal License.
Reading the license file
A license file contains a number of license keys. Each license key supports a different license feature.
When a secondary License Manager is specified for a feature, two license keys appear. Each license is keyed against the MAC address of the two License Manager servers.
A license key consists of an encrypted license and a comment detailing the components of the license.
ExamplezELLH+XobsdLTU48vNDHy8/NzBR0ZGxqyUCE8Omk49D7E3HpZ4ECA8eHIzqWcNN2ug5XGRuaGlpKSg== # LM_CCS300C 6.0 00:11:25:3e:11:78 Identifier (1) 60 secs
The number sign (#) denotes a comment.
Component Description
LM_CCS300C Feature ID. The Corporate Networking package.
6.0 Release of the product.
00:11:25:3e:11:78 License identifier.
Identifier Information field.
(1) Number of licenses available.
60 secs Refresh rate. If the License Manager does not receive a refresh message within this time, it releases this license, and issues it to another client.
60 Standby Server
Licensing Standard 10.12
Viewing the license file configuration
Use this procedure to view the license file information, including which licenses are validated in your contact center.
1 On the server where the License Manager is installed, from the Start menu, click All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > License Manager > Configuration.
Result: The License Manager Configuration dialog box appears. Use this dialog box to verify the IP address of the License Manager files (primary and secondary) and the License Manager port number.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 61
January 2008 Licensing
2 Click View Licenses.
Result: The CCMS Package Features dialog box appears listing the available licenses.
3 Click OK.
4 Click Cancel to exit the License Manager Configuration dialog box.
Interpreting the license file
Contact Center includes package, agent, and feature licensing.
Package licensingThe license file includes the following package types:
CCS200—The base package (The Network-skilled Based Routing feature is not included in the base package.) You must select this package for SIP installations.
CCS300—The networking package
CCS350—The Network Control Center package
62 Standby Server
Licensing Standard 10.12
These packages are available in both the Nodal Licensing (N) and Corporate Licensing (C) modes.
Agent licenses Agent licenses determine the number of agents that can log on to Contact Center. Agent licenses are available for both Nodal and Corporate Licensing.
Licensing is available for the following types of agents:
voice agent
video agent (SIP only)
outbound agent
e-mail agent
Web communications agent
Feature licenses The following feature licenses are available:
Open Queue (not supported co-resident with SIP)
Universal Networking (not supported co-resident with SIP)
Standby Server
Outbound (not supported co-resident with SIP)
Report Creation Wizard (supported with SIP)
Licensed features
This section describes some of the licensed features in Contact Center.
Open Queue With Open Queue, you can queue voice and multimedia contacts in Contact Center and then route the contacts to agents using the Contact Center Agent Desktop. Configure Open Queue using the Contact Center Manager Server Setup Configuration utility.
Universal NetworkingUniversal Networking is the networking between Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX systems and Communication Server 2x00/DMS systems.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 63
January 2008 Licensing
Universal Networking refers to the following features:
Network Skill-based Routing between all switch types supported by Contact Center
attached data transport during agent-initiated transfers or conferences when under the control of the Communication Control Toolkit
Configure the Universal Networking feature using the Contact Center Manager Server Setup Configuration utility.
Standby ServerUse the Standby Server feature to replicate a primary Contact Center Manager Server database to a Standby Server.
Configure the Standby Server using the Contact Center Manager Server Setup Configuration utility.
For more information, see the Nortel Contact Center Manager Server Installation Guide and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server.
Outbound Only licensed users can access the Outbound Campaign Manager Tool using Contact Center Manager Administration.
The Outbound Campaign Manager Tool is only compatible with Contact Center Multimedia/Outbound.
For more information about the Outbound feature, see the Contact Center Manager Administrator’s Guide.
Report Creation WizardReport Creation Wizard provides a simplified method to customize historical reports within Contact Center.
Report Creation Wizard is a user-based license. License Manager controls the maximum concurrent Report Creation Wizard users.
Contact Center Manager Administration includes a one-user license for the Report Creation Wizard feature. You can order additional licenses in groups of 5 up to a maximum of 25 licenses (that is, 5, 10, 15, 20, or 25 licenses).
64 Standby Server
Licensing Standard 10.12
For more information about Report Creation Wizard, see the Contact Center Manager Administration Installation and Maintenance Guide.
License identifiers
License identifiers connect a license file to a particular server or to a particular installation. For example:
pT0z9b4z++unYkFAwIAZlJKQkVElvfG2lTzUsgCOqLtqtsbWmp6cHZ3dzc0= # plicd 1.2 00:11:25:3e:11:78 (1) 360 secs
Communication Server 2x00/DMS serverThe only identifier allowed for DMS installations is the MAC address for the Standby Server running the License Manager.
The MAC address can be any MAC address of any of the network interface cards (NIC); however, Nortel recommends that you use the Nortel server subnet MAC address. If the MAC address does not match the MAC address in the license file, the Contact Center License Service cannot start.
Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX serverThe serial ID of the Communication Server 1000 server (CS 1000) is the identifier for Nodal Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX installations.
You can also use the MAC addresses, but the license file is shipped with a serial ID rather than the MAC address.
You must enter the serial ID correctly during the installation. If the serial ID does not match the ID used to generate the license file, the Contact Center License Manager Server cannot start.
ATTENTIONA corporate license file can only be generated from the Nortel server subnet NIC MAC address. The nodal license file can be generated from either the Nortel server subnet NIC MAC address or the Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX serial ID.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 65
January 2008 Licensing
Communication Control Toolkit serverIf you plan to use the Communication Control Toolkit server as a standalone server (without Contact Center Manager Server), the license identifier is the MAC address of the server.
If you are using Communication Control Toolkit as part of the Contact Center solution, use Contact Center Manager Server for the License Manager software.
The MAC address can be any MAC address of the NICs; however, Nortel recommends that you use the Nortel server subnet MAC address. If the MAC address does not match the MAC address in the license file, the Contact Center License Service cannot start.
SIP serverThe only identifier allowed for SIP installations is the MAC address of the Standby Server running License Manager.
The MAC address can be any MAC address of the NICs; however, Nortel recommends that you use the Nortel server subnet MAC address. If the MAC address does not match the MAC address in the license file, the Contact Center License Service cannot start.
Mixed Corporate nodeIn all Corporate installations, even if all servers connect to a Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX, servers use the MAC address as the identifier.
The MAC address can be any MAC address of the NICs; however, Nortel recommends that you use the Nortel server subnet MAC address. If the MAC address does not match the MAC address in the license file, the Contact Center License Service cannot start.
66 Standby Server
Licensing Standard 10.12
Install License Manager
This section provides an overview of the three different kinds of License Manager installations.
License Manager with Standby Server or Network Control Center serverUse this installation of License Manager if you use the Standby Server database to store the historical statistics for the maximum number of licenses that are issued in an interval, day, week, and month.
Dedicated installation (without the database)Use this installation if you are not installing Standby Server in the network. When you choose the dedicated installation, no historical statistics are collected concerning the license usage.
Dedicated installation (includes the database)This option is not currently supported.
Installing the License Manager software
Nortel recommends that you install the License Manager on a server on which you plan to install Contact Center Manager Server, or on a Network Control Center server; however, you must install the Contact Center Manager Server application before you install the License Manager.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 67
January 2008 Licensing
1 Log on to the server as Administrator.
2 Insert the Contact Center DVD into the DVD-ROM drive and wait for it to start. If the DVD does not start, browse to the DVD and run setup.exe.
Result: The following window appears.
ATTENTIONNortel recommends that you install License Manager on the NCC server in a Corporate License environment, with a secondary License Manager installed on another Contact Center Manager Server.
68 Standby Server
Licensing Standard 10.12
3 Select License Manager and click Install.
Result: The License Manager InstallShield Wizard window appears.
4 Click Next.
Result: The Custom Installation Information window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 69
January 2008 Licensing
5 Select the type of installation you require, and then click Next.
Result: The License File location window appears.
6 Click Browse.
7 Navigate to the license file and select it.
You can find the license file in the D:\Nortel\lm\bin folder on the server. The license file is named plservrc.
70 Standby Server
Licensing Standard 10.12
8 When the license file location appears in the box, click Next.
Result: The Ready to Install the Program window appears.
9 Click Begin.
Result: The Installing License Manager window appears showing the progress of the installation. When the installation is complete, the InstallShield Wizard Completed window appears.
10 Click Finish.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 71
January 2008 Licensing
Installing service updates (SU) and service update supplements (SUS)
Install the latest SU and SUS after you install the License Manager software. The latest SU and SUS are not automatically picked up by the License Manager installation. You can find the latest SU and SUS in the DTR document (DTR-2005-0392-Global-Rev n).
72 Standby Server
Licensing Standard 10.12
Configure the License Manager
This section describes how to configure the licensing information for Contact Center Manager Server after you install the License Manager software.
1 On Contact Center Manager Server, click Start > All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Server Setup Configuration.
2 Click the License Manager tab.
3 From the CCMS Package list, select the package and mode (Nodal or Corporate Licensing).
. ca
CAUTION
Risk of malfunctionMake sure that you read the license file (provided by your distributor) and that you know which CCMS package you require. You cannot choose a different package after you configure Standby Server. If you choose the wrong package, you must reinstall Standby Server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 73
January 2008 Licensing
You can find the license file in the D:\Nortel\lm\bin folder on the server. The license file is called plservrc.
The options in the CCMS package list depend on your installation. Only packages applicable to your installation choice appear in the list. For example, if you install NCC, only CCS350 packages appear.
The options can include the following:
CCS200N
CCS200C
CCS300N
CCS300C
CCS350N
CCS350C
Result: After you select the package and mode, a list of the CCMS optional packages appears with a list of extra features that you can select.
4 Select all of the optional features that you purchased.
5 Click View Features to review the features you select.
6 If you are connecting to a Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX, enter the serial number of the switch in the Serial Number field.
The serial number must match the serial number in the License file and the switch serial number.
7 In the Primary License Manager IP box, type the IP address of the Primary License Manager server.
If you selected the Nodal Licensing package in Step 1, the Contact Center Manager Server Setup Configuration utility automatically populates the Primary License Manager Server IP address because the License Manager server and Contact Center Manager Server must be installed on the same server. If you selected a Corporate Licensing package, you must enter the IP address manually.
8 In the Port box, type the port number of the Primary License Manager.
The default port number is 3998. You must have 10 ports to configure licensing on any server. These 10 port numbers are offset from the base port number that is set during the License Manager configuration. The range of ports is 3998 to 4007. If, for example, you want to change the port number to 20000, the port range is 20000 to 20009.
74 Standby Server
Licensing Standard 10.12
9 If you have a Secondary License Manager, in the Secondary License Manager IP box, type the IP address of the Secondary License Manager server.
The Secondary License Manager is only available for Corporate Licensing.
The IP address of the Secondary License Manager cannot be the same as the Primary License Manager.
10 In the Port box, type the port number of the Secondary License Manager.
The default port number is 3998. You must have 10 ports to configure licensing on any server. These 10 port numbers are offset from the base port number that is set during the License Manager configuration. The range of ports is 3998 to 4007.
Each application (Contact Center Manager Administration, Contact Center Multimedia, and Communication Control Toolkit) requires the range of 10 ports.
11 Click OK.
ATTENTIONThe IP addresses for the primary and secondary License Manager must be on the same Nortel server subnet and the Nortel server subnet must be at the top of the binding order on the Contact Center Manager Server and License Manager.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 75
January 2008 Licensing
Update the license file
You can use the License Manager Configuration window to locate (or change) the license file and to change the default port number.
This section provides the steps to:
change the default License Manager port number
change the license file (for upgrading features or numbers of agents)
change from Nodal to Corporate Licensing
If you change the name or IP address of any server on which the License Manager is installed, you must ensure that you update all of the other Contact Center servers. For more information, see Appendix J, “Change the names or IP addresses of servers.”
Starting the License Manager
From the Start menu, choose All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > License Manager > Startup.
Shutting down the License Manager
From the Start menu, choose All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > License Manager > Shutdown.
Changing the License Manager port number configuration
The License Manager uses port 3998 as the default port number. You can change the default port number; for example, if the default port number is used by another application or if a specific port number is required because of firewall restrictions.
1 From the Start menu, choose All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > License Manager > Configuration.
2 In the License Manager Port Number box, type the new port number.
76 Standby Server
Licensing Standard 10.12
3 Click OK.
Result: A dialog box appears with the following message: “You must restart to commit any changes. Restart the License Manager now?”
4 Click Yes.
Result: A dialog box appears indicating that the “Service started successfully”.
5 Click OK to close the dialog box.
Updating a new license file
Complete this procedure when you receive a new license file to activate the license file.
You need to reboot the server on which the License Manager is installed if you change the Licence File to add more features, such as Open Queue.
You do not need to reboot the server on which the License Manager is installed if:
you use the licence file to change the number of agents allowed to log on
you install a patch that changes the Licence Manager executable file
ATTENTIONIf you are using a secondary License Manager, perform this procedure on both the primary and secondary License Manager. There is only one license file and must be used for both configurations.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 77
January 2008 Licensing
Configuring the new license file
1 On the server where the License Manager is installed, click Start > All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > License Manager > Configuration.
Result: The following window appears.
2 Click Browse.
Result: The Open dialog box appears.
3 Navigate the file system and locate the new license file.
4 Click Open.
Result: The path for the license file appears in the text box.
5 Click OK.
Result: The following window appears.
78 Standby Server
Licensing Standard 10.12
6 Click Yes to restart the License Manager Server service.
Result: The following window appears.
7 Click OK to close the window.
Changing from Nodal to Corporate licensing in a Network Skill Based Routing (NSBR) environment
Use Corporate Licensing to distribute licenses to multiple servers from a single license pool. You configure one active License Manager in any server network. Contact Center 6.0 identifies this as the primary License Manager. You can also configure a standby License Manager for redundancy in a Corporate License environment. You configure this License Manager as the secondary License Manager.
If you configure the server where the primary License Manager server is installed on the Active Contact Center Manager Server, it does not guarantee that this server is always active. If you want the primary License Manager on the Active Contact Center Manager Server, you need to ensure the primary License Manager server starts while the secondary License Manager is not running. The primary License Manager does not assume active service when it is started.
For more information about the Active and Standby servers, see the Nortel Contact Center Manager Server Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server.
The following conditions apply to License Manager in a Corporate environment:
You must install License Manager on a Contact Center Manager Server or NCC server.
You cannot configure a standby License Manager in a Nodal licensing environment.
Do not use the standby License Manager for load balancing issues.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 79
January 2008 Licensing
Corporate and Nodal License sites can exist in the same Contact Center configuration and are supported by Nortel. This allows you to upgrade to Corporate License Manager over several maintenance windows.
Default ports 3998 to 4007 need to pass through any firewall between nodes and the Corporate License Manager site.
Changing from Nodal to Corporate licensing
1 Install License Manager, if it is not already installed.
2 From the Start menu, choose All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > License Manager > Configuration.
If your License Manager is installed on the same server as Contact Center Manager Server, shut down Contact Center Manager Server first. If you do not, the Contact Center Manager Server services shut down due to a refresh error.
Result: The License Manager Configuration dialog box appears.
3 Click Browse.
Result: The Open dialog box appears.
4 Navigate the file system and locate the new license file.
80 Standby Server
Licensing Standard 10.12
5 Click Open.
Result: The path for the license file appears in the text box.
6 Click OK.
Result: The following window appears.
7 Click Yes to restart the License Manager Server service.
Result: The following window appears.
8 Click OK to close the window.
9 If you have a Secondary License Manager, complete the following steps. If not, proceed to step 10.
a. Copy the new Corporate License file to the appropriate directory on the Contact Center Manager Server serving as the host for the secondary License Manager.
b. Shut down the Contact Center Manager Server services on the secondary License Manager server. If you do not, the Contact Center Manager Server services shut down due to a refresh error.
c. From the Start menu, choose All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > License Manager > Configuration.
Result: The License Manager Configuration dialog box appears.
d. Click Browse.
Result: The Open dialog box appears.
e. Navigate the file system and locate the new license file.
f. Click Open.
Result: The path for the license file appears in the text box.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 81
January 2008 Licensing
g. Click OK.
Result: The following window appears.
h. Click Yes to restart the License Manager Server service.
Result: The following window appears.
i. Click OK to close the window.
10 Run the Server Setup Configuration utility on all Contact Center Manager Servers.
a. From the Start menu, choose All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Server Setup Configuration.
Result: The following window appears. This window can remain open for up to 30 seconds.
b. If you have a co-resident License Manager, an information box may appear. If is does, click Continue.
82 Standby Server
Licensing Standard 10.12
Result: Server Setup Configuration utility initializes.
11 On the License Manager tab, change the package to the corporate version. For example, if the current package is CCS300N, change to CCS300C.
12 On the License Manager tab, enter the correct IP information for the Primary and Secondary License Manager IP address.
13 Click OK.
Result: You are prompted to reboot the server.
14 Click Yes.
15 Update the license file on any additional Contact Center Manager Servers in the NSBR environment.
a. Shut down the Contact Center Manager Server services on the appropriate server. If you do not, the Contact Center Manager Server services shut down due to a refresh error.
b. From the Start menu, choose All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > License Manager > Shutdown.
c. From the Start menu, choose All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Server Setup Configuration.
d. On the License Manager tab, change the package to the corporate version. For example, if the current package is CCS200N, change to CCS200C.
e. On the License Manager tab, enter the correct IP information for the Primary and Secondary License Manager IP address.
f. Click OK.
Result: You are prompted to reboot the server.
g. Click Yes.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 83
January 2008 Licensing
Refreshing your server
If a new license file is configured and accepted by Contact Center Manager Server, or you connect to a different License Manager server (that is, a new or standby License Manager server), you must refresh your servers.
1 Log on to Contact Center Manager Administration.
a. Start Internet Explorer.
b. In the Address field, type the server name. For example, http://<Contact Center Manager Administration server name>.
You must log on using the Contact Center Manager Administration server name instead of the IP address, as the SOAP files are configured to use the server name. You can save the Contact Center Manager Administration server address by adding it to your list of Internet Explorer Favorites.
c. Press Enter.
If you did not configure the Contact Center Manager Administration server name as Trusted Site with the relevant ActiveX Download values selected, the Trusted Sites Warning Message window appears. For details about configuring the Contact Center Manager Administration server name as a Trusted Site, see the Nortel Contact Center Manager Administration Installation and Maintenance Guide.
If you did not install the client version of SOAP 3.0 on the PC, a warning message appears, notifying you that you must install this software.
If you already configured the Contact Center Manager Administration server name as a Trusted Site and also installed the client version of SOAP 3.0 on the PC, the Standby Server main logon window appears.
d. Enter your Webadmin user ID and password in the boxes.
ATTENTIONOnly the default administrator, Webadmin, can add, edit, delete, and refresh servers in Contact Center Manager Server. When you refresh a server, you refresh Contact Center Manager Server data associated with that server in ADAM, such as release number, feature list, and networking information.
84 Standby Server
Licensing Standard 10.12
e. Click Login.
Result: The Contact Center Manager Administration main window appears
2 Select Configuration.
3 On the menu bar, click Server > Refresh All Servers.
Result: The system asks if you want to continue to refresh all servers.
4 Click Yes.
Result: The system refreshes all servers in the system tree. A message appears in the information bar at the bottom of the window which lists the refreshed servers and the servers that did not refresh. An entry specifying the refreshed servers also appears in the Audit Trail.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 85
January 2008 Licensing
Uninstall License Manager
Use this procedure to uninstall the License Manager. The procedure consists of several subprocedures:
Remove each SUS from last to first in Patch Manager.
Remove all SUs and SUSs in Patch Manager.
Remove License Manager in Add or Remove Programs.
Removing each SUS from last to first in Patch Manager
1 Log on to the server where the License Manager is installed as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Shutdown.Result: The Contact Center - Manager Server Shutdown utility window appears.
ATTENTIONIf License Manager is removed, all Contact Center servers enter the license grace period. A new License Manager is required for servers to continue to operate after the grace period ends. Contact Nortel Technical Support for further assistance.
86 Standby Server
Licensing Standard 10.12
3 Click OK.
Result: The utility shuts down all services. The Service Status Log window appears. This log displays any services that failed to shut down. Click Recheck to refresh the service status.
If any services are still running:
a. From the Start menu, choose Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services to display the Services window.
b. Select any CCMS service with a status of Started.
c. Right-click and select Stop from the menu.
Result: The Status column is blank for this service.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 87
January 2008 Licensing
d. Repeat steps b and c until all services are stopped.
Result: The Status column is blank for all services.
e. Close the Services window.
f. Click Recheck to update the status log.
4 After all Contact Center services on the Contact Center Manager Server are shut down, click Accept on the Server Status Log window to exit the utility.
5 Log on to the server where License Manager is installed as Administrator.
Removing SUs and SUSs in Patch Manager
1 From the Start menu, choose All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > License Manager > Patch Viewer.Result: The Patch Manager for License Manager window appears, displaying the installed SU and SUSs.
2 Select an SU or SUS and click Read Me.
Result: The Read Me file appears.
3 Read the file for special uninstallation instructions.
4 Close the Read Me file.
88 Standby Server
Licensing Standard 10.12
5 Click Uninstall Last to remove the last SU or SUS applied.
Attention: Uninstall SUs and SUSs in the order last to first.
Result: A caution window appears.
6 Click Yes to uninstall the patch.
Result: When uninstallation is complete, the Patch Manager License Manager window appears.
7 Repeat steps 5, 6, and 6 until all SUs and SUSs are uninstalled.
8 Click Exit to close the Patch Manager License Manager window:
You must restart the system to ensure that all the changes take effect. However, if you plan to perform a complete uninstallation, you do not have to restart the system.
Remove License Manager
1 From the Start menu, choose Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.
Result: The Add or Remove Programs dialog box appears.
2 Select License Manager.
3 Click Remove.
Result: A window appears prompting you to confirm the Remove action.
4 Click Yes.
Result: The License Manager window appears, displaying the progress of the uninstallation.
When the uninstallation is complete, the Add or Remove Programs window reappears. This can take a few seconds.
5 Verify that License Manager does not appear in this window.
6 Close all open windows, and then restart the server.
Result: The software is uninstalled.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 89
January 2008 Licensing
Licensing grace period
In the event of a communication error between the Contact Center Manager Server and the License Manager, normal operation of the Contact Center Manager Server runs for the duration of the grace period.
The grace period duration is equal to 10 days and is accumulative over the lifetime of the product. On the first occurrence of a communication problem between the Contact Center Manager Server and the License Manager, 10 days are available for the Contact Center Manager Server to continue normal operation. If the problem is resolved in two days, on the next occurrence of a communication problem, eight days are available to fix the problem.
If, at any stage, the grace period expires, Contact Center Manager Server shuts down and locked. You cannot restart Contact Center Manager Server without resetting the grace period.
You can reset the grace period to 10 days at any time. When a communication error is detected, an event is fired to the Server Utility detailing that an error occurred, the time already elapsed in the Grace Period, and a lock code that you must return to Nortel to reset the grace period.
Resetting the Grace Period
1 From the Event Viewer, make a copy of the lock code and send this code to Nortel Support.
Result: Nortel Support provides you with another code that you must apply to the Contact Center Manager Server.
90 Standby Server
Licensing Standard 10.12
2 Launch the Nortel Contact Center License Grace Period Reset application to apply the new unlock code.
3 Enter the unlock code you received from Nortel Support.
4 Click Apply.
5 Click Exit.
6 Restart the Contact Center Manager Server application.
Note: For Contact Center Manager Server, you must apply separate unlock codes for the CCMS Control Service and the ASM Service. Repeat steps 1 to 6 for both services.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 91
January 2008 Licensing
Within the grace period, you have the same capabilities as if you were the only client of the License Manager. You can request the maximum licenses that are available from the License Manager. When communication is reestablished, the licenses are acquired automatically from the License Manager (if they are available).
When a licensing error is detected, you must check that the License Manager service is running, and verify the status of the License Manager server and network communications. During the grace period, alarms are sent every 6 hours notifying the time elapsed in the grace period.
If you reestablish communications during the grace period, notification is sent to the Windows Event Log on the server and the Alarm Monitor. The Alarm Monitor lists an alarm every 6 hours notifying the time elapsed in the grace period.
During the grace period, you can shut down, start up, or restart Contact Center Manager Server without affecting the operation of Contact Center Manager Server.
Emergency license files
If you cannot fix the connection between the License Manager and Contact Center Manager Server within the 10-day grace period, contact your Nortel customer service representative to determine if you need to activate an emergency license file on your system.
The emergency license file expires after 30 days and is used only to ensure operation of the Contact Center Manager Server on a temporary basis.
You must install the emergency license file through the License Manager Configuration tool. If you are using corporate licensing, you may need to change the Contact Center Manager Server configuration in cases where the License Manager is installed on a different server than it was previously.
Updating the license file
If you want to upgrade any Contact Center Manager Server, you must update your license file.
92 Standby Server
Licensing Standard 10.12
1 From the Start menu, choose All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > License Manager > Configuration.
2 Click Browse.
Result: The Open dialog box appears.
3 Navigate the file system and locate the new license file.
4 Click Open.
Result: The path for the license file appears in the text box.
5 Click OK.
Result: The following window appears.
6 Click Yes to restart the License Manager Server service.
Result: The following window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 93
January 2008 Licensing
7 Click OK to close the window.
94 Standby Server
Licensing Standard 10.12
License Manager statistics
Historical reporting data is produced by the License Manager to support the analysis and management of concurrent license usage in the network. Historical data is available in 15-minute intervals on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis. License utilization is reported on a client basis, with the IP address of the client used to denote individual clients.
The License Manager reports the following statistics:
Timestamp—The time the data is written to the database.
IP Address—The IP address of the Contact Center Manager Server, Contact Center Manager Administration, Contact Center Multimedia, and Communication Control Toolkit.
License identifier—The name of the license.
Maximum allocation during interval—The maximum number of licenses allocated to the server during the 15-minute interval.
If an interval has 10 licenses issued for a feature, then 10 is written to the database table. If another 5 licenses are issued in the next interval, then 15 is written to the database table. However, at the end of the interval, if only 14 licenses were issued, but 15 were issued at some stage during the interval, then a value of 15 is written to the database.
The data is written to the database on the server on which you installed the License Manager for each 15-minute interval. These statistics are consolidated daily, weekly, and monthly.
The License Manager reports any errors in writing data to the database.
The data is stored on a site-by-site basis where the site identifier is the IP address of the server.
A report template is available to generate reports using this statistical information. The data is available from the following database views:
iLicenseStat—interval statistics
dLicenseStat—daily statistics
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 95
January 2008 Licensing
wLicenseStat—weekly statistics
mLicenseStat—monthly statistics
Real-time statistics
The plicmon.exe utility monitors the licenses issued by the active License Manager. When you run this utility, it takes a snapshot of the licenses issued.
96 Standby Server
Licensing Standard 10.12
Other licensing
This section provides information about other licensing that is used in Contact Center.
Media Application Server (MAS) licensing
The MAS license resides on the server on which you plan to install MAS and is specific to the SIP Contact Center application that resides on the server. Install this license using the MAS console window. For more information, see the Nortel MAS Installation and Maintenance Guide.
You can configure the following licenses for MAS:
Advanced SIP Contact Center Service (per port)—Voice Conversation space, observe, barge-in; Announcements, Tones, and Give RAN/MOH.
Premium SIP Contact Center Service (per port)—Voice Conversation space, observe, barge-in; Announcements service - Tones, Give RAN/MOH; Dialog service/Give IVR - advanced treatments including play prompts, collect digits, Web page push, canned applications like EWT/PIQ, send IM, and VXML invocation.
SIP Video Contact Center Service (On/off)—Enables video agents and video streaming treatments.
SIP Contact Center Services CD—Media for installing services on the MAS.
The SIP-enabled Contact Center MAS software is the only component that is ordered separately from the other Contact Center components.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 97
Pa r t 2
Install the server software
98 Contact Center Standby Server
Standard 10.12
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 99
C h a p t e r 4
Install the Active Server software
In this chapterOverview 100
Section A: Preinstallation 103
Section B: Installation 125
Section C: Postinstallation 181
100 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
Overview
This chapter describes how to install the Contact Center Manager Server software, License Manager software, and the Server Utility software.
Assumptions
The information in this chapter is based on the following assumptions:
The hardware platform, Windows Server 2003, is configured for use with the Contact Center Manager Server software. For more information, see the Nortel Contact Center Manager Server Technical Requirements and Operating System Configuration Guide.
The switch is installed, operational, and configured for use with the Contact Center Manager Server software.
The Nortel server subnet and the ELAN subnet (optional) are installed and operational.
The server is setup as a standalone server. Co-residency is not supported in Contact Center Standby Server. You cannot install a Standby Server for an Active Server containing Contact Center Manager Server and Contact Center Manager Administration or Communication Control Toolkit.
ATTENTION Do not perform unsupervised maintenance on the Contact Center Manager Server (Active or Standby). Nortel recommends that the Contact Center Manager Server administrator supervise all maintenance activities on the server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 101
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
Methods of server installation
How you install the server software depends upon the environment in which you are working, as described in the following table.
Timing
The following installation times provide guidance on the time required for software installation:
preinstallation (including operating system installation and configuration): 3.5 hours
installing the server software: 30 minutes
postinstallation tasks: 1 hour
Method Requirements
Run the installation program from the Contact Center DVD-ROM. Use the DVD-ROM drive that is part of the hardware platform.
DVD drive
Run the installation program from a remote DVD-ROM drive that is accessible over the LAN.
Nortel does not recommend this method, as network traffic can interfere with proper installation.
The remote PC is running Windows 2000 Server or Professional, Windows Server 2003 Enterprise or Standard, or Windows XP Professional.
The path name of the drive that contains the DVD cannot contain spaces or underscores and must be a mapped drive using a drive letter, for example, Z:\.
Run the installation program from a remote hard disk copy of the installation DVD.
Nortel does not recommend this method, as network traffic can interfere with proper installation.
A copy of the DVD on a remote hard disk (accessible over the LAN from the Contact Center Manager Server).
The path name of the directory that contains the copy of the DVD cannot contain spaces or underscores and must be a mapped drive using a drive letter, for example, Z:\CCM\R6.
102 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
These times can vary depending on the server, network infrastructure, and your confidence level with the software. The proceeding installation times were obtained on servers with the following specifications:
CPU: Intel Xeon 3GHz
RAM: 1.0 GB
Hard drive: 80GB 7200 RPM SATA with no RAID configuration
DVD drive: Internal IDE 8X DVD-ROM
Event logging
The SysOps Event log (D:\sysops.log) tracks events associated with any installation, reinstallation, upgrade, or uninstallation operation. It also tracks any fatal errors that interrupt these operations. Use any text editor (for example, Notepad) to view the SysOps log.
What you need
The following checklist describes the software and equipment you need to install Contact Center Manager Server.
Qty Description ✔
1 Contact Center DVD-ROM
1 License file. This file governs the software features you install. Ensure that you have a copy of the license file on your server.
1 Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 103
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
Section A: Preinstallation
In this sectionStep 1. Read the relevant documentation to perform a new installation 104
Step 2. Record and check for required installation information 105
Step 3. Install pcAnywhere 11.5 111
Step 4. Copy the latest Service Update to the server 123
104 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
Step 1. Read the relevant documentation to perform a new installation
Perform the following tasks:
Read this chapter to understand the steps involved in a new installation.
Check for any updated customer documentation on the Nortel Web site (www.nortel.com).
Complete the Nortel Contact Center Installer’s Roadmap on the Partner Information Center Web site (www.nortel.com/pic).
Read the Contact Center Manager Planning and Engineering Guide. This guide provides information about the server specifications for the Active and Standby Contact Center Manager Servers and the Replication Server.
Read the readme files for each application and patch you plan to install. You can find the readme files for the applications on the DVD in the various application folders. For example, E:\CCMS contains the readme file for Contact Center Manager Server and E:\CCMSU contains the readme file for the Server Utility.
ATTENTION Before you install the Contact Center Standby Server software, you must read the Nortel Contact Center Manager Server Technical Requirements and Operating System Configuration Guide.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 105
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
Step 2. Record and check for required installation information
Use the following checklist to record information required for your Contact Center Manager Server installation. Ensure that you refer to this checklist for specific information during the installation. You must also complete the Nortel Contact Center Installer’s Roadmap on the Partner Information Center Web site (www.nortel.com/pic).
Step Details ✔
1 Record the server computer and operating system.
You can refer to the following information when you install Windows Server 2003:
Windows Server 2003 licence key __________________
Computer name ___________________________
6–15 characters in length
First character must be alphabetical
Allowed: letters and numbers
Not allowed: spaces, hyphens, and underscores
Administrator password _____________________
Workgroup or domain name__________________
Type of modem for the server_________________
106 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
2 Record switch information.
Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX
Switch name _____________________________Note: The switch name does not need to match the CS 1000/Meridian 1 host name. Record it here for reference only.
Switch customer number ____________________
Switch subnet primary IP address (for example, 192.168.100.50) _________________________
Switch subnet secondary IP address (for example, 192.168.100.60) _________________________
Notes:
Switches with two processors require two IP addresses. Use the switch primary address for the primary CPU (core 0), and use the secondary address for the redundant CPU (core 1). For small switches, such as a Meridian 1 PBX 11C - Cabinet, you need only the primary address.
Step Details ✔
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 107
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
Ensure that the switch host name, IP name, and net mask are the same as those that appear by the STAT ELNK command in LD 137. Ensure that the switch serial number matches the serial number delivered with the license file.
Communication Server 2x00/DMS switch information
Switch name _____________________________
Switch IP address (for example, 47.9.43.244)
_______________________________________
IP addresses for routers on the ICM connection between the switch and ELAN subnet __________________________________________
__________________________________________
Network node ID ____________________________
Service ID __________________________________
Application ID ______________________________
Service version ______________________________
Business group ______________________________
Link set name _______________________________
Password ___________________________________
Remote host IP address (optional) ___________________________________________
Step Details ✔
108 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
3 Record the Nortel server subnet and ELAN subnet IP information.
Record the IP addresses for both Nortel server subnet and ELAN subnet connections. The customer’s LAN administrator is the source for IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateways.
Note: Nortel server subnet and ELAN subnet addresses must be unique.
Nortel server subnet server
IP address _______________________________
Subnet mask ______________________________
Gateway, description, or name ________________
________________________________________
Nortel server subnet router/gateway IP address
IP address _______________________________
Subnet mask ______________________________
Gateway, description, or name ________________
________________________________________
ELAN subnet server
IP address _______________________________
Subnet mask ______________________________
Gateway, description, or name ________________
__________________________________________
ELAN subnet router/gateway IP address
IP address _______________________________
Subnet mask ______________________________
Gateway, description, or name ________________
________________________________________
Step Details ✔
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 109
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
4 Record the RAS information.
RAS
IP address _______________________________
Subnet mask ______________________________
Gateway, description, or name ________________
________________________________________
5 Record the voice services information.
Voice connection type (Meridian Mail or Call Pilot) ___________________
Call Pilot server IP address___________________
Call Pilot server port_______________________
6 Record the Replication Server information.
IP address _______________________________
Replication Server name_____________________
7 Record the site information.
Site name __________________________________
Note: For Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX switches with the Network Skill-Based Routing feature, the Network Control Center site name is automatically propagated to servers.
(Networking option only) IP address of RSM server
__________________________________________
New password for NGenDesign account(a user account for Nortel support). For security reasons, do not record the password here.
New password for NGenDist account(a user account for distributors to provide support). For security reasons, do not record the password here.
Modem phone number for the server (for dial-up connections from the client PC) _________________
__________________________________________
Step Details ✔
110 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
8 Check for equipment and data required for the server installation.
List the unique names and IP addresses for all equipment on both the ELAN subnet and Nortel server subnet.
Step Details ✔
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 111
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
Step 3. Install pcAnywhere 11.5
Only one licensed copy of pcAnywhere 11.5 for host computers is provided on the Contact Center DVD. This software license provides permission for you to configure the server as the host computer in remote control sessions (that is, the computer to which remote computers connect).
You must install pcAnywhere on the server on which you install Contact Center Manager Server to support the following four remote technical support options:
modem connected directly to the Contact Center Manager Server on the serial port COM1
modem connected directly to the Contact Center Manager Server on a USB port
modem connected to a VPN
Internet connected to a VPN
For more information about setting up remote support with a VPN, see the Contact Center Manager Planning and Engineering Guide.
Information required during installationDuring installation the following installer information is required:
pcAnywhere LiveUpdateNortel recommends that you use another computer to periodically check the Symantec Web site for changes and updates. If there are changes, download the changes and transfer them to the Contact Center Manager Server.
User name
Organization
Destination directory Nortel recommends that you install in the default directory(C:\Program Files\Symantec\pcAnywhere)
112 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
Installing pcAnywhere Host Only
1 Log on to the server as Administrator.
2 Navigate to the pcAnywhere folder on the Contact Center Release 6.0 DVD.
3 Double-click NTJK08BA-02 -Host Only.exe.
4 Wait for the Welcome window to appear.
Result: The Windows Installer window appears, and then the installation Welcome window appears. This can take a few moments.
5 Click Next.
Result: The License Agreement window appears.
6 Accept the terms of the license agreement, and then click Next.
Result: The Customer Information window appears.
7 Enter your user name and company details, and then click Next.
Result: The Destination Folder window appears.
8 Accept the default location to install the software, or click Change to choose a custom location. If you click Change, type the location in which you want to install pcAnywhere, and then click OK.
9 Click Next.
Result: The Ready to Install the Program window appears.
10 Click Install.
Result: The program installs any updates.
11 Click Finish when the installation is complete.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 113
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
Starting pcAnywhere 11.5 or later for the first time
1 Log on to Windows as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Symantec pcAnywhere.
Note: If the system asks you to register pcAnywhere, select Skip, and then choose Yes when you are asked to confirm.
Result: The Symantec pcAnywhere window appears.
3 Continue with the following procedure to configure pcAnywhere 11.5.
Configure pcAnywhere user access rights
This section describes how to configure pcAnywhere to accept remote connections. When you first receive your server, pcAnywhere can already be configured. If so, go through the following procedures to ensure that the network properties and remote caller settings are correct.
Configuration of pcAnywhere sets up a secure caller account to access the server. You can add a caller account for each remote PC. These caller accounts restrict the use of pcAnywhere to appropriate users (for example, Nortel support personnel and distributors).
If, during the pcAnywhere configuration, a message indicates that you do not have the rights to modify a setting or to create a new caller, follow this procedure to change the Windows User access rights for pcAnywhere files.
ATTENTION If the following message appears, it indicates that your video driver is incompatible with pcAnywhere: pcAnywhere detected and fixed a display driver problem. Please restart your computer to allow the change to take effect. In this case, you must uninstall pcAnywhere, update your video driver, and then reinstall pcAnywhere.
114 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
Configuring pcAnywhere user access rights
1 Exit pcAnywhere.
Tip: This procedure requires you to browse to a hidden directory. To view hidden directories, follow these steps:
a. Open My Computer.
b. Choose Tools > Folder Options.
c. Click the View tab.
d. Scroll down until you see Show Hidden Files and Folders, and select this option.
e. Click OK.
2 In Windows Explorer, navigate to the following folder:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Symantec\pcAnywhere
3 Right-click the pcAnywhere folder icon, and click Properties.
Result: The pcAnywhere Properties window appears.
4 Click the Security tab.
5 In the Group or user names box, select Administrators.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 115
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
6 To grant administrators full access to the pcAnywhere folder, in the Permissions box, ensure that Allow, beside Full Control, is selected.
7 Click OK to save your changes and close the Properties window.
Configuring pcAnywhere as a host
1 Log on to Windows as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Symantec pcAnywhere.
Note: If the system asks you to register pcAnywhere, click Skip, and choose Yes when you are asked to confirm.
3 On the pcAnywhere Manager (left side), select the Hosts option.
4 Click the File menu, and choose New > Item > Advanced.
Note: Do not use the Wizard option.
Result: The Host Properties: New Host window appears.
5 On the Connection Info page, select the TCP/IP check box.
116 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
6 Click the Settings tab.
7 In the Host startup section, select Launch with Windows and Run minimized.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 117
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
8 Click the Callers tab.
9 Click the New Item icon ( ).
Result: The Call Properties: New Caller window appears.
118 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
10 In the Login name box, type a name for the caller account. You can choose any name, or use a name that is familiar to you, such as NGenDist.
11 In the Password box, type the password for the caller account.
12 In the Confirm password box, type the same password again.
13 Click the Privileges tab.
Result: The following window appears.
14 Select the Superuser option.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 119
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
15 Click OK to save your changes and close the Caller Properties window.
Result: The Host Properties window reappears with the account now listed according to its logon ID.
16 Click the Security Options tab.
120 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
17 Ensure that the settings are as shown in the following example.
18 Click the Conference tab.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 121
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
19 Select Enable conferencing and Obtain IP address automatically, as shown in the following example.
Note: If you find that your connection to a conferencing session times out when you try to log on, you must change the Allow conference over value to a number greater than 0.
20 Click the Protect Item tab if you want to protect the settings for this caller account by assigning a password to control access to the settings. If you do not want to assign a password, skip to step 23 on page 121.
21 In the Password box, type the password you want to use to protect the caller account settings.
22 In the Confirm password box, type the password again.
23 Click OK to apply all pcAnywhere host PC settings.
Result: The Host List window appears.
ATTENTION If you select the Required option to modify properties, you must type the password each time you change a setting. Record the password and keep a copy of it in a safe place. If you forget the password, you cannot change settings.
122 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
24 Enter an appropriate name for the host that you just set up.
25 Click File > Exit to close the pcAnywhere Manager window.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 123
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
Step 4. Copy the latest Service Update to the server
Before you install the Contact Center Standby Server software, copy the latest Service Update (SU) and Service Update Supplement (SUS) to the root of drive D on the Active Server.
The Contact Center DVD contains an SU shipped with your software. You must check for a more recent SU on the Enterprise Solutions PEP Library Web site at www.nortel.com/espl. If the Web site contains a more recent SU, copy it to the drive D on the server.
Copying the Service Update to the server
1 Insert the Contact Center DVD into the DVD-ROM drive.
Note: If you are installing from a remote DVD or a network shared drive, map the DVD to a drive letter on the server. The path name of the drive or directory that contains the copy of the DVD cannot contain spaces or underscores.
2 Navigate to the Supplementary SU folder on the DVD (for example, CCMS_6.0_SU_92.msi), and copy the SU and the corresponding readme file to the root of the server drive D.
What is next
The preinstallation tasks are complete. Proceed to Section B: “Installation,” on page 125 to install the Contact Center Manager Server software.
ATTENTION The installation program automatically installs the SU and SUS for Contact Center Manager Server located at the root of drive D during installation of the Contact Center Manager Server software.
124 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 125
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
Section B: Installation
In this sectionStep 5. Install the Active Server software 126
Step 6. Configure your CCMS settings after the installation (optional) 152
Step 7. Install the License Manager 172
Step 8. Install the Server Utility 176
126 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
Step 5. Install the Active Server software
Follow the procedures in this section to install the Active Server software.
Installing the Active Contact Center Manager Server software
1 Log on to the server as Administrator.
2 Insert the Contact Center DVD into the DVD-ROM drive and wait for it to start. If the DVD does not start, browse to the DVD and run setup.exe.
Result: The Nortel Contact Center main menu appears.
3 Select Contact Center Manager Server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 127
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
4 Click Install.
Result: The INSTALLATION ORDER window appears.
Note: If you choose to install one application or component, the INSTALLATION ORDER window does not appear; instead, the Contact Center Manager Server - InstallShield Wizard window appears.
5 Click Start.
Result: The Contact Center Manager Server - InstallShield Wizard window appears.
128 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
6 Click Next.
Result: The Custom Installation Information window appears.
7 In the Server Type section, select Standalone.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 129
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
8 In the Installation Type section, leave the selection as New Installation, and click Next.
Result: The Service Update Information window appears, and the preinstallation checker starts. The Pre-Install Check window appears.
9 Review the tab pages to determine potential installation problems. Correct all installation problems. If you make any changes to your configuration, you must click Refresh to rerun the preinstallation checker.
130 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
10 After you resolve any potential problems, click OK.
Result: The Contact Center Manager Server configuration window appears.
11 Perform one of the following tasks:
If you want to enter all of the configuration data before you install the software, select Enter configuration data now to complete CCMS configuration automatically, and click Next.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 131
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
If you want to enter the configuration data after the installation, select Enter configuration data when CCMS configuration is run at end of installation. Click Next and skip to step 40 on page 145.
Result: The Customer Information window appears.
12 In the Customer Name box, type the name of the customer.
13 In the Company Name box, type the name of the company.
132 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
14 Click Next.
Result: The Switch Type window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 133
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
15 Select the appropriate switch type, and click Next.
Result: The License Manager Package Configuration window appears.
16 In the Serial Number box, type the serial number for the switch (for Communication Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX only).
Note: You can find the license file in the D:\Nortel\lm\bin folder on the server. The license file is called plservrc.
17 Select the Contact Center Manager Server optional packages you require in addition to Standby Server:
Universal Networking—Allows you to use Network Skill-Based Routing to route voice and multimedia contacts between networked sites in a mixed switch environment.
. ca
CAUTION
Risk of malfunctionEnsure that you read the license file (provided by your distributor) and that you know which Contact Center Manager Server package you require. You cannot choose a different package after you configure Standby Server. If you choose the wrong package, you must reinstall Standby Server.
134 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
Open Queue—Allows Contact Center Multimedia to route multimedia contacts to agents using the existing scripting and skillset routing features available for calls.
18 Ensure that you select the Standby Server option. This allows the secondary server (Standby Server) to run your contact center if the primary server (Active Server) fails.
19 In the Primary License Manager IP box, type the IP address for the server on which you plan to install the License Manager.
Note: If the License Manager resides on the Contact Center Manager Server, type the IP address for the Contact Center Manager Server.
20 In the Port box, confirm the port number. The default port is 3998.
Note: You can change the primary License Manager IP address when the installation is complete.
21 In the Secondary License Manager IP box, type the secondary License Manager IP address (corporate only).
Note: You can change the secondary License Manager IP address after you install Standby Server.
22 In the Port box, confirm the port number (corporate only). The default port is 3998.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 135
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
23 Click View Features to display package features.
Result: The CCMS Package Features window appears.
24 Check that the features that appear in the CCMS Package Features list match the product that you purchased, and then perform one of the following tasks:
If the information is not correct, verify that you selected the correct package. Click OK, and then select the correct package.
If the information is correct, click OK to close the window.
136 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
25 Click Next.
Result: The Local Area Network IP window appears.
26 From the IP Address list, choose the IP address for the Nortel server subnet.
Note: If you are using two network interface cards, select the ELAN subnet check box, and then from the IP Address list, choose the IP address for the ELAN subnet.
27 Click Next.
28 Perform one of the following tasks depending on which switch you chose in step 15 on page 133:
“Option One (CS 1000)” on page 136
“Option Two (CS 2x00)” on page 138
Option One (CS 1000)If you selected CS 1000 (M1), the following window appears.
If you selected CS 2x00 (DMS/SL-100), continue with “Option Two (CS 2x00)” on page 138.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 137
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
a. In the Switch Name box, type the name of the switch.
Valid characters for switch names are A–Z, a–z, 0–9, underscore (_), and period (.). Switch names must begin with an alphabetical character and cannot contain spaces. The last character must not be an underscore or a period. Switch names must not exceed 80 characters in length.
Note: If you are unsure of the correct information, or if you make a mistake, you can change the switch information after you finish the installation.
b. In the Switch IP Address box, type the IP address for the switch.
c. In the Switch Customer Number box, type the customer number for the switch.
d. Click Next.
138 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
Option Two (CS 2x00)If you select CS 2x00 (DMS/SL-100), the following window appears.
If you selected CS 1000 (M1), see “Option One (CS 1000)” on page 136.
a. In the Switch Name box, type the name of the switch.
Valid characters for switch names are A–Z, a–z, 0–9, underscore (_), and period (.). Switch names must begin with an alphabetical character and cannot contain spaces. The last character must not be an underscore or a period. Switch names must not exceed 80 characters in length.
Note: If you are unsure of the correct information, or if you make a mistake, you can change the switch information after you finish the installation.
b. In the Switch IP Address box, type the IP address for the switch.
c. In the Network Node box, type the network node information.
d. In the Service ID box, type the service ID information.
e. In the Application ID box, type the identifier for the application.
f. In the Service Version box, type the SCAI protocol that you plan to use as defined by the application.
g. In the Business Group box, type the name of the business group.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 139
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
h. In the Linkset Name box, type the name for the Contact Center Manager Server as it is known to the switch (uppercase only). The linkset name creates a logical pathway to the server on the Ethernet Interface Unit (EIU).
i. In the Password box, type the password for the switch.
j. Click Next.
Result: One of the following results occurs:
If you are using a Communication Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX switch, the Voice Services window appears.
If you are using a Communication Server 2x00/DMS switch, the Voice Services window does not appear. Proceed to step 30 on page 141.
140 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
29 Perform one of the following tasks:
If you are not using an integrated voice-processing system (Meridian Mail or CallPilot), for Voice Connection Type, select Serial, and click Next.
Note: If your computer is not configured with COM2, for Voice Connection Type, select TCP, type a dummy IP address and port number, and click Next.
If you are using Meridian Mail as your voice-processing system, for Voice Connection Type, select Serial, and click Next.
If you are using CallPilot, for Voice Connection Type, select TCP, specify the ELAN subnet IP address of the CallPilot server, and set the CallPilot Server Port to 10008. Click Next.
Note: Although you can install Contact Center Manager Server on a server without a COM 2 serial port, the hard-coded dependency in the Media Application Server (MAS) Access Link service can cause the Access Link Handler to restart constantly if you do not configure the COM2 port. For a Contact Center Manager Server that does not require the Access Link connection to Meridian Mail, type a dummy IP address and port number in the Voice Connection Type.
Result: The RSM IP Address window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 141
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
30 In the RSM IP Address box, type the Real-time Statistics Multicase (RSM) IP address that you want to associate with sending real-time statistical data.
Note: Do not confuse the RSM IP address with the Nortel server subnet or ELAN subnet addresses for the server.
31 Click Next.
Result: If you selected the Standby Server package, the Database Replication window appears.
32 For Warm Standby type, select Active.
ATTENTION The IP multicast addresses that you select for RSM sending and receiving must be within the 224.0.1.0 and 239.255.255.255 range. The default is 230.0.0.1. Check with your network administrator for acceptable IP multicast addresses for your specific network.
142 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
33 Enter the details for your Replication Server, and click Next.
Result: The CCT Server window appears.
34 Click Next.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 143
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
35 Wait for the Site Name window to appear.
Result: The Site Name window appears.
36 In the Site Name box, type the site name for the server.
Note: The site name must not contain spaces or nonalphabetical characters except for hyphens (-) and underscores (_). The first character must be a letter. The site name must be unique and can consist of 6 to 15 characters.
37 Click Finish.
Result: The Information window appears.
144 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
38 Click Continue.
Result: The Nortel Contact Center Management Server Setup Configuration Utility window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 145
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
39 Review the tabs and make any necessary changes, and click OK.
Result: The Ready to Install the Program window appears.
40 Click Begin.
Result: The Installing Contact Center Manager Server window appears.
After a few seconds, the Sybase installation window appears. The system copies the Sybase software files to the server. After 3 to 5 minutes, the system restarts and the Sybase installation window appears.
Stage 1 window
146 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
The installation of the Sybase software and the Contact Center Manager Server software continues. The system windows appear showing the different stages (Stage 1 to 5) of the installation. During Sybase installation, the server restarts.
Note: If you are prompted to click Continue to complete the installation, do this now. You have to click Continue several times.
41 Log on as Administrator.
Result: The installation of the Sybase software and the Contact Center Manager Server software continues.
Note: You do not require Terminal Services on the server; however, if you installed Terminal Services on the server, you must click Continue to continue with installing the database.
Stage 2 window
Stage 3 window
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 147
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
Stage 4 window
The system copies files to drive D and installs the Service Updates.
Stage 5 window (This stage has six parts during which the database is created.)
42 Perform one of the following tasks:
If you did not type your server requirements before the installation, skip to Step 6. “Configure your CCMS settings after the installation (optional)” on page 152.
If you did type your server requirements before the installation, continue with step 43.
148 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
43 Wait for the installation to complete.
Result: The following window appears.
The Server Configuration Utility window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 149
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
This utility completes the Contact Center Manager Server installation.
The Nortel Contact Center - Manager installation success window appears.
44 Click OK.
Result: The Nortel Contact Center - Manager Platform Recovery Disk window appears.
150 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
45 Click Cancel. You can create the Platform Recovery Disk and backup the database after you install the remaining components on the server (when you complete the postinstallation tasks).
Result: The InstallShield Wizard Completed for Contact Center Manager Server (CCMS) window appears.
46 Click Finish when the button becomes active.
Result: The following window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 151
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
47 Click No. You can restart the server after you install the remaining components.
Result: The INSTALLATION ORDER window appears.
48 Perform one of the following tasks:
If you plan to install License Manager now, click Continue. Proceed to Step 7. “Install the License Manager” on page 172.
If you do not plan to install any other Nortel Contact Center components on this server, click Cancel. Proceed to Step 8. “Install the Server Utility” on page 176.
152 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
Step 6. Configure your CCMS settings after the installation (optional)
Complete the procedure in this section if you chose to configure Standby Server after you install the software. This procedure is a continuation from step 42 on page 147. If you chose to configure Standby Server during the installation, you can skip this step.
Configuring your CCMS settings after installation
1 Wait for the Customer Information window to appear.
2 In the Customer Name box, type the name of the customer.
3 In the Company Name box, type the name of the company.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 153
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
4 Click Next.
Result: The Switch Type window appears.
154 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
5 Select the appropriate switch type, and click Next.
Result: The License Manager Package Configuration window appears.
6 In the Serial Number box, type the serial number for the switch (for Communication Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX only).
Note: You can find the license file in the D:\Nortel\lm\bin folder on the server. The license file is called plservrc.
7 Select the Contact Center Manager Server optional packages you require in addition to Standby Server:
Universal Networking—Allows you to use Network Skill-Based Routing to route voice and multimedia contacts between networked sites in a mixed switch environment.
. ca
CAUTION
Risk of malfunctionEnsure that you read the license file (provided by your distributor) and that you know which Contact Center Manager Server package you require. You cannot choose a different package after you configure Standby Server. If you choose the wrong package, you must reinstall Standby Server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 155
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
Open Queue—Allows Contact Center Multimedia to route multimedia contacts to agents using the existing scripting and skillset routing features available for calls.
8 Ensure that you select the Standby Server option. This allows the secondary server (Standby Server) to run your contact center if the primary server (Active Server) fails.
9 In the Primary License Manager IP box, type the IP address for the server on which you plan to install the License Manager.
Note: If the License Manager resides on Contact Center Manager Server, type the IP address for the Contact Center Manager Server.
10 In the Port box, confirm the port number. The default port is 3998.
Note: You can change the primary License Manager IP address when the installation is complete.
11 In the Secondary License Manager IP box, type the secondary License Manager IP address (corporate only).
Note: You can change the secondary License Manager IP address after you install Standby Server.
12 In the Port box, confirm the port number (corporate only). The default port is 3998.
156 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
13 Click View Features to display package features.
Result: The CCMS Package Features window appears.
14 Check that the features that appear in the CCMS Package Features list match the product that you purchased, and then perform one of the following tasks:
If the information is not correct, verify that you selected the correct package. Click OK, and then select the correct package.
If the information is correct, click OK to close the window.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 157
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
15 Click Next.
Result: The Local Area Network IP window appears.
16 From the IP Address list, choose the IP address for the Nortel server subnet.
Note: If you are using two network interface cards, select the ELAN subnet check box, and then from the IP Address list, choose the IP address for the ELAN subnet.
17 Click Next.
18 Perform one of the following tasks depending on which switch you chose in step 16 on page 157:
Option One (CS 1000)
Option Two (CS 2x00)
Option One (CS 1000)If you selected CS 1000 (M1), the following window appears.
If you selected CS 2x00 (DMS/SL-100), continue with “Option Two (CS 2x00)” on page 159.
158 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
a. In the Switch Name box, type the name of the switch.
Valid characters for switch names are A–Z, a–z, 0–9, underscore (_), and period (.). Switch names must begin with an alphabetical character and cannot contain spaces. The last character must not be an underscore or a period. Switch names must not exceed 80 characters in length.
Note: If you are unsure of the correct information, or if you make a mistake, you can change the switch information after you finish the installation.
b. In the Switch IP Address box, type the IP address for the switch.
c. In the Switch Customer Number box, type the customer number for the switch.
d. Click Next.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 159
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
Option Two (CS 2x00)If you select CS 2x00 (DMS/SL-100), the following window appears.
If you selected CS 1000 (M1), see “Option One (CS 1000)” on page 157.
a. In the Switch Name box, type the name of the switch.
Valid characters for switch names are A–Z, a–z, 0–9, underscore (_), and period (.). Switch names must begin with an alphabetical character and cannot contain spaces. The last character must not be an underscore or a period. Switch names must not exceed 80 characters in length.
Note: If you are unsure of the correct information, or if you make a mistake, you can change the switch information after you finish the installation.
b. In the Switch IP Address box, type the IP address for the switch.
c. In the Network Node box, type the network node information.
d. In the Service ID box, type the service ID information.
e. In the Application ID box, type the identifier for the application.
f. In the Service Version box, type the SCAI protocol that you plan to use as defined by the application.
g. In the Business Group box, type the name of the business group.
160 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
h. In the Linkset Name box, type the name for the Contact Center Manager Server as it is known to the switch (uppercase only). The linkset name creates a logical pathway to the server on the Ethernet Interface Unit (EIU).
i. In the Password box, type the password for the switch.
j. Click Next.
Result: One of the following results occurs:
If you are using a Communication Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX switch, the Voice Services window appears.
If you are using a Communication Server 2x00/DMS switch, the Voice Services window does not appear. Proceed to step 26 on page 164.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 161
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
19 Perform one of the following tasks:
If you are not using an integrated voice-processing system (Meridian Mail or CallPilot), for Voice Connection Type, select Serial, and click Next.
Note: If your computer is not configured with COM2, for Voice Connection Type, select TCP, type a dummy IP address and port number, and click Next.
If you are using Meridian Mail as your voice-processing system, for Voice Connection Type, select Serial, and click Next.
If you are using CallPilot, for Voice Connection Type, select TCP, specify the ELAN subnet IP address of the CallPilot server, and set the CallPilot Server Port to 10008. Click Next.
Note: Although you can install Contact Center Manager Server on a server without a COM 2 serial port, the hard-coded dependency in the Media Application Server (MAS) Access Link service can cause the Access Link Handler to restart constantly if you do not configure the COM2 port. For a Contact Center Manager Server that does not require the Access Link connection to Meridian Mail, type a dummy IP address and port number in the Voice Connection Type.
Result: The RSM IP Address window appears.
162 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
20 In the RSM IP Address box, type the Real-time Statistics Multicase (RSM) IP address that you want to associate with sending real-time statistical data.
Note: Do not confuse the RSM IP address with the Nortel server subnet or ELAN subnet addresses for the server.
21 Click Next.
Result: If you selected the Standby Server package, the Database Replication window appears.
22 For Warm Standby type, select Active.
ATTENTION The IP multicast addresses that you select for RSM sending and receiving must be within the 224.0.1.0 and 239.255.255.255 range. The default is 230.0.0.1. Check with your network administrator for acceptable IP multicast addresses for your specific network.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 163
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
23 Enter the details for your Replication Server, and click Next.
Result: The CCT Server window appears.
24 Click Next.
25 Wait for the Site Name window to appear.
164 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
26 In the Site Name box, type the site name for the server.
Note: The site name must not contain spaces or nonalphabetical characters except for hyphens (-) and underscores (_). The first character must be a letter. The site name must be unique and can consist of 6 to 15 characters.
27 Click Finish.
Result: The Information window appears.
28 Click Continue.
Result: The Nortel Contact Center Management Server Setup Configuration Utility window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 165
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
29 Review the tabs and make any necessary changes, and click OK.
Result: The Ready to Install the Program window appears.
30 Click Begin.
Result: The Installing Contact Center Manager Server window appears.
After a few seconds, the Sybase installation window appears. The system copies the Sybase software files to the server. After 3 to 5 minutes, the system restarts and the Sybase installation window appears.
Stage 1 window
166 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
The installation of the Sybase software and the Contact Center Manager Server software continues. The system windows appear showing the different stages (Stage 1 to 5) of the installation. During Sybase installation, the server restarts.
Note: If you are prompted to click Continue to complete the installation, do this now. You have to click Continue several times.
31 Log on as Administrator.
Result: The installation of the Sybase software and the Contact Center Manager Server software continues.
Note: You do not require Terminal Services on the server; however, if you installed Terminal Services on the server, you must click Continue to continue with installing the database.
Stage 2 window
Stage 3 window
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 167
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
Stage 4 window
The system copies files to drive D and installs the Service Updates.
Stage 5 window (This stage has six parts during which the database is created.)
168 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
32 Wait for the installation to complete.
Result: The following window appears.
The Server Configuration Utility window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 169
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
This utility completes the Contact Center Manager Server installation.
The Nortel Contact Center - Manager installation success window appears.
33 Click OK.
Result: The Nortel Contact Center - Manager Platform Recovery Disk window appears.
170 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
34 Click Cancel. You can create the Platform Recovery Disk and backup the database after you install the remaining components on the server (when you complete the postinstallation tasks).
Result: The InstallShield Wizard Completed for Contact Center Manager Server (CCMS) window appears.
35 Click Finish when the button becomes active.
Result: The following window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 171
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
36 Click No. You can restart the server after you install the remaining components.
Result: The INSTALLATION ORDER window appears.
37 Perform one of the following tasks:
If you plan to install License Manager now, click Continue. Proceed to Step 7. “Install the License Manager” on page 172.
If you do not plan to install any other Nortel Contact Center components on this server, click Cancel. Proceed to Step 8. “Install the Server Utility” on page 176.
172 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
Step 7. Install the License Manager
This procedure is a continuation from Step 5. “Install the Active Server software” on page 126.
Installing the License Manager
1 On the INSTALLATION ORDER window, click Start.
Result: The License Manager InstallShield Wizard window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 173
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
2 Click Next.
Result: The Custom Installation Information window appears.
3 Select the type of installation you require, and click Next.
Result: The License File location window appears.
174 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
4 Locate the license file, and click Next.
Result: The Ready to Install the Program window appears.
5 Click Begin.
Result: The Installing License Manager window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 175
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
The InstallShield Wizard Completed window appears.
6 Click Finish.
Result: The INSTALLATION ORDER window appears.
7 Perform one of the following tasks:
If you plan to install the Server Utility on the same server on which you installed the Active Server, continue with Step 8. “Install the Server Utility” on page 176.
If you do not plan to install any other Nortel Contact Center components on this server, continue with Step 8. “Install the Server Utility” on page 176.
176 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
Step 8. Install the Server Utility
This procedure is a continuation from Step 7. “Install the License Manager” on page 172.
Installing the Server Utility software
1 Log on to the server as Administrator.
2 Insert the Contact Center 6.0 DVD into the DVD-ROM drive and wait for it to autorun. If the DVD does not autorun, then browse to the DVD and run setup.exe.
Result: The following dialog box appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 177
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
3 Select Server Utility, and then click Next.
Result: The Windows Installer window appears, and then the Server Utility - InstallShield Wizard window appears.
4 Click Next.
Result: The following dialog box appears.
5 In the User Name box, enter your user name.
6 In the Organization box, enter the name of your organization.
178 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
7 Click Next.
Result: The Destination Folder window appears.
8 Verify the destination folder, and then click Next.
Result: The following dialog box appears, prompting you to begin the installation.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 179
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
9 Click Install.
Result: The following dialog box appears, displaying the installation progress.
Result: When installation is complete the InstallShield Wizard Completed window appears.
10 Click Finish.
Result: The INSTALLATION ORDER window appears.
180 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
11 Click Finish.
Result: The installation is complete.The Server Utility is installed.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 181
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
Section C: Postinstallation
In this sectionStep 9. Install required CCMS Service Updates 182
Step 10. Change the NGenDist, NGenDesign, and NGenSys passwords 186
Step 11. Configure the NGen user groups for remote access (optional) 190
Step 12. Add NGen names to pcAnywhere 192
Step 13. Accept the license agreement 195
Step 14. Activate the Master Script 197
Step 15. Verify the success of the installation 198
Step 16. Add the server to a domain (optional) 199
Step 17. Create a Platform Recovery Disk 209
Step 18. Install and configure Real-time Statistics Multicast 213
Step 19. Install LinkPlexer 225
Step 20. Verify your security settings 242
Step 21. Disable the time synchronization features on the operating system244
Step 22. Complete other postinstallation tasks 246
182 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
Step 9. Install required CCMS Service Updates
You can obtain Service Updates (SU) and Service Update Supplements (SUS) as follows:
All SU packs and SUSs are available on the Enterprise Solutions PEP Library Web site located at www.nortel.com/espl.
Note: To register for this Web site, follow the instructions provided at www.nortel.com/register.
Any SU packs and SUSs that are available at the time of shipping are included on the DVD with your software.
Before you begin
If you are not installing patches from a DVD, download them from the Enterprise Solutions PEP Library Web site (www.nortel.com/espl) or obtain them from your Nortel customer support representative.
You must read the readme file associated with each Service Update you plan to install.
Installing a patch on the server (SU or SUS)
1 Use the PEP Viewer utility to ensure that the patch (SU or SUS) is not installed.
2 Ensure that you close all applications.
3 Perform one of the following tasks:
If you are downloading the patch, navigate to the Enterprise Solutions PEP Library Web site located at http://www.nortel.com/espl and download the patch you require.
If you are installing the patch, locate the patch directory on the DVD, or the directory into which you downloaded the patch from the Web.
4 Read the readme file associated with the patch.
5 Double-click the <SU _ID>.msi or <SUS_ID>.msi file associated with the patch.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 183
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
6 If you are prompted to view the readme file, click Yes.
7 Review the readme file and continue with the installation of the SU.
Result: The following window appears.
8 Click Next.
184 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
9 The following window appears.
10 Click Install.
Result: The system installs the patch on the server, and then the following window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 185
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
11 Click Finish.
Result: The following window may appear.
12 Click Yes to restart the server.
Result: The patch is installed.
Install the Sybase Security Alert (Sybase EBF 12326)
Install this stand-alone patch from Sybase to address security issues. You must install this patch after you install Standby Server.
The Sybase patch is available from the Enterprise Solutions PEP Library Web site (www.nortel.com/espl) or from your Nortel customer support representative.
You must read the readme file associated with each Service Update you plan to install. Follow the instructions in the readme file to install this patch.
186 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
Step 10. Change the NGenDist, NGenDesign, and NGenSys passwords
To protect your system from unauthorized access, change the passwords for the Nortel user accounts as soon as you finish the installation.
NGenDist, NGenDesign, and NGenSys are Windows remote access accounts that enable the distributor or Nortel customer support to remotely log on to the server if requested by the customer. These accounts are created during the server software installation.
Assign new passwords
To assign new passwords, you do not need to know the default passwords for NGenDist, NGenDesign, and NGenSys.
Password security
Write down the new passwords you create, and store them in a safe, secure place away from the server. Give the passwords only to those who need them.
Default accounts and passwords
The following Windows accounts are created on the server during the installation procedure:
NGenSys
NGenDist
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 187
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
NGenDesign
Changing the NGenDist, NGenDesign, or NGenSys password
You are not required to change the NGenSys password. If you change the NGenSys password, you must apply the same password change to the Meridian Application Server (MAS) Backup and Restore service.
1 Log on to the server as Administrator.
2 Click Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Computer Management.
Result: The Computer Management window appears.
3 Click Local users and groups, and then click Users.
Result: The Computer Management window displays a list of available user accounts, including NGenDist and NGenDesign.
4 Right-click NGenDist.
ATTENTION The on-site installer is instructed to change all default passwords as part of the on-site installation procedures.
You can change all passwords with the procedures in this section. Nortel recommends that you change all passwords regularly to maintain system security.
If the server software is reinstalled, the default accounts and passwords are recreated and passwords must be changed.
188 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
5 Click Set Password.
Result: The Set Password window appears.
6 Click Proceed.
Result: The Properties window appears.
7 In the Password box, type the new password.
Note: Ensure that you use a password that contains a combination of numbers and letters.
8 In the Confirm Password box, type the same password entered in the Password box.
9 Click OK.
Result: The following window appears.
10 Click OK
11 Repeat steps 4 to 10 for NGenDesign and NGenSys.
12 Select Exit to save changes.
13 Record these passwords and store them in a secure place away from the server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 189
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
If you have changed the NGenSys password, continue with the following procedure.
Change the CCMS MAS Backup/Restore password
Change the the password for the CCMS MAS Backup/Restore service and set it to the same password as the NGenSys.
Changing the CCMS MAS Backup/Restore password
1 On the Active Server, go to Start > Administrative Tools > Services.
Result: The Services window opens.
2 Right-click the CCMS MAS Backup/Restore service and click Properties.
Result: The CCMS MAS Backup/Restore Properties (Local Computer) window appears.
3 Click the Log On tab.
4 Set the password to the same password as NGenSys.
5 Click Apply.
6 Close all open windows.
ATTENTION When you finish changing passwords, remember to log on as NGenSys. You must log on as NGenSys to monitor and manage the server.
190 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
Step 11. Configure the NGen user groups for remote access (optional)
Contact Center Manager Server software creates three users: NGenSys, NGenDesign, and NGenDist. Set up these user accounts for support personnel to remotely access the server.
Configuring NGenSys, NGenDesign, and NGenDist for remote access
1 From the Start menu, choose Control Panel.
2 Double-click Network Connections.
Result: The Network Connections window appears.
3 Right-click the incoming connection you created, and then choose Properties.
Result: The Incoming Connections Properties window for your connection appears.
4 Click the Users tab.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 191
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
5 Select the check box beside the users NGenDesign, NgenDist, and NGenSys.
6 Click OK to close the window, and then close the Network Connections window.
192 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
Step 12. Add NGen names to pcAnywhere
Adding NGenDist and NGenDesign to pcAnywhere 11.5
1 Log on to Windows as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Symantec pcAnywhere.
3 On the pcAnwhere Manager (left side), select the Hosts option.
4 Click the File menu, and then choose New > Item > Advanced.
Note: Do not use the Wizard option.
5 Click the Callers tab.
ATTENTION If your server is in a workgroup, complete this step. If you intend to add your server to a domain, see Step 16. “Add the server to a domain (optional)” on page 199 for information about configuring the NGen user groups for remote access in a domain environment.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 193
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
6 From the Authentication type list, select NT.
7 Below the Caller list heading, click the New item icon ( ).
Result: The pcAnywhere Caller Properties: New Caller window appears.
8 On the Identification tab, select User.
9 From the Domain list, select the computer name of the server for the Active Contact Center Manager Server.
10 From the Account list, select NGenDist.
Note: The NGenDist and NGenDesign user accounts are automatically created on the server as Windows user accounts when you install the Contact Center Manager Server software. To allow authorized remote personnel to use pcAnywhere to log on and administer the server with either account, you must designate these Windows accounts as valid pcAnywhere caller accounts. By creating this link between Windows and pcAnywhere, you never have to change the passwords for these accounts in pcAnywhere; when you change the passwords in Windows, the information is automatically updated in pcAnywhere.
11 Click the Privileges tab.
194 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
12 Select the Superuser option.
13 Click OK to save the NGenDist caller account settings.
Result: The Callers tab in the pcAnywhere Host Properties window reappears.
14 Perform steps 7 to 13 again to add the NGenDesign caller account.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 195
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
Step 13. Accept the license agreement
If you installed or upgraded Contact Center Manager Server, you must accept the licence agreement for the Server Utility before you can log on to the Contact Center Manager Administration application.
Accepting the license agreement for Server Utility
1 On the Contact Center Manager Server, click Start > Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Server Utility > Server Utility.
Result: The Nortel Contact Center Manager Server Utility Login window appears.
2 Enter the User ID sysadmin, the password nortel, and the server name or IP address.
196 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
3 Click OK.
Result: The End User License Agreement window appears.
4 Read the End User License Agreement.
5 Click Accept.
Result: The Change Password window appears.
6 In the Old Password box, type the old password.
7 In the New Password box, type the new password.
8 In the Confirm New Password box, type the new password again, and click OK.
Result: The Server Utility launches.
9 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 197
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
Step 14. Activate the Master Script
You must install Contact Center Manager Administration to activate the Master Script. For more information about activating scripts, see the Contact Center Manager Administration Installation and Maintenance Guide.
When you create a new script, or modify an existing inactive script, you must validate the script manually before it can be activated. For more information about validating scripts, see the Contact Center Manager Administration Installation and Maintenance Guide.
When you change an existing active script, the system automatically validates the changes you make when you activate the script again.
Activating the Master Script
1 Log on to Contact Center Manager Administration.
2 Click Scripting.
3 On the system tree, click the server containing the script that you want to activate.
4 Click Script Manager.
Result: The Script Manager window appears, listing all scripts on the server.
5 Click Yes to reload Script Manager, if prompted.
6 Select and right-click the Master Script.
7 On the menu, select Open.
8 Click File > Activate.
Result: A message box appears, asking you to confirm your choice.
9 Click OK.
Result: The system activates the script. The script status changes to Active when the activation process finishes successfully.
198 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
Step 15. Verify the success of the installation
You can verify the success of your installation by making sure that the Active Server is running.
Verifying the Active Server services are running
1 Log on to the server as NGenSys.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > System Monitor.
Result: The System Monitor window appears showing the state of each Contact Center Manager Server service.
3 Check that all relevant services are in the UP state.
Note: It can take 15 minutes or more for the system to start and for all of the services to start.
4 Check the Windows Event Viewer again to be sure that no errors occurred during the restart.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 199
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
Step 16. Add the server to a domain (optional)
Follow the procedures in this step to add your Contact Center Manager Server to an existing domain, and to perform other necessary tasks to make your server work in a domain. To perform this step, you need domain administrator’s privileges, or ask the domain administrator to assign you a domain user account for remote access.
Add the Active Contact Center Manager Server to your domain
After you install Contact Center Manager Server, you can add your server as a member of an existing domain.
Adding the Active Contact Center Manager Server to your domain
1 On the Windows desktop, right-click My Computer, and select Properties.
2 In the System Properties window, click the Computer Name tab.
3 Click Change.
4 In the Computer Name Changes window, change the computer name and its domain or workgroup affiliation.
5 To add the server to an existing domain:
a. Click the Domain option.
b. Type the domain name (you must provide the Fully Qualified Domain Name of the domain, which includes the prefix and suffix).
6 Click OK.
Result: When the system processes your change successfully, it notifies you that the server now belongs to the domain that you specified.
7 Restart the server when you are prompted to do so.
ATTENTION Nortel recommends that the servers be in a workgroup rather than on a domain to eliminate the process of removing the computer name and IP address on the domain controller.
200 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
Configure the operating system for remote access (domain)
In a Windows Server 2003 domain environment, you must create a dial-up user as a domain user on the domain controller and assign dial-in access permissions to this user. When you dial in to the Contact Center Manager Server Remote Access Services (RAS) configuration, the domain controller authenticates the user. Because no local dial-in account is created on the Contact Center Manager Server, the system no longer uses the accounts NGenDist and NGenDesign for dial-up access. However, after you establish a dial-up connection using the domain user account, the pcAnywhere user accounts can still use the NGenDist or NGenDesign accounts.
Configuring the operating system for remote access (domain)
1 From the Start menu, choose Administrative Tools > Routing and Remote Access.
Result: The Routing and Remote Access window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 201
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
2 Right-click the local server name, and select Configure and Enable Routing and Remote Access.
Result: The Welcome window appears.
3 Click Next.
Result: The Configuration window appears.
202 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
4 Make sure Remote Access (dial-up or VPN) is selected, and click Next.
Result: The Remote Access window appears.
5 Select Dial-up, and click Next.
Result: The Network Selection window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 203
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
6 Select the network connection that represents your Nortel server subnet, and then click Next.
Result: The IP Address Assignment window appears.
7 Select From a specified range of addresses, and click Next.
Result: The Address Range Assignment window appears.
204 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
8 Click New.
Result: The New Address Range window appears.
9 Enter the ranges of the IP addresses provided by your domain administrator, and then click OK.
Result: The Address Range Assignment window appears showing the address ranges you entered.
10 Click Next.
Result: The Managing Multiple Remote Access Servers window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 205
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
11 Select No, use Routing and Remote Access to authenticate requests, and click Next.
Result: The Completing the Routing and Remote Access Server Setup Wizard window appears.
12 Click Finish.
Result: The Routing and Remote Access service starts and is successfully installed on your computer.
Set up your user accounts for remote access
After you install the Routing and Remote Access service on your server, you need to set up your user accounts for remote access. Choose from one of the following two options.
Option 1: Creating a domain user while using the NGenDist account for pcAnywhereThis option requires that you create a domain user account on the domain controller with dial-in access privileges, while retaining the NGenDist or NGenDesign accounts at a pcAnywhere level.
206 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
1 On the domain controller, create a new domain user account and allow dial-in access.
Notes:
Nortel recommends that you use a user name and password that are different from NGenDist and NGenDesign. The network administrator can be required to carry out this step. Record the user name and password carefully as they are required to support Contact Center Manager Server remotely.
On the Contact Center Manager Server, no changes are required to the operating system, RAS configuration, server software or pcAnywhere installation.
2 Dial into the Active Contact Center Manager Server.
Result: The system prompts you for a domain user account and password.
3 Enter the domain user account name and password.
Result: The domain controller authenticates the domain user account and password.
4 Start the pcAnywhere session.
Notes:
The pcAnywhere logon can still use the NGenDist or NGenDesign account.
Because there is no local record of the domain user account, you need to maintain two user accounts: the domain user account and the local pcAnywhere account.
Option 2: Using the domain user account for pcAnywhereThis option requires that you create a domain user account on the domain controller with dial-in access, as in option 1. However, you also use the same domain user account instead of NgenDist for pcAnywhere access. The NGenDist or NGenDesign accounts are no longer used at any level.
1 On the domain controller, create a new domain user account and allow dial-in access.
Notes:
Nortel recommends that you use a user name and password that are different from NGenDist and NGenDesign. The network administrator can be required to carry out this step. Record the user name and
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 207
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
password carefully as they are required for remote support of Contact Center Manager Server.
On the Contact Center Manager Server, you do not need to make any changes to the operating system, RAS configuration, or server software, except for the pcAnywhere configuration.
2 Dial into the Active Contact Center Manager Server.
Result: The system prompts you for a domain user account and password.
3 Enter the domain user account name and password.
Result: The domain controller authenticates the domain user account and password.
4 Start the pcAnywhere session.
5 On the pcAnywhere configuration, select a domain user account from the domain controller in the pcAnywhere Add Users window.
Note: You must log on to Contact Center Manager Server using an account with domain administrator privileges before you can configure pcAnywhere users.
Stop and disable the Windows Time Service (Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX switch)
If you are using a Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX switch, you must stop and disable the Windows Time Service to allow the CS 1000/Meridian 1 switch to set the time and not the server. You do not need to disable the Windows Time Service if you are using a Communication Server 2x00/DMS switch.
Stopping and disabling the Windows Time ServiceCheck that the Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX time is within 10 seconds of the domain controller time. If the time is not within 10 seconds, adjust the Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX time to match the domain controller time.
1 On the Windows desktop, right-click My Computer and choose Manage > Services and Applications > Services.
2 On the right window pane, right-click Windows Time Service and select Stop.
208 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
3 When the Windows Time Service stops, right-click Windows Time Service again, and select Properties.
4 On the General tab, change the Startup Type to Disabled.
5 Click Apply, and click OK.
6 On the Computer Management window, check that Windows Time Service Startup Type is disabled.
7 Close the window.
Note: Nortel recommends that the time difference between the Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX and the domain controller time be kept within a few seconds (+/- 10 seconds). The maximum difference is 5 minutes before Kerberos authentication problems may arise. Check the times on the Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX and the domain once a month to ensure that the 5-minute tolerance is not exceeded.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 209
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
Step 17. Create a Platform Recovery Disk
When you create a Platform Recovery Disk, the system saves both server and database configuration data into a series of text files. You must keep an up-to-date Platform Recovery Disk available in case you need to recover your server software, database, or both. You also need this disk for upgrade and migration procedures. Nortel recommends that you create a Platform Recovery disk after any major modifications to the system.
You can create a Platform Recovery Disk on either a floppy disk or a remote directory on a network computer.
If you want to use a remote computer, you must first map the directory on the network computer to a network drive on your server. The name of the remote directory into which you save the Platform Recovery Disk must not contain any spaces. Spaces in the remote directory name cause errors.
210 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
Creating a Platform Recovery Disk
1 Log on to the Active Server as NGenSys.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Server Setup Configuration.
Result: The following window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 211
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
3 Click the Utilities tab.
Result: The following window appears.
4 In the Create Platform Recovery Disk section, perform one of the following tasks:
To save the Platform Recovery Disk to a floppy disk:
a. Ensure the path shows A:\.
b. Insert a blank floppy disk in drive A.
c. Click Create Disk.
Result: The following message appears.
d. Click OK.
212 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
To save the Platform Recovery Disk to a remote directory:
a. Map a network drive to the remote directory.
Note: The name of the remote directory into which you save the Platform Recovery Disk must not contain any spaces. Spaces in the remote directory name cause errors.
b. Click Browse, and then navigate to the mapped network drive.
c. Select the drive, and then click OK.
d. Click Create Disk.
Result: The system creates the Platform Recovery Disk. The following window appears.
e. Click OK.
Note: The system also checks for database segmentation problems. If it finds any, a message indicating the type of problem appears.
If the system finds a database data segmentation overlapping problem, it advises you to contact Nortel customer support before you proceed with the migration procedure. After customer support fixes the problem, you must create a new Platform Recovery Disk before you proceed with the migration.
If the system finds a database log segmentation overlapping problem, you can still use the Platform Recovery Disk that you just created. The system prompts you to shut down the Contact Center Manager Server services so it can fix the problem. Follow the on-screen prompt to shut down the services.
5 If you used a floppy disk, remove it from the drive, and ensure it is labeled clearly.
6 Close the Contact Center Manager Server Setup Configuration Utility window.
7 Store the Platform Recovery Disk in a safe place.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 213
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
Step 18. Install and configure Real-time Statistics Multicast
As part of the imstallation of the Active Server, you must configure the Acitve Server so the Real-Time Statistics IP address, Real-Time Display Multicast Controller Utility (MulticastCtrl.exe), and Real-Time Display Multicast Configuration Utility (RSMConfg.exe).
You can begin using the RSM service with the default RSM settings, or you can modify RSM settings to conform to the requirements of your RSM-dependent applications.
Installing Real-time Statistics Multicast
During the installation, you are prompted to enter the IP multicast address that you want RSM to use to send real-time statistical data. Use the same IP multicast address for both the Active Server and Standby Server.
The RSM IP Address window appears whenever RSM is detected during any one of the following scenarios:
an initial installation of Contact Center Manager Server
an upgrade or reinstallation of Contact Center Manager Server
ATTENTION RSM compression is supported on Contact Center Manager Server, but it is not supported with Contact Center Manager Administration. If RSM compression is configured on the Active Server, Contact Center Manager Administration real-time displays do not work.
ATTENTION The IP multicast addresses that you select for RSM sending and receiving must be within the 224.0.1.0 and 239.255.255.255 range. The default is 230.0.0.1. Check with your network administrator for acceptable IP multicast addresses for your specific network.
214 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
For more information about installing the RSM feature in Contact Center Manager Server, see the Contact Center Manager Server Installation and Maintenance Guide.
After completing the installation, you can perform the following tasks:
Use the mRcv.exe utility on both the Active Server to verify that the RSM service is sending data to the appropriate ports. The information must match on both servers. For more information, see the Contact Center Manager Server Installation and Maintenance Guide.
Accept the default RSM settings provided by the Active Server installation, and begin using the RSM service. Ensure the RSM settings match on the Standby Server.
Modify the default settings on the Active Server to values recommended by your RSM-dependent applications. The information must match on both servers. For more information, see the Contact Center Manager Server Installation and Maintenance Guide.
Modifying Real-time Statistics Multicast settings
After installing the optional Real-time Statistics Multicast (RSM) feature, you can modify the RSM component default settings on the Active Server to reflect the requirements of your organization. You can modify the following settings:
the IP multicast address to which each server in the Contact Center Manager Server configuration sends real-time statistics
the ports at which real-time statistics are received
the multicast Time To Live (TTL) value for RSM
the default multicast rate for each port at which real-time statistics are received
ATTENTION The IP multicast addresses that you select for RSM sending and receiving must be within the 224.0.1.0 and 239.255.255.255 range. The default is 230.0.0.1. Check with your network administrator for acceptable IP multicast addresses for your specific network.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 215
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
The TTL value in the ICMP protocol is measured in seconds or hops. For Standby Server, it is measured in hops (for example, the number of routers).
This section describes how to modify and enable changes to the RSM service on the Active Server.
The RSM service consists of the configuration and the data propagation components. You configure RSM settings through the RSM configuration and multicast control utilities. The RSM statistics are transmitted through the Statistical Data Propagator (SDP).
When you complete your modifications, you must stop and restart the SDP service on the Active Server. This service must be aware of IP multicast changes to send the appropriate data.
When you modify multicast rates in the Multicast Configuration utility, you must open the Multicast Controller utility and click Apply to activate your changes.
Modifying the Real-Time Statistics Multicast serviceAfter the RSM component is installed on both the Active Server, you can use the following utilities to reconfigure RSM:
RTD Multicast Controller utility (MulticastCtrl.exe)—Use this utility to modify settings for applications that require that real-time statistics be turned on manually.
Note: The real-time statistics groups that you need to turn on or off vary depending on the applications that receive data from the RSM service. Nortel highly recommends that you review the documentation for each RSM-dependent application in Contact Center Manager Server before modifying the RSM settings.
RTD Multicast Configuration utility (RSMConfg.exe)—Use this utility to change
the IP multicast address
the Time To Live (TTL) value for the IP multicast data
the IP ports that send the real-time statistics
the multicast rates for the IP ports that send the real-time statistics
216 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
Modifying real-time statistics settings for applications that use the RSM serviceThe RTD Multicast Controller indicates which statistics are sent and how they are collected. Some applications that use RSM set this data automatically while others require manual configuration.
If you need to modify the default settings based on application requirements, or if you want to customize statistics to be sent to match the needs of your users, use the RTD Multicast Controller window to select or deselect the appropriate settings.
1 On the Active Server, from the windows Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Multicast Stream Control.
Result: The RTD Multicast Controller window appears.
2 Select the Moving Window or Interval To Date check boxes, or both, for each real-time statistics group.
The Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX switch and SIP switch real-time statistics groups are:
Skillset
Application
Agent
Nodal
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 217
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
IVR
Route
Compression
The Communication Server 2x00/DMS real-time statistics groups are:
Skillset
Application
Agent
Nodal
Compression
3 Click Apply.
Tip: You must also use the RTD Multicast Controller utility’s Apply button to activate changes to multicast rates made in the configuration utility. For more information, see “Activate modifications to the RSM service in Contact Center Manager Server” on page 220.
4 Click Close.
5 To activate new RSM settings on Contact Center Manager Server (except the multicast rates), stop and start the Statistical Data Propagator (SDP) service.
Modifying the IP multicast settings in Contact Center Manager ServerPerform the following steps to modify the multicast IP settings on the Active Server.
ATTENTION Nortel highly recommends that you review the documentation for each RSM-dependent application that uses the RSM service in Contact Center Manager Server before modifying the RSM IP multicast settings.
218 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
1 On the Active Server, from the windows Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server >Multicast Address and Port Configuration.
Result: The RTD Multicast Configuration window appears.
2 In the Multicast IP group box, type the IP multicast address that you designated as the sending address for IP multicasting in Contact Center Manager Server.
3 In the IP Port boxes, type the IP port for each statistics group.
ATTENTION The IP multicast addresses that support multicasting are 224.0.1.0 through 239.255.255.255, but the IP multicast addresses between 224.0.0.0 and 224.0.0.255 inclusive are reserved for routing and topology discovery protocols. Addresses between 239.0.0.0 and 239.255.255.255 are reserved for administrative scoping. The IP multicast addresses that you select for RSM sending and receiving must be within the 224.0.1.0 and 239.255.255.255 range.
ATTENTION If you change the IP port settings, some applications that are dependent upon the RSM service can malfunction.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 219
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
4 Change the Multicast time to live (TTL) value to a value that is appropriate for your network.
5 To increase or decrease the default multicast rate, enter a new rate in milliseconds for each port in the Multicast Rate boxes.
Note: If you enter 0 in the Multicast Rate box, you disable the statistic.
Tip: If you make an error in modifying the multicast IP group, TTL, IP ports, or the multicast rates for each port, you can restore the original values by clicking Registry Value or Default Value. Note that if you modify any of these values and click OK or Apply, the appropriate registries are updated with your changes. If you click Registry Value after the modifications are saved to the registry, it has no effect.
Click Registry Value before you click Apply to retrieve the values stored in the registries. Use this option if you want to cancel a change without having to remember and retype the original values.
Click Default Value to restore the values that are set when Contact Center Manager Server is installed. Use this option if you save changes to the registry that caused RSM-dependent applications to malfunction, and you want to begin again with the default RSM configuration.
ATTENTION If packets are traveling through more than one router to reach their destination, it is important to change the Multicast time to live (TTL) value to a value that is appropriate for your network and the number of routers that you use. If the TTL value is set too low and the packets have to go through many routers, the real-time multicast statistics may not reach your application.
ATTENTION If you change the multicast rate for any display in RTD Multicast Configuration, it may not produce the refresh rate changes that you anticipate. Refresh rates depend on the settings in other applications, as well as those set in the configuration window. The minimum refresh rate for RSM is 5000 ms (5 seconds). In addition, certain applications require a specific multicast rate. Before changing a multicast rate, check the documentation for each application to verify that all applications that receive RSM data are not affected by the change.
220 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
6 Click OK.
7 To activate new multicast rate settings on Contact Center Manager Server, you must open the configuration utility and click Apply. For more information, see the procedure “Activate modifications to the RSM service in Contact Center Manager Server” on page 220.
Activating a multicast rate modificationWhen you change a multicast rate in the configuration utility, you modify only the default value, not the current transmission rate. RSM continues to transmit data at the current rate until you open the controller utility and click Apply.
1 On the Active Server, from the Start menu, choose Programs > Windows Explorer.
2 Navigate to the folder in which the RSM component is installed:
D:\Nortel\iccm\bin
3 Double-click MulticastCtrl.exe.
Result: The RTD Multicast Controller window appears.
4 Click Apply.
5 Click Close.
6 Stop and start the Statistical Data Propagator (SDP) service to activate new RSM settings on Contact Center Manager Server (except multicast rates).
Result: The new multicast rates are retrieved from the appropriate registry, and RSM begins transmitting at the new rate.
Activate modifications to the RSM service in Contact Center Manager Server
When you modify the RSM service multicast IP group, TTL, and IP port settings, you must activate the new values on Contact Center Manager Server by stopping and starting the Statistical Data Propagator (SDP) service.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 221
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
Activating the Contact Center Manager Server settings
1 On the Active Server, from the Start menu, choose Control Panel.
2 Click Services.
Result: The Services window appears.
3 From the list of services, select SDP_Service.
4 Click Stop.
5 Click Start.
6 Click Close.
Tip: If you have problems stopping and starting the SDP Service, you can temporarily disable SDP Service to stop it. After the service stops, reset the service to start manually, and then restart the service.
a. In the Services window, click SDP_Service.
b. Click Properties.
Result: The Service Properties window appears.
c. On the Startup Type menu, select Disabled.
Result: The SDP_Service is disabled.
d. Click OK to return to the Services window.
e. Select SDP_Service and click Stop.
Result: The SDP_Service stops.
f. Click Properties.
Result: The Service Properties window appears.
g. On the Startup Type menu, select Manual.
Result: The SDP_Service is set to manually start when the system starts.
h. Click OK to return to the Services window.
i. Select SDP_Service and click Start to restart the service.
j. Click Close.
222 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
Testing the Real-time Statistics Multicast service
After you install or modify RSM on the Active Server, use the Multicast Receive utility (mRcv.exe) to test the RSM service. mRcv.exe displays statistical information according to the settings specified in a configuration file called mRcv.ini.
Configure the Multicast Receive utilityThe mRcv.exe utility tests the RSM service send capabilities one port at a time. You can specify which IP address and port the utility monitors in the [MCast] section of the mRcv.ini file.
Modifying the mRcv.ini file
1 On the Active Server, from the Start menu, choose Programs > Windows Explorer.
2 Navigate to the folder in which the RSM component is installed:
<drive>:\Nortel\iccm\bin
3 Use a text editor to open the mRcv.ini file.
4 Modify the IP address or the port number, or both.
Note: The port numbers listed within the section bordered by pound (#) symbols in the .ini file are for reference only and list all of the acceptable port numbers that you can use in your test. For an example of the information in a standard mRcv.ini file, see “Sample mRcv.ini file” on page 223.
For example, if you want to test receipt of Skillset - Interval to date data using mRcv.exe, check the port number for Skillset - Interval to date in the .ini file, and then change the Port= setting in the [MCast] section to that port number. If Skillset - Interval to date = 6040 in the .ini file, the [MCast] section of the .ini file must be modified as follows:
[MCast]IP=234.5.6.7Port=6040
ATTENTION The IP= value must match your IP multicast address.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 223
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
5 Save the mRcv.ini file. After setting the parameters for your test, you can start mRcv.exe to begin the test. For more information, see “Starting the mRcv application” on page 224.
Sample mRcv.ini fileThe following sample is the default mRcv.ini file provided by the Contact Center Manager Server installation. If you run the mRcv.exe utility using this .ini file, it displays Skillset - Moving window data sent by RSM, based on the settings in the [MCast] section at the bottom of the file (IP = 234.5.6.7 Port = 6050).
The list of port numbers in the mRcv.ini file is for reference only, and each line is marked with the pound (#) symbol. You can use these port numbers as an easy-to-access list of valid ports that are used in the system to display data. The only portion of the .ini file that can be modified is the [MCast] section at the bottom of the file.
######################################################## mRcv.ini file## Valid port numbers are:# Application - Interval to date = 6020# Application - Moving window = 6030# Skillset - Interval to date = 6040# Skillset - Moving window = 6050# Agent - Interval to date = 6060# Agent - Moving window = 6070# Nodal - Interval to date = 6080# Nodal - Moving window = 6090# IVR - Interval to date = 6100# IVR - Moving window = 6110# Route - Interval to date = 6120# Route - Moving window = 6130#######################################################[MCast]IP = 234.5.6.7Port = 6050
224 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
Starting the mRcv application
1 On the Active Server, from the Start menu, choose Programs > Windows Explorer.
2 Navigate to the folder in which the RSM component is installed:
<drive>:\Nortel\iccm\bin
3 Double-click mRcv.exe.
Result: The mRcv.exe utility appears in a console window and displays data from the port and IP address that you specified in the mRcv.ini file.
Note: The mRcv.exe utility displays all data received on the selected port, including data that is not recognizable by RSM. All non-RSM data is identified as Not recognized by RSM.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 225
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
Step 19. Install LinkPlexer
If you use a Communication Server 2x00/DMS switch, you must install LinkPlexer. A LinkPlexer 6.0 system consists of a PC running the Microsoft Windows Server 2003 operating system. The system is connected to a Communication Server 2x00/DMS switch.
If you are adding LinkPlexer to your configuration, see the following section for installation procedures. For LinkPlexer server requirements, see the Nortel Contact Center Manager Planning and Engineering Guide.
Currently, only installing LinkPlexer as a standalone server is supported with Contact Center Standby Server. In a standalone LinkPlexer, the switch address should be the same as the LinkPlexer IP address.
For additional information, see the Nortel LinkPlexer Installation and Configuration Guide.
Installing the iButton software and hardware
In addition to the LinkPlexer 6.0 software, Nortel provides an iButton and a USB adapter for mounting the iButton on the server, a keycode specific to the iButton, and Dallas Semiconductor 1-Wire drivers.
Installing the 1-Wire iButton drivers
1 Remove any 1-Wire USB devices that are plugged in an available USB port of the LinkPlexer 6.0 server. Leave any non-USB devices plugged in.
2 Insert the DVD containing LinkPlexer 6.0 into the DVD drive and using Windows Explorer, launch the installation package <DVD DRIVE>:\LinkPlexer\ThirdParty\install_1_wire_drivers_v400.msi. You can also obtain the 1-Wire drivers from the following Web site:
226 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
http://www.maxim-ic.com
Result: The 1-Wire-Drivers Welcome window appears.
3 Click Next.
Result: The License Agreement window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 227
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
4 Read the License Agreement, select I Agree, and then click Next.
Result: The Custom Installation Choices window appears.
5 Ensure that all check boxes are cleared, and then click Next.
Result: The 1-Wire Drivers USB Warning window appears.
6 If a 1-Wire USB device is attached to the LinkPlexer 6.0 server, unplug it.
228 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
7 Click Next.
Result: The Select Installation Folder window appears.
Note: The default folder for installation appears. If you want to select an alternative location, click Browse or type the path in the Folder box.
8 Click Disk Cost to ensure that there is sufficient free space on the selected disk for the installation.
9 Under Install 1-Wire Drivers for yourself, or for anyone who uses this computer, select Everyone.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 229
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
10 Click Next.
Result: The Confirm Installation window appears.
11 Click Next to begin the installation.
Result: The Installing 1-Wire Drivers window appears. The installation proceeds. The Back and Next buttons are unavailable during the installation.
230 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
When the installation is complete, the USB Instructions dialog box appears.
12 Insert the USB adapter and click OK. Wait for Windows to detect the new hardware.
Result: The Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard window appears.
Note: If Windows cannot detect the driver, select it manually by browsing to the location where the 1-Wire software is installed.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 231
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
13 Under Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for new software?, select No, not this time, and then click Next.
Result: The Found New Hardware - This Wizard helps you install software for USB Host Adapter for 1-Wire Network window appears.
14 Select Install from a list or specific location (Advanced), and then click Next.
Result: The Found New Hardware - Please choose your search and installation options appears.
232 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
15 Select Search for the best driver in these locations.
16 Clear the check box for Search removable media (floppy, CD ROM).
17 Select Include this location in the search.
18 Click Browse and navigate to the location where you installed the driver in Step 8 (by default, C:\Program Files\Dallas Semiconductor\1-Wire Drivers Version 4.00)
Result: The Security Alert - Driver Installation window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 233
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
19 Click Yes.
Result: The application installs the USB Host Adapter for 1-Wire Network. The 1-Wire Net Port Selection window appears.
The application detects the iButton adapter that is installed and sets up the 1-Wire driver to access this device.
20 Click Next.
Result: The 1-Wire Net Port Selection window appears.
234 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
21 Click Auto-Detect. The application searches all ports for the connected device.
Result: A Warning dialog box appears, indicating that the application communicates with all available ports until it finds an iButton device.
22 Click OK.
Result: The Auto-Detect In Progress dialog box appears.
When Auto-Detect locates a device, the following window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 235
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
23 Click Yes to select the detected port as your 1-Wire Net Port.
Result: The auto-detect process is complete. The Installation Complete window appears.
Note: If the Auto-Detect process fails to locate a device, see the Troubleshooting section.
24 Click Close.
25 Restart the LinkPlexer 6.0 server.
Note: The 1-Wire installation process creates a Start menu folder called 1-Wire Driver. This folder contains the default 1-Wire Net application for detecting and setting the port and device, and a Java-based OneWireViewer for viewing the attached device.
236 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
Installing LinkPlexer 6.0
1 Insert the DVD containing LinkPlexer 6.0 into the DVD drive. In Windows Explorer, browse to <DVD DRIVE>:\LinkPlexer\Setup.exe.
Result: The Welcome window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 237
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
2 Click Next.
Result: The Destination Folder window appears.
Note: The default folder for installation appears. Nortel recommends that you use the default location.You can change the folder for installation by clicking the Change button.
3 Click Next.
Result: The Ready to Install window appears.
238 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
4 Click Next.
Result: The Installing Nortel LinkPlexer 6 window appears.
When the installation is complete, the InstallShield Wizard Completed window appears.
5 Click Finish. The LinkPlexer 6.0 installation is now complete.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 239
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
Entering the keycode
1 Click Start > Programs > Nortel Contact Center > LinkPlexer > KeycodeTracker.
Result: The LinkPlexer KeycodeTracker window appears.
2 In the Keycode box, type the supplied keycode.
3 Click Apply.
Result: The LinkPlexer 6.0 KeycodeTracker window closes. The KeycodeTracker application closes.
Using Tracker
The LinkPlexer Tracker application provides information about the LinkPlexer 6.0 build version and the operating system. It detects and displays information about the Microsoft Windows operating version, the build number and date of the installation, and the version number and date of any PEP installation.
Launching the Tracker application
Click Start > Programs > Nortel Contact Center > LinkPlexer > Tracker.
Result: The Tracker window appears.
240 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
The LinkPlexer Tracker application window displays the following components and information:
Windows—refers to the operating system and service pack versions
Tracker—indicates the current version of the LinkPlexer Tracker application
DMS Server File Stamp—refers to the version of the file stamp
Build Info—indicates the LinkPlexer 6.0 build.
The date for the Tracker, DMS Server File Stamp, and Build Info components refer to the date LinkPlexer 6.0 was installed.
LinkPlexer Keycode Tracker
Use the LinkPlexer Keycode Tracker to enter the dongle keycodes. The Keycode Tracker displays the number of applications that can connect to the LinkPlexer 6.0 server.
You can also use the Keycode tracker to confirm dongle detection. Click the Check Dongle button and wait approximately 10 seconds. If a dongle is detected, the Check Dongle box on the Keycode Tracker window displays Connected. If the dongle is not detected, the Check Dongle box displays Not Connected.
Alternatively, the dongle can be also be detected using iButton applications as referred to at http://www.ibutton.com/software.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 241
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
Entering keycodes with LinkPlexer Keycode Tracker
1 Click Start > Programs > Nortel Contact Center \ LinkPlexer > Keycode Tracker.
Result: The Keycode Tracker window appears.
2 Type the supplied 16-character keycode in the Keycode boxes.
3 Click Apply.
242 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
Step 20. Verify your security settings
Ensure that your security settings meet the requirements for your contact center. For more information about configuring your security settings for the Active Server, see “Manage security” on page 977.
Verifying your security settings
You must restart the server to complete the configuration.
1 If you are configuring an existing Contact Center Manager Server as the Active Server and you are not already logged on as NGenSys, log on to the server as NGenSys. From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Server Setup Configuration.
Result: The License Manager Package Configuration window appears.
2 Select the Standby Server optional package.
Result: The the Configuration window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 243
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
3 Select the Database Replication tab.
4 Verify the name of the Replication Server. Ensure that the computer name appears in all uppercase letters.
5 Verify the IP address for the Replication Server.
6 Enter the Contact Center Manager Server listener port number, or accept the default value. If the value is different from the default, you must type the new value on the Replication Server.
7 Select the Active option, and click OK.
8 Run the Server Setup Configuration Utility and restart the server.
244 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
Step 21. Disable the time synchronization features on the operating system
When Contact Center Manager Server is used in the Communication Server 1000/Meridian 1 environment, you must disable all time synchronization features on the operating system to avoid potential call processing outages. Complete the procedures in this section to disable the synchronization features on your operating system.
Note: If you disable the Date and Time features after you disable the Windows Time service, the Startup type for the Windows Time service is set to Automatic.
If the Contact Center Manager Server is in a Communication Server 2x00/DMS or SIP environment or is the Network Control Center server, proceed to Step 22. “Complete other postinstallation tasks” on page 246.
Configuring the server for daylight savings
1 Click Start > Control Panel > Date and Time.
Result: The Date and Time Properties dialog box appears.
Note: If you click OK without making changes, Startup type of the Windows Time service is set to Automatic.
2 Click the Time Zone tab, and then clear the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes check box.
3 Click the Internet Time tab.
4 Clear the Automatically synchronize with an Internet time server check box.
5 Click Apply to save your changes.
6 Click OK.
Disabling the Windows Time services
1 Click Start > Control Panel > Date and Time.
Result: The Date and Time Properties dialog box appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 245
January 2008 Install the Active Server software
2 Click the Time Zone tab.
3 Clear the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes check box.
4 Click the Internet Time tab.
Note: If you click OK without making any changes, the Startup type for the Windows Time service is set to Automatic.
5 Clear the Automatically synchronize with an Internet time server check box.
6 Click Apply to save your changes.
7 Click OK.
246 Contact Center Standby Server
Install the Active Server software Standard 10.12
Step 22. Complete other postinstallation tasks
Complete these additional postinstallation tasks.
Check and install the latest Service Update Supplements
Check for the latest Service Update Supplements on the Enterprise Solutions PEP Library Web site at http://www.nortel.com/espl. For instructions to install a Service Update Supplement, see “Install patches on the server” on page 870.
Configure SNMP (optional)
If you are using the Windows SNMP service to forward traps to an NMS, you must perform these tasks (if you have not already done so):
Configure the Windows SNMP service on the server.
Select the types of events you want to forward to the NMS.
Configure the NMS.
Change your Event Viewer settings
Based on the size of your contact center, change the size of the Windows Application Log that hold events produced by the Contact Center Manager Server application.
Back up the server
Create full, database, and (if applicable) RAID backups of the server. For instructions, see Appendix C, “Back up data.”
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 247
C h a p t e r 5
Install and configure the Standby Server
In this chapterOverview 248
Section A: Preinstallation 251
Section B: Migrate the Active Server to the Standby Server 333
Section C: Postinstallation 391
Section D: Prepare the Replication Server 449
248 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Overview
This chapter describes how to install the Contact Center Manager Server software, License Manager software, and the Server Utility software.
Assumptions
The information in this chapter is based on the following assumptions:
The hardware platform, Windows Server 2003, is configured for use with the Contact Center Manager Server software. For more information, see the Nortel Contact Center Manager Server Technical Requirements and Operating System Configuration Guide.
The switch is installed, operational, and configured for use with the Contact Center Manager Server software.
The Nortel server subnet and the ELAN subnet (optional) are installed and operational.
The server is setup as a standalone server. Co-residency is not supported in Contact Center Standby Server. You cannot install a Standby Server for an Active Server containing Contact Center Manager Server and Contact Center Manager Administration or Communication Control Toolkit.
ATTENTION Do not perform unsupervised maintenance on the Contact Center Manager Server (Active or Standby). Nortel recommends that the Contact Center Manager Server administrator supervise all maintenance activities on the server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 249
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Methods of server installation
How you install the server software depends upon the environment in which you are working, as described in the following table.
Timing
The following installation times provide guidance on the time required for software installation:
preinstallation (including operating system installation and configuration): 3.5 hours
installing the server software: 30 minutes
postinstallation tasks: 1 hour
Method Requirements
Run the installation program from the Contact Center DVD-ROM. Use the DVD-ROM drive that is part of the hardware platform.
DVD drive
Run the installation program from a remote DVD-ROM drive that is accessible over the LAN.
Nortel does not recommend this method, as network traffic can interfere with proper installation.
The remote PC is running Windows 2000 Server or Professional, Windows Server 2003 Enterprise or Standard, or Windows XP Professional.
The path name of the drive that contains the DVD cannot contain spaces or underscores and must be a mapped drive using a drive letter, for example, Z:\.
Run the installation program from a remote hard disk copy of the installation DVD.
Nortel does not recommend this method, as network traffic can interfere with proper installation.
A copy of the DVD on a remote hard disk (accessible over the LAN from the Contact Center Manager Server).
The path name of the directory that contains the copy of the DVD cannot contain spaces or underscores and must be a mapped drive using a drive letter, for example, Z:\CCM\R6.
250 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
These times can vary depending on the server, network infrastructure, and your confidence level with the software. The proceeding installation times were obtained on servers with the following specifications:
CPU: Intel Xeon 3GHz
RAM: 1.0 GB
Hard drive: 80GB 7200 RPM SATA with no RAID configuration
DVD drive: Internal IDE 8X DVD-ROM
Event logging
The SysOps Event log (D:\sysops.log) tracks events associated with any installation, reinstallation, upgrade, or uninstallation operation. It also tracks any fatal errors that interrupt these operations. Use any text editor (for example, Notepad) to view the SysOps log.
What you need
The following checklist describes the software and equipment you need to install Contact Center Manager Server.
Qty Description ✔
1 Contact Center DVD-ROM
1 License file. This file governs the software features you install. Ensure that you have a copy of the license file on your server.
1 Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 251
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Section A: Preinstallation
In this sectionStep 1. Read the relevant documentation for an upgrade 252
Step 2. Gather the materials required for an installation 253
Step 3. Copy the latest Service Update to the server 254
Step 4. Perform a database integrity check on the Active Server 255
Step 5. Check the disk partition configuration on the Active Server 258
Step 6. Create a backup of the original 6.0 database 261
Step 7. Create a Platform Recovery Disk on the Active Server 277
Step 8. Prepare the Standby Server for Release 6.0 (optional) 281
Step 9. Record and check for required installation information 282
Step 10. Install Windows Server 2003 288
Step 11. Ensure the computer name and DNS host name match 301
Step 12. Configure the operating system for remote access 305
Step 13. Install pcAnywhere version 11.5 on the Standby Server 312
Step 14. Copy the latest Service Update and Platform Recovery Disk 325
Step 15. Configuring the server 330
252 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Step 1. Read the relevant documentation for an upgrade
Perform the following tasks:
Read this chapter to understand the steps involved in a new installation.
Check for any updated customer documentation on the Nortel Web site (www.nortel.com).
Read the Contact Center Manager Planning and Engineering Guide. This guide provides information about the server specifications for a Contact Center Manager Server and Replication Server.
Review the Nortel Contact Center Installer’s Roadmap on the Partner Information Center Web site (www.nortel.com/pic).
Read the readme files for each application and patch you plan to install. You can find the readme files for the applications on the DVD in the various application folders. For example, E:\CCMS contains the readme file for Contact Center Manager Server and E:\CCMSU contains the readme file for the Server Utility.
ATTENTION Before you install the Standby Server software, you must read the Nortel Contact Center Manager Server Technical Requirements and Operating System Configuration Guide.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 253
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Step 2. Gather the materials required for an installation
You need the following materials before starting your installation.
Item Purpose and details
tape drive and tape driver software
(required only if you are backing up your database to a tape drive, rather than a remote directory on a network computer)
Use tape drive to back up the database on the original server (Active Server) and restore it on the reconfigured server.
blank tapes or data cartridges
(required only if you are backing up your database to a tape drive, rather than a remote directory on a network computer)
Use a blank tape to store the Active Server’s database using the database backup procedure. The blank tape must be the correct type for the tape drive that you are using. The tape capacity must be large enough to contain the database backup.
blank preformatted disk Use a disk to create a Platform Recovery Disk that contains the Active Server setup record and database configuration.
Contact Center DVD-ROM Use to install Release 6.0 of Standby Server software on the server.
license file This file controls the installed software features.
Windows Server 2003 installation CD
The server already has Windows Server 2003 installed. Ensure you have the documentation provided by Microsoft available on-site when you configure the operating system.
254 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Step 3. Copy the latest Service Update to the server
Before you install the Contact Center Standby Server software, copy the latest Service Update (SU) and Service Update Supplement (SUS) to the root of drive D on the Standby Server.
The Contact Center DVD contains an SU shipped with your software. You must check for a more recent SU on the Enterprise Solutions PEP Library Web site at www.nortel.com/espl. If the Web site contains a more recent SU, copy it to the drive D on the server.
Copying the Service Update to the server
1 Insert the Contact Center DVD into the DVD-ROM drive.
Note: If you are installing from a remote DVD or a network shared drive, map the DVD to a drive letter on the server. The path name of the drive or directory that contains the copy of the DVD cannot contain spaces or underscores.
2 Navigate to the Supplementary SU folder on the DVD (for example, CCMS_6.0_SU_92.msi), and copy the SU and the corresponding readme file to the root of the server drive D.
ATTENTION The installation program automatically installs the SU and SUS for Contact Center Manager Server located at the root of drive D during installation of the Contact Center Manager Server software.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 255
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Step 4. Perform a database integrity check on the Active Server
To ensure the integrity of the databases on the server, Nortel recommends that you perform a database integrity check before you create a backup of your database. This step is highly recommended to capture any database consistency problems.
Remember that a database integrity check can take from 1 to 3 hours, and that the server must be offline during the check. You can perform the check ahead of time, but make it as close as possible to the time of the database backup.
Follow the next procedure to perform a database integrity check on the server.
Performing a database integrity check on the Active Server
1 Log on to the server as NGenSys.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Migration.
Result: The Platform Migration Utility window appears.
256 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
3 Click Database Integrity Check.
Result: The following window appears.
4 Click OK.
Result: The system displays messages as it checks the status of each service running on the server. All Standby Server services are shut down.
5 Wait until the following window appears.
6 Click Accept to start the database integrity check.
Result: The following window appears.
7 Click OK.
Result: A DOS window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 257
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
8 Do not close this window. The database integrity check takes from 1 to 3 hours to complete. You may not see any activity on the screen, but you should notice continuous disk activity.
9 Wait until the following window appears.
10 Click OK.
11 Click Close to close the Platform Migration Utility window.
12 Check the database check log (C:\DbChk.log) for database errors. To do this, use a text editor (such as Notepad).
When you check the log file, search for key words such as ERROR or MSG. Contact your Nortel customer support representative for any detected database error. Do not put the server into service if any detected database errors exist, even though the server seems to operate normally.
13 Restart the server to start the Standby Server services required to perform the backup.
258 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Step 5. Check the disk partition configuration on the Active Server
Record the disk partition configuration of the Active Server so you can use it to determine how to partition your new server (Standby Server).
Checking the disk partition configuration on the Active Server
1 From the Start menu, choose Administrative Tools > Computer Management > Disk Management.
Note: Go to Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Computer Management > Disk Management, if you use the Classic Start menu.
2 Record the following information on the “Disk partition configuration worksheet” on page 259:
the displayed disk number
the logical disk drive letter assignments
the size of each partitioned disk
3 Ensure that the Standby Server has enough disk space to create the required partitions.
The following table presents an example of disk partition configuration.
Disk number
Disk drive letter assignment
Disk partition size(stand-alone)
Disk partition size(co-resident)
Disk 0 C 16 GB 32 GB
Disk 0 D 4096 MB NTFS 4096 MB NTFS
DVD-ROM 0 E n/a n/a
Disk 1 F 32 GB 32 GB
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 259
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Disk partition configuration worksheet
Check the RAM size on the Active Server
The total physical RAM of the reconfigured server must meet the requirements for a Contact Center Manager Server Release 6.0 server. For RAM requirements, see the Contact Center Manager Planning and Engineering Guide.
Checking the RAM size on the Active Server
1 From the Start menu, choose Control Panel > System > General tab.
Result: The System Properties window appears, with the General tab displayed.
2 Record the RAM size on the RAM size worksheet.
Disk numberDisk drive letter assignment Disk partition size
260 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
RAM size worksheet
Item Fill in the required information
RAM size
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 261
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Step 6. Create a backup of the original 6.0 database
Create a backup of the database of the server. You can use the backup to recreate the Active Server if the upgrade fails. The Active Server can remain online while you back up the database. However, consider the following information before you proceed with the backup:
An online backup adds an additional load on the Active Server and reduces overall contact center performance. Nortel recommends that you perform backups during non-peak traffic hours. Do not change any contact center configuration or user setup information during the database backup operation.
If your server continues to receive calls after the backup, some call statistics and data pegging will be missing from the backup. If it is important that all call statistics and data pegging be migrated to your Standby Server, take the Active Server offline immediately following the database backup. Ensure that the server remains offline until you install Contact Center Manager Server on the Standby Server.
Options for database backup
You can back up and restore the database using either a tape or a remote directory on a network computer.
If you want to use a tape drive for the database backup, proceed to “Back up the database to a tape” on page 262.
If you want to use a network drive for the database backup, proceed to “Back up the database to a remote directory” on page 264.
262 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Back up the database to a tape
Follow this procedure to back up the database to a tape. To help calculate the speed of database backups to tape, perform a trial run of the backup at least several days before the upgrade. Keep in mind that the time required to do a database backup can vary between the trial run and the actual backup day.
To see sample time measurements for tape backup and restore, see “Requirements for backups” on page 917.
To calculate the capacity requirements for tape or remote directory backups, see “Calculate the capacity requirements for database backups” on page 924.
Backing up the database to tape
1 On the Active Server, insert a blank tape into the tape drive.
2 Ensure the services on the server are up.
Note: A database backup uses the CCMS HDM service. If this service is down, the database backup cannot start.
3 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Database Backup.
Result: The Database Backup Utility window appears.
4 Select Local Tape Drive, and click Next.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 263
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
5 Verify that the database tape is in the tape drive, and click Start Backup.
Result: A DOS window appears showing the progress of the database backup.
The remote backup process begins. This can take from 30 minutes to 3 hours to complete, depending on the size of your database, the speed of your computer, and network traffic. Leave the DOS window open so you can see the backup completion message.
6 Wait until the completed OK message appears in the DOS window.
264 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
7 Press Enter, type quit, and press Enter again.
Result: The Remember to schedule regular database backups window appears.
8 Click OK.
9 After the database backup is complete, remove the backup tape and save it.
10 Check whether any events are recorded in the event log on the client PC from which you scheduled the backup. If there are any errors, check the database backup log files on the server. These files are located at the following paths: C:\Windows\System32\Backup.log and D:\Sybase\ASE-12_5\Install\backup.log.
Back up the database to a remote directory
Follow this procedure to back up the database to a remote directory. To help calculate the speed of database backups to a remote directory, perform a trial run of the backup at least several days before the upgrade. Keep in mind that the time required to do a database backup can vary between the trial run and the actual backup day due to several factors.
For a list of the variables that can affect the speed of your backup and restore, see “Backup speeds” on page 912.
To help you calculate space requirements before you back up the database, see details about the DBSpace utility in the section “Calculate the capacity requirements for database backups” on page 924.
ATTENTION Before you back up your database to a remote directory, check your remote folder configuration by following the guidelines listed in the section “Test the remote directory backup and restore configuration” on page 944.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 265
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Set up the database backup to a remote directoryFirst, identify the computer onto which you are going to back up the database. You must then set up the connection between the server and the remote directory.
The following section explains the requirements for the remote computer and network.
Remote computer requirementsThe remote computer for your database backup can be either a server or a workstation that meets the following requirements:
The operating system must be Windows Server 2003, Windows 2000 Server, Windows 2000 Professional, or Windows XP Professional.
The drive partition for the remote directory must be NTFS.
The directory for the backup must have enough space available to hold the backup files.
Network requirementsThe network must meet the following requirements:
The remote computer must be on the same network as the server.
The network connection must be through the Nortel server subnet. Ensure that the Nortel server subnet has low traffic during the scheduled time for the database backup. If you run the backup when Nortel server subnet traffic is high, the database backup can take longer than planned.
Files created during remote directory backupThe remote backup process creates the following files.
File Description
blue.dmp Contains the contents of the Blue database.
cbc.dmp Contains the contents of the CBC database.
master.dmp Contains the contents of the Master database.
miginfo.txt Contains configuration details.
266 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Worksheet for setting up a remote directory backupSet up an account, password, and a shared directory on the network computer in preparation for a remote directory backup. Create names for these items ahead of time and record them in the following table.
rbackup.txt Includes details about the user name, password, and path used when you perform a database backup to a remote directory.
dbseg.txt Contains information about the data and log segments in your database.
dbdvc.txt Contains information about the size and location of your database files.
ItemFill in the required information
User name
Create a name and assign it to two user accounts—one on the network computer and the other on the server. The names must be identical on both computers.
User account password
Create a password and assign it to the two accounts described in the previous step. The passwords must be identical on both computers.
Computer name of the network computer
Obtain and record this name. This is required to back up the database.
Share name for the remote directory
Create and assign a share name to the directory on the remote computer. The share name can be the directory name (this is the default in Windows) or a different name.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 267
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Prepare the network computer for remote directory backup
After you determine which network computer to use for the remote directory backup, you must create a local Windows user account on it and then create a shared directory to contain the remote backup. Use the steps outlined in the following procedure, along with the documentation that came with the operating system, to correctly set up the user account and shared directory.
The following procedures do not provide detailed steps because they differ depending on the operating system on your network computer.
Creating the local Windows user account on the network computer
1 Create a new user account in Windows using the user name and password that you recorded in the worksheet.
a. From the Start menu, choose Programs > Administrative Tools > Computer Management.
b. In the left panel, navigate to Local Users and Groups > Users.
c. Right-click Users and select New User from the shortcut menu.
d. Enter the user account details in the New User window.
268 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
2 Make the user account a member of the Administrators group.
Creating and sharing the remote directory on the network computer
1 On the network computer, create a directory (folder) to contain the database backup. Use the share name you recorded in the worksheet.
Note: The name of the remote directory must not contain any spaces. Spaces in the remote directory name cause errors.
2 Ensure file sharing is enabled on the network computer.
3 Make the directory shared, and assign the share name that you recorded in the worksheet.
4 For the shared directory permissions, grant Full Control access rights to the user account that you created in the previous procedure.
Result: The network computer is now set up for remote directory backups. You must now prepare the server using the following procedures.
5 Record the computer name of the network computer in the worksheet.
Prepare the server for remote directory backup
On the Active Server, create a local Windows user account that is identical to the account you created on the network computer. Then add the account to the policy Log on as a service. The following procedure provides the detailed steps.
.
CAUTION
Risk of database backup failure
When you create the new user account in Windows, you must clear the check box for User must change password at next logon. If this check box is selected, Contact Center Manager Server cannot connect to the remote computer.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 269
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Setting up the local Windows user account on the Active Server
1 Log on to the Active Server as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Administrative Tools > Computer Management.
Result: The Computer Management window appears.
a. In the left panel, navigate to Local Users and Groups > Users.
b. Right-click Users and select New User from the shortcut menu.
Result: The New User window appears.
3 In the User Name box, type the same user name you assigned to the account on the network computer.
4 In the Password box, type the same password you assigned to the account on the network computer.
5 In the Confirm Password box, type the password again.
6 Clear the check box for User must change password at next logon.
Note: If you do not remove this check mark, the restore can fail because the Contact Center Manager Server cannot access the network computer.
7 Click Create.
8 Click Close.
270 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
9 In the left panel of the Computer Management window, click the Users folder to display its contents in the right panel.
10 In the right panel, right-click the new user you just created, and select Properties.
Result: The Properties window for the user appears.
11 Click the Member Of tab.
12 Click Add.
Result: The Select Groups window appears.
13 Click Advanced.
Result: The Select Groups search window appears.
14 Click Find Now.
15 Select Administrators.
16 Click OK.
Result: The Select Group search window closes.
17 Click OK.
18 When the Member Of tab reappears, click Apply and then click Close.
19 Close all windows that remain open.
Logging on as a service
1 On the Active Server, select Start > Administrative Tools > Local Security Policy.
Note: Go Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Local Security Policy, if you use the Classic Start menu.
Result: The Local Security Settings window appears.
2 In the left panel, navigate to Local Policies > User Rights Assignment. Click User Rights Assignment to view its contents in the right panel.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 271
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
3 From the right panel, double-click Log on as a service.
Result: The Log on as a Service window appears.
4 Click Add User or Group.
Result: The Select Users or Groups window appears.
5 Click Advanced.
6 Click Find Now.
272 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
7 In the Name column, select the user account that you just created, and then click OK.
Result: The account appears in the text box.
8 Close the Local Security Settings window.
Backing up the database to a remote server
1 Ensure the services on the Active Server are running.
Note: A database backup uses the HDM service. If this service is down, the database backup cannot start.
2 On the Active Server, select Start > Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Database Backup.
Result: The Database Backup Utility window appears.
ATTENTION Before you back up your database to a remote directory, check your remote folder configuration by following the guidelines listed in the section “Test the remote directory backup and restore configuration” on page 944.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 273
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
3 Ensure Network Disk is selected, and click Next.
Result: The configuration window appears.
4 In the Account box, type the user name you recorded in the worksheet on page 266. This must be the same user name you assigned to the account on both the network computer and the server.
5 In the Password box, type the password you recorded in the worksheet on page 266. This must be the same password you assigned to the account on both the network computer and the server.
6 In the Network Path box, type the network path for the shared directory you created on the network computer. Use the following format:
computername\sharename
Refer to the computer name and share name that you recorded in the worksheet on page 266.
7 Click Next.
Result: Contact Center Manager Server is now set to back up the database from the remote directory on the network computer.
274 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
8 If your backup is already scheduled, the system automatically sends the database backup files to the remote directory.
Result: The following window appears.
9 If your backup is not scheduled, click Start Backup; otherwise, click Cancel to save your settings and exit.
Result: The services start, and then the following window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 275
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
A DOS window appears showing the progress of the database backup.
The remote backup process begins. This can take from 30 minutes to 3 hours to complete, depending on the size of your database, the speed of your computer, and network traffic. Leave the DOS window open so you can see the backup completion message.
10 Wait until the completed OK message appears in the DOS window.
276 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
11 Press Enter, type quit, and press Enter again.
Result: The following window appears.
12 Click OK.
Result: The backup is complete.
The backup log for your backup is located atD:\Nortel\data\backup\BackupLogs\dbbackup.log.
13 Navigate to D:\Nortel\data\backup\BackupLogs\ and open the file dbbackup.log (with Notepad). If your database backup succeeded, the log contains the following lines of text:
[SERVER MESSAGE]:Backup Server: 3.42.1.1: DUMP is complete (database cbc).
[SERVER MESSAGE]:Backup Server: 3.42.1.1: DUMP is complete (database blue).
[SERVER MESSAGE]:Backup Server: 3.42.1.1: DUMP is complete (database master).
This database backup log does not have any errors or warnings.
14 Perform one of the following tasks:
If your database backup log contains the text in the previous example, your backup succeeded. Close the log file.
If your database backup log contains any messages or errors, this can indicate a problem with the backup. Navigate to the folder D:\sybase\ASE-12_5\install and open the file backup.log (with Notepad). This file can indicate the source of the problem. Retry the backup and check the backup log again. If the log still contains messages or errors, contact Nortel product support.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 277
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Step 7. Create a Platform Recovery Disk on the Active Server
Create a Platform Recovery Disk to gather required information from the server, such as its setup record and database configuration. The Platform Recovery Disk contains the file MigInfo.txt, which includes important details about how the server is configured.
Even if a Platform Recovery Disk is available, ensure you create a new one to include the latest PEPs and SUs.
Creating a Platform Recovery Disk
1 Log on to the Active Server as NGenSys.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Server Setup Configuration.
Result: The following window appears.
278 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
3 Click the Utilities tab.
Result: The following window appears.
4 In the Create Platform Recovery Disk section, perform one of the following tasks:
To save the Platform Recovery Disk to a floppy disk:
a. Ensure the path shows A:\.
b. Insert a blank floppy disk in drive A.
c. Click Create Disk.
Result: The following message appears.
d. Click OK.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 279
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
To save the Platform Recovery Disk to a remote directory:
a. Map a network drive to the remote directory.
Note: The name of the remote directory into which you save the Platform Recovery Disk must not contain any spaces. Spaces in the remote directory name cause errors.
b. Click Browse, and then navigate to the mapped network drive.
c. Select the drive, and then click OK.
d. Click Create Disk.
Result: The system creates the Platform Recovery Disk. The following window appears.
e. Click OK.
Note: The system also checks for database segmentation problems. If it finds any, a message indicating the type of problem appears.
If the system finds a database data segmentation overlapping problem, it advises you to contact Nortel customer support before you proceed with the migration procedure. After customer support fixes the problem, you must create a new Platform Recovery Disk before you proceed with the migration.
If the system finds a database log segmentation overlapping problem, you can still use the Platform Recovery Disk that you just created. The system prompts you to shut down the Contact Center Manager Server services so it can fix the problem. Follow the on-screen prompt to shut down the services.
5 If you used a floppy disk, remove it from the drive, and ensure it is labeled clearly.
6 Close the Contact Center Manager Server Setup Configuration Utility window.
7 Store the Platform Recovery Disk in a safe place.
280 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Contents of the Platform Recovery Disk
The Platform Recovery Disk contains the following support files:
dbdvc.txt
dbseg.txt
MigInfo.txt
rbackup.txt
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 281
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Step 8. Prepare the Standby Server for Release 6.0 (optional)
You must complete the base configuration of your Standby Server before you can install Release 6.0 of the Contact Center Manager Server software and restore your database. Complete this step only if you perform tape backups.
Reviewing the Contact Center Manager Server software requirements and setting up the tape drive on the Standby Server
1 Review the list of requirements for a Release 6.0 server, and ensure that your server meets each requirement. See Chapter 2, “Contact Center Standby Server requirements.”
2 If the new platform is equipped with a tape drive and driver software that is not compatible with that of the Active Server, remove the tape drive and install a compatible drive and its driver software on the new platform. For more information, see the maintenance guide for your hardware platform.
Note: Nortel recommends that you test your network connection before you prepare your Standby Server for full service.
.
CAUTION
Risk of database restoration failure
The database backup that you make on the Active Server must be compatible with the tape drive subsystem on the Standby Server (driver software, tape drive, and tape media). Otherwise, you cannot restore your database. For more information, see Step 3. “Copy the latest Service Update to the server” on page 254.”
282 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Step 9. Record and check for required installation information
Use the following checklist to record information required for your Windows Server 2003 and Contact Center Manager Server installation. You can refer to this checklist for specific information during the installation. Some information is in the Platform Recovery Disk you created. However, it is still a good idea to record the information for reference.
Step Details ✔
1 Record the server computer and operating system.
You can refer to the following information when you install Windows Server 2003:
Windows Server 2003 licence key __________________
Computer name ___________________________
6–15 characters in length
First character must be alphabetical
Allowed: letters and numbers
Not allowed: spaces, hyphens, and underscores
Not from the Reserved word list in “Reserved words” on page 1068.
Administrator password _____________________
Workgroup or domain name__________________
Type of modem for the server_________________
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 283
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
2 Record switch information.
Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX
Switch name _____________________________Note: The switch name does not need to match the CS 1000/Meridian 1 host name. Record it here for reference only.
Switch customer number ____________________
Switch subnet primary IP address (for example, 192.168.100.50) _________________________
Switch subnet secondary IP address (for example, 192.168.100.60) _________________________
Notes:
Switches with two processors require two IP addresses. Use the switch primary address for the primary CPU (core 0), and use the secondary address for the redundant CPU (core 1). For small switches, such as a Meridian 1 PBX 11C - Cabinet, you need only the primary address.
Step Details ✔
284 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Ensure that the switch host name, IP name, and net mask are the same as those that appear by the STAT ELNK command in LD 137. Ensure that the switch serial number matches the serial number delivered with the license file.
Communication Server 2x00/DMS switch information
Switch name _____________________________
Switch IP address (for example, 47.9.43.244)
_______________________________________
IP addresses for routers on the ICM connection between the switch and ELAN subnet __________________________________________
__________________________________________
Network node ID ____________________________
Service ID __________________________________
Application ID ______________________________
Service version ______________________________
Business group ______________________________
Link set name _______________________________
Password ___________________________________
Remote host IP address (optional) ___________________________________________
Step Details ✔
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 285
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
3 Record the Nortel server subnet and ELAN subnet IP information.
Record the IP addresses for both Nortel server subnet and ELAN subnet connections. The customer’s LAN administrator is the source for IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateways.
Note: Nortel server subnet and ELAN subnet addresses must be unique.
Nortel server subnet server
IP address _______________________________
Subnet mask ______________________________
Gateway, description, or name ________________
________________________________________
Nortel server subnet router/gateway IP address
IP address _______________________________
Subnet mask ______________________________
Gateway, description, or name ________________
________________________________________
ELAN subnet server
IP address _______________________________
Subnet mask ______________________________
Gateway, description, or name ________________
__________________________________________
ELAN subnet router/gateway IP address
IP address _______________________________
Subnet mask ______________________________
Gateway, description, or name ________________
________________________________________
Step Details ✔
286 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
4 Record the RAS information.
RAS
IP address _______________________________
Subnet mask ______________________________
Gateway, description, or name ________________
________________________________________
5 Record the voice services information.
Voice connection type (Meridian Mail or Call Pilot) ___________________
Call Pilot server IP address___________________
Call Pilot server port_______________________
6 Record the Replication Server information.
IP address _______________________________
Replication Server name_____________________
7 Record the site information.
Site name __________________________________
Note: For Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX switches with the Network Skill-Based Routing feature, the Network Control Center site name is automatically propagated to servers.
(Networking option only) IP address of RSM server
__________________________________________
New password for NGenDesign account(a user account for Nortel support). For security reasons, do not record the password here.
New password for NGenDist account(a user account for distributors to provide support). For security reasons, do not record the password here.
Modem phone number for the server (for dial-up connections from the client PC) _________________
__________________________________________
Step Details ✔
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 287
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
8 Check for equipment and data required for the server installation.
List the unique names and IP addresses for all equipment on both the ELAN subnet and Nortel server subnet.
Step Details ✔
288 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Step 10. Install Windows Server 2003
You must perform a fresh installation of Windows Server 2003 on the Standby Server. Use the following checklist to perform a new installation of Windows Server 2003.
When you install Windows Server 2003, remember to do the following:
Delete all existing partitions on the primary drives (do not alter the disabled drives) and format the drives.
Create a new drive C partition on which to install the Windows Server 2003 operating system.
Configure the LAN network cards with the appropriate network IP configuration (for example, subnet mask and default gateway) for the subnet on which the server is located. The Standby Server must be configured with a different computer name and IP address from the Active Server.
Check that the virtual memory allocation (swap file) on the Standby Server is RAM size times 1.5. Set both the initial and maximum size to this value.
Partition the disks to at least the minimum recommended size. For more information, see the Contact Center Manager Planning and Engineering Guide.
If you use a tape drive for database backup and restore, ensure the tape drive is compatible with the current operating system and hardware standards. For more information, see the Nortel Contact Center Manager Planning and Engineering Guide.
Ensure that the new drives are installed with the correct RAID administration utility (if your server is equipped with RAID). The RAID software is platform-specific and is installed differently for each platform.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 289
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Perform a new installation of Windows Server 2003
Use the following checklist to perform a new installation of Windows Server 2003.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
1 Set up your RAID configuration.
If your server uses RAID, ensure the RAID configuration is set up according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
2 Obtain the Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM.
Use either Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition or Enterprise Edition.
Do not use Windows Server 2003 Datacenter or Web editions.
3 Start the Windows Server 2003 installation.
Start installing Windows Server 2003 according to the instructions supplied with the operating system. Follow the on-screen instructions to create a partition for the operating system. This partition must reside on drive C of your server on an NTFS partition.
The Windows Server 2003 installation copies the operating system files to the installation folders on the new partition. When the copy process is complete, the system restarts. The Windows Server 2003 Setup wizard appears.
4 Complete the Windows Server 2003 Setup wizard.
Use the following guidelines in this table to complete the Windows Server 2003 Setup wizard.
Regional Settings window
Complete this window as required for your site.
Personalize Your Software window
Complete this window as required for your site.
290 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Licensing Modes window
Nortel recommends that you use the Per server licensing mode and that you have a minimum of five concurrent connections. This is the default.
Computer Name and Administrator Password window
Enter the computer name and administrator password.
Pay close attention to the naming rules for the computer name as described in the Contact Center Manager Planning and Engineering Guide (no spaces, hyphens, or underscores are allowed).
Date and Time Settings window
Complete this window as required for your site. Make sure the correct time zone is set for the server.
Attention: To configure the daylight savings settings on your server, perform one of the following tasks:
If you are using a CS 1000/Meridian 1 switch, ensure that the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes check box is cleared.
If you are using a CS2x00/DMS switch, ensure that the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes check box is checked for regions using daylight saving time.
If you have purchased the Network Skill-Based Routing feature and are setting the time zone for the Network Control Center server, ensure that the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes check box is checked.
Modem Dialing Information window
Complete this window as required for your site.
This window appears if you have a modem attached to the server. If this window does not appear, proceed to the next window.
Networking Settings window
After the system installs the networking components and the status bar finishes scrolling, select Custom settings.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 291
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Networking Components window
Use this window to select networking components and set up the TCP/IP parameters for the Nortel server subnet and ELAN network interface cards.
Networking components selection
After detecting the first network card, the Windows Server 2003 Setup wizard displays a list of networking components for that card. For each network card, the following three components are selected by default. Do not deactivate any of the following default networking components:
Client for Microsoft Networks
File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks
Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)Configuring TCP/IP parameters for Nortel server subnet and ELAN cards
Complete the following steps for each card that the Setup wizard detects on your server.
1 Click Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and then click Properties.
2 In the General tab, type the IP information required for the card (for example, IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway). Consult with the network administrator for the site.
3 To complete the installation successfully, you must type an IP address for each network interface card. If you do not yet have the correct IP addresses for the cards, then type dummy IP addresses now. Remember to reconfigure the cards with the correct addresses later.
4 From the General tab, click Advanced. Use the DNS and WINS tabs to type information about DNS and WINS servers. Consult with the network administrator for the site.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
292 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Workgroup or Computer domain window
Adding computer to a workgroup
1 Select No, this computer is not on a network, or is on a network without a domain.
2 In the Workgroup or computer domain box, type the workgroup name.
You can add the server to a domain after you install Contact Center Manager Server.
5 Log on to Windows Server 2003.
After the Windows Server 2003 Setup wizard installation of the operating system is complete, you must configure the operating system before you install Contact Center Manager Server software. Remove the CD-ROM.
When you log on to Windows Server 2003 for the first time, the Windows Server 2003 Manage Your Server wizard appears. This wizard is not necessary for Standby Server functionality. Proceed to the next step (Step 6) to configure additional server software.
Tip:
Select the Don’t display this screen on startup option.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 293
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
6 Add or remove programs.
Use Add or Remove Programs to configure your Windows Server 2003 operating system.
Using Add or Remove Programs
1 Go to Start > Control Panel.
Note: Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel, if you use the Classic Start menu.
2 Double-click Add or Remove Programs.
3 Click Add or Remove Windows Components to view a list of the installed components.
4 Click Application Server, and then click Details to deselect IIS on the components list. IIS is an subcomponent of Application Server and is selected by default.
5 Select Management and Monitoring Tools, and then click Details.
6 Select the check box beside SNMP. If it is selected already, SNMP is installed.
7 Click OK to return to the Add or Remove Windows Components property page.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
294 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
7 Check the virtual memory settings.
Verify that the virtual memory on the server is RAM size times 1.5. Set both the initial and maximum size to this value. If the virtual memory is smaller, increase it to RAM size times 1.5. Nortel recommends that the paging file be located on drive C.
Verifying the virtual memory on the server
1 Go to Start > Control Panel.
Note: Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel, if you use the Classic Start menu.
2 Click System.
3 On the General tab, take note of the RAM size.
4 Click the Advanced tab, and then click Performance Settings.
5 Click the Advanced tab again.
6 Click Change to view and make changes to the virtual memory settings.
7 Restart the server if prompted.
For a system with 512 MB of RAM, the default minimum paging file size is 768 MB and the default maximum paging file size is 1 GB. To optimize performance, Microsoft recommends that the minimum paging file size equal the maximum paging file size. Nortel recommends that you set both the minimum and maximum paging file sizes to RAM size times 1.5.
If any of the following conditions apply, the system complete memory dump is not generated when the system stops unexpectedly:
Multiple paging files are distributed over separate disks.
The paging file is not located on drive C.
Physical RAM size is larger than 2 GB.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 295
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Check the virtual memory settings (continued).
Due to the limitations presented by large paging files, Nortel recommends that the following:
Set the minimum and maximum paging file sizes to 1.5 x RAM, up to a maximum paging file size of 4 GB.
Add the paging file to the drive C partition only. Do not create paging files on database partitions or other partitions.
8 Configure the modem connection for remote access.
Configure a direct serial connection for the modem hardware connected to your server. The modem uses COM 1.
Configuring a direct serial connection
1 Go to Start > Control Panel.
Note: Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel, if you use the Classic Start menu.
2 Double-click Phone and Modem Options.
3 Click the Modems tab, and then click Add.
Note: If you have not configured a modem on the server, the Location Information screen appears first. You must completed the Local Information screen before the Modems tab can be accessed.
4 Follow the instructions in the Add or Remove Hardware Wizard to detect the modem and install the driver.
9 Configure the operating system for remote access.
Configure an incoming connection on the server to allow for remote support through the dial-up modem.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
296 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
10 Check the bindings order for the Nortel server subnet and ELAN cards.
Attention: You must complete the procedure in this section if you have more than one network card. If you do not have the correct binding order, you may encounter problems when you want to restore your database.
You only require one network interface card. However, if you have more than one network interface card, you must configure the bindings order of the network interface cards so that the Nortel server subnet card is first, then the ELAN card, then the virtual adapters for remote access.
Configuring the bindings order of the network interface cards
1 Go to Start > Control Panel.
Note: Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel, if you use the Classic Start menu.
2 Double-click Network Connections.
3 Click either the Nortel server subnet or ELAN connection, and then from the Advanced menu, click Advanced Settings.
4 In the Connections box, ensure the Nortel server subnet connection is listed first. If it is not first, adjust the order.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 297
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
11 Check the serial port configuration.
Use the Windows Device Manager to check that the required serial ports exist. You require COM1 to provide remote support, unless you are using the USB port or VPN for remote access. Also, you require COM2 for Symposium Voice Services on Meridian Mail.
Checking the required serial ports
1 Go to Start > Control Panel.
Note: Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel, if you use the Classic Start menu.
2 Click System, and then click the Hardware tab.
3 Click Device Manager, and then double-click Ports (COM & LPT) to view the communications ports.
4 For COM1, set the base I/O Port Address to 3F8 and the IRQ to 4.
If a required port does not exist:
1 Ensure that the port is installed.
2 Go to the BIOS and correct the address of the missing port.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
298 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
12 Format all disk drives.
Ensure that the disk drives on the server are formatted according to the requirements for Contact Center Manager Server Release 6.0.
If the Welcome to the Write Signature and Upgrade Disk wizard appears, click Cancel. This wizard is only for configuring dynamic disk partitioning. Release 6.0 supports Windows basic disk partitioning and dynamic disk volumes. When you partition your drives, do not use the Windows option to upgrade to dynamic disks.
Ensuring the disk drives are formatted correctly
1 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Administrative Tools > Computer Management.
2 Under Storage, click Disk Management to view and change disk partitioning.
3 Configure all partitions (D, F, G, and other additional drives) as logical drives within extended partitions on the basic disks.
Note: The operating system resides on the C partition. This must be the only primary partition.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 299
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
a. Right-click each disk that you want to configure.b. On the shortcut menu, click Create Partition.c. Follow the prompts in the Create Partition Wizard to
create an extended partition for each disk.d. Right-click each disk. e. On the shortcut menu, click Create Logical Drive.f. Follow the prompts in the Create Partition Wizard to
create logical drives for each disk.
Note: When you create the extended partitions, you must create the logical drives by specifying their size and drive letters.
When you right-click a disk, if you see Write Signature in the shortcut menu, you must choose this option to write a disk signature before you proceed with creating partitions and logical drives.
13 Install any additional drivers required for your hardware configuration.
If your server requires any additional drivers for your hardware configuration, install them.
14 Test the network connection.
Use the ping command to test both the Nortel server subnet and ELAN subnet network connections.
15 Install the Windows Server 2003 service pack.
Install the latest Windows Server 2003 service pack that is validated with Contact Center Manager Server. You can obtain this information from the Contact Center Portfolio Service Packs Compatibility and Security Hotfixes Applicability List, available on the Partner Information Center Web site (www.nortel.com/pic).
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
300 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
17 Install the Internet Group Management Protocol patch from Microsoft.
After you install Windows Server 2003, depending on your version of the software, you must download and install the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) patch from Microsoft to receive multicast data properly.
To download and install the patch, and to find out which versions of the Windows Server 2003 software require it, you must contact Microsoft Product Support Services, as described in the knowledge base article listed on the Microsoft Web site (www.microsoft.com).
If your version of Windows Server 2003 requires this patch, but you do not install it, your server cannot reliably receive multicast data from the server in Contact Center Manager Server.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 301
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Step 11. Ensure the computer name and DNS host name match
You must ensure your computer name and DNS host name match exactly, including uppercase and lowercase letters. If these names do not match, you cannot install the Contact Center Manager Server software.
A mismatch in these names can occur, for example, if you perform a new installation of the operating system and type the computer name in uppercase letters. In Windows, your entry is used to set both the computer name and the DNS host name. However, after the operating system is installed, you may find that Windows set the DNS host name in uppercase letters as you entered it, but the computer name is set in all lowercase letters. Use the following procedures to check the names and, if necessary, change them.
Ensuring the computer name and DNS host name match
1 After you install the operating system, log on to the Standby Server as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose Control Panel, and then click the System icon.
Result: The System Properties dialog box appears.
302 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
3 Click the Computer Name tab.
Result: The Computer Name page appears.
4 Write down the full computer name exactly as it appears, including case.
Note: Ignore the period at the end of the full computer name.
5 Click Change.
Result: The Computer Name Changes window appears.
6 Click More.
Result: The DNS Suffix and NetBIOS Computer Name window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 303
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
7 Compare the NetBIOS computer name on this window with the full computer name that you wrote down to determine whether the names match exactly, including case.
8 Perform one of the following tasks:
If the names match, close the windows you opened, and then continue with the configuration of your server.
If the names do not match, complete the following procedure.
Updating the computer name to match the DNS host name
This procedure is a continuation of the previous procedure.
1 Write down the NetBIOS computer name exactly as it appears.
2 On the DNS Suffix and NetBIOS Computer Name window, click Cancel.
Result: The Computer Name Changes window appears.
3 In the Computer name box, type the NetBIOS computer name exactly as you wrote it down in step 1 on page 303, and click OK.
Note: If the only difference between the two names is the case (uppercase or lowercase letters), you cannot click OK to register the change because Windows does not recognize changes to case. In this situation, perform the following workaround:
304 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
a. Type any character at the end of the computer name to enable the OK button.
b. Click OK.
c. When the system prompts you to restart, click OK, but do not restart the server.
Result: The System Properties window appears.
d. Click Change.
e. Go back to step step 3 on page 303.
Result: The system prompts you to restart.
4 Click OK.
5 Click OK to close the System Properties window.
Result: The system prompts you to restart the server.
6 Click Yes.
7 When the system restarts, log on to the server as Administrator.
8 To ensure the names match now, repeat the procedure Step 11. “Ensure the computer name and DNS host name match” on page 301.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 305
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Step 12. Configure the operating system for remote access
For support personnel to connect remotely to the server, you must configure remote access on the server. This section shows you how to configure the operating system for a workgroup only.
Configuring the operating system for remote access (workgroup)
1 From the Start menu, choose Control Panel > Network Connections > New Connection Wizard.
Result: The New Connection Wizard window appears.
306 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
2 Click Next.
Result: The Network Connection Type window appears.
3 Click Set up an advanced connection, and click Next.
Result: The Advanced Connection Options window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 307
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
4 Ensure Accept incoming connections is selected, and click Next.
Result: The Devices for Incoming Connections window appears.
Note: The Devices for Incoming Connections window only displays if there is a modem or other connection device installed. If there is no modem or connection device, the Incoming Virtual Private connection window appears.
308 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
5 Ensure that the server modem appears in the Connection devices box with a check mark beside it, and click Next.
Result: The Incoming Virtual Private (VPN) Connection window appears.
6 Click Do not allow virtual private connections, and click Next.
Result: The User Permissions window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 309
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
7 Select the Administrator check box, and click Next.
Note: After you install the Contact Center Manager Server software, three additional users appear in this box: NGenSys, NGenDesign, and NGenDist. Ensure that check marks are beside these names so that these users can connect remotely to the server.
Result: The Networking Software window appears.
8 Ensure that default check marks appear beside the three components, as shown in the preceding illustration.
310 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
9 In the Networking Software box, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and then click Properties.
Result: The Incoming TCP/IP Properties window appears.
10 Ensure that the check box beside Allow callers to access my local area network is not selected.
11 Select the Specify TCP/IP addresses option.
12 In the From and To boxes, specify a range of IP addresses in the same subnet as the Nortel server subnet IP address. This range must include at least two available IP addresses.
Note: Obtain the range of addresses from your network administrator. Remote access uses the first IP address. The remaining IP addresses are loaned to each dial-in client. Your administrator must select the range carefully.
13 Ensure that the check box beside Allow calling computer to specify its own IP address is not selected.
14 Click OK.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 311
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
15 In the Networking Software window, click Next.
Result: The Completing the New Connection Wizard window appears.
16 Click Finish.
Result: The new connection appears in the Network Connections folder.
17 Right-button click the new connection icon.
18 Choose Rename from the shortcut menu.
19 In the highlighted field type the name of the incoming connection as you want it to appear in the Network Connections folder.
312 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Step 13. Install pcAnywhere version 11.5 on the Standby Server
One licensed copy of pcAnywhere 11.5 for host computers only is provided for the server on the Contact Center DVD. This software license enables you to configure the server as the host computer in remote control sessions (that is, the computer to which remote computers connect).
pcAnywhere is required on the Contact Center Manager Server for all four remote technical support options:
modem connected directly to the Contact Center Manager Server on the serial port COM1
modem connected directly to the Contact Center Manager Server on a USB port
modem connected to a VPN
Internet connected to a VPN
For more information about setting up remote support with a VPN, see the Contact Center Manager Planning and Engineering Guide.
pcAnywhere on the client PCTo install pcAnywhere 11.5 on the client PC, you must purchase a separate license for the client PC.
Information required during installationDuring installation the following installer information is required.
User name
Organization
Destination directory Nortel recommends that you install to the default directory(C:\Program Files\Symantec\pcAnywhere)
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 313
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
pcAnywhere LiveUpdateNortel recommends that you use another computer to periodically check the Symantec Web site for changes and updates. If there are changes, download the changes and transfer them to the Standby Server.
Installing pcAnywhere Host Only
1 Log on to the Standby Server as Administrator.
2 Navigate to the pcAnywhere folder on the Contact Center Release 6.0 DVD.
3 Double-click NTJK08BA-02 -Host Only.exe.
Note: If the Terminal Server Install Failure dialog box appears, you must launch the pcAnywhere installer from Add or Remove Programs. This occurs because Terminal Services must be in Install Mode before you can install an application.
Terminal Services is not required on the server.
a. Click Add or Remove Programs to open the Add or Remove Programs window.
b. Click Add New Programs.
c. Click CD or Floppy.
d. Click Next.
Result: The program finds the setup.exe file on the DVD and the installation begins.
4 Wait for the Welcome window to appear.
Result: The Windows Installer window appears, and then the installation Welcome window appears. This can take a few moments.
5 Click Next.
Result: The License Agreement window appears.
6 Accept the terms of the license agreement, and then click Next.
Result: The Customer Information window appears.
7 Enter your user name and company details, and then click Next.
Result: The Destination Folder window appears.
314 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
8 Accept the default location to install the software, or click Change to choose a custom location. If you click Change, type the location in which you want to install pcAnywhere, and then click OK.
9 Click Next.
Result: The Ready to Install the Program window appears.
10 Click Install.
Result: The program installs any updates.
11 Click Finish when the installation is complete.
Starting pcAnywhere 11.5 or later for the first time
1 On the Standby Server, log on to Windows as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Symantec pcAnywhere.
Note: If the system asks you to register pcAnywhere, select Skip, and then choose Yes when you are asked to confirm.
Result: The Symantec pcAnywhere window appears.
3 Continue with the following procedure to configure pcAnywhere 11.5 user access rights.
ATTENTION If the following message appears, it indicates that your video driver is incompatible with pcAnywhere: pcAnywhere detected and fixed a display driver problem. Please restart your computer to allow the change to take effect. In this case, you must uninstall pcAnywhere, update your video driver, and then reinstall pcAnywhere.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 315
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Configuring pcAnywhere user access rights
This section describes how to configure pcAnywhere to accept remote connections. When you first receive your server, pcAnywhere can already be configured. If so, go through the following procedures to ensure that the network properties and remote caller settings are correct.
Configuration of pcAnywhere sets up a secure caller account to access the server. You can add a caller account for each remote PC. These caller accounts restrict the use pcAnywhere to appropriate users (for example, Nortel support personnel and distributors).
If, during the pcAnywhere configuration, a message indicates that you do not have the rights to modify a setting or to create a new caller, follow this procedure to change the Windows User access rights for pcAnywhere files.
1 Exit pcAnywhere.
Tip: This procedure requires you to browse to a hidden directory. To view hidden directories, follow these steps:
a. Open My Computer.
b. Choose Tools > Folder Options.
c. Click the View tab.
d. Scroll down until you see Show Hidden Files and Folders, and then select this option.
e. Click OK.
2 In Windows Explorer, navigate to the following folder:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Symantec\pcAnywhere
3 Right-click the pcAnywhere folder icon, and then click Properties.
Result: The pcAnywhere Properties window appears.
316 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
4 Click the Security tab.
5 In the Name box, select Administrators.
6 To grant administrators full access to the pcAnywhere folder, in the Permissions box, ensure that Allow, beside Full Control, is selected.
7 Click OK to save your changes and close the Properties window.
Configuring pcAnywhere as a host
1 On the Standby Server, log on to Windows as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Symantec pcAnywhere.
Note: If the system asks you to register pcAnywhere, click Skip, and then choose Yes when you are asked to confirm.
3 On the pcAnywhere Manager (left side), select the Hosts option.
Result: The Hosts option on the pcAnywhere Manager pane is selected.
4 Click the File menu, and then choose New > Item > Advanced.
Note: Do not use the Wizard option.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 317
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
5 On the Connection Info tab, ensure that only the TCP/IP check box is selected.
318 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
6 Click the Settings tab.
7 In the Host startup area, ensure that the Launch with Windows and Run minimized check boxes are selected.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 319
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
8 Click the Callers tab.
9 Click the New Item icon ( ).
Result: The Call Properties: New Caller window appears.
320 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
10 In the Login name box, type a name for the caller account. You can choose any name, or use a name that is familiar to you, such as NGenDist.
11 In the Password box, type the password for the caller account.
12 In the Confirm Password box, type the same password again.
13 Click the Privileges tab.
Result: The following window appears.
14 Select the Superuser option.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 321
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
15 Click OK to save your changes and close the Caller Properties window.
Result: The Host Properties window reappears with the account now listed according to its Login ID.
16 Click the Security Options tab.
322 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
17 Ensure that the settings are as shown in the following example.
18 Click the Conference tab.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 323
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
19 Ensure that Enable conferencing and Obtain IP address automatically are selected, as shown in the following example.
Note: If you find that your connection to a conferencing session times out, when you try to log on, you must change Allow conference over value to a number greater than 0.
20 Click the Protect Item tab if you want to protect the settings for this caller account by assigning a password to control access to the settings. If you do not want to assign a password, skip to step 23 on page 323.
21 In the Password box, type the password you want to use to protect the Network icon settings.
22 In the Confirm password box, type the password again.
23 Click OK to apply all pcAnywhere Host PC settings.
Result: The Host List window appears.
ATTENTION If you select the Required option to modify properties, you must type the password each time you change a setting. Record the password and keep a copy of it in a safe place. If you forget the password, you cannot change settings.
324 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
24 Enter an appropriate name for the host that you just set up.
25 Click File > Exit to close the pcAnywhere Manager window.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 325
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Step 14. Copy the latest Service Update and Platform Recovery Disk
Before you install the Release 6.0 Contact Center Manager Server software on the Standby Server, you must do the following:
Copy the latest Service Update pack to drive D on the Standby Server.
Copy the Platform Recovery Disk previously backed up from the Active Server to drive D:\OldPrd on the Standby Server.
A Service Update is included in the Supplementary SU folder on the DVD shipped with your software. However, check for a more recent Service Update pack on the Enterprise Solutions PEP Library Web site at http://www.nortel.com/espl.
Copying the latest Service Update pack and Platform Recovery Disk to the server
1 Insert the Contact Center Release 6.0 DVD into the DVD-ROM drive.
Note: If you are installing from a network shared drive, map the DVD to a drive letter on the server.
2 Navigate to the Supplementary SU folder on the DVD or the shared drive and copy the Service Update (for example, CCMS_6.0_SU_92.msi) to the root of drive D.
3 Create a directory called OldPrd in drive D.
4 Insert the Platform Recovery Disk you created previously into drive A.
5 Copy the contents of the Platform Recovery Disk to drive D:\OldPrd.
ATTENTION Do not install the Service Update pack. The installation program installs it automatically at the appropriate time when you install the server software.
326 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Before you begin
If you are not installing patches from a DVD, download them from the Enterprise Solutions PEP Library Web site (www.nortel.com/espl) or obtain them from your Nortel customer support representative.
You must read the readme file associated with each Service Update you plan to install.
Installing a patch on the server (SU or SUS)
1 Use the PEP Viewer utility to ensure that the patch (SU or SUS) is not installed.
2 Ensure that you close all applications.
3 Perform one of the following tasks:
If you are downloading the patch, navigate to the Enterprise Solutions PEP Library Web site located at http://www.nortel.com/espl and download the patch you require.
If you are installing the patch, locate the patch directory on the DVD, or the directory into which you downloaded the patch from the Web.
4 Read the readme file associated with the patch.
5 Double-click the <SU _ID>.msi or <SUS_ID>.msi file associated with the patch.
6 If you are prompted to view the readme file, click Yes.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 327
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
7 Review the readme file and continue with the installation of the SU.
Result: The following window appears.
8 Click Next.
Result: The following window appears.
328 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
9 Click Install.
Result: The system installs the patch on the server, and then the following window appears.
10 Click Finish.
Result: The following window may appear.
11 Click Yes to restart the server.
Result: The patch is installed.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 329
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Install the Sybase Security Alert (Sybase EBF 12326)
Install this stand-alone patch from Sybase to address security issues. You must install this patch after you install the Contact Center Manager Server software on the Standby Server.
The Sybase patch is available from the Enterprise Solutions PEP Library Web site (www.nortel.com/espl) or from your Nortel customer support representative.
You must read the readme file associated with each Service Update you plan to install. Follow the instructions in the readme file to install this patch.
330 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Step 15. Configuring the server
This section contains additional information on the configuration of the server.
Set user account policies
Before you install the Contact Center Manager Server software, you must ensure that the account policies for the users on your server meet the following guidelines:
The disable password must meet complexity requirements.
The minimum password age is set to 0.
The minimum password length is 0 characters.
Use a password history of 0.
Store the password using reversible encryption 0.
Change the account policy to meet your requirements after you complete the installation.
Accessing user account policies
1 Go to Start > Administrative Tools > Local Security Policies.
Result: Local Security Settings windows open.
2 Expand Security Settings > Account Policies > Password Policy.
Result: Password Policy setting appear.
Switch type
Ensure that you are you using the same type of switch that you used for Active Server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 331
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Verify your Standby Server package
Before you install the Contact Center Manager Server software, ensure you know which package you are going to install so that you can type the correct information during the installation.
332 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 333
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Section B: Migrate the Active Server to the Standby Server
In this sectionStep 16. Migrate the Active CCMS to the Standby Server 334
Step 17. Configure your CCMS settings on the Standby Server (optional) 365
Step 18. Install the License Manager 382
Step 19. Install the Server Utility (optional) 386
334 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Step 16. Migrate the Active CCMS to the Standby Server
You must use the following migration procedure to install the Contact Center Manager Server software to ensure that the Standby Server is installed and configured similarly to the Active Server.
Migrating the Active Contact Center Manager Server to the Standby Server
1 Log on to the Standby Server as Administrator.
2 Insert the Contact Center DVD (autorun initiates), or map to a network DVD and run Setup.exe.
Result: The Welcome to Nortel Contact Center 6.0 main menu appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 335
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
3 Select the following components:
Contact Center Manager Server
License Manager
Server Utility (if it is installed on the Active Server)
Note: If Contact Center Manager Server is co-resident with License Manager, select Contact Center Manager Server and License Manager.
4 Click Install.
Result: The INSTALLATION ORDER window appears.
5 Click Start.
Result: The Contact Center - Manager Server - InstallShield Wizard window appears.
336 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
6 Click Next.
Result: The Custom Installation Information window appears.
7 In the Server Type section, select Standalone (default).
8 In the Install Type section, select Upgrade from 4.2 database Migration of 5.0 or 6.0 database.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 337
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
9 Click Next.
Result: The preinstallation checker starts, and the Pre-Install Check window appears.
10 Review the information in the tabs on this window. Nortel recommends that you fix any errors before you continue the installation. If you make any changes, click Refresh to rerun the preinstallation checker.
338 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
11 Click OK.
Result: The CCMS Configuration window appears.
12 Perform one of the following tasks:
If you want to enter all of the configuration data before you install the software, select Enter configuration data now to complete CCMS configuration automatically. Click Next and proceed to step 13.
If you want to enter all configuration data after the installation, select Enter configuration data when CCMS configuration is run at end of installation. Click Next and skip to step 44 on page 353.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 339
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
13 Click Next.
Result: The Customer Information window appears.
14 Verify the information in the Customer Name box.
15 Verify the information in the Company Name box.
340 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
16 Click Next.
Result: The Switch Type window appears.
17 Ensure that the appropriate switch type is selected, and click Next.
Result: The License Manager Package Configuration window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 341
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
18 Verify the settings for the switch.
Note: If you are working in a Campus Redundancy setup, type the same switch information you used on your Active Server. If you are working in a Geographic Redundancy setup, type the information for your new switch.
19 From the CCMS Package list, select the Standby Server package.
Note: You can find the license file in the D:\Nortel\lm\bin folder on the server. The license file is called plservrc.
20 In the Serial Number box, type the serial number for the switch (for Communication Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX only).
If you are using Campus Redundancy, type the same serial number you used on the Active Server.
If you are using Geographic Redundancy, type the serial number for the secondary switch.
21 In the Primary License Manager IP box, type the IP address for the server on which you plan to install the License Manager.
Note: If the License Manager resides on the Standby Server, type the IP address for the Standby Server.
22 In the Port box, confirm the port number. The default port is 3998.
Note: You can change the Primary License Manager IP address when the installation is complete.
23 In the Secondary License Manager IP box, type the Secondary License Manager IP address (corporate only).
Note: You can change the Secondary License Manager IP address when the installation is complete.
24 In the Port box, confirm the port number (corporate only). The default port is 3998.
342 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
25 Click View Features to display package features.
Result: The Package Feature window appears.
26 Check that the features that appear in the CCMS Package Features list match the product that you purchased, and then perform one of the following tasks:
If the information is not correct, verify that you selected the correct package. Click OK, and then select the correct package.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 343
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
If the information is correct, click OK to close the window.
Result: The Local Area Network IP window appears.
27 From the IP Address list, choose the IP address for the Nortel server subnet.
Note: If you are using two network interface cards, select the ELAN subnet check box, and then from the IP Address list, choose the IP address for the ELAN subnet.
28 Click Next.
29 Perform one of the following tasks depending on which switch you chose in step 17 on page 340.
Option One (CS 1000)
Option Two (CS 2x00)
344 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Option One (CS 1000)If you selected CS 1000 (M1), the following window appears.
If you selected CS 2x00 (DMS/SL-100), continue with “Option Two (CS 2x00)” on page 345.
a. In the Switch Name box, type the name of the switch.
Valid characters for switch names are A–Z, a–z, 0–9, underscore (_), and period (.). Switch names must begin with an alphabetical character and cannot contain spaces. The last character must not be an underscore or a period. Switch names must not exceed 80 characters in length.
Note: If you are unsure of the correct information, or if you make a mistake, you can change the switch information after you finish the installation.
b. In the Switch IP Address box, type the IP address for the switch.
c. In the Switch Customer Number box, type the customer number for the switch.
ATTENTION If you have a campus redundancy scenario, use the same switch information on the Standby Server as on the Active Server. If you have a geographic redundancy scenario, enter different switch information for the secondary site.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 345
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
d. Click Next.
Option Two (CS 2x00)If you select CS 2x00 (DMS/SL-100), the following window appears.
If you selected CS 1000 (M1), see “Option One (CS 1000)” on page 344.
a. In the Switch Name box, type the name of the switch.
Valid characters for switch names are A–Z, a–z, 0–9, underscore (_), and period (.). Switch names must begin with an alphabetical character and cannot contain spaces. The last character must not be an underscore or a period. Switch names must not exceed 80 characters in length.
Note: If you are unsure of the correct information, or if you make a mistake, you can change the switch information after you finish the installation.
b. In the Switch IP Address box, type the IP address for the switch.
c. In the Network Node box, type the network node information.
d. In the Service ID box, type the service ID information.
e. In the Application ID box, type the identifier for the application.
f. In the Service Version box, type the SCAI protocol that you plan to use as defined by the application.
346 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
g. In the Business Group box, type the name of the business group.
h. In the Linkset Name box, type the name for the Contact Center Manager Server as it is known to the switch (uppercase only). The linkset name creates a logical pathway to the server on the Ethernet Interface Unit (EIU).
i. In the Password box, type the password for the switch.
j. Click Next.
Result: One of the following results occurs:
If you are using a Communication Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX switch, the Voice Services window appears.
If you are using a Communication Server 2x00/DMS switch, the Voice Services window does not appear. Proceed to step 31 on page 348.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 347
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
30 Perform one of the following tasks:
If you are not using an integrated voice-processing system (Meridian Mail or CallPilot), for Voice Connection Type, select Serial, and click Next.
Note: If your computer is not configured with COM2, for Voice Connection Type, select TCP, type a dummy IP address and port number, and click Next.
If you are using Meridian Mail as your voice-processing system, for Voice Connection Type, select Serial, and click Next.
If you are using CallPilot, for Voice Connection Type, select TCP, specify the ELAN subnet IP address of the CallPilot server, and set the CallPilot Server Port to 10008. Click Next.
ATTENTION If you have a campus redundancy scenario, use the same ELAN subnet IP address on the Standby Server as on the Active Server. If you have a geographic redundancy scenario, enter different ELAN subnet IP address for the secondary site.
348 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Note: Although you can install Contact Center Manager Server on a server without a COM 2 serial port, the hard-coded dependency in the Media Application Server (MAS) Access Link service can cause the Access Link Handler to restart constantly if you do not configure the COM2 port. For a Contact Center Manager Server that does not require the Access Link connection to Meridian Mail, type a dummy IP address and port number in the Voice Connection Type.
Result: The RSM IP Address window appears.
31 In the RSM IP Address box, type the Real-time Statistics Multicast (RSM) IP address that you want to associate with sending real-time statistical data.
Note: Do not confuse the RSM IP address with the Nortel server subnet or ELAN subnet addresses for the server.
ATTENTION The IP multicast addresses that you select for RSM sending and receiving must be within the 224.0.1.0 and 239.255.255.255 range. The default is 230.0.0.1. Check with your network administrator for acceptable IP multicast addresses for your specific network.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 349
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
32 Click Next.
Result: The Database Replication window appears.
33 For Warm Standby type, select Standby.
34 Verify the information for the Replication Server. Ensure that the Replication Server name is all written in uppercase.
Attention: This information must match the Active Server information.
35 Enter the CCMS Listener Port Number, or accept the default value. If the value is changed from the default, you must type the new value on the Replication Server.
36 Click Next.
Result: The following window appears.
350 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
37 Click OK.
Result: The CCT Server window appears.
38 Click Next.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 351
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
39 Wait for the Site Name window to appear.
Result: The Site Name window appears.
40 In the Site Name box, type the site name for the server.
The site name must not contain spaces or non-alphabetical characters except for - (hyphen) and _ (underscore). The first character must be a letter. The site name must be unique and can consist of any combination of a minimum of 6 and up to 15 characters.
Note: You must use the same site name you used on the Active Server.
41 Click Finish.
Result: The Information window appears.
352 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
42 Click Continue.
Result: The Contact Center Manager Server Setup Configuration Utility Information window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 353
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
43 Review the tabs and make any necessary changes, and click OK.
Result: The Ready to Install the Program window appears.
44 Click Begin.
Result: The Installing Contact Center Manager Server window appears.
After a few seconds, the Sybase installation window appears. The system copies the Sybase software files to the server. After 3 to 5 minutes, the system restarts and the Sybase installation window appears.
Stage 1
354 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
The installation of the Sybase software and the Contact Center Manager Server software continues. The system windows appear showing the different stages (Stage 1 to 5) of the installation. During Sybase installation, the server restarts.
Note: If you are prompted to click Continue to complete the installation, do this now. You have to click Continue several times.
45 Log on as Administrator.
Result: The installation of the Sybase software and the Contact Center Manager Server software continues.
Note: You do not require Terminal Services on the server; however, if you installed Terminal Services on the server, you must click Continue to continue with installing the database.
Stage 2
Stage 3
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 355
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Stage 4
The system copies files to drive D and installs the Service Updates.
Stage 5 (This stage has six parts during which the database is created.)
356 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
46 Wait for the Database Restore Utility window to appear.
Result: The following window appears.
47 Select Local Tape Drive or Network Disk.
48 Perform one of the following tasks based on which method you are using to restore your backed up files.
If you selected Network Disk, proceed to “Option 1” on page 357.
If you selected Local Tape Drive, proceed to “Option 2” on page 359.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 357
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Option 1If you choose Network Disk, the following window appears.
49 Verify the details of the network disk, and click Next.
Result: The following window appears.
Note: If you performed a database integrity check on the Active Server and you know that your database is working properly, you can choose to skip the database verification during the restore. The database verification takes about 30 minutes. If you want to skip the database verification, select the Do not verify the restored database check box.
358 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
50 Click Start Restore.
Result: The following window appears.
Stage 1
Stage 2
51 When the restore is complete, click Finish. Proceed to step 54.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 359
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Option 2If you choose Local Tape Drive, the following window appears.
52 Ensure that the database backup tape is in the tape drive.
Note: If you performed a database integrity check on the Active Server and you know that your database is working properly, you can choose to skip the database verification during the restore. The database verification takes about 30 minutes. If you want to skip the database verification, select the Do not verify the restored database check box.
53 Click Start Restore.
Result: The following window appears and the services start.
360 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Stage 1
Stage 2
54 Perform one of the following tasks:
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 361
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
55 Wait for the Server Configuration Utility window to appear.
Result: The Server Configuration Utility window appears. The configuration continues from Stage 1 to Stage 14.
362 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
This utility completes the Contact Center Manager Server installation.
Example: The Nortel Contact Center - Manager Server installation success window appears.
56 Click OK.
Result: The Nortel Contact Center - Manager Server Platform Recovery Disk window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 363
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
57 Click Cancel. You can create the Platform Recovery Disk after you install the remaining components on the server (when you complete the postinstallation tasks).
Result: The InstallShield Wizard Completed for Contact Center Manager Server (CCMS) window appears.
58 Click Finish when the button becomes active.
Result: The following window appears.
364 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
59 Click No. You can restart the server after you install the remaining components.
Result: The INSTALLATION ORDER window appears. The Contact Center Manager Server software is installed.
60 Perform one of the following tasks:
a. If you did not configure the Standby Server during installation, proceed to Step 17. “Configure your CCMS settings on the Standby Server (optional)” on page 365.
b. If you configured your server settings during installation, click Continue. Proceed to Step 18. “Install the License Manager” on page 382.18
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 365
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Step 17. Configure your CCMS settings on the Standby Server (optional)
If you did not configure your server settings during the installation, do so now. If you already configured your server settings, skip to Step 18. “Install the License Manager” on page 382.
Configuring your Contact Center Manager Server settings on the Standby Server (optional)
1 Wait for the Customer Information window to appear.
2 Verify the information in the Customer Name box.
3 Verify the information in the Company Name box.
366 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
4 Click Next.
Result: The Switch Type window appears.
5 Ensure that the appropriate switch type is selected, and click Next.
Result: The License Manager Package Configuration window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 367
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
6 Verify the settings for the switch.
Note: If you are working in a Campus Redundancy setup, type the same switch information you used on your Active Server. If you are working in a Geographic Redundancy setup, type the information for your new switch.
7 From the CCMS Package list, select the Standby Server package.
Note: You can find the license file in the D:\Nortel\lm\bin folder on the server. The license file is called plservrc.
8 In the Serial Number box, type the serial number for the switch (for Communication Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX only).
If you are using Campus Redundancy, type the same serial number you used on the Active Server.
If you are using Geographic Redundancy, type the serial number for the secondary switch.
9 In the Primary License Manager IP box, type the IP address for the server on which you plan to install the License Manager.
Note: If the License Manager resides on the Standby Server, type the IP address for the Standby Server.
10 In the Port box, confirm the port number. The default port is 3998.
Note: You can change the Primary License Manager IP address when the installation is complete.
11 In the Secondary License Manager IP box, type the Secondary License Manager IP address (corporate only).
Note: You can change the Secondary License Manager IP address when the installation is complete.
12 In the Port box, confirm the port number (corporate only). The default port is 3998.
368 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
13 Click View Features to display package features.
Result: The Package Feature window appears.
14 Check that the features that appear in the CCMS Package Features list match the product that you purchased, and then perform one of the following tasks:
If the information is not correct, verify that you selected the correct package. Click OK, and then select the correct package.
If the information is correct, click OK to close the window.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 369
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Note: The features that appear in the CCMS Package Feature window can differ depending on the switch and the package you chose on the License Manager window.
Result: The Local Area Network IP window appears.
15 From the IP Address list, choose the IP address for the Nortel server subnet.
Note: If you are using two network interface cards, select the ELAN subnet check box, and then from the IP Address list, choose the IP address for the ELAN subnet.
16 Click Next.
17 Perform one of the following tasks depending on which switch you chose in step 5 on page 366:
“Option One (CS 1000)” on page 370
“Option Two (CS 2x00)” on page 345
370 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Option One (CS 1000)If you selected CS 1000 (M1), the following window appears.
If you selected CS 2x00 (DMS/SL-100), continue with “Option Two (CS 2x00)” on page 345.
a. In the Switch Name box, type the name of the switch.
Valid characters for switch names are A–Z, a–z, 0–9, underscore (_), and period (.). Switch names must begin with an alphabetical character and cannot contain spaces. The last character must not be an underscore or a period. Switch names must not exceed 80 characters in length.
Note: If you are unsure of the correct information, or if you make a mistake, you can change the switch information after you finish the installation.
b. In the Switch IP Address box, type the IP address for the switch.
c. In the Switch Customer Number box, type the customer number for the switch.
ATTENTION If you have a campus redundancy scenario, use the same switch information on the Standby Server as on the Active Server. If you have a geographic redundancy scenario, enter different switch information for the secondary site.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 371
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
d. Click Next.
Option Two (CS 2x00)If you select CS 2x00 (DMS/SL-100), the following window appears.
If you selected CS 1000 (M1), see “Option One (CS 1000)” on page 370.
a. In the Switch Name box, type the name of the switch.
Valid characters for switch names are A–Z, a–z, 0–9, underscore (_), and period (.). Switch names must begin with an alphabetical character and cannot contain spaces. The last character must not be an underscore or a period. Switch names must not exceed 80 characters in length.
Note: If you are unsure of the correct information, or if you make a mistake, you can change the switch information after you finish the installation.
b. In the Switch IP Address box, type the IP address for the switch.
c. In the Network Node box, type the network node information.
d. In the Service ID box, type the service ID information.
e. In the Application ID box, type the identifier for the application.
f. In the Service Version box, type the SCAI protocol that you plan to use as defined by the application.
372 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
g. In the Business Group box, type the name of the business group.
h. In the Linkset Name box, type the name for the Contact Center Manager Server as it is known to the switch (uppercase only). The linkset name creates a logical pathway to the server on the Ethernet Interface Unit (EIU).
i. In the Password box, type the password for the switch.
j. Click Next.
Result: One of the following results occurs:
If you are using a Communication Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX switch, the Voice Services window appears.
If you are using a Communication Server 2x00/DMS switch, the Voice Services window does not appear. Proceed to step 19 on page 374.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 373
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
18 Perform one of the following tasks:
If you are not using an integrated voice-processing system (Meridian Mail or CallPilot), for Voice Connection Type, select Serial, and click Next.
Note: If your computer is not configured with COM2, for Voice Connection Type, select TCP, type a dummy IP address and port number, and click Next.
If you are using Meridian Mail as your voice-processing system, for Voice Connection Type, select Serial, and click Next.
If you are using CallPilot, for Voice Connection Type, select TCP, specify the ELAN subnet IP address of the CallPilot server, and set the CallPilot Server Port to 10008. Click Next.
ATTENTION If you have a campus redundancy scenario, use the same ELAN subnet IP address on the Standby Server as on the Active Server. If you have a geographic redundancy scenario, enter different ELAN subnet IP address for the secondary site.
374 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Note: Although you can install Contact Center Manager Server on a server without a COM 2 serial port, the hard-coded dependency in the Media Application Server (MAS) Access Link service can cause the Access Link Handler to restart constantly if you do not configure the COM2 port. For a Contact Center Manager Server that does not require the Access Link connection to Meridian Mail, type a dummy IP address and port number in the Voice Connection Type.
Result: The RSM IP Address window appears.
19 In the RSM IP Address box, type the Real-time Statistics Multicast (RSM) IP address that you want to associate with sending real-time statistical data.
Note: Do not confuse the RSM IP address with the Nortel server subnet or ELAN subnet addresses for the server.
ATTENTION The IP multicast addresses that you select for RSM sending and receiving must be within the 224.0.1.0 and 239.255.255.255 range. The default is 230.0.0.1. Check with your network administrator for acceptable IP multicast addresses for your specific network.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 375
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
20 Click Next.
Result: The Database Replication window appears.
21 For Warm Standby type, select Standby.
22 Verify the information for the Replication Server. Ensure that the Replication Server name is all written in uppercase.
Attention: This information must match the Active Server information.
23 Enter the CCMS Listener Port Number, or accept the default value. If the value is changed from the default, you must type the new value on the Replication Server.
376 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
24 Click Next.
Result: The following window appears.
Result: The CCT Server window appears.
25 Click Next.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 377
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
26 Wait for the Site Name window to appear.
Result: The Site Name window appears.
27 In the Site Name box, type the site name for the server.
The site name must not contain spaces or nonalphabetical characters except for hyphens (-) and underscores (_). The first character must be a letter. The site name must be unique and can consist of 6 to 15 characters.
Note: You must use the same site name that you used on the Active Server.
28 Click Finish.
Result: The Information window appears.
29 Click Continue.
Result: The Contact Center Manager Server Setup Configuration Utility Information window appears.
378 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
30 Review the tabs and make any necessary changes, and click OK.
Result: The Nortel Contact Center Management Server Setup Configuration Utility window appears.
31 Review the tabs and make any changes as required, and click OK.
32 Wait for the Server Configuration Utility window to appear.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 379
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
This utility completes the Contact Center Manager Server installation.
The Nortel Contact Center - Manager installation success window appears.
33 Click OK.
Result: The Nortel Contact Center - Manager Platform Recovery Disk window appears.
380 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
34 Click Cancel. You can create the Platform Recovery Disk and backup the database after you install the remaining components on the server (when you complete the postinstallation tasks).
Result: The InstallShield Wizard Completed for Contact Center Manager Server (CCMS) window appears.
35 Click Finish when the button becomes active.
Result: The following window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 381
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
36 Click No. You can restart the server after you install the remaining components.
Result: The INSTALLATION ORDER window appears.
37 Perform one of the following tasks:
If you plan to install License Manager now, click Continue. Proceed to Step 18. “Install the License Manager” on page 382.
If you do not plan to install any other Nortel Contact Center components on this server, click Cancel. Proceed to Section C:“Postinstallation” on page 391.
382 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Step 18. Install the License Manager
This procedure is a continuation from Step 16. “Migrate the Active CCMS to the Standby Server” on page 334.
Installing the License Manager
1 On the INSTALLATION ORDER window, click Continue.
Result: The License Manager InstallShield Wizard window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 383
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
2 Click Next.
Result: The Custom Installation Information window appears.
3 Select the type of installation you require, and click Next.
Result: The License File location window appears.
384 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
4 Locate the license file, and click Next.
Result: The Ready to Install the Program window appears.
5 Click Begin.
Result: The Installing License Manager window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 385
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
The InstallShield Wizard Completed window appears.
6 Click Finish.
Result: The INSTALLATION ORDER window appears.
7 Perform one of the following tasks:
If you plan to install the Server Utility on the same server on which you installed the Standby Server, click Continue. Proceed to Step 19. “Install the Server Utility (optional)” on page 386.
If you do not plan to install any other Nortel Contact Center components on this server, click Cancel. Proceed to Section C:“Postinstallation” on page 391.
386 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Step 19. Install the Server Utility (optional)
This procedure is a continuation from Step 18. “Install the License Manager” on page 382.
Installing the Server Utility software
1 Log on to the server as Administrator.
2 Insert the Contact Center 6.0 DVD into the DVD-ROM drive and wait for it to autorun. If the DVD does not autorun, then browse to the DVD and run setup.exe.
Result: The following dialog box appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 387
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
3 Select Server Utility, and then click Next.
Result: The Windows Installer window appears, and then the Server Utility - InstallShield Wizard window appears.
4 Click Next.
Result: The following dialog box appears.
5 In the User Name box, type your user name.
6 In the Organization box, type the name of your organization.
388 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
7 Click Next.
Result: The Destination Folder window appears.
8 Verify the destination folder, and then click Next.
Result: The following dialog box appears, prompting you to begin the installation.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 389
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
9 Click Install.
Result: The following dialog box appears, displaying the installation progress.
Result: When installation is complete the InstallShield Wizard Completed window appears.
10 Click Finish.
Result: The INSTALLATION ORDER window appears.
390 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
11 Click Finish.
12 The installation is complete.The Server Utility is installed.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 391
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Section C: Postinstallation
In this sectionStep 20. Install required CCMS Service Updates on the Standby Server 392
Step 21. Change the NGenDist, NGenDesign, and NGenSys passwords 396
Step 22. Configure the NGen user groups for remote access (optional) 400
Step 23. Add NGen names to pcAnywhere 402
Step 24. Add the server to a domain (optional) 405
Step 25. Install and configure Real-time Statistics Multicast 415
Step 26. Install LinkPlexer 427
Step 27. Verify your security settings 444
Step 28. Disable the time synchronization features on the operating system446
Step 29. Complete other postinstallation tasks 448
392 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Step 20. Install required CCMS Service Updates on the Standby Server
You can obtain Service Updates (SU) and Service Update Supplements (SUS) as follows:
All SU packs and SUSs are available on the Enterprise Solutions PEP Library Web site located at www.nortel.com/espl.
Note: To register for this Web site, follow the instructions provided at www.nortel.com/register.
Any SU packs and SUSs that are available at the time of shipping are included on the DVD with your software.
Before you begin
If you are not installing patches from a DVD, download them from the Enterprise Solutions PEP Library Web site (www.nortel.com/espl) or obtain them from your Nortel customer support representative.
You must read the readme file associated with each Service Update you plan to install.
Installing a patch on the server (SU or SUS)
1 Use the PEP Viewer utility to ensure that the patch (SU or SUS) is not installed.
2 Ensure that you close all applications.
3 Perform one of the following tasks:
If you are downloading the patch, navigate to the Enterprise Solutions PEP Library Web site located at http://www.nortel.com/espl and download the patch you require.
If you are installing the patch, locate the patch directory on the DVD, or the directory into which you downloaded the patch from the Web.
4 Read the readme file associated with the patch.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 393
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
5 Double-click the <SU _ID>.msi or <SUS_ID>.msi file associated with the patch.
6 If you are prompted to view the readme file, click Yes.
7 Review the readme file and continue with the installation of the SU.
Result: The following window appears.
394 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
8 Click Next.
Result: The following window appears.
9 Click Install.
Result: The system installs the patch on the server, and then the following window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 395
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
10 Click Finish.
Result: The following window may appear.
11 Click Yes to restart the server.
Result: The patch is installed.
Install the Sybase Security Alert (Sybase EBF 12326)
Install this stand-alone patch from Sybase to address security issues. You must install this patch after you install the Contact Center Manager Server software.
The Sybase patch is available from the Enterprise Solutions PEP Library Web site (www.nortel.com/espl) or from your Nortel customer support representative.
You must read the readme file associated with each Service Update you plan to install. Follow the instructions in the readme file to install this patch.
396 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Step 21. Change the NGenDist, NGenDesign, and NGenSys passwords
To protect your system from unauthorized access, change the passwords for the Nortel user accounts on the Standby Server as soon as you finish the installation.
NGenDist, NGenDesign, and NGenSys are Windows remote access accounts that enable the distributor or Nortel customer support to remotely log on to the server if requested by the customer. These accounts are created during the server software installation.
Assign new passwords
To assign new passwords, you do not need to know the default passwords for NGenDist, NGenDesign, and NGenSys.
Password security
Write down the new passwords you create, and store them in a safe, secure place away from the server. Give the passwords only to those who need them.
Default accounts and passwords
The following Windows accounts are created on the server during the installation procedure:
NGenSys
NGenDist
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 397
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
NGenDesign
Changing the NGenDist, NGenDesign, or NGenSys password
You are not required to change the NGenSys password. If you change the NGenSys password, you must apply the same password change to the Meridian Application Server (MAS) Backup and Restore service.
1 Log on to the Standby Server as Administrator.
2 Click Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Computer Management.
Result: The Computer Management window appears.
3 Click Local users and groups, and then click Users.
Result: The Computer Management window displays a list of available user accounts, including NGenDist and NGenDesign.
4 Right-click NGenDist.
ATTENTION The on-site installer is instructed to change all default passwords as part of the on-site installation procedures.
You can change all passwords with the procedures in this section. Nortel recommends that you change all passwords regularly to maintain system security.
If the server software is reinstalled, the default accounts and passwords are recreated and passwords must be changed.
398 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
5 Click Set Password.
Result: The Set Password window appears.
6 Click Proceed.
Result: The Properties window appears.
7 In the Password box, type the new password.
Note: Ensure that you use a password that contains a combination of numbers and letters.
8 In the Confirm Password box, type the same password you entered in the Password box.
9 Click OK.
Result: The following window appears.
10 Click OK
11 Repeat steps 4 to 10 for NGenDesign and NGenSys.
12 Click Exit to save changes.
13 Record these passwords and store them in a secure place away from the server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 399
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
If you changed the NGenSys password, continue with the following procedure.
Changing the NGenSys password for the MAS Backup and Restore service
This procedure is required only if you change the Windows user account password for NGenSys.
1 On the Standby Server, click Start > Settings > Control Panel > Administrative Tools.
2 Click Services.
Result: The Services window appears.
3 Scroll to the MAS Backup and Restore service, and then select it.
4 From the Action menu, choose Properties.
Result: The Service window appears.
5 Click the Log On tab, and then type the current NGenSys password in the Password and Confirm Password boxes.
Note: Use the same password you assigned to NGenSys in “Changing the NGenDist, NGenDesign, or NGenSys password” on page 397.
6 Click OK.
ATTENTION When you finish changing passwords, remember to log on as NGenSys. You must log on as NGenSys to monitor and manage the server.
ATTENTION When you are finished, remember to log on as NGenSys. You must log on as NGenSys to monitor and manage the server.
400 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Step 22. Configure the NGen user groups for remote access (optional)
Contact Center Manager Server software creates three users: NGenSys, NGenDesign, and NGenDist. Set up these user accounts for support personnel to remotely access the server.
Configuring NGenSys, NGenDesign, and NGenDist for remote access
1 On the Standby Server, from the Start menu, choose Control Panel.
Result: The Control Panel window appears.
2 Double-click Network Connections.
Result: The Network Connections window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 401
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
3 Right-click the incoming connection that you created in “Configuring the operating system for remote access (workgroup)” on page 305, and then choose Properties.
Result: The Incoming Connections Properties window for your connection appears.
4 Click the Users tab.
5 Select the check box beside the users NGenDesign, NgenDist, and NGenSys.
6 Click OK to close the window, and then close the Network Connections window.
402 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Step 23. Add NGen names to pcAnywhere
Adding NGenDist and NGenDesign to pcAnywhere 11.5
1 On the Standby Server, log on to Windows as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Symantec pcAnywhere.
3 On the pcAnywhere manager (left side), select the Hosts option.
4 Click the File menu, and then choose New > Item > Advanced.
Note: Do not use the Wizard option.
Result: The Host Properties: New Host window appears.
ATTENTION If your server is in a workgroup, complete this step. If you intend to add your server to a domain, see Step 24. “Add the server to a domain (optional)” on page 405 for information about configuring the NGen user groups for remote access in a domain environment.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 403
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
5 Click the Callers tab.
Result: The Callers tab appears.
6 From the Authentication type list, select NT.
7 Below the Caller list heading, click the New item icon( ).
Result: The pcAnywhere Caller Properties: New Caller window appears.
8 On the Identification tab, select User.
9 From the Domain list, select the computer name of the server for Standby Server.
404 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
10 From the Account list, select NGenDist.
Note: The NGenDist and NGenDesign user accounts are automatically created on the server as Windows user accounts when you install the Contact Center Manager Server software. To allow authorized remote personnel to use pcAnywhere to log on and administer the server with either account, you must designate these Windows accounts as valid pcAnywhere caller accounts. By creating this link between Windows and pcAnywhere, you never have to change the passwords for these accounts in pcAnywhere; when you change the passwords in Windows, the information is automatically updated in pcAnywhere.
11 Click the Privileges tab.
12 Select the Superuser option.
13 Click OK to save the NGenDist caller account settings.
Result: The Callers tab in the pcAnywhere Host Properties window reappears.
14 Perform steps 7 to 13 again to add the NGenDesign caller account.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 405
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Step 24. Add the server to a domain (optional)
This step shows you how to add your Standby Server to an existing domain and perform other necessary tasks to make your server work on a domain. To perform this step, you need domain administrator’s privileges, or ask the domain administrator to assign you a domain user account for remote access.
Add Standby Server to your domain
1 On the Standby Server, on the Windows desktop, right-click My Computer, and then select Properties.
2 In the System Properties window, click the Computer Name tab.
3 Click Change.
4 In the Computer Name Changes window, change the computer's name and its domain or workgroup affiliation.
5 To add the server to an existing domain:
a. Select the Domain option.
b. Type the domain name (you must provide the Fully Qualified Domain Name of the domain, which includes the prefix and suffix).
6 Click OK.
Result: When the system processes your change successfully, it notifies you that the server now belongs to the domain that you specified.
7 Restart the server when you are prompted to do so.
ATTENTION Nortel recommends that the servers be in a workgroup rather than on a domain to eliminate the process of removing the computer name and IP address on the domain controller.
406 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Configure the operating system for remote access (domain)
In a Windows Server 2003 domain environment, you must create a dial-up user as a domain user on the domain controller and assign dial-in access permissions to this user. When you dial in to the Standby Server RAS configuration, the domain controller authenticates the user. Because no local dial-in account is created on Standby Server, the system no longer uses the accounts NGenDist and NGenDesign for dial-up access. However, after you establish dial-up connection using the domain user account, the pcAnywhere user accounts can still use the NGenDist or NGenDesign accounts.
Configuring the operating system for remote access (domain)
1 On the Standby Server, from the Start menu, choose Administrative Tools > Routing and Remote Access.
Result: The Routing and Remote Access window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 407
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
2 Right-click the Local Server Name, and then select Configure and Enable Routing and Remote Access.
Result: The Welcome window appears.
3 Click Next.
Result: The Configuration window appears.
408 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
4 Make sure Remote Access (dial-up or VPN) is selected, and then click Next.
Result: The Remote Access window appears.
5 Click Dial-up, and then click Next.
Result: The Network Selection window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 409
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
6 Select the network connection that represents your Nortel server subnet, and then click Next.
Result: The IP Address Assignment window appears.
7 Select From a specified range of addresses, and then click Next.
Result: The Address Range Assignment window appears.
410 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
8 Click New.
Result: The New Address Range window appears.
9 Enter the ranges of the IP addresses provided by your domain administrator, and then click OK.
Result: The Address Range Assignment window appears showing the address ranges you entered.
10 Click Next.
Result: The Managing Multiple Remote Access Servers window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 411
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
11 Select No, use Routing and Remote Access to authenticate requests, and then click Next.
Result: The Completing the Routing and Remote Access Server Setup Wizard window appears.
12 Click Finish.
Result: The Routing and Remote Access service starts and is successfully installed on your computer.
412 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Set up your user accounts for remote access
After you install the Routing and Remote Access service on your server, you must set up your user accounts for remote access. Choose from one of the following two options.
Option 1: Creating a domain user while using NGenDist account for pcAnywhereThis option requires that you create a domain user account on the domain controller with dial-in access privileges, while retaining the NGenDist or NGenDesign accounts at a pcAnywhere level.
1 On the domain controller, create a new domain user account and allow dial-in access.
Note: Nortel recommends using a user name and password that are different from NGenDist and NGenDesign. The network administrator may be required to carry out this step. Record the user name and password carefully as they are required to remotely support the Contact Center Manager Server Release 6.0 server.
2 On the Contact Center Manager Server Release 6.0 server, no changes are required to the operating system, RAS configuration, server software, or pcAnywhere installation.
3 When you dial in to the Release 6.0 server of Contact Center Manager Server, the system prompts you for a domain user account and password. After the domain controller authenticates the domain user account and password, you can start the pcAnywhere session. The pcAnywhere logon can still use the NGenDist or NGenDesign account.
Note: Because there is no local record of the domain user account, you must maintain two user accounts; one is the domain user account, and the other is the local pcAnywhere account.
Option 2: Using the domain user account for pcAnywhereThis option requires that you create a domain user account on the domain controller with dial-in access, as in Option 1. However, you also use the same domain user account instead of NgenDist for pcAnywhere access. The NGenDist or NGenDesign accounts are no longer used at any level.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 413
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
1 On the domain controller, create a new domain user account and allow dial-in access.
Note: Nortel recommends that you use a user name and password that are different from NGenDist and NGenDesign. The network administrator may be required to carry out this step. Record the user name and password carefully as they are required to remotely support Contact Center Manager Server.
2 On the Contact Center Manager Server, no changes are required to the operating system, RAS configuration, or server software, except for the pcAnywhere configuration.
3 On the pcAnywhere configuration, select a domain user account from the domain controller in the pcAnywhere Add Users window.
Note: The Contact Center Manager Server user must log on using an account with domain administrator privileges before configuring pcAnywhere users.
Stop and disable the Windows Time Service (Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX switch)
If you are using a Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX switch, stop and disable the Windows Time Service.
Stopping and disabling the Windows Time Service
Check that the Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX time is within 10 seconds of the domain controller time. If the time is not within 10 seconds, adjust the Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX time to match the domain controller time.
1 On the Standby Server, on the Windows desktop, right-click My Computer and choose Manage > Services and Applications > Services.
2 In the right pane, right-click Windows Time Service, and then select Stop.
3 When the Windows Time Service stops, right-click Windows Time Service again, and then select Properties.
4 On the General tab, change the Startup Type to Disabled.
5 Click Apply, and then click OK.
414 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
6 On the Computer Management window, check that Windows Time Service Startup Type is disabled.
7 Close the window.
Note: Nortel recommends that the time difference between the Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX and the domain controller time be kept within a few seconds (+/- 10 seconds). The maximum difference is 5 minutes before Kerberos authentication problems may arise. Check the times on the Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX and the domain once a month to ensure that the 5-minute tolerance is not exceeded.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 415
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Step 25. Install and configure Real-time Statistics Multicast
As part of the migration of the Active Server to Standby Server, you must configure the Standby Server so the Real-Time Statistics IP address, Real-Time Display Multicast Controller Utility (MulticastCtrl.exe), and Real-Time Display Multicast Configuration Utility (RSMConfg.exe) are set up the same as the Active Server.
You can begin using the RSM service with the default RSM settings, or you can modify RSM settings to conform to the requirements of your RSM-dependent applications.
Installing Real-time Statistics Multicast
During the installation, you are prompted to enter the IP multicast address that you want RSM to use to send real-time statistical data. Use the same IP multicast address for both the Active Server and Standby Server.
The RSM IP Address window appears whenever RSM is detected during any one of the following scenarios:
an initial installation of Contact Center Manager Server
ATTENTION RSM compression is supported on Contact Center Manager Server, but it is not supported with Contact Center Manager Administration. If RSM compression is configured on the Active Server, Contact Center Manager Administration real-time displays do not work.
416 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
an upgrade or reinstallation of Contact Center Manager Server
For more information about installing the RSM feature in Contact Center Manager Server, see the Contact Center Manager Server Installation and Maintenance Guide.
After completing the installation, you can perform the following tasks:
Use the mRcv.exe utility on both the Active Server and Standby Server to verify that the RSM service is sending data to the appropriate ports. The information must match on both servers. For more information, see the Contact Center Manager Server Installation and Maintenance Guide.
Accept the default RSM settings provided by the Active Server installation, and begin using the RSM service. Ensure the RSM settings match on the Standby Server.
Modify the default settings on the Active Server and Standby Server to values recommended by your RSM-dependent applications. The information must match on both server. For more information, see the Contact Center Manager Server Installation and Maintenance Guide.
Modifying Real-time Statistics Multicast settings
After installing the optional Real-time Statistics Multicast (RSM) feature, you can modify the RSM component default settings on the Active Server and Standby Server to reflect the requirements of your organization. You can modify the following settings:
the IP multicast address to which each server in the Contact Center Manager Server configuration sends real-time statistics
the ports at which real-time statistics are received
the multicast Time To Live (TTL) value for RSM
ATTENTION The IP multicast addresses that you select for RSM sending and receiving must be within the 224.0.1.0 and 239.255.255.255 range. The default is 230.0.0.1. Check with your network administrator for acceptable IP multicast addresses for your specific network.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 417
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
the default multicast rate for each port at which real-time statistics are received
The TTL value in the ICMP protocol is measured in seconds or hops. For Standby Server, it is measured in hops (for example, the number of routers).
This section describes how to modify and enable changes to the RSM service on the Standby Server.
The RSM service consists of the configuration and the data propagation components. You configure RSM settings through the RSM configuration and multicast control utilities. The RSM statistics are transmitted through the Statistical Data Propagator (SDP).
When you complete your modifications, you must stop and restart the SDP service on the Standby Server. This service must be aware of IP multicast changes to send the appropriate data.
When you modify multicast rates in the Multicast Configuration utility, you must open the Multicast Controller utility and click Apply to activate your changes.
Modifying the Real-Time Statistics Multicast serviceAfter the RSM component is installed on both the Active Server and Standby Server, you can use the following utilities to reconfigure RSM:
RTD Multicast Controller utility (MulticastCtrl.exe)—Use this utility to modify settings for applications that require that real-time statistics be turned on manually.
Note: The real-time statistics groups that you need to turn on or off vary depending on the applications that receive data from the RSM service. Nortel highly recommends that you review the documentation for each RSM-dependent application in Contact Center Manager Server before modifying the RSM settings.
ATTENTION The IP multicast addresses that you select for RSM sending and receiving must be within the 224.0.1.0 and 239.255.255.255 range. The default is 230.0.0.1. Check with your network administrator for acceptable IP multicast addresses for your specific network.
418 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
RTD Multicast Configuration utility (RSMConfg.exe)—Use this utility to change
the IP multicast address
the Time To Live (TTL) value for the IP multicast data
the IP ports that send the real-time statistics
the multicast rates for the IP ports that send the real-time statistics
Modifying real-time statistics settings for applications that use the RSM serviceThe RTD Multicast Controller indicates which statistics are sent and how they are collected. Some applications that use RSM set this data automatically while others require manual configuration.
If you need to modify the default settings based on application requirements, or if you want to customize statistics to be sent to match the needs of your users, use the RTD Multicast Controller window to select or deselect the appropriate settings.
1 On the Standby Server, from the windows Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Multicast Stream Control.
Result: The RTD Multicast Controller window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 419
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
2 Select the Moving Window or Interval To Date check boxes, or both, for each real-time statistics group.
The Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX switch and SIP switch real-time statistics groups are:
Skillset
Application
Agent
Nodal
IVR
Route
Compression
The Communication Server 2x00/DMS real-time statistics groups are:
Skillset
Application
Agent
Nodal
Compression
3 Click Apply.
Tip: You must also use the RTD Multicast Controller utility’s Apply button to activate changes to multicast rates made in the configuration utility. For more information, see “Activate modifications to the RSM service in Contact Center Manager Server” on page 423.
4 Click Close.
5 To activate new RSM settings on Contact Center Manager Server (except the multicast rates), stop and start the Statistical Data Propagator (SDP) service.
420 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Modifying the IP multicast settings in Contact Center Manager ServerPerform the following steps to modify the multicast IP settings on the Standby Server.
1 On the Standby Server, from the windows Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server >Multicast Address and Port Configuration.
Result: The RTD Multicast Configuration window appears.
ATTENTION Nortel highly recommends that you review the documentation for each RSM-dependent application that uses the RSM service in Contact Center Manager Server before modifying the RSM IP multicast settings.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 421
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
2 In the Multicast IP group box, type the IP multicast address that you designated as the sending address for IP multicasting in Contact Center Manager Server.
3 In the IP Port boxes, type the IP port for each statistics group.
4 Change the Multicast time to live (TTL) value to a value that is appropriate for your network.
ATTENTION The IP multicast addresses that support multicasting are 224.0.1.0 through 239.255.255.255, but the IP multicast addresses between 224.0.0.0 and 224.0.0.255 inclusive are reserved for routing and topology discovery protocols. Addresses between 239.0.0.0 and 239.255.255.255 are reserved for administrative scoping. The IP multicast addresses that you select for RSM sending and receiving must be within the 224.0.1.0 and 239.255.255.255 range.
ATTENTION If you change the IP port settings, some applications that are dependent upon the RSM service can malfunction.
ATTENTION If packets are traveling through more than one router to reach their destination, it is important to change the Multicast time to live (TTL) value to a value that is appropriate for your network and the number of routers that you use. If the TTL value is set too low and the packets have to go through many routers, the real-time multicast statistics may not reach your application.
422 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
5 To increase or decrease the default multicast rate, enter a new rate in milliseconds for each port in the Multicast Rate boxes.
Note: If you enter 0 in the Multicast Rate box, you disable the statistic.
Tip: If you make an error in modifying the multicast IP group, TTL, IP ports, or the multicast rates for each port, you can restore the original values by clicking Registry Value or Default Value. Note that if you modify any of these values and click OK or Apply, the appropriate registries are updated with your changes. If you click Registry Value after the modifications are saved to the registry, it has no effect.
Click Registry Value before you click Apply to retrieve the values stored in the registries. Use this option if you want to cancel a change without having to remember and retype the original values.
Click Default Value to restore the values that are set when Contact Center Manager Server is installed. Use this option if you save changes to the registry that caused RSM-dependent applications to malfunction, and you want to begin again with the default RSM configuration.
6 Click OK.
7 To activate new multicast rate settings on Contact Center Manager Server, you must open the configuration utility and click Apply. For more information, see the procedure “Activate modifications to the RSM service in Contact Center Manager Server” on page 423.
Activating a multicast rate modificationWhen you change a multicast rate in the configuration utility, you modify only the default value, not the current transmission rate. RSM continues to transmit data at the current rate until you open the controller utility and click Apply.
ATTENTION If you change the multicast rate for any display in RTD Multicast Configuration, it may not produce the refresh rate changes that you anticipate. Refresh rates depend on the settings in other applications, as well as those set in the configuration window. The minimum refresh rate for RSM is 5000 ms (5 seconds). In addition, certain applications require a specific multicast rate. Before changing a multicast rate, check the documentation for each application to verify that all applications that receive RSM data are not affected by the change.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 423
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
1 On the Standby Server, from the Start menu, choose Programs > Windows Explorer.
2 Navigate to the folder in which the RSM component is installed:
D:\Nortel\iccm\bin
3 Double-click MulticastCtrl.exe.
Result: The RTD Multicast Controller window appears.
4 Click Apply.
5 Click Close.
6 Stop and start the Statistical Data Propagator (SDP) service to activate new RSM settings on Contact Center Manager Server (except multicast rates).
Result: The new multicast rates are retrieved from the appropriate registry, and RSM begins transmitting at the new rate.
Activate modifications to the RSM service in Contact Center Manager Server
When you modify the RSM service multicast IP group, TTL, and IP port settings, you must activate the new values on Contact Center Manager Server by stopping and starting the Statistical Data Propagator (SDP) service.
Activating the Contact Center Manager Server settings
1 On the Standby Server, from the Start menu, choose Control Panel.
2 Click Services.
Result: The Services window appears.
3 From the list of services, select SDP_Service.
4 Click Stop.
5 Click Start.
6 Click Close.
Tip: If you have problems stopping and starting the SDP Service, you can temporarily disable SDP Service to stop it. After the service stops, reset the service to start manually, and then restart the service.
424 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
a. In the Services window, click SDP_Service.
b. Click Properties.
Result: The Service Properties window appears.
c. On the Startup Type menu, select Disabled.
Result: The SDP_Service is disabled.
d. Click OK to return to the Services window.
e. Select SDP_Service and click Stop.
Result: The SDP_Service stops.
f. Click Properties.
Result: The Service Properties window appears.
g. On the Startup Type menu, select Manual.
Result: The SDP_Service is set to manually start when the system starts.
h. Click OK to return to the Services window.
i. Select SDP_Service and click Start to restart the service.
j. Click Close.
Testing the Real-time Statistics Multicast service
After you install or modify RSM on the Standby Server, use the Multicast Receive utility (mRcv.exe) to test the RSM service. mRcv.exe displays statistical information according to the settings specified in a configuration file called mRcv.ini.
Configure the Multicast Receive utilityThe mRcv.exe utility tests the RSM service send capabilities one port at a time. You can specify which IP address and port the utility monitors in the [MCast] section of the mRcv.ini file.
Modifying the mRcv.ini file
1 On the Standby Server, from the Start menu, choose Programs > Windows Explorer.
2 Navigate to the folder in which the RSM component is installed:
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 425
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
<drive>:\Nortel\iccm\bin
3 Use a text editor to open the mRcv.ini file.
4 Modify the IP address or the port number, or both.
Note: The port numbers listed within the section bordered by pound (#) symbols in the .ini file are for reference only and list all of the acceptable port numbers that you can use in your test. For an example of the information in a standard mRcv.ini file, see “Sample mRcv.ini file” on page 425.
For example, if you want to test receipt of Skillset - Interval to date data using mRcv.exe, check the port number for Skillset - Interval to date in the .ini file, and then change the Port= setting in the [MCast] section to that port number. If Skillset - Interval to date = 6040 in the .ini file, the [MCast] section of the .ini file must be modified as follows:
[MCast]IP=234.5.6.7Port=6040
5 Save the mRcv.ini file. After setting the parameters for your test, you can start mRcv.exe to begin the test. For more information, see “Starting the mRcv application” on page 426.
Sample mRcv.ini fileThe following sample is the default mRcv.ini file provided by the Contact Center Manager Server installation. If you run the mRcv.exe utility using this .ini file, it displays Skillset - Moving window data sent by RSM, based on the settings in the [MCast] section at the bottom of the file (IP = 234.5.6.7 Port = 6050).
The list of port numbers in the mRcv.ini file is for reference only, and each line is marked with the pound (#) symbol. You can use these port numbers as an easy-to-access list of valid ports that are used in the system to display data. The only portion of the .ini file that can be modified is the [MCast] section at the bottom of the file.
######################################################## mRcv.ini file## Valid port numbers are:
ATTENTION The IP= value must match your IP multicast address.
426 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
# Application - Interval to date = 6020# Application - Moving window = 6030# Skillset - Interval to date = 6040# Skillset - Moving window = 6050# Agent - Interval to date = 6060# Agent - Moving window = 6070# Nodal - Interval to date = 6080# Nodal - Moving window = 6090# IVR - Interval to date = 6100# IVR - Moving window = 6110# Route - Interval to date = 6120# Route - Moving window = 6130#######################################################[MCast]IP = 234.5.6.7Port = 6050
Starting the mRcv application
1 On the Standby Server, from the Start menu, choose Programs > Windows Explorer.
2 Navigate to the folder in which the RSM component is installed:
<drive>:\Nortel\iccm\bin
3 Double-click mRcv.exe.
Result: The mRcv.exe utility appears in a console window and displays data from the port and IP address that you specified in the mRcv.ini file.
Note: The mRcv.exe utility displays all data received on the selected port, including data that is not recognizable by RSM. All non-RSM data is identified as Not recognized by RSM.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 427
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Step 26. Install LinkPlexer
If you are adding LinkPlexer to your configuration, see the following section for installation procedures. For LinkPlexer server requirements, see the Nortel Contact Center Manager Planning and Engineering Guide.
If your Primary and Secondary servers are connected to the Communication Server 2x00/DMS/SL-100 switch using LinkPlexer, you can use unique IP addresses for each server. LinkPlexer allows you to have both the Primary and Secondary servers connected to the network with unique IP addresses.
For additional information, see the Nortel LinkPlexer Installation and Configuration Guide.
Installing the iButton software and hardware
In addition to the LinkPlexer 6.0 software, Nortel provides an iButton and a USB adapter for mounting the iButton on the server, a keycode specific to the iButton, and Dallas Semiconductor 1-Wire drivers.
Installing the 1-Wire iButton drivers
1 Remove any 1-Wire USB devices that are plugged in an available USB port of the LinkPlexer 6.0 server. Leave any non-USB devices plugged in.
2 Insert the DVD containing LinkPlexer 6.0 into the DVD drive and using Windows Explorer, launch the installation package <DVD DRIVE>:\LinkPlexer\ThirdParty\install_1_wire_drivers_v400.msi. You can also obtain the 1-Wire drivers from the following Web site:
428 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
http://www.maxim-ic.com
Result: The 1-Wire-Drivers Welcome window appears.
3 Click Next.
Result: The License Agreement window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 429
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
4 Read the License Agreement, select I Agree, and then click Next.
Result: The Custom Installation Choices window appears.
5 Ensure that all check boxes are cleared, and then click Next.
Result: The 1-Wire Drivers USB Warning window appears.
6 If a 1-Wire USB device is attached to the LinkPlexer 6.0 server, unplug it.
430 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
7 Click Next.
Result: The Select Installation Folder window appears.
Note: The default folder for installation appears. If you want to select an alternative location, click Browse or type the path in the Folder box.
8 Click Disk Cost to ensure that there is sufficient free space on the selected disk for the installation.
9 Under Install 1-Wire Drivers for yourself, or for anyone who uses this computer, select Everyone.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 431
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
10 Click Next.
Result: The Confirm Installation window appears.
11 Click Next to begin the installation.
Result: The Installing 1-Wire Drivers window appears. The installation proceeds. The Back and Next buttons are unavailable during the installation.
432 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
When the installation is complete, the USB Instructions dialog box appears.
12 Insert the USB adapter and click OK. Wait for Windows to detect the new hardware.
Result: The Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard window appears.
Note: If Windows cannot detect the driver, select it manually by browsing to the location where the 1-Wire software is installed.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 433
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
13 Under Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for new software?, select No, not this time, and then click Next.
Result: The Found New Hardware - This Wizard helps you install software for USB Host Adapter for 1-Wire Network window appears.
14 Select Install from a list or specific location (Advanced), and then click Next.
Result: The Found New Hardware - Please choose your search and installation options appears.
434 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
15 Select Search for the best driver in these locations.
16 Clear the check box for Search removable media (floppy, CD ROM).
17 Select Include this location in the search.
18 Click Browse and navigate to the location where you installed the driver in Step 8 (by default, C:\Program Files\Dallas Semiconductor\1-Wire Drivers Version 4.00)
Result: The Security Alert - Driver Installation window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 435
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
19 Click Yes.
Result: The application installs the USB Host Adapter for 1-Wire Network. The 1-Wire Net Port Selection window appears.
The application detects the iButton adapter that is installed and sets up the 1-Wire driver to access this device.
20 Click Next.
Result: The 1-Wire Net Port Selection window appears.
436 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
21 Click Auto-Detect. The application searches all ports for the connected device.
Result: A Warning dialog box appears, indicating that the application communicates with all available ports until it finds an iButton device.
22 Click OK.
Result: The Auto-Detect In Progress dialog box appears.
When Auto-Detect locates a device, the following window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 437
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
23 Click Yes to select the detected port as your 1-Wire Net Port.
Result: The auto-detect process is complete. The Installation Complete window appears.
Note: If the Auto-Detect process fails to locate a device, see the Troubleshooting section.
24 Click Close.
25 Restart the LinkPlexer 6.0 server.
Note: The 1-Wire installation process creates a Start menu folder called 1-Wire Driver. This folder contains the default 1-Wire Net application for detecting and setting the port and device, and a Java-based OneWireViewer for viewing the attached device.
438 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Installing LinkPlexer 6.0
1 Insert the DVD containing LinkPlexer 6.0 into the DVD drive. In Windows Explorer, browse to <DVD DRIVE>:\LinkPlexer\Setup.exe.
Result: The Welcome window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 439
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
2 Click Next.
Result: The Destination Folder window appears.
Note: The default folder for installation appears. Nortel recommends that you use the default location.You can change the folder for installation by clicking the Change button.
3 Click Next.
Result: The Ready to Install window appears.
440 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
4 Click Next.
Result: The Installing Nortel LinkPlexer 6 window appears.
When the installation is complete, the InstallShield Wizard Completed window appears.
5 Click Finish. The LinkPlexer 6.0 installation is now complete.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 441
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Entering the keycode
1 Click Start > Programs > Nortel Contact Center > LinkPlexer > KeycodeTracker.
Result: The LinkPlexer KeycodeTracker window appears.
2 In the Keycode box, type the supplied keycode.
3 Click Apply.
Result: The LinkPlexer 6.0 KeycodeTracker window closes. The KeycodeTracker application closes.
Using Tracker
The LinkPlexer Tracker application provides information about the LinkPlexer 6.0 build version and the operating system. It detects and displays information about the Microsoft Windows operating version, the build number and date of the installation, and the version number and date of any PEP installation.
Launching the Tracker application
Click Start > Programs > Nortel Contact Center > LinkPlexer > Tracker.
Result: The Tracker window appears.
442 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
The LinkPlexer Tracker application window displays the following components and information:
Windows—refers to the operating system and service pack versions
Tracker—indicates the current version of the LinkPlexer Tracker application
DMS Server File Stamp—refers to the version of the file stamp
Build Info—indicates the LinkPlexer 6.0 build.
The date for the Tracker, DMS Server File Stamp, and Build Info components see the date LinkPlexer 6.0 was installed.
LinkPlexer Keycode Tracker
Use the LinkPlexer Keycode Tracker to enter the dongle keycodes. The Keycode Tracker displays the number of applications that can connect to the LinkPlexer 6.0 server.
You can also use the Keycode tracker to confirm dongle detection. Click the Check Dongle button and wait approximately 10 seconds. If a dongle is detected, the Check Dongle box on the Keycode Tracker window displays Connected. If the dongle is not detected, the Check Dongle box displays Not Connected.
Alternatively, the dongle can be also be detected using iButton applications as referred to at http://www.ibutton.com/software.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 443
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Entering keycodes with LinkPlexer Keycode Tracker
1 Click Start > Programs > Nortel Contact Center \ LinkPlexer > Keycode Tracker.
Result: The Keycode Tracker window appears.
2 Type the supplied 16-character keycode in the Keycode boxes.
3 Click Apply.
444 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Step 27. Verify your security settings
Ensure that your security settings meet the requirements for your contact center. For more information about configuring your security settings for the Active Server, see “Manage security” on page 977.
Verifying your security settings
You must restart the server to complete the configuration.
1 If you are configuring an existing Contact Center Manager Server as the Active Server and you are not already logged on as NGenSys, log on to the server as NGenSys. From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Server Setup Configuration.
Result: The License Manager Package Configuration window appears.
2 Select the Standby Server optional package.
Result: The the Configuration window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 445
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
3 Select the Database Replication tab.
4 Verify the name of the Replication Server. Ensure that the computer name appears in all uppercase letters.
5 Verify the IP address for the Replication Server.
6 Enter the CCMS listener port number, or accept the default value. If the value is different from the default, you must type the new value on the Replication Server.
7 Select the Active option, and click OK.
8 Run the Server Setup Configuration Utility and restart the server.
446 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Step 28. Disable the time synchronization features on the operating system
When Contact Center Manager Server is used in the Communication Server 1000/Meridian 1 environment, you must disable all time synchronization features on the operating system to avoid potential call processing outages. Complete the procedures in this section to disable the synchronization features on your operating system.
Note: If you disable the Date and Time features after you disable the Windows Time service, the Startup type for the Windows Time service is set to Automatic.
If the Contact Center Manager Server is in a Communication Server 2x00/DMS or SIP environment or is the Network Control Center server, proceed to Step 29. “Complete other postinstallation tasks” on page 448.
Configuring the server for daylight savings
1 Click Start > Control Panel > Date and Time.
Result: The Date and Time Properties dialog box appears.
Note: If you click OK without making changes, Startup type of the Windows Time service is set to Automatic.
2 Click the Time Zone tab, and then clear the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes check box.
3 Click the Internet Time tab.
4 Clear the Automatically synchronize with an Internet time server check box.
5 Click Apply to save your changes.
6 Click OK.
Disabling the Windows Time services
1 Click Start > Control Panel > Date and Time.
Result: The Date and Time Properties dialog box appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 447
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
2 Click the Time Zone tab.
3 Clear the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes check box.
4 Click the Internet Time tab.
Note: If you click OK without making any changes, the Startup type for the Windows Time service is set to Automatic.
5 Clear the Automatically synchronize with an Internet time server check box.
6 Click Apply to save your changes.
7 Click OK.
448 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Step 29. Complete other postinstallation tasks
Complete these additional postinstallation tasks.
Check and install the latest Service Update Supplements
Check for the latest Service Update Supplements on the Enterprise Solutions PEP Library Web site at http://www.nortel.com/espl. For instructions to install a Service Update Supplement, see “Install patches on the server” on page 870.
Configure SNMP (optional)
If you are using the Windows SNMP service to forward traps to an NMS, you must perform these tasks (if you have not already done so):
Configure the Windows SNMP service on the server.
Select the types of events you want to forward to the NMS.
Configure the NMS.
Change your Event Viewer settings
Based on the size of your contact center, change the size of the Windows Application Log that hold events produced by the Contact Center Manager Server application.
Back up the server
Create full, database, and (if applicable) RAID backups of the server. For instructions, see Appendix C, “Back up data.”
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 449
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Section D: Prepare the Replication Server
In this sectionStep 30. Install Windows Server 2003 on the Replication Server 450
Step 31. Install the Replication Server software 465
Step 32. Set up the Warm Standby configuration on the Replication Server472
Step 33. Prepare the Standby Server to perform database backups 489
450 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Step 30. Install Windows Server 2003 on the Replication Server
If you have not already installed Windows Server 2003 on the Replication Server, follow this checklist to do so.
ATTENTION Nortel recommends the Replication Server be configured on a Nortel server subnet and not on an ELAN subnet.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
1 Set up your RAID configuration.
If your server uses RAID, ensure the RAID configuration is set up according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
2 Obtain the Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM.
Use either Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition or Enterprise Edition.
Do not use Windows Server 2003 Datacenter or Web editions.
3 Start the Windows Server 2003 installation.
Start installing Windows Server 2003 according to the instructions supplied with the operating system. Follow the on-screen instructions to create a partition for the operating system. This partition must reside on drive C of your server on an NTFS partition.
The Windows Server 2003 installation copies the operating system files to the installation folders on the new partition. When the copy process is complete, the system restarts. The Windows Server 2003 Setup wizard appears.
4 Complete the Windows Server 2003 Setup wizard.
Use the following guidelines in this table to complete the Windows Server 2003 Setup wizard.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 451
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Regional Settings window
Complete this window as required for your site.
Personalize Your Software window
Complete this window as required for your site.
Licensing Modes window
Nortel recommends that you use the Per server licensing mode and that you have a minimum of five concurrent connections. This is the default.
Computer Name and Administrator Password window
Enter the computer name and administrator password.
Pay close attention to the naming rules for the computer name as described in the Contact Center Manager Planning and Engineering Guide (no spaces, hyphens, or underscores are allowed).
Date and Time Settings window
Complete this window as required for your site. Make sure the correct time zone is set for the server.
Modem Dialing Information window
Complete this window as required for your site.
This window appears if you have a modem attached to the server. If this window does not appear, proceed to the next window.
Networking Settings window
After the system installs the networking components and the status bar finishes scrolling, select Custom settings.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
452 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Networking Components window
Use this window to select networking components and set up the TCP/IP parameters for the Nortel server subnet network interface cards.
Networking components selection
After detecting the first network card, the Windows Server 2003 Setup wizard displays a list of networking components for that card. For each network card, the following three components are selected by default. Do not deactivate any of the following default networking components:
Client for Microsoft Networks
File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks
Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)Configuring TCP/IP parameters for Nortel server subnet
Complete the following steps for each card that the Setup wizard detects on your server.
1 Click Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and then click Properties.
2 In the General tab, type the IP information required for the card (for example, IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway). Consult with the network administrator for the site.
3 To complete the installation successfully, you must type an IP address for each network interface card. If you do not yet have the correct IP addresses for the cards, then type dummy IP addresses now. Remember to reconfigure the cards with the correct addresses later.
4 From the General tab, click Advanced. Use the DNS and WINS tabs to type information about DNS and WINS servers. Consult with the network administrator for the site.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 453
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Workgroup or Computer domain window
Adding computer to a workgroup
1 Select No, this computer is not on a network, or is on a network without a domain.
2 In the Workgroup or computer domain box, type the workgroup name.
You can add the server to a domain after you install Replication Server.
5 Log on to Windows Server 2003.
After the Windows Server 2003 Setup wizard installation of the operating system is complete, you must configure the operating system before you install Replication Server. Remove the CD-ROM.
When you log on to Windows Server 2003 for the first time, the Windows Server 2003 Manage Your Server wizard appears. This wizard is not necessary for Replication Server functionality. Proceed to the next step (Step 6) to configure additional server software.
Tip:
Select the Don’t display this screen on startup option.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
454 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
6 Add or remove programs.
Use Add or Remove Programs to configure your Windows Server 2003 operating system.
Using Add or Remove Programs
1 Go to Start > Control Panel.
Note: Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel, if you use the Classic Start menu.
2 Double-click Add or Remove Programs.
3 Click Add or Remove Windows Components to view a list of the installed components.
4 Click Application Server, and then click Details to deselect IIS on the components list. IIS is an subcomponent of Application Server and is selected by default.
5 Select Management and Monitoring Tools, and then click Details.
6 Select the check box beside SNMP. If it is selected already, SNMP is installed.
7 Click OK to return to the Add or Remove Windows Components property page.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 455
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
7 Check the virtual memory settings.
Verify that the virtual memory on the server is RAM size times 1.5. Set both the initial and maximum size to this value. If the virtual memory is smaller, increase it to RAM size times 1.5. Nortel recommends that the paging file be located on drive C.
Verifying the virtual memory on the server
1 Go to Start > Control Panel.
Note: Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel, if you use the Classic Start menu.
2 Click System.
3 On the General tab, take note of the RAM size.
4 Click the Advanced tab, and then click Performance Settings.
5 Click the Advanced tab again.
6 Click Change to view and make changes to the virtual memory settings.
7 Restart the server if prompted.
For a system with 512 MB of RAM, the default minimum paging file size is 768 MB and the default maximum paging file size is 1 GB. To optimize performance, Microsoft recommends that the minimum paging file size equal the maximum paging file size. Nortel recommends that you set both the minimum and maximum paging file sizes to RAM size times 1.5.
If any of the following conditions apply, the system complete memory dump is not generated when the system stops unexpectedly:
Multiple paging files are distributed over separate disks.
The paging file is not located on drive C.
Physical RAM size is larger than 2 GB.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
456 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Check the virtual memory settings (continued).
Due to the limitations presented by large paging files, Nortel recommends the following:
Set the minimum and maximum paging file sizes to RAM size times 1.5, up to a maximum paging file size of 4 GB.
Add the paging file to the drive C partition only. Do not create paging files on database partitions or other partitions.
8 Configure the modem connection for remote access.
Configure a direct serial connection for the modem hardware connected to your server. The modem uses COM 1.
Configuring a direct serial connection
1 Go to Start > Control Panel.
Note: Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel, if you use the Classic Start menu.
2 Double-click Phone and Modem Options.
3 Click the Modems tab, and then click Add.
Note: If you have not configured a modem on the server, the Location Information screen appears first. You must completed the Local Information screen before the Modems tab can be accessed.
4 Follow the instructions in the Add or Remove Hardware Wizard to detect the modem and install the driver.
9 Configure the operating system for remote access.
Configure an incoming connection on the server to allow for remote support through the dial-up modem.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 457
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
10 Check the bindings order for the Nortel server subnet and virtual adapters.
Attention: You must complete the procedure in this section if you have more than one network card. If you do not have the correct binding order, you may encounter problems when you want to restore your database.
You only require one network interface card. However, if you have more than one network interface card, you must configure the bindings order of the network interface cards so that the Nortel server subnet card is first, then the virtual adapters for remote access.
Configuring the bindings order of the network interface cards
1 Go to Start > Control Panel.
Note: Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel, if you use the Classic Start menu.
2 Double-click Network Connections.
3 Click the Nortel server subnet, and then from the Advanced menu, click Advanced Settings.
4 In the Connections box, ensure the Nortel server subnet connection is listed first. If it is not first, adjust the order.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
458 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
11 Check the serial port configuration.
Use the Windows Device Manager to check that the required serial ports exist. You require COM1 to provide remote support, unless you are using the USB port or VPN for remote access.
Checking the required serial ports
1 Go to Start > Control Panel.
Note: Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel, if you use the Classic Start menu.
2 Click System, and then click the Hardware tab.
3 Click Device Manager, and then double-click Ports (COM & LPT) to view the communications ports.
4 For COM1, set the base I/O Port Address to 3F8 and the IRQ to 4.
If a required port does not exist:
1 Ensure that the port is installed.
2 Go to the BIOS and correct the address of the missing port.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 459
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
12 Format all disk drives.
Ensure that the disk drives on the server are formatted according to the requirements for Contact Center Standby Server Release 6.0.
If the Welcome to the Write Signature and Upgrade Disk wizard appears, click Cancel. This wizard is only for configuring dynamic disk partitioning. Release 6.0 supports Windows basic disk partitioning and dynamic disk volumes. When you partition your drives, do not use the Windows option to upgrade to dynamic disks.
If you are performing an upgrade, ensure you fully understand the partition requirements on your new server. See the section on disk partitioning requirements in your upgrade procedure. Note that file and folder compression are not supported.
Ensuring the disk drives are formatted correctly
1 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Administrative Tools > Computer Management.
2 Under Storage, click Disk Management to view and change disk partitioning.
3 Configure all partitions (D, F, G, and other additional drives) as logical drives within extended partitions on the basic disks.
Note: The operating system resides on the C partition. This must be the only primary partition.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
460 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Format all disk drives (continued).
a. Right-click each disk that you want to configure.b. On the shortcut menu, click Create Partition.c. Follow the prompts in the Create Partition Wizard to
create an extended partition for each disk.d. Right-click each disk. e. On the shortcut menu, click Create Logical Drive.f. Follow the prompts in the Create Partition Wizard to
create logical drives for each disk.
Note: When you create the extended partitions, you must create the logical drives by specifying their size and drive letters.
When you right-click a disk, if you see Write Signature in the shortcut menu, you must choose this option to write a disk signature before you proceed with creating partitions and logical drives.
13 Install any additional drivers required for your hardware configuration.
If your server requires any additional drivers for your hardware configuration, install them.
14 Test the network connection.
Use the ping command to test both the Nortel server subnet network connections.
15 Install the Windows Server 2003 service pack.
Install the latest Windows Server 2003 service pack that is validated with Replication Server. You can obtain this information from the Contact Center Portfolio Service Packs Compatibility and Security Hotfixes Applicability List, available on the Partner Information Center Web site (www.nortel.com/pic).
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 461
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Ensuring the computer name and DNS host name match
1 After you install the operating system, log on to the server as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose Control Panel, and then click the System icon.
Result: The System Properties dialog box appears.
3 Click the Computer Name tab.
Result: The Computer Name page appears.
4 Write down the full computer name exactly as it appears, including case.
Note: Ignore the period at the end of the full computer name.
5 Click Change.
Result: The Computer Name Changes window appears.
462 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
6 Click More.
Result: The DNS Suffix and NetBIOS Computer Name window appears.
7 Compare the NetBIOS computer name on this window with the full computer name that you wrote down to determine whether the names match exactly, including case.
8 Perform one of the following tasks:
If the names match, close the windows you opened, and then continue with the configuration of your server.
If the names do not match, complete the following procedure.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 463
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Updating the computer name to match the DNS host name
This procedure is a continuation of the previous procedure.
1 Write down the NetBIOS computer name exactly as it appears.
2 From the DNS Suffix and NetBIOS Computer Name window, click Cancel.
Result: The Computer Name Changes window appears.
3 In the Computer Name box, type the NetBIOS computer name exactly as you wrote it down in step 1 on page 463, and click OK.
Note: If the only difference between the two names is the case (uppercase or lowercase letters), you cannot click OK to register the change because Windows does not recognize changes to case. In this situation, perform the following workaround:
a. Type any character at the end of the computer name to enable the OK button.
b. Click OK.
c. When the system prompts you to restart, click OK, but do not restart the server.
Result: The System Properties window appears.
d. Click Change.
464 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
e. Go back to step 3 on page 463.
Result: The system prompts you to restart.
4 Click OK.
5 Click OK to close the System Properties window.
Result: The system prompts you to restart the server.
6 Click Yes.
7 When the system restarts, log on to the server as Administrator.
Copying the Replication Server SU to drive DBefore you begin this procedure, ensure that you copy the Replication Server SU to the drive D.
1 Insert the Contact Center Release 6.0 DVD into the DVD-ROM drive.
Note: If you are installing from a network shared drive, map the DVD to a drive letter on the server.
2 Navigate to the Supplementary SU folder on the DVD or the shared drive and copy the Service Update (for example, REP_6.0_SU_01.msi) to the root of the drive D.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 465
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Step 31. Install the Replication Server software
Follow this procedure to install the Replication Server software.
ATTENTION Do not change the computer name of the Replication Server. If you must change the computer name of the Replication Server, uninstall the software, reinstall the software, and rename the computer. If you do not follow this procedure, there will be two Sybase services running at the same time, using the old computer name and the new computer name. This impacts the Replication Server functions.
466 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Installing the Replication Server
1 Log on to the Replication Server as Administrator.
2 Insert the Contact Center DVD (autorun initiates) or map to a network DVD and run Setup.exe.
Result: The Welcome to Nortel Contact Center 6.0 main menu appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 467
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
3 Select Replication Server, and click Install.
Result: The Preinstall Compliancy Checker window appears.
4 Click OK.
Result: The following window appears.
468 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
5 Click Next.
Result: The Ready to install the Program window appears.
6 Click Begin.
Result: The following window appears.
Stage 1
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 469
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Stage 2
7 At the end of Stage 2, the server restarts. Log back on to the server as Administrator.
Result: The Sybase installation continues.
Stage 3
The server restarts. The Replication Server is installed, and the Sybase installation continues.
8 Log on to the server as Administrator.
Note: The Sybase installation continues until complete. When it is complete, the InstallShield Wizard Completed window appears, and the Replication Server Setup Configuration Utility launches.
9 Click Finish in the InstallShield Wizard Completed window.
470 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
The Replication Server Configuration window appears.
10 Wait until the Expand Stable Queues window appears.
11 Perform one of the following tasks:
If you want to configure additional space for the Replication Server, enter the amount of disk space you require, and click Expand.
If you want to operate with the existing amount of disk space, click Skip Expansion.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 471
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
If you want to configure additional drives before you run this utility, click Cancel.
Result: The configuration is complete. The following windows appears.
12 Click Done.
472 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Step 32. Set up the Warm Standby configuration on the Replication Server
Follow this procedure to set up the Warm Standby configuration on the Replication Server.
Setting up the Warm Standby configuration on the Replication Server
1 On the Replication Server, from the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Replication Server > Replication Server Management.
Result: The following window appears.
.
SERVER SETUP CONFIGURATION DISABLES WARM STANDBY SET UP
Do not run the Server Setup Configuration on the Standby Server once the Warm Standby configuration is set up. Running the Server Setup Configuration on the Standby Server after setting up the Warm Standby configuration disables the switchover operation.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 473
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
2 Click Create.
Result: The following window appears.
3 In the Primary CCMS box, type the name and Nortel server subnet IP address for the Active Server, and click OK.
4 In the Secondary CCMS box, type the name and Nortel server subnet IP address for the Standby Server, and click OK.
Note: Enter names for only the Active and Standby Servers that were configured correctly on the Server Setup Configuration Site Name tab. The name for each Active and Standby Server must match the computer name configured on the server. If no Active and Standby Servers are configured to use the Warm Standby feature, or if you want to create a Warm Standby configuration at a later time, click Cancel.
Result: The following window appears.
474 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
The Warm Standby configuration takes several minutes. Several Setup windows appear, and the Initialize Standby CCMS Database window appears.
Attention: Do not click OK until you complete the backup and restore procedures in the following step.
5 Use the Database Backup utility on the Active Server to back up the Active Contact Center Manager Server database. After you complete the back up, use the Database Restore utility on the Standby Server to restore this database backup. This initializes the Standby Server database.
To back up the database to tape, proceed to “Backing up the database to tape” on page 474.
To back up the database to a remote directory, proceed to “Backing up the database to a remote directory” on page 477.
Backing up the database to tape
a. On the Active Server, insert a blank tape into the tape drive.
b. Ensure the services on the server are up.
Note: A database backup uses the CCMS HDM service. If this service is down, the database backup cannot start.
ATTENTION To initialize the Standby Server database correctly, ensure you do the following:
Back up the Active Server database only after you are prompted to do so. For more information about backing up the server, see “Back up data” on page 907. For more information about restoring the database, see “Restore data” on page 953.
Use the backup utility to initialize the Standby Server database. Do not use a previous or subsequent backup.
Ensure the backup is not overwritten by subsequent backups until after you initialize the Standby Server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 475
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
c. From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Database Backup.
Result: The Database Backup Utility window appears.
d. Select Local Tape Drive, and click Next.
e. Verify that the database tape is in the tape drive, and click Start Backup.
Result: A DOS window appears showing the progress of the database backup.
476 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
The remote backup process begins. This can take from 30 minutes to 3 hours to complete, depending on the size of your database, the speed of your computer, and network traffic. Leave the DOS window open so you can see the backup completion message.
f. Wait until the completed OK message appears in the DOS window.
g. Press Enter, type quit, and press Enter again.
Result: The Remember to schedule regular database backups window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 477
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
h. Click OK.
i. After the database backup is complete, remove the backup tape and save it.
j. Check whether any events are recorded in the event log on the client PC from which you scheduled the backup. If there are any errors, check the database backup log files on the server. These files are located at the following paths: C:\Windows\System32\Backup.log and D:\Sybase\ASE-12_5\Install\backup.log.
k. Proceed to “Restoring the database from a tape backup” on page 482.
Backing up the database to a remote directory
a. On the Active Server, ensure the services on the server are running.
Note: A database backup uses the HDM service. If this service is down, the database backup cannot start.
b. On the Active Server, select Start > Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Database Backup.
Result: The Database Backup Utility window appears.
478 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
c. Ensure Network Disk is selected, and click Next.
Result: The configuration window appears.
d. In the Account box, type the user name you recorded in the worksheet on page 266. This must be the same user name you assigned to the account on both the network computer and the server.
e. In the Password box, type the password you recorded in the worksheet on page 266. This must be the same password you assigned to the account on both the network computer and the server.
f. In the Network Path box, type the network path for the shared directory you created on the network computer. Use the following format:
computername\sharename
Refer to the computer name and share name that you recorded in the worksheet on page 266.
g. Click Next.
Result: Contact Center Manager Server is now set to back up the database from the remote directory on the network computer.
If your backup is already scheduled, the system automatically sends the database backup files to the remote directory. The following window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 479
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
h. If your backup is not scheduled, click Start Backup.
Result: The services start, and then the following window appears.
i. To start your backup, skip to step j; otherwise, click Cancel to save your settings and exit.
j. Click Start Backup.
Result: A DOS window appears showing the progress of the database backup.
480 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
The remote backup process begins. This can take from 30 minutes to 3 hours to complete, depending on the size of your database, the speed of your computer, and network traffic. Leave the DOS window open so you can see the backup completion message.
k. Wait until the completed OK message appears in the DOS window.
l. Press Enter, type quit, and press Enter again.
Result: The following window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 481
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
m. Click OK.
Result: The backup is complete.
The backup log for your backup is located atD:\Nortel\data\backup\BackupLogs\dbbackup.log.
n. Navigate to D:\Nortel\data\backup\BackupLogs\ and open the file dbbackup.log (with Notepad). If your database backup succeeded, the log contains the following lines of text:
[SERVER MESSAGE]:Backup Server: 3.42.1.1: DUMP is complete (database cbc).
[SERVER MESSAGE]:Backup Server: 3.42.1.1: DUMP is complete (database blue).
[SERVER MESSAGE]:Backup Server: 3.42.1.1: DUMP is complete (database master).
This database backup log does not have any errors or warnings.
o. Perform one of the following tasks:
If your database backup log contains the text in the previous example, your backup succeeded. Close the log file.
If your database backup log contains any messages or errors, this can indicate a problem with the backup. Navigate to the folder D:\sybase\ASE-12_5\install and open the file backup.log (with Notepad). This file can indicate the source of the problem. Retry the backup and check the backup log again. If the log still contains messages or errors, contact Nortel product support.
p. Proceed to “Restoring the database from a remote directory backup” on page 484.
482 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Restoring the database from a tape backup
a. Log on to the Standby Server as NGenSys.
b. From the Start menu, choose Programs > Standby Server > Database Restore.
Result: The Database Restore Utility window appears.
c. Select Local Tape Drive, and click Next.
d. Insert the tape containing the database backup.
Result: The system first shuts down the Standby Server services that you installed. Then the database restore begins. During this time, the Database Restore window remains visible and displays numerous status messages about the progress of the restore.
e. Wait until the Database Restore Utility window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 483
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
f. When the tape in the drive stops moving, click Start Restore to begin the database restore process.
Note: A log file is created with the following path name after the database restore is complete: D:\Nortel\data\backup\RestoreLogs\restore.log.
Result: The following window appears.
g. Click Done.
h. Eject the backup tape from the tape drive.
484 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
i. Click OK to exit the Database Restore utility.
Attention: You must wait for the Database Restore Utility window to close. It can seem like there is no activity, but the system must complete its processes and close this window. This can take up to 2 minutes to complete. Do not restart the system.
j. Proceed to step 6.
Restoring the database from a remote directory backup
a. Log on to the Standby Server as NGenSys.
b. Ensure that you have a network connection to the computer containing the remote directory backup.
c. From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Database Restore.
Result: The Database Restore Utility window appears.
d. Select Network Disk, and click Next.
Result: The following window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 485
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
e. In the Account box, type the account name for the remote backup location.
f. In the Password box, type the password for the remote backup location.
g. In the Network Path box, type the path of the remote backup location.
h. Check that the path is correct.
i. Click Next.
Result: The following window appears.
486 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
j. Click Start Restore to begin the database restore process.
Result: The database restore process begins. This can take 1 to 3 hours, depending on the amount of data and the CPU speed of the server. During this time, the Database Restore Utility window remains in view and displays numerous status messages about the progress of the restore.
Note: The restore can take longer if you store your call-by-call records for longer than the recommended interval.
k. Wait until the following window appears, indicating that the restore is complete.
Note: A log file with the following path name is created after the database restore is complete: D:\Nortel\data\backup\RestoreLogs\restore.log
l. Click Done.
Result: The following window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 487
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
m. Click OK to exit the Database Restore utility.
Attention: You must wait for the Database Restore Utility window to close. It can seem as if there is no activity, but the system must complete its processes and close this window. Nortel recommends that you do not restart the server at this time.
n. Proceed to step 6.
6 After you back up and restore the database, click OK on the Initialize Standby CCMS Database window.
Result: The Standby Server database initializes by performing the backup and restore. This can take several minutes. Then the Initialization Complete? window appears.
7 Click Yes.
Result: The Warm Standby Properties window appears.
8 Choose one of the following:
Option One—Uses the enhanced switchover procedure. For more information, see “Switchover options” on page 719.
Option Two—Requires you to configure the computer name and IP address manually. For more information, see “Switchover options” on page 719.
488 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
9 Select the Switch Over automatically checkbox, to enable the automatic switchover.
You can only enable the automatic switchover if you choose Option One.
If you choose Option Two, the Switch Over automatically checkbox is unavailable.
When you select an automatic switchover, the switchover from the Active Server to the Standby Server starts automatically when the heartbeat between the Replication Server and the Active Server fails for a duration in excess of the Alarm Switch Over/Timeout value.
Note: Automatic switchover is limited to the operation of the Standby Server and does not take into account additional application servers such as Contact Center Manager Administration, Contact Center Multimedia, and CallPilot.
10 In the Alarm/Switch Over Timeout box, type the number of seconds that the heartbeat can fail before the switchover takes place.
Attention: Ensure that you type an appropriate timeout value in this box. Too short a time can cause a switchover to start when the Active Server is unavailable for a short time, for example, if the server is restarted. The default timeout is 5 minutes. The minimum value is 30 seconds.
11 In the CCM Server Port Number box, type the port number to which the Replication Server connects during a switchover.
Note: You must type the same value that you entered in the CCMS Listener Port field. Ensure that the value you enter does not interfere with a port used by any other application.
12 Click OK.
Result: The Warm Standby configuration is complete. The Replication Server Management window appears.
13 Click OK to exit the Replication Server Management window.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 489
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
Step 33. Prepare the Standby Server to perform database backups
You must prepare the Standby Server so that it can perform scheduled database backups in the event that it becomes the Active Server. Ensure that the database backup information on the Standby Server is the same as that on the Active Server. If the Standby Server becomes the Active Server, it automatically runs any database backups that were scheduled prior to the switchover.
To prepare the Standby Server, follow the procedure “Setting up a tape backup” on page 490 or “Setting up remote directory backups” on page 492.
Repeat this procedure every time you change the database backup information on the Active Server.
For more information about backups, such as tape or network requirements, see “Back up data” on page 907.
490 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Setting up a tape backup
1 Log on to the server as NGenSys.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Standby Server > Database Backup Utility.
Result: The Database Backup Utility window appears.
3 Select Local Tape Drive, and click Next.
Result: The following window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 491
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
4 Verify that the backup tape is in the tape drive.
5 Wait until the following message appears in the DOS window.
6 Press Enter, type quit, and press Enter again.
Result: The following window appears.
7 Click OK.
Result: The backup is complete.
The backup log for your backup is located atD:\Nortel\data\backup\BackupLogs\dbbackup.log.
8 Navigate to D:\Nortel\data\backup\BackupLogs and open the file dbbackup.log file (with Notepad). If your database backup succeeds, the log contains the following lines of text:
[SERVER MESSAGE]:Backup Server: 3.42.1.1: DUMP is complete (database cbc).
[SERVER MESSAGE]:Backup Server: 3.42.1.1: DUMP is complete (database blue).
[SERVER MESSAGE]:Backup Server: 3.42.1.1: DUMP is complete (database master).
492 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
This database backup log does not have any errors or warnings.
9 Perform one of the following tasks:
If your database backup log contains the text in the previous example, your backup was successful. Close the log file.
If your database backup log contains any messages or errors, this can indicate a problem with the backup. Navigate to the folder D:\sybase\ASE-12_5\install and open the file backup.log (with Notepad). This file can indicate the source of the problem. Retry the backup and check the backup log again. If the log still contains messages or errors, contact Nortel product support.
Setting up remote directory backups
When you determine which network computer you want to use for the remote directory backup, you must create a local Windows user account on it, and then create a shared directory to contain the remote backup. Use the following basic steps, along with the documentation that came with the operating system, to correctly set up the user account and shared directory.
The following procedures do not provide detailed steps because they differ depending on the operating system on your network computer.
1 Create a new user account in Windows using the user name and password that you recorded in the worksheet.
a. From the Start menu, choose Programs > Administrative Tools > Computer Management.
b. In the left panel, navigate to Local Users and Groups > Users.
c. Right-click Users and select New User from the shortcut menu.
d. Enter the user account details in the New User window.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 493
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
2 Make the user account a member of the Administrators group.
Creating and sharing the remote directory on the network computer
1 On the network computer, create a directory (folder) to contain the database backup. Use the share name you recorded in the worksheet.
Note: The name of the remote directory must not contain any spaces. Spaces in the remote directory name cause errors.
2 Ensure file sharing is enabled on the network computer.
3 Make the directory shared, and assign the share name that you recorded in the worksheet.
.
CAUTION
Risk of database backup failure
When you create the new user account in Windows, you must clear the check box for User must change password at next logon. If this check box is selected, Standby Server cannot connect to the remote computer.
494 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
4 For the shared directory permissions, grant Full Control access rights to the user account that you created in the previous procedure.
Result: The network computer is now set up for remote directory backups. You must now prepare the server using the following procedures.
5 Record the computer name of the network computer in the worksheet.
Prepare Contact Center Manager Server for remote directory backupOn your Standby Server, you must create a local Windows user account that is identical to the one you created on the network computer. You then add the account to the policy Log on as a service. To complete preparation of the server, you type the account information and the path of the remote directory in Contact Center Manager Server and turn off the tape backup option. See the following detailed procedures.
Setting up the local Windows user account on the Standby Server
1 Log on to the Standby Server as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Administrative Tools > Computer Management.
Result: The Computer Management window appears.
3 In the left panel, navigate to Local Users and Groups > Users.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 495
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
4 Right-click Users and select New User from the shortcut menu.
Result: The New User window appears.
5 In the User Name box, type the same user name you assigned to the account on the network computer.
6 In the Password box, type the same password you assigned to the account on the network computer.
7 In the Confirm Password box, type the password again.
8 Clear the check box for User must change password at next logon.
Note: If you do not remove this check mark, the restore can fail because the Standby Server cannot access the network computer.
9 Click Create.
10 Click Close.
11 In the left panel of the Computer Management window, click the Users folder to display its contents in the right panel.
12 In the right panel, right-click the new user you just created, and select Properties.
Result: The Properties window for the user appears.
13 Click the Member Of tab.
496 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
14 Click Add.
Result: The Select Groups window appears.
15 In the Name column, click Administrators, and click Add.
Result: The group appears at the bottom of the list.
16 Click OK.
17 When the Member Of tab reappears, click Apply and then click Close.
18 Close all windows that remain open.
Setting up the local security settings
1 On the server, select Start > Administrative Tools > Local Security Policy.
Result: The Local Security Settings window appears.
2 In the left panel, navigate to Local Policies > User Rights Assignment.
3 Click User Rights Assignment to view the Local Security Settings in the right panel.
4 In the right panel, double-click Log on as a service.
Result: The Log on as Service window appears.
5 Click Add User or Group.
Result: The Select Users or Groups window appears.
6 Click Advanced.
7 Click Find Now.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 497
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
8 In the Name column, select the user account that you just created, and then click OK.
Result: The account appears in the text box.
9 Close the Local Security Settings window.
Completing the remote backup settings on the Standby Server
1 On the Standby Server, select Start > Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Database Backup.
Result: The Database Backup Utility window appears.
498 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
2 Ensure Network Disk is selected, and click Next.
Result: The configuration window appears.
3 In the Account box, type the user name you recorded in the worksheet on page 266. This must be the same user name you assigned to the account on both the network computer and the server.
4 In the Password box, type the password you recorded in the worksheet on page 266. This must be the same password you assigned to the account on both the network computer and the server.
5 In the Network Path box, type the network path for the shared directory you created on the network computer. Use the following format:
computername\sharename
Refer to the computer name and share name that you recorded in the worksheet on page 266.
6 Click Next.
Result: Contact Center Manager Server is now set to back up the database from the remote directory on the network computer.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 499
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
7 If your backup is already scheduled, the system automatically sends the database backup files to the remote directory.
Result: The following window appears.
8 If your backup is not scheduled, click Cancel to save your settings and exit.
9 Click Start Backup.
Result: A DOS window appears showing the progress of the database backup.
500 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
The remote backup process begins. This can take from 30 minutes to 3 hours to complete, depending on the size of your database, the speed of your computer, and network traffic. Leave the DOS window open so you can see the backup completion message.
10 Wait until the completed OK message appears in the DOS window.
11 Press Enter, type quit, and press Enter again.
Result: The following window appears.
12 Click OK.
Result: The backup is complete.
The backup log for your backup is located atD:\Nortel\data\backup\BackupLogs\dbbackup.log.
13 Navigate to D:\Nortel\data\backup\BackupLogs\ and open the file dbbackup.log (with Notepad). If your database backup succeeded, the log contains the following lines of text:
[SERVER MESSAGE]:Backup Server: 3.42.1.1: DUMP is complete (database cbc).
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 501
January 2008 Install and configure the Standby Server
[SERVER MESSAGE]:Backup Server: 3.42.1.1: DUMP is complete (database blue).
[SERVER MESSAGE]:Backup Server: 3.42.1.1: DUMP is complete (database master).
This database backup log does not have any errors or warnings.
14 Perform one of the following tasks:
If your database backup log contains the text in the previous example, your backup succeeded. Close the log file.
If your database backup log contains any messages or errors, this can indicate a problem with the backup. Navigate to the folder D:\sybase\ASE-12_5\install and open the file backup.log (with Notepad). This file can indicate the source of the problem. Retry the backup and check the backup log again. If the log still contains messages or errors, contact Nortel product support.
502 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and configure the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 503
C h a p t e r 6
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
In this chapterOverview 504
Section A: Prepare the Replication Server 505
Section B: Preinstallation 529
Section C: Migrate the Active Server to the Standby Server 601
Section D: Post-installation 659
Section E: Set up and test Warm Standby 693
504 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Overview
Follow the procedures in this section to set up the Standby Server in an existing Contact Center Manager Server setup. This section is based on the assumption that you did not configure your Standby Server details during the initial installation.
You must restart your server during this procedure. You briefly lose service on your server when you:
enable the Standby Server on the License Manager tab
configure the Standby Server with the computer name and IP address of the Replication Server
ATTENTION Do not perform unsupervised maintenance on the Contact Center Manager Server (Active or Standby). Nortel recommends that the Contact Center Manager Server administrator supervise all maintenance activities on the server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 505
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Section A: Prepare the Replication Server
In this sectionStep 1. Install Windows Server 2003 on the Replication Server 506
Step 2. Install the Replication Server software 520
Step 3. Verify Standby Server feature is enabled 527
506 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Step 1. Install Windows Server 2003 on the Replication Server
If you have not already installed Windows Server 2003 on the Replication Server, follow this checklist to do so.
ATTENTION Nortel recommends the Replication Server be configured on a Nortel server subnet and not on an ELAN subnet.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
1 Set up your RAID configuration.
If your server uses RAID, ensure the RAID configuration is set up according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
2 Obtain the Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM.
Use either Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition or Enterprise Edition.
Do not use Windows Server 2003 Datacenter or Web editions.
3 Start the Windows Server 2003 installation.
Start installing Windows Server 2003 according to the instructions supplied with the operating system. Follow the on-screen instructions to create a partition for the operating system. This partition must reside on drive C of your server on an NTFS partition.
The Windows Server 2003 installation copies the operating system files to the installation folders on the new partition. When the copy process is complete, the system restarts. The Windows Server 2003 Setup wizard appears.
4 Complete the Windows Server 2003 Setup wizard.
Use the following guidelines in this table to complete the Windows Server 2003 Setup wizard.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 507
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Regional Settings window
Complete this window as required for your site.
Personalize Your Software window
Complete this window as required for your site.
Licensing Modes window
Nortel recommends that you use the Per server licensing mode and that you have a minimum of five concurrent connections. This is the default.
Computer Name and Administrator Password window
Enter the computer name and administrator password.
Pay close attention to the naming rules for the computer name as described in the Contact Center Manager Planning and Engineering Guide (no spaces, hyphens, or underscores are allowed).
Date and Time Settings window
Complete this window as required for your site. Make sure the correct time zone is set for the server.
Modem Dialing Information window
Complete this window as required for your site.
This window appears if you have a modem attached to the server. If this window does not appear, proceed to the next window.
Networking Settings window
After the system installs the networking components and the status bar finishes scrolling, select Custom settings.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
508 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Networking Components window
Use this window to select networking components and set up the TCP/IP parameters for the Nortel server subnet network interface cards.
Networking components selection
After detecting the first network card, the Windows Server 2003 Setup wizard displays a list of networking components for that card. For each network card, the following three components are selected by default. Do not deactivate any of the following default networking components:
Client for Microsoft Networks
File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks
Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)Configuring TCP/IP parameters for Nortel server subnet
Complete the following steps for each card that the Setup wizard detects on your server.
1 Click Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and then click Properties.
2 In the General tab, type the IP information required for the card (for example, IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway). Consult with the network administrator for the site.
3 To complete the installation successfully, you must type an IP address for each network interface card. If you do not yet have the correct IP addresses for the cards, then type dummy IP addresses now. Remember to reconfigure the cards with the correct addresses later.
4 From the General tab, click Advanced. Use the DNS and WINS tabs to type information about DNS and WINS servers. Consult with the network administrator for the site.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 509
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Workgroup or Computer domain window
Adding computer to a workgroup
1 Select No, this computer is not on a network, or is on a network without a domain.
2 In the Workgroup or computer domain box, type the workgroup name.
You can add the server to a domain after you install Contact Center Manager Server.
5 Log on to Windows Server 2003.
After the Windows Server 2003 Setup wizard installation of the operating system is complete, you must configure the operating system before you install Standby Server. Remove the CD-ROM.
When you log on to Windows Server 2003 for the first time, the Windows Server 2003 Manage Your Server wizard appears. This wizard is not necessary for Standby Server functionality. Proceed to the next step (Step 6) to configure additional server software.
Tip:
Select the Don’t display this screen on startup option.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
510 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
6 Add or remove programs.
Use Add or Remove Programs to configure your Windows Server 2003 operating system.
Using Add or Remove Programs
1 Go to Start > Control Panel.
Note: Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel, if you use the Classic Start menu.
2 Double-click Add or Remove Programs.
3 Click Add or Remove Windows Components to view a list of the installed components.
4 Click Application Server, and then click Details to deselect IIS on the components list. IIS is an subcomponent of Application Server and is selected by default.
5 Select Management and Monitoring Tools, and then click Details.
6 Select the check box beside SNMP. If it is selected already, SNMP is installed.
7 Click OK to return to the Add or Remove Windows Components property page.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 511
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
7 Check the virtual memory settings.
Verify that the virtual memory on the server is RAM size times 1.5. Set both the initial and maximum size to this value. If the virtual memory is smaller, increase it to RAM size times 1.5. Nortel recommends that the paging file be located on drive C.
Verifying the virtual memory on the server
1 Go to Start > Control Panel.
Note: Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel, if you use the Classic Start menu.
2 Click System.
3 On the General tab, take note of the RAM size.
4 Click the Advanced tab, and then click Performance Settings.
5 Click the Advanced tab again.
6 Click Change to view and make changes to the virtual memory settings.
7 Restart the server if prompted.
For a system with 512 MB of RAM, the default minimum paging file size is 768 MB and the default maximum paging file size is 1 GB. To optimize performance, Microsoft recommends that the minimum paging file size equal the maximum paging file size. Nortel recommends that you set both the minimum and maximum paging file sizes to RAM size times 1.5.
If any of the following conditions apply, the system complete memory dump is not generated when the system stops unexpectedly:
Multiple paging files are distributed over separate disks.
The paging file is not located on drive C.
Physical RAM size is larger than 2 GB.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
512 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Check the virtual memory settings (continued).
Due to the limitations presented by large paging files, Nortel recommends the following:
Set the minimum and maximum paging file sizes to RAM size times 1.5, up to a maximum paging file size of 4 GB.
Add the paging file to the drive C partition only. Do not create paging files on database partitions or other partitions.
8 Configure the modem connection for remote access.
Configure a direct serial connection for the modem hardware connected to your server. The modem uses COM 1.
Configuring a direct serial connection
1 Go to Start > Control Panel.
Note: Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel, if you use the Classic Start menu.
2 Double-click Phone and Modem Options.
3 Click the Modems tab, and then click Add.
Note: If you have not configured a modem on the server, the Location Information screen appears first. You must completed the Local Information screen before the Modems tab can be accessed.
4 Follow the instructions in the Add or Remove Hardware Wizard to detect the modem and install the driver.
9 Configure the operating system for remote access.
Configure an incoming connection on the server to allow for remote support through the dial-up modem.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 513
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
10 Check the bindings order for the Nortel server subnet and virtual adapters.
Attention: You must complete the procedure in this section if you have more than one network card. If you do not have the correct binding order, you may encounter problems when you want to restore your database.
You only require one network interface card. However, if you have more than one network interface card, you must configure the bindings order of the network interface cards so that the Nortel server subnet card is first, then the virtual adapters for remote access.
Configuring the bindings order of the network interface cards
1 Go to Start > Control Panel.
Note: Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel, if you use the Classic Start menu.
2 Double-click Network Connections.
3 Click the Nortel server subnet and then from the Advanced menu, click Advanced Settings.
4 In the Connections box, ensure the Nortel server subnet connection is listed first. If it is not first, adjust the order.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
514 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
11 Check the serial port configuration.
Use the Windows Device Manager to check that the required serial ports exist. You require COM1 to provide remote support, unless you are using the USB port or VPN for remote access.
Checking the required serial ports
1 Go to Start > Control Panel.
Note: Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel, if you use the Classic Start menu.
2 Click System, and then click the Hardware tab.
3 Click Device Manager, and then double-click Ports (COM & LPT) to view the communications ports.
4 For COM1, set the base I/O Port Address to 3F8 and the IRQ to 4.
If a required port does not exist:
1 Ensure that the port is installed.
2 Go to the BIOS and correct the address of the missing port.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 515
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
12 Format all disk drives.
Ensure that the disk drives on the server are formatted according to the requirements for Contact Center Standby Server Release 6.0.
If the Welcome to the Write Signature and Upgrade Disk wizard appears, click Cancel. This wizard is only for configuring dynamic disk partitioning. Release 6.0 supports Windows basic disk partitioning and dynamic disk volumes. When you partition your drives, do not use the Windows option to upgrade to dynamic disks.
If you are performing an upgrade, ensure you fully understand the partition requirements on your new server. See the section on disk partitioning requirements in your upgrade procedure. Note that file and folder compression are not supported.
Ensuring the disk drives are formatted correctly
1 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Administrative Tools > Computer Management.
2 Under Storage, click Disk Management to view and change disk partitioning.
3 Configure all partitions (D, F, G, and other additional drives) as logical drives within extended partitions on the basic disks.
Note: The operating system resides on the C partition. This must be the only primary partition.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
516 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Ensuring the computer name and DNS host name match
1 After you install the operating system, log on to the Replication Server as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose Control Panel, and then click the System icon.
Result: The System Properties dialog box appears.
a. Right-click each disk that you want to configure.b. On the shortcut menu, click Create Partition.c. Follow the prompts in the Create Partition Wizard to
create an extended partition for each disk.d. Right-click each disk. e. On the shortcut menu, click Create Logical Drive.f. Follow the prompts in the Create Partition Wizard to
create logical drives for each disk.
Note: When you create the extended partitions, you must create the logical drives by specifying their size and drive letters.
When you right-click a disk, if you see Write Signature in the shortcut menu, you must choose this option to write a disk signature before you proceed with creating partitions and logical drives.
13 Install any additional drivers required for your hardware configuration.
If your server requires any additional drivers for your hardware configuration, install them.
14 Test the network connection.
Use the ping command to test both the Nortel server subnet network connections.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 517
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
3 Click the Computer Name tab.
Result: The Computer Name page appears.
4 Write down the full computer name exactly as it appears, including case.
Note: Ignore the period at the end of the full computer name.
5 Click Change.
Result: The Computer Name Changes window appears.
6 Click More.
Result: The DNS Suffix and NetBIOS Computer Name window appears.
518 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
7 Compare the NetBIOS computer name on this window with the full computer name that you wrote down to determine whether the names match exactly, including case.
8 Perform one of the following tasks:
If the names match, close the windows you opened, and then continue with the configuration of your server.
If the names do not match, complete the following procedure.
Updating the computer name to match the DNS host name
This procedure is a continuation of the previous procedure.
1 Write down the NetBIOS computer name exactly as it appears.
2 From the DNS Suffix and NetBIOS Computer Name window, click Cancel.
Result: The Computer Name Changes window appears.
3 In the Computer Name box, type the NetBIOS computer name exactly as you wrote it down in step 1, and click OK.
Note: If the only difference between the two names is the case (uppercase or lowercase letters), you cannot click OK to register the change because Windows does not recognize changes to case. In this situation, perform the following workaround:
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 519
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
a. Type any character at the end of the computer name to enable the OK button.
b. Click OK.
c. When the system prompts you to restart, click OK, but do not restart the server.
Result: The System Properties window appears.
d. Click Properties.
e. Go back to step 3 on page 518.
Result: The system prompts you to restart.
4 Click OK.
5 Click OK to close the System Properties window.
Result: The system prompts you to restart the server.
6 Click Yes.
7 When the system restarts, log on to the server as Administrator.
Copying the Replication Server SU to drive D
Before you begin, ensure that you copy the Replication Server SU to drive D.
1 Insert the Contact Center Release 6.0 DVD into the DVD-ROM drive.
Note: If you are installing from a network shared drive, map the DVD to a drive letter on the server.
2 Navigate to the Supplementary SU folder on the DVD or the shared drive and copy the Service Update (for example, REP_6.0_SU_01.msi) to the root of the drive D.
520 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Step 2. Install the Replication Server software
Follow this procedure to install the Replication Server software.
ATTENTION Do not change the computer name of the Replication Server. If you must change the computer name of the Replication Server, uninstall the software, reinstall the software, and rename the computer. If you do not follow this procedure, there will be two Sybase services running at the same time, using the old computer name and the new computer name. This impacts the Replication Server functions.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 521
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Installing the Replication Server
1 Log on to the Replication Server as Administrator.
2 Insert the Contact Center DVD (autorun initiates) or map to a network DVD and run Setup.exe.
Result: The Welcome to Nortel Contact Center 6.0 main menu appears.
522 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
3 Select Replication Server, and click Install.
Result: The Preinstall Compliancy Checker window appears.
4 Click OK.
Result: The following window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 523
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
5 Click Next.
Result: The Ready to install the Program window appears.
6 Click Begin.
Result: The following window appears.
Stage 1
524 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Stage 2
7 At the end of Stage 2, the server restarts. Log back on to the server as Administrator.
Result: The Sybase installation continues.
Stage 3
The server restarts. The Replication Server is installed, and the Sybase installation continues.
8 Log on to the server as Administrator.
Note: The Sybase installation continues until complete. When it is complete, the InstallShield Wizard Completed window appears, and the Replication Server Setup Configuration Utility launches.
9 Click Finish in the InstallShield Wizard Completed window.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 525
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
The Replication Server Configuration window appears.
10 Wait until the Expand Stable Queues window appears.
11 Perform one of the following tasks:
If you want to configure additional space for the Replication Server, enter the amount of disk space you require, and click Expand.
If you want to operate with the existing amount of disk space, click Skip Expansion.
526 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
If you want to configure additional drives before you run this utility, click Cancel.
Result: The configuration is complete. The following windows appears.
12 Click Done.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 527
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Step 3. Verify Standby Server feature is enabled
Follow this procedure to Verify that the Standby Server feature is enabled on the License Manager tab.
Verifying the Standby Server feature is enabled on the License Manager tab
1 On the Active Server, log on as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Server Setup Configuration.
3 Select the License Manager tab.
4 Select the Standby Server check box.
5 Click on another tab.
Result: The Database Replication tab appears on the window.
528 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
6 Click the Database Replication tab.
7 Enter the name of the Replication Server. Ensure that the computer name appears in all uppercase.
8 Enter the IP address for the Replication Server.
9 Enter the CCMS Listener Port Number, or accept the default value. If the value is different from the default, you must type the new value on the Replication Server.
10 Select the Active option, and click OK.
11 Run the Server Setup Configuration Utility and restart the server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 529
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Section B: Preinstallation
In this sectionStep 4. Read the relevant documentation for an upgrade 530
Step 5. Gather the materials required for an upgrade 531
Step 6. Install the latest Service Update and any required patches 532
Step 7. Perform a database integrity check on the Active Server 533
Step 8. Check the disk partition configuration on the Active Server 536
Step 9. Create a backup of the original 6.0 database 538
Step 10. Create a Platform Recovery Disk on the Active Server 551
Step 11. Prepare the Standby Server for Release 6.0 (optional) 555
Step 12. Record and check for required installation information 556
Step 13. Install Windows Server 2003 562
Step 14. Ensure the computer name and DNS host name match 574
Step 15. Configure the operating system for remote access 578
Step 16. Install pcAnywhere version 11.5 on the Standby Server 585
Step 17. Copy the latest Service Update and Platform Recovery Disk 598
Step 18. Configuring the server 599
530 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Step 4. Read the relevant documentation for an upgrade
Perform the following tasks:
Read this chapter to understand the steps involved in a migration.
Check for any updated customer documentation on the Nortel Web site (www.nortel.com).
Read the Contact Center Manager Planning and Engineering Guide. This guide provides information about the server specifications for the Active and Contact Center Manager Server servers and Replication Server.
Review the Nortel Contact Center Installer’s Roadmap on the Partner Information Center Web site (www.nortel.com/pic).
Read the readme files for each application and patch you plan to install. You can find the readme files for the applications on the DVD in the various application folders. For example, E:\CCMS contains the readme file for Contact Center Manager Server and E:\CCMSU contains the readme file for the Server Utility.
ATTENTION Before you install the Standby Server software, you must read the Nortel Contact Center Manager Server Technical Requirements and Operating System Configuration Guide.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 531
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Step 5. Gather the materials required for an upgrade
You need the following materials before starting your upgrade.
Item Purpose and details
tape drive and tape driver software
(required only if you are backing up your database to a tape drive, rather than a remote directory on a network computer)
Use tape drive to back up the database on the Active Server and restore it on the reconfigured server.
blank tapes or data cartridges
(required only if you are backing up your database to a tape drive, rather than a remote directory on a network computer)
Use a blank tape to store the Active Server’s database using the database backup procedure. The blank tape must be the correct type for the tape drive that you are using. The tape capacity must be large enough to contain the database backup.
blank preformatted disk Use a disk to create a Platform Recovery Disk that contains the Active Server setup record and database configuration.
Contact Center DVD-ROM Use to install Release 6.0 of Contact Center Manager Server software on the server.
license file This file controls the installed software features.
Windows Server 2003 installation CD
The server already has Windows Server 2003 installed. Ensure you have the documentation provided by Microsoft available on-site when you configure the operating system.
532 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Step 6. Install the latest Service Update and any required patches
Before you install the Contact Center Standby Server software, copy the latest Service Update (SU) and Service Update Supplement (SUS) to the root of drive D on the Standby Server.
The Contact Center DVD contains an SU shipped with your software. You must check for a more recent SU on the Enterprise Solutions PEP Library Web site at www.nortel.com/espl. If the Web site contains a more recent SU, copy it to the drive D on the server.
Copying the Service Update to the server
1 Insert the Contact Center DVD into the DVD-ROM drive.
Note: If you are installing from a remote DVD or a network shared drive, map the DVD to a drive letter on the server. The path name of the drive or directory that contains the copy of the DVD cannot contain spaces or underscores.
2 Navigate to the Supplementary SU folder on the DVD (for example, CCMS_6.0_SU_92.msi), and copy the SU and the corresponding readme file to the root of the server drive D.
ATTENTION The installation program automatically installs the SU and SUS for Contact Center Manager Server located at the root of drive D during installation of the Contact Center Manager Server software.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 533
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Step 7. Perform a database integrity check on the Active Server
To ensure the integrity of the databases on the server, Nortel recommends that you perform a database integrity check before you create a backup of your database. This step is highly recommended to capture any database consistency problems.
Remember that a database integrity check can take from 1 to 3 hours, and that the server must be offline during the check. You can perform the check ahead of time, but make it as close as possible to the time of the database backup.
Follow the next procedure to perform a database integrity check on the server.
Performing a database integrity check on the Active Server
1 Log on to the Active Server as NGenSys.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Migration.
Result: The Platform Migration Utility window appears.
534 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
3 Click Database Integrity Check.
Result: The following window appears.
4 Click OK.
Result: The system displays messages as it checks the status of each service running on the server. All Standby Server services are shut down.
5 Wait until the following window appears.
6 Click Accept to start the database integrity check.
Result: The following window appears.
7 Click OK.
Result: A DOS window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 535
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
8 Do not close this window. The database integrity check takes from 1 to 3 hours to complete. You may not see any activity on the screen, but you should notice continuous disk activity.
9 Wait until the following window appears.
10 Click OK.
11 Click Close to close the Platform Migration Utility window.
12 Check the database check log (C:\DbChk.log) for database errors. To do this, use a text editor (such as Notepad).
When you check the log file, search for key words such as ERROR or MSG. Contact your Nortel customer support representative for any detected database error. Do not put the server into service if any detected database errors exist, even though the server seems to operate normally.
13 Restart the server to start the Standby Server services required to perform the backup.
536 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Step 8. Check the disk partition configuration on the Active Server
Record the disk partition configuration of the Active Server so you can use it to determine how to partition your Standby Server.
Checking the disk partition configuration on the Active Server
1 On the Active Server, go to Start > Administrative Tools > Computer Management > Disk Management.
Note: Go to Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Computer Management > Disk Administrator, if you use the Classic Start menu.
2 Record the following information on the “Disk partition configuration worksheet” on page 537:
the displayed disk number
the logical disk drive letter assignments
the size of each partitioned disk
3 Ensure that the Standby Server has enough disk space to create the required partitions.
The following table presents an example of disk partition configuration.
Disk number
Disk drive letter assignment
Disk partition size(stand-alone)
Disk partition size(co-resident)
Disk 0 C 16 GB 32 GB
Disk 0 D 4096 MB NTFS 4096 MB NTFS
DVD-ROM 0 E n/a n/a
Disk 1 F 32 GB 32 GB
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 537
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Disk partition configuration worksheet
Check the RAM size on the Active Server
The total physical RAM of the reconfigured server must meet the requirements for a Contact Center Manager Server Release 6.0 server. For more information about RAM requirements, see the Contact Center Manager Planning and Engineering Guide.
Checking the RAM size on the Active Server
1 Go to Start > Control Panel, and double-click the System icon.
Result: The System Properties window appears, with the General tab displayed.
2 Record the RAM size on the RAM size worksheet.
RAM size worksheet
Disk numberDisk drive letter assignment Disk partition size
Item Fill in the required information
RAM size
538 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Step 9. Create a backup of the original 6.0 database
Create a backup of the database of the server. You can use the backup to recreate the Standby Server if the upgrade fails. The server can remain online while you back up the database. However, consider the following information before you proceed with the backup:
An online backup adds an additional load to the server and reduces overall contact center performance. Nortel recommends that you perform backups during non-peak traffic hours. Do not change any contact center configuration or user setup information during the database backup operation.
If your server continues to receive calls after the backup, some call statistics and data pegging will be missing from the backup. If it is important that all call statistic and data pegging be migrated to your Contact Center Manager Server server, take the Active Server offline immediately following the database backup. Ensure that the server remains offline until you install Contact Center Manager Server.
Options for database backup
You can back up and restore the database using either a tape or a remote directory on a network computer.
1. If you want to use a network drive for database backup, proceed to “Back up the database to a remote directory” on page 541.
2. If you want to use a tape drive for database backup, proceed to “Back up the database to a tape” on page 539.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 539
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Back up the database to a tape
Follow this procedure to back up the database to a tape. To help calculate the speed of database backups to tape, perform a trial run of the backup at least several days before the upgrade. Keep in mind that the time required to do a database backup can vary between the trial run and the actual backup day.
To see sample time measurements for tape backup and restore, see “Requirements for backups” on page 917.
To calculate the capacity requirements for tape or remote directory backups, see “Calculate the capacity requirements for database backups” on page 924.
Backing up the database to tape
1 On the Active Server, insert a blank tape into the tape drive.
2 Ensure the services on the server are up.
Note: A database backup uses the CCMS HDM service. If this service is down, the database backup cannot start.
3 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Database Backup.
Result: The Database Backup Utility window appears.
4 Select Local Tape Drive, and click Next.
540 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
5 Verify that the database tape is in the tape drive, and click Start Backup.
Result: A DOS window appears showing the progress of the database backup.
The remote backup process begins. This can take from 30 minutes to 3 hours to complete, depending on the size of your database, the speed of your computer, and network traffic. Leave the DOS window open so you can see the backup completion message.
6 Wait until the completed OK message appears in the DOS window.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 541
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
7 Press Enter, type quit, and press Enter again.
Result: The Remember to schedule regular database backups window appears.
8 Click OK.
9 After the database backup is complete, remove the backup tape and save it.
10 Check whether any events are recorded in the event log on the client PC from which you scheduled the backup. If there are any errors, check the database backup log files on the server. These files are located at the following paths: C:\Windows\System32\Backup.log and D:\Sybase\ASE-12_5\Install\backup.log.
Back up the database to a remote directory
Follow this procedure to back up the database to a remote directory. To help calculate the speed of database backups to a remote directory, perform a trial run of the backup at least several days before the upgrade. Keep in mind that the time required to do a database backup can vary between the trial run and the actual backup day due to several factors.
For a list of the variables that can affect the speed of your backup and restore, see “Backup speeds” on page 912.
To help you calculate space requirements before you back up the database, see details about the DBSpace utility in the section “Calculate the capacity requirements for database backups” on page 924.
ATTENTION Before you back up your database to a remote directory, check your remote folder configuration by following the guidelines listed in the section “Test the remote directory backup and restore configuration” on page 944.
542 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Set up the database backup to a remote directoryFirst, identify the computer onto which you are going to back up the database. You must then set up the connection between the server and the remote directory.
The following section explains the requirements for the remote computer and network.
Remote computer requirementsThe remote computer for your database backup can be either a server or a workstation that meets the following requirements:
The operating system must be Windows Server 2003, Windows 2000 Server, Windows 2000 Professional, or Windows XP Professional.
The drive partition for the remote directory must be NTFS.
The directory for the backup must have enough space available to hold the backup files.
Network requirementsThe network must meet the following requirements:
The remote computer must be on the same network as the server.
The network connection must be through the Nortel server subnet. Ensure that the Nortel server subnet has low traffic during the scheduled time for the database backup. If you run the backup when Nortel server subnet traffic is high, the database backup can take longer than planned.
Files created during remote directory backupThe remote backup process creates the following files.
File Description
blue.dmp Contains the contents of the Blue database.
cbc.dmp Contains the contents of the CBC database.
master.dmp Contains the contents of the Master database.
miginfo.txt Contains configuration details.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 543
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Worksheet for setting up a remote directory backupSet up an account, password, and a shared directory on the network computer in preparation for a remote directory backup. Create names for these items ahead of time and record them in the following table.
rbackup.txt Includes details about the user name, password, and path used when you perform a database backup to a remote directory.
dbseg.txt Contains information about the data and log segments in your database.
dbdvc.txt Contains information about the size and location of your database files.
ItemFill in the required information
User name
Create a name and assign it to two user accounts—one on the network computer and the other on the server. The names must be identical on both computers.
User account password
Create a password and assign it to the two accounts described in the previous step. The passwords must be identical on both computers.
Computer name of the network computer
Obtain and record this name. This is required to back up the database.
Share name for the remote directory
Create and assign a share name to the directory on the remote computer. The share name can be the directory name (this is the default in Windows) or a different name.
544 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Prepare the network computer for remote directory backupAfter you determine which network computer to use for the remote directory backup, you must create a local Windows user account on it and then create a shared directory to contain the remote backup. Use the steps outlined in the following procedure, along with the documentation that came with the operating system, to correctly set up the user account and shared directory.
The following procedures do not provide detailed steps because they differ depending on the operating system on your network computer.
Creating the local Windows user account on the network computer
1 Create a new user account in Windows using the user name and password that you recorded in the worksheet.
a. From the Start menu, choose Programs > Administrative Tools > Computer Management.
b. In the left panel, navigate to Local Users and Groups > Users.
c. Right-click Users and select New User from the shortcut menu.
d. Enter the user account details in the New User window.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 545
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
2 Make the user account a member of the Administrators group.
Creating and sharing the remote directory on the network computer
1 On the network computer, create a directory (folder) to contain the database backup. Use the share name you recorded in the worksheet.
Note: The name of the remote directory must not contain any spaces. Spaces in the remote directory name cause errors.
2 Ensure file sharing is enabled on the network computer.
3 Make the directory shared, and assign the share name that you recorded in the worksheet.
4 For the shared directory permissions, grant Full Control access rights to the user account that you created in the previous procedure.
Result: The network computer is now set up for remote directory backups. You must now prepare the server using the following procedures.
5 Record the computer name of the network computer in the worksheet.
Prepare the server for remote directory backupOn the server, create a local Windows user account that is identical to the account you created on the network computer. Then add the account to the policy Log on as a service. The following procedure provides the detailed steps.
Setting up the local Windows user account on the Standby Server
1 Log on to the Standby Server as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Administrative Tools > Computer Management.
Result: The Computer Management window appears.
.
CAUTION
Risk of database backup failure
When you create the new user account in Windows, you must clear the check box for User must change password at next logon. If this check box is selected, Standby Server cannot connect to the remote computer.
546 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
3 In the left panel, navigate to Local Users and Groups > Users.
4 Right-click Users and select New User from the shortcut menu.
Result: The New User window appears.
5 In the User Name box, type the same user name you assigned to the account on the network computer.
6 In the Password box, type the same password you assigned to the account on the network computer.
7 In the Confirm Password box, type the password again.
8 Clear the check box for User must change password at next logon.
Note: If you do not remove this check mark, the restore can fail because the Standby Server cannot access the network computer.
9 Click Create.
10 Click Close.
11 In the left panel of the Computer Management window, click the Users folder to display its contents in the right panel.
12 In the right panel, right-click the new user you just created, and select Properties.
Result: The Properties window for the user appears.
13 Click the Member Of tab.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 547
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
14 Click Add.
Result: The Select Groups window appears.
15 In the Name column, click Administrators, and click Add.
Result: The group appears at the bottom of the list.
16 Click OK.
17 When the Member Of tab reappears, click Apply and then click Close.
18 Close all windows that remain open.
Logging on as a service
1 On the Standby Server, select Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Local Security Policy.
Result: The Local Security Settings window appears.
2 In the left panel, navigate to Local Policies > User Rights Assignment. Click User Rights Assignment to view its contents in the right panel.
548 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
3 From the right panel, double-click Log on as a service.
Result: The Log on as a Service window appears.
4 Click Add User or Group.
Result: The Select Users or Groups window appears.
5 Click Advanced.
6 Click Find Now.
7 In the Name column, select the user account that you just created, and then click OK.
Result: The account appears in the text box.
8 Close the Local Security Settings window.
Backing up the database on the server
1 Ensure the services on the server are up.
Note: A database backup uses the HDM service. If this service is down, the database backup cannot start.
ATTENTION Before you back up your database to a remote directory, check your remote folder configuration by following the guidelines listed in the section “Test the remote directory backup and restore configuration” on page 944.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 549
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Database Backup.
Result: The Database Backup Utility window appears.
3 Select Network Disk, and click Next.
Result: The following window appears.
4 In the Account box, type the account name for the remote backup location.
5 In the Password box, type the password for the remote backup location.
6 In the Network Path box, type the path of the remote backup location.
550 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
7 Click Next.
Result: The Database Backup Utility progress window appears.
8 Click Start backup.
Result: The Standby Server services are started. A DOS window displays the progress.
9 When the backup of database is complete, close the DOS window.
Result: The Database Backup Utility progress window appears.
10 Click Exit.
Result: The Remember to schedule regular database backups window appears.
11 Click OK.
Note: If you plan to use tape backups for all future backups, and you do not plan to reuse the remote directory for future backups, delete the user account you created for this purpose after you complete the upgrade. You must unshare the directory on the network computer.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 551
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Step 10. Create a Platform Recovery Disk on the Active Server
Create a Platform Recovery Disk to gather required information from the server, such as its setup record and database configuration. The Platform Recovery Disk contains the file MigInfo.txt, which includes important details about how the server is configured.
Even if a Platform Recovery Disk is available, ensure you create a new one to include the latest PEPs and SUs.
Creating a Platform Recovery Disk
1 Log on to the Active Server as NGenSys.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Server Setup Configuration.
Result: The following window appears.
552 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
3 Click the Utilities tab.
Result: The following window appears.
4 In the Create Platform Recovery Disk section, perform one of the following tasks:
a. Ensure the path shows A:\.
b. Insert a blank floppy disk in drive A.
c. Click Create Disk.
Result: The following message appears.
d. Click OK.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 553
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
To save the Platform Recovery Disk to a remote directory:
a. Map a network drive to the remote directory.
Note: The name of the remote directory into which you save the Platform Recovery Disk must not contain any spaces. Spaces in the remote directory name cause errors.
b. Click Browse, and then navigate to the mapped network drive.
c. Select the drive, and then click OK.
d. Click Create Disk.
Result: The system creates the Platform Recovery Disk. The following window appears.
e. Click OK.
Note: The system also checks for database segmentation problems. If it finds any, a message indicating the type of problem appears.
If the system finds a database data segmentation overlapping problem, it advises you to contact Nortel customer support before you proceed with the migration procedure. After customer support fixes the problem, you must create a new Platform Recovery Disk before you proceed with the migration.
If the system finds a database log segmentation overlapping problem, you can still use the Platform Recovery Disk that you just created. The system prompts you to shut down the Contact Center Manager Server services so it can fix the problem. Follow the on-screen prompt to shut down the services.
5 If you used a floppy disk, remove it from the drive, and ensure it is labeled clearly.
6 Close the Contact Center Manager Server Setup Configuration Utility window.
7 Store the Platform Recovery Disk in a safe place.
554 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Contents of the Platform Recovery Disk
The Platform Recovery Disk contains the following support files:
dbdvc.txt
dbseg.txt
MigInfo.txt
rbackup.txt
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 555
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Step 11. Prepare the Standby Server for Release 6.0 (optional)
You must complete the base configuration of your Standby Server before you can install Release 6.0 of Standby Server and restore your database. Perform this procedure if you use tape backups.
Reviewing the Release 6.0 server requirements and setting up the tape drive on the Standby Server
1 Review the list of requirements for a Release 6.0 server, and ensure that your server meets each requirement. See Chapter 2, “Contact Center Standby Server requirements.”.
2 If the new platform is equipped with a tape drive and driver software that is not compatible with that of the Active Server, remove the tape drive and install a compatible drive and its driver software on the new platform. For more information, see the maintenance guide for your hardware platform.
Note: Nortel recommends that you test your network connection before you prepare your Standby Server for full service.
.
CAUTION
Risk of database restoration failure
The database backup that you make on the Active Server must be compatible with the tape drive subsystem on the Standby Server (driver software, tape drive, and tape media). Otherwise, you cannot restore your database.
556 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Step 12. Record and check for required installation information
Use the following checklist to record information required for your Windows Server 2003 and Contact Center Manager Server installation. You can refer to this checklist for specific information during the installation. Some information is in the Platform Recovery Disk you created. However, it is still a good idea to record the information for reference.
Step Details ✔
1 Record the server computer and operating system.
You can refer to the following information when you install Windows Server 2003:
Windows Server 2003 licence key __________________
Computer name ___________________________
6–15 characters in length
First character must be alphabetical
Allowed: letters and numbers
Not allowed: spaces, hyphens, and underscores
Administrator password _____________________
Workgroup or domain name__________________
Type of modem for the server_________________
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 557
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
2 Record switch information.
Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX
Switch name _____________________________Note: The switch name does not need to match the CS 1000/Meridian 1 host name. Record it here for reference only.
Switch customer number ____________________
Switch subnet primary IP address (for example, 192.168.100.50) _________________________
Switch subnet secondary IP address (for example, 192.168.100.60) _________________________
Notes:
Switches with two processors require two IP addresses. Use the switch primary address for the primary CPU (core 0), and use the secondary address for the redundant CPU (core 1). For small switches, such as a Meridian 1 PBX 11C - Cabinet, you need only the primary address.
Step Details ✔
558 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Ensure that the switch host name, IP name, and net mask are the same as those that appear by the STAT ELNK command in LD 137. Ensure that the switch serial number matches the serial number delivered with the license file.
Communication Server 2x00/DMS switch information
Switch name _____________________________
Switch IP address (for example, 47.9.43.244)
_______________________________________
IP addresses for routers on the ICM connection between the switch and ELAN subnet __________________________________________
__________________________________________
Network node ID ____________________________
Service ID __________________________________
Application ID ______________________________
Service version ______________________________
Business group ______________________________
Link set name _______________________________
Password ___________________________________
Remote host IP address (optional) ___________________________________________
Step Details ✔
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 559
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
3 Record the Nortel server subnet and ELAN subnet IP information.
Record the IP addresses for both Nortel server subnet and ELAN subnet connections. The customer’s LAN administrator is the source for IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateways.
Note: Nortel server subnet and ELAN subnet addresses must be unique.
Nortel server subnet server
IP address _______________________________
Subnet mask ______________________________
Gateway, description, or name ________________
________________________________________
Nortel server subnet router/gateway IP address
IP address _______________________________
Subnet mask ______________________________
Gateway, description, or name ________________
________________________________________
ELAN subnet server
IP address _______________________________
Subnet mask ______________________________
Gateway, description, or name ________________
__________________________________________
ELAN subnet router/gateway IP address
IP address _______________________________
Subnet mask ______________________________
Gateway, description, or name ________________
________________________________________
Step Details ✔
560 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
4 Record the RAS information.
RAS
IP address _______________________________
Subnet mask ______________________________
Gateway, description, or name ________________
________________________________________
5 Record the voice services information.
Voice connection type (Meridian Mail or Call Pilot) ___________________
Call Pilot server IP address___________________
Call Pilot server port_______________________
6 Record the Replication Server information.
IP address _______________________________
Replication Server name_____________________
7 Record the site information.
Site name __________________________________
Note: For Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX switches with the Network Skill-Based Routing feature, the Network Control Center site name is automatically propagated to servers.
(Networking option only) IP address of RSM server
__________________________________________
New password for NGenDesign account(a user account for Nortel support). For security reasons, do not record the password here.
New password for NGenDist account(a user account for distributors to provide support). For security reasons, do not record the password here.
Modem phone number for the server (for dial-up connections from the client PC) _________________
__________________________________________
Step Details ✔
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 561
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
8 Check for equipment and data required for the server installation.
List the unique names and IP addresses for all equipment on both the ELAN subnet and Nortel server subnet.
Step Details ✔
562 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Step 13. Install Windows Server 2003
You must perform a fresh installation of Windows Server 2003 on the Standby Server. Use the following checklist to perform a new installation of Windows Server 2003.
When you install Windows Server 2003, remember to do the following:
Delete all existing partitions on the primary drives (do not alter the disabled drives) and format the drives.
Create a new drive C partition on which to install the Windows Server 2003 operating system.
Configure the LAN network cards with the appropriate network IP configuration (for example, subnet mask and default gateway) for the subnet on which the server is located. The Standby Server must be configured with a different computer name and IP address from the Active Server.
Check that the virtual memory allocation (swap file) on the Standby Server is RAM size times 1.5. Set both the initial and maximum size to this value.
Partition the disks to at least the minimum recommended size. For more information, see the Contact Center Manager Planning and Engineering Guide.
If you use a tape drive for database backup and restore, ensure the tape drive is compatible with the current operating system and hardware standards. For more information, see the Nortel Contact Center Manager Planning and Engineering Guide.
Ensure that the new drives are installed with the correct RAID administration utility (if your server is equipped with RAID). The RAID software is platform-specific and is installed differently for each platform.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 563
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Performing a new installation of Windows Server 2003
Use the following checklist to perform a new installation of Windows Server 2003 on the Standby Server.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
1 Set up your RAID configuration.
If your server uses RAID, ensure the RAID configuration is set up according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
2 Obtain the Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM.
Use either Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition or Enterprise Edition.
Do not use Windows Server 2003 Datacenter or Web editions.
3 Start the Windows Server 2003 installation.
Start installing Windows Server 2003 according to the instructions supplied with the operating system. Follow the on-screen instructions to create a partition for the operating system. This partition must reside on drive C of your server on an NTFS partition.
The Windows Server 2003 installation copies the operating system files to the installation folders on the new partition. When the copy process is complete, the system restarts. The Windows Server 2003 Setup wizard appears.
4 Complete the Windows Server 2003 Setup wizard.
Use the following guidelines in this table to complete the Windows Server 2003 Setup wizard.
Regional Settings window
Complete this window as required for your site.
Personalize Your Software window
Complete this window as required for your site.
564 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Licensing Modes window
Nortel recommends that you use the Per server licensing mode and that you have a minimum of five concurrent connections. This is the default.
Computer Name and Administrator Password window
Enter the computer name and administrator password.
Pay close attention to the naming rules for the computer name as described in the Contact Center Manager Planning and Engineering Guide (no spaces, hyphens, or underscores are allowed).
Date and Time Settings window
Complete this window as required for your site. Make sure the correct time zone is set for the server.
Attention: To configure the daylight savings settings on your server, perform one of the following tasks:
If you are using a CS 1000/Meridian 1 switch, ensure that the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes check box is cleared.
If you are using a CS2x00/DMS switch, ensure that the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes check box is checked for regions using daylight saving time.
If you have purchased the Network Skill-Based Routing feature and are setting the time zone for the Network Control Center server, ensure that the Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes check box is checked.
Modem Dialing Information window
Complete this window as required for your site.
This window appears if you have a modem attached to the server. If this window does not appear, proceed to the next window.
Networking Settings window
After the system installs the networking components and the status bar finishes scrolling, select Custom settings.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 565
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Networking Components window
Use this window to select networking components and set up the TCP/IP parameters for the Nortel server subnet and ELAN network interface cards.
Networking components selection
After detecting the first network card, the Windows Server 2003 Setup wizard displays a list of networking components for that card. For each network card, the following three components are selected by default. Do not deactivate any of the following default networking components:
Client for Microsoft Networks
File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks
Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)Configuring TCP/IP parameters for Nortel server subnet and ELAN cards
Complete the following steps for each card that the Setup wizard detects on your server.
1 Click Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and then click Properties.
2 In the General tab, type the IP information required for the card (for example, IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway). Consult with the network administrator for the site.
3 To complete the installation successfully, you must type an IP address for each network interface card. If you do not yet have the correct IP addresses for the cards, then type dummy IP addresses now. Remember to reconfigure the cards with the correct addresses later.
4 From the General tab, click Advanced. Use the DNS and WINS tabs to type information about DNS and WINS servers. Consult with the network administrator for the site.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
566 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Workgroup or Computer domain window
Adding computer to a workgroup
1 Select No, this computer is not on a network, or is on a network without a domain.
2 In the Workgroup or computer domain box, type the workgroup name.
You can add the server to a domain after you install Contact Center Manager Server.
5 Log on to Windows Server 2003.
After the Windows Server 2003 Setup wizard installation of the operating system is complete, you must configure the operating system before you install Standby Server. Remove the CD-ROM.
When you log on to Windows Server 2003 for the first time, the Windows Server 2003 Manage Your Server wizard appears. This wizard is not necessary for Standby Server functionality. Proceed to the next step (Step 6) to configure additional server software.
Tip:
Select the Don’t display this screen on startup option.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 567
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
6 Add or remove programs.
Use Add or Remove Programs to configure your Windows Server 2003 operating system.
Using Add or Remove Programs
1 Go to Start > Control Panel.
Note: Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel, if you use the Classic Start menu.
2 Double-click Add or Remove Programs.
3 Click Add or Remove Windows Components to view a list of the installed components.
4 Click Application Server, and then click Details to deselect IIS on the components list. IIS is an subcomponent of Application Server and is selected by default.
5 Select Management and Monitoring Tools, and then click Details.
6 Select the check box beside SNMP. If it is selected already, SNMP is installed.
7 Click OK to return to the Add or Remove Windows Components property page.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
568 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
7 Check the virtual memory settings.
Verify that the virtual memory on the server is RAM size times 1.5. Set both the initial and maximum size to this value. If the virtual memory is smaller, increase it to RAM size times 1.5. Nortel recommends that the paging file be located on drive C.
Verifying the virtual memory on the server
1 Go to Start > Control Panel.
Note: Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel, if you use the Classic Start menu.
2 Click System.
3 On the General tab, take note of the RAM size.
4 Click the Advanced tab, and then click Performance Settings.
5 Click the Advanced tab again.
6 Click Change to view and make changes to the virtual memory settings.
7 Restart the server if prompted.
For a system with 512 MB of RAM, the default minimum paging file size is 768 MB and the default maximum paging file size is 1 GB. To optimize performance, Microsoft recommends that the minimum paging file size equal the maximum paging file size. Nortel recommends that you set both the minimum and maximum paging file sizes to RAM size times 1.5.
If any of the following conditions apply, the system complete memory dump is not generated when the system stops unexpectedly:
Multiple paging files are distributed over separate disks.
The paging file is not located on drive C.
Physical RAM size is larger than 2 GB.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 569
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Check the virtual memory settings (continued).
Due to the limitations presented by large paging files, Nortel recommends the following:
Set the minimum and maximum paging file sizes to RAM size times 1.5, up to a maximum paging file size of 4 GB.
Add the paging file to the drive C partition only. Do not create paging files on database partitions or other partitions.
8 Configure the modem connection for remote access.
Configure a direct serial connection for the modem hardware connected to your server. The modem uses COM 1.
Configuring a direct serial connection
1 Go to Start > Control Panel.
Note: Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel, if you use the Classic Start menu.
2 Double-click Phone and Modem Options.
3 Click the Modems tab, and then click Add.
Note: If you have not configured a modem on the server, the Location Information screen appears first. You must completed the Local Information screen before the Modems tab can be accessed.
4 Follow the instructions in the Add or Remove Hardware Wizard to detect the modem and install the driver.
9 Configure the operating system for remote access.
Configure an incoming connection on the server to allow for remote support through the dial-up modem.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
570 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
10 Check the bindings order for the Nortel server subnet and ELAN cards.
Attention: You must complete the procedure in this section if you have more than one network card. If you do not have the correct binding order, you may encounter problems when you want to restore your database.
You only require one network interface card. However, if you have more than one network interface card, you must configure the bindings order of the network interface cards so that the Nortel server subnet card is first, then the ELAN card, then the virtual adapters for remote access.
Configuring the bindings order of the network interface cards
1 Go to Start > Control Panel.
Note: Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel, if you use the Classic Start menu.
2 Double-click Network Connections.
3 Click either the Nortel server subnet or ELAN connection, and then from the Advanced menu, click Advanced Settings.
4 In the Connections box, ensure the Nortel server subnet connection is listed first. If it is not first, adjust the order.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 571
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
11 Check the serial port configuration.
Use the Windows Device Manager to check that the required serial ports exist. You require COM1 to provide remote support, unless you are using the USB port or VPN for remote access. Also, you require COM2 for Symposium Voice Services on Meridian Mail.
Checking the required serial ports
1 Go to Start > Control Panel.
Note: Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel, if you use the Classic Start menu.
2 Click System, and then click the Hardware tab.
3 Click Device Manager, and then double-click Ports (COM & LPT) to view the communications ports.
4 For COM1, set the base I/O Port Address to 3F8 and the IRQ to 4.
If a required port does not exist:
1 Ensure that the port is installed.
2 Go to the BIOS and correct the address of the missing port.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
572 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
12 Format all disk drives.
Ensure that the disk drives on the server are formatted according to the requirements for Contact Center Manager Server Release 6.0.
If the Welcome to the Write Signature and Upgrade Disk wizard appears, click Cancel. This wizard is only for configuring dynamic disk partitioning. Release 6.0 supports Windows basic disk partitioning and dynamic disk volumes. When you partition your drives, do not use the Windows option to upgrade to dynamic disks.
If you are performing an upgrade, ensure you fully understand the partition requirements on your new server. See the section on disk partitioning requirements in your upgrade procedure. Note that file and folder compression are not supported.
Ensuring the disk drives are formatted correctly
1 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Administrative Tools > Computer Management.
2 Under Storage, click Disk Management to view and change disk partitioning.
3 Configure all partitions (D, F, G, and other additional drives) as logical drives within extended partitions on the basic disks.
Note: The operating system resides on the C partition. This must be the only primary partition.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 573
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
a. Right-click each disk that you want to configure.b. On the shortcut menu, click Create Partition.c. Follow the prompts in the Create Partition Wizard to
create an extended partition for each disk.d. Right-click each disk. e. On the shortcut menu, click Create Logical Drive.f. Follow the prompts in the Create Partition Wizard to
create logical drives for each disk.
Note: When you create the extended partitions, you must create the logical drives by specifying their size and drive letters.
When you right-click a disk, if you see Write Signature in the shortcut menu, you must choose this option to write a disk signature before you proceed with creating partitions and logical drives.
13 Install any additional drivers required for your hardware configuration.
If your server requires any additional drivers for your hardware configuration, install them.
14 Test the network connection.
Use the ping command to test both the Nortel server subnet and ELAN subnet network connections.
Install Windows Server 2003
Step Details ✔
574 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Step 14. Ensure the computer name and DNS host name match
You must ensure your computer name and DNS host name match exactly, including uppercase and lowercase letters. If these names do not match, you cannot install the Standby Server database software.
A mismatch in these names can occur, for example, if you perform a new installation of the operating system and type the computer name in uppercase letters. In Windows, your entry is used to set both the computer name and the DNS host name. However, after the operating system is installed, you may find that Windows set the DNS host name in uppercase letters as you entered it, but the computer name is set in all lowercase letters. Use the following procedures to check the names and, if necessary, change them.
Ensuring the computer name and DNS host name match
1 After you install the operating system on the Standby Server, log on to the server as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose Control Panel, and then click the System icon.
Result: The System Properties dialog box appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 575
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
3 Click the Computer Name tab.
Result: The Computer Name page appears.
4 Write down the full computer name exactly as it appears, including case.
Note: Ignore the period at the end of the full computer name.
5 Click Change.
Result: The Computer Name Changes window appears.
6 Click More.
Result: The DNS Suffix and NetBIOS Computer Name window appears.
576 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
7 Compare the NetBIOS computer name on this window with the full computer name that you wrote down to determine whether the names match exactly, including case.
8 Perform one of the following tasks:
If the names match, close the windows you opened, and then continue with the configuration of your server.
If the names do not match, complete the following procedure.
Updating the computer name to match the DNS host name
This procedure is a continuation of the previous procedure.
1 Write down the NetBIOS computer name exactly as it appears.
2 On the DNS Suffix and NetBIOS Computer Name window, click Cancel.
Result: The Computer Name Changes window appears.
3 In the Computer name box, type the NetBIOS computer name exactly as you wrote it down in step step 1 on page 576, and click OK.
Note: If the only difference between the two names is the case (uppercase or lowercase letters), you cannot click OK to register the change because Windows does not recognize changes to case. In this situation, perform the following workaround:
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 577
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
a. Type any character at the end of the computer name to enable the OK button.
b. Click OK.
c. When the system prompts you to restart, click OK, but do not restart the server.
Result: The System Properties window appears.
d. Click Properties.
e. Go back to step step 3 on page 576.
Result: The system prompts you to restart.
4 Click OK.
5 Click OK to close the System Properties window.
Result: The system prompts you to restart the server.
6 Click Yes.
7 When the system restarts, log on to the server as Administrator.
8 To ensure the names match now, repeat the procedure Step 14. “Ensure the computer name and DNS host name match” on page 574.
578 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Step 15. Configure the operating system for remote access
For support personnel to connect remotely to the server, you must configure remote access on the server. This section shows you how to configure the operating system for a workgroup only.
Configuring the operating system for remote access (workgroup)
1 On the Standby Server, from the Start menu, choose Control Panel > Network Connections > New Connection Wizard.
Result: The New Connection Wizard window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 579
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
2 Click Next.
Result: The Network Connection Type window appears.
3 Click Set up an advanced connection, and click Next.
Result: The Advanced Connection Options window appears.
580 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
4 Ensure Accept incoming connections is selected, and click Next.
Result: The Devices for Incoming Connections window appears.
Note: The Devices for Incoming Connections window only displays if there is a modem or other connection device installed. If there is no modem or connection device, the Incoming Virtual Private connection window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 581
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
5 Ensure that the server modem appears in the Connection devices box with a check mark beside it, and click Next.
Result: The Incoming Virtual Private (VPN) Connection window appears.
6 Click Do not allow virtual private connections, and click Next.
Result: The User Permissions window appears.
582 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
7 Select the Administrator check box, and click Next.
Note: After you install the Windows operating system, three additional users appear in this box: NGenSys, NGenDesign, and NGenDist. Ensure that check marks are beside these names so that these users can connect remotely to the server.
Result: The Networking Software window appears.
8 Ensure that default check marks appear beside the three components, as shown in the preceding illustration.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 583
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
9 In the Networking Software box, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and then click Properties.
Result: The Incoming TCP/IP Properties window appears.
10 Ensure that the check box beside Allow callers to access my local area network is not selected.
11 Select the Specify TCP/IP addresses option.
12 In the From and To boxes, specify a range of IP addresses in the same subnet as the Nortel server subnet IP address. This range must include at least two available IP addresses.
Note: Obtain the range of addresses from your network administrator. Remote access uses the first IP address. The remaining IP addresses are loaned to each dial-in client. Your administrator must select the range carefully.
13 Ensure that the check box beside Allow calling computer to specify its own IP address is not selected.
14 Click OK.
584 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
15 In the Networking Software window, click Next.
Result: The Completing the New Connection Wizard window appears.
16 Type the name of the incoming connection as you want it to appear in the Network Connections folder.
17 Click Finish.
Result: The new connection appears in the Network Connections folder.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 585
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Step 16. Install pcAnywhere version 11.5 on the Standby Server
One licensed copy of pcAnywhere 11.5 for host computers only is provided for the server on the Contact Center DVD. This software license enables you to configure the server as the host computer in remote control sessions (that is, the computer to which remote computers connect).
pcAnywhere is required on the Contact Center Manager Server for all four remote technical support options:
modem connected directly to the Contact Center Manager Server on the serial port COM1
modem connected directly to the Contact Center Manager Server on a USB port
modem connected to a VPN
Internet connected to a VPN
For more information about setting up remote support with a VPN, see the Contact Center Manager Planning and Engineering Guide.
pcAnywhere on the client PCTo install pcAnywhere 11.5 on the client PC, you must purchase a separate license for the client PC.
Information required during installationDuring installation the following installer information is required.
User name
Organization
Destination directory Nortel recommends that you install to the default directory(C:\Program Files\Symantec\pcAnywhere)
586 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
pcAnywhere LiveUpdateNortel recommends that you use another computer to periodically check the Symantec Web site for changes and updates. If there are changes, download the changes and transfer them to the Contact Center Manager Server.
Installing pcAnywhere Host Only
1 Log on to the Standby Server as Administrator.
2 Navigate to the pcAnywhere folder on the Contact Center Release 6.0 DVD.
3 Double-click NTJK08BA-02 -Host Only.exe.
Note: If the Terminal Server Install Failure dialog box appears, you must launch the pcAnywhere installer from Add or Remove Programs. This occurs because Terminal Services must be in Install Mode before you can install an application.
Terminal Services is not required on the server.
a. Click Add or Remove Programs to open the Add or Remove Programs window.
b. Click Add New Programs.
c. Click CD or Floppy.
d. Click Next.
Result: The program finds the setup.exe file on the DVD and the installation begins.
4 Wait for the Welcome window to appear.
Result: The Windows Installer window appears, and then the installation Welcome window appears. This can take a few moments.
5 Click Next.
Result: The License Agreement window appears.
6 Accept the terms of the license agreement, and then click Next.
Result: The Customer Information window appears.
7 Enter your user name and company details, and then click Next.
Result: The Destination Folder window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 587
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
8 Accept the default location to install the software, or click Change to choose a custom location. If you click Change, type the location in which you want to install pcAnywhere, and then click OK.
9 Click Next.
Result: The Ready to Install the Program window appears.
10 Click Install.
Result: The program installs any updates.
11 Click Finish when the installation is complete.
Starting pcAnywhere 11.5 or later for the first time
1 On the Standby Server, log on to Windows as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Symantec pcAnywhere.
Note: If the system asks you to register pcAnywhere, select Skip, and then choose Yes when you are asked to confirm.
Result: The Symantec pcAnywhere window appears.
3 Continue with the following procedure to configure pcAnywhere 11.5 user access rights.
ATTENTION If the following message appears, it indicates that your video driver is incompatible with pcAnywhere: pcAnywhere detected and fixed a display driver problem. Please restart your computer to allow the change to take effect. In this case, you must uninstall pcAnywhere, update your video driver, and then reinstall pcAnywhere.
588 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Configuring pcAnywhere user access rights
This section describes how to configure pcAnywhere to accept remote connections. When you first receive your server, pcAnywhere can already be configured. If so, go through the following procedures to ensure that the network properties and remote caller settings are correct.
Configuration of pcAnywhere sets up a secure caller account to access the server. You can add a caller account for each remote PC. These caller accounts restrict the use pcAnywhere to appropriate users (for example, Nortel support personnel and distributors).
If, during the pcAnywhere configuration, a message indicates that you do not have the rights to modify a setting or to create a new caller, follow this procedure to change the Windows User access rights for pcAnywhere files.
1 Exit pcAnywhere.
Tip: This procedure requires you to browse to a hidden directory. To view hidden directories, follow these steps:
a. Open My Computer.
b. Choose Tools > Folder Options.
c. Click the View tab.
d. Scroll down until you see Show Hidden Files and Folders, and then select this option.
e. Click OK.
2 In Windows Explorer, navigate to the following folder:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Symantec\pcAnywhere
3 Right-click the pcAnywhere folder icon, and then click Properties.
Result: The pcAnywhere Properties window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 589
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
4 Click the Security tab.
5 In the Name box, select Administrators.
6 To grant administrators full access to the pcAnywhere folder, in the Permissions box, ensure that Allow, beside Full Control, is selected.
7 Click OK to save your changes and close the Properties window.
Configuring pcAnywhere as a host
1 On the Standby Server, log on to Windows as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Symantec pcAnywhere.
Note: If the system asks you to register pcAnywhere, click Skip, and then choose Yes when you are asked to confirm.
3 On the pcAnywhere Manager (left side), select the Hosts option.
Result: The Hosts option on the pcAnywhere Manager pane is selected.
4 Click the File menu, and then choose New > Item > Advanced.
Note: Do not use the Wizard option.
590 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
5 On the Connection Info tab, ensure that only the TCP/IP check box is selected.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 591
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
6 Click the Settings tab.
7 In the Host startup area, ensure that the Launch with Windows and Run minimized check boxes are selected.
592 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
8 Click the Callers tab.
9 Click the New Item icon ( ).
Result: The Call Properties: New Caller window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 593
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
10 In the Login name box, type a name for the caller account. You can choose any name, or use a name that is familiar to you, such as NGenDist.
11 In the Password box, type the password for the caller account.
12 In the Confirm Password box, type the same password again.
13 Click the Privileges tab.
Result: The following window appears.
14 Select the Superuser option.
594 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
15 Click OK to save your changes and close the Caller Properties window.
Result: The Host Properties window reappears with the account now listed according to its Login ID.
16 Click the Security Options tab.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 595
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
17 Ensure that the settings are as shown in the following example.
18 Click the Conference tab.
596 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
19 Ensure that Enable conferencing and Obtain IP address automatically are selected, as shown in the following example.
Note: If you find that your connection to a conferencing session times out, when you try to log on, you must change Allow conference over value to a number greater than 0.
20 Click the Protect Item tab if you want to protect the settings for this caller account by assigning a password to control access to the settings. If you do not want to assign a password, skip to step 23 on page 596.
21 In the Password box, type the password you want to use to protect the Network icon settings.
22 In the Confirm password box, type the password again.
23 Click OK to apply all pcAnywhere Host PC settings.
Result: The Host List window appears.
ATTENTION If you select the Required option to modify properties, you must type the password each time you change a setting. Record the password and keep a copy of it in a safe place. If you forget the password, you cannot change settings.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 597
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
24 Enter an appropriate name for the host that you just set up.
25 Click File > Exit to close the pcAnywhere Manager window.
598 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Step 17. Copy the latest Service Update and Platform Recovery Disk
Before you install the Release 6.0 Contact Center Manager Server software, you must do the following:
Copy the latest Service Update pack to drive D on the Standby Server.
Copy the Platform Recovery Disk previously backed up from the Active Server to drive D:\OldPrd on the Standby Server.
A Service Update is included in the Supplementary SU folder on the DVD shipped with your software. However, check for a more recent Service Update pack on the Enterprise Solutions PEP Library Web site at http://www.nortel.com/espl.
Copying the latest Service Update pack and Platform Recovery Disk to the Standby Server
1 On the Standby Server, insert the Contact Center Release 6.0 DVD into the DVD-ROM drive.
Note: If you are installing from a network shared drive, map the DVD to a drive letter on the server.
2 Navigate to the Supplementary SU folder on the DVD or the shared drive and copy the Service Update (for example, CCMS_6.0_SU_92.msi) to the root of drive D.
3 Create a directory called OldPrd in drive D.
4 Insert the Platform Recovery Disk you created previously into drive A.
5 Copy the contents of the Platform Recovery Disk to drive D:\OldPrd.
ATTENTION Do not install the Service Update pack. The installation program installs it automatically at the appropriate time when you install the server software.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 599
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Step 18. Configuring the server
This section contains additional information on the configuration of the server.
Set user account policies
Before you install the Contact Center Manager Server software, you must ensure that the account policies for the users on your server meet the following guidelines:
The disable password must meet complexity requirements.
The minimum password age is set to 0.
The minimum password length is 0 characters.
Use a password history of 0.
Store the password using reversible encryption 0.
Change the account policy to meet your requirements after you complete the installation.
Accessing user account policies
1 On the Standby Server, go to Start > Administrative Tools > Local Security Policies.
Result: Local Security Settings windows open.
2 Expand Security Settings > Account Policies > Password Policy.
Result: Password Policy setting appear.
Switch type
Ensure that you are you using the same type of switch that you used for Active Server.
600 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Verify your Standby Server package
Before you install Contact Center Manager Server software, ensure you know which package you are going to install so that you can type the correct information during the installation.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 601
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Section C: Migrate the Active Server to the Standby Server
In this sectionStep 19. Migrate the Active CCMS to the Standby Server 602
Step 20. Configure your CCMS settings on the Standby Server (optional) 632
Step 21. Install the License Manager 649
Step 22. Install the Server Utility (optional) 653
602 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Step 19. Migrate the Active CCMS to the Standby Server
You must use the following migration procedure to install the Standby Server software to ensure that the Standby Server is installed and configured similarly to the Active Server.
Migrating the Active Contact Center Manager Server to the Standby Server
1 Log on to the Standby Server as Administrator.
2 Insert the Contact Center DVD (autorun initiates), or map to a network DVD and run Setup.exe.
Result: The Welcome to Nortel Contact Center 6.0 main menu appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 603
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
3 Select the following components:
Contact Center Manager Server
License Manager
Server Utility (if it is installed on the Active Server)
Note: If Contact Center Manager Server is co-resident with License Manager, select Contact Center Manager Server and License Manager.
4 Click Install.
Result: The INSTALLATION ORDER window appears.
5 Click Start.
Result: The Contact Center - Manager Server - InstallShield Wizard window appears.
604 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
6 Click Next.
Result: The Custom Installation Information window appears.
7 In the Server Type section, select Standalone (default).
8 In the Install Type section, select Upgrade from 4.2 database Migration of 5.0 or 6.0 database.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 605
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
9 Click Next.
Result: The preinstallation checker starts, and the Pre-Install Check window appears.
10 Review the information in the tabs on this window. Nortel recommends that you fix any errors before you continue the installation. If you make any changes, click Refresh to rerun the preinstallation checker.
606 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
11 Click OK.
Result: The CCMS Configuration window appears.
12 Perform one of the following tasks:
If you want to enter all of the configuration data before you install the software, select Enter configuration data now to complete CCMS configuration automatically. Click Next and proceed to step 13.
If you want to enter all configuration data after the installation, select Enter configuration data when CCMS configuration is run at end of installation. Click Next and skip to step 44 on page 621.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 607
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
13 Click Next.
Result: The Customer Information window appears.
14 Verify the information in the Customer Name box.
15 Verify the information in the Company Name box.
608 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
16 Click Next.
Result: The Switch Type window appears.
17 Ensure that the appropriate switch type is selected, and click Next.
Result: The License Manager Package Configuration window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 609
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
18 Verify the settings for the switch.
Note: If you are working in a Campus Redundancy setup, type the same switch information you used on your Active Server. If you are working in a Geographic Redundancy setup, type the information for your new switch.
19 From the CCMS Package list, select the Standby Server package.
Note: You can find the license file in the D:\Nortel\lm\bin folder on the server. The license file is called plservrc.
20 In the Serial Number box, type the serial number for the switch (for Communication Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX only).
If you are using Campus Redundancy, type the same serial number you used on the Active Server.
If you are using Geographic Redundancy, type the serial number for the secondary switch.
21 In the Primary License Manager IP box, type the IP address for the server on which you plan to install the License Manager.
Note: If the License Manager resides on the Standby Server, type the IP address for the Standby Server.
22 In the Port box, confirm the port number. The default port is 3998.
Note: You can change the Primary License Manager IP address when the installation is complete.
23 In the Secondary License Manager IP box, type the Secondary License Manager IP address (corporate only).
Note: You can change the Secondary License Manager IP address when the installation is complete.
24 In the Port box, confirm the port number (corporate only). The default port is 3998.
610 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
25 Click View Features to display package features.
Result: The Package Feature window appears.
26 Check that the features that appear in the CCMS Package Features list match the product that you purchased, and then perform one of the following tasks:
If the information is not correct, verify that you selected the correct package. Click OK, and then select the correct package.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 611
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
If the information is correct, click OK to close the window.
Note: The features that appear in the CCMS Package Feature window can differ depending on the switch and the package you chose on the License Manager window.
Result: The Local Area Network IP window appears.
27 From the IP Address list, choose the IP address for the Nortel server subnet.
Note: If you are using two network interface cards, select the ELAN subnet check box, and then from the IP Address list, choose the IP address for the ELAN subnet.
28 Click Next.
29 Perform one of the following tasks depending on which switch you chose in step 17 on page 608.
“Option One (CS 1000)” on page 612
“Option Two (CS 2x00)” on page 613
612 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Option One (CS 1000)If you selected CS 1000 (M1), the following window appears.
If you selected CS 2x00 (DMS/SL-100), continue with “Option Two (CS 2x00)” on page 613.
a. In the Switch Name box, type the name of the switch.
Valid characters for switch names are A–Z, a–z, 0–9, underscore (_), and period (.). Switch names must begin with an alphabetical character and cannot contain spaces. The last character must not be an underscore or a period. Switch names must not exceed 80 characters in length.
Note: If you are unsure of the correct information, or if you make a mistake, you can change the switch information after you finish the installation.
b. In the Switch IP Address box, type the IP address for the switch.
c. In the Switch Customer Number box, type the customer number for the switch.
ATTENTION If you have a campus redundancy scenario, use the same switch information on the Standby Server as on the Active Server. If you have a geographic redundancy scenario, enter different switch information for the secondary site.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 613
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
d. Click Next.
Option Two (CS 2x00)If you select CS 2x00 (DMS/SL-100), the following window appears.
If you selected CS 1000 (M1), see “Option One (CS 1000)” on page 612.
a. In the Switch Name box, type the name of the switch.
Valid characters for switch names are A–Z, a–z, 0–9, underscore (_), and period (.). Switch names must begin with an alphabetical character and cannot contain spaces. The last character must not be an underscore or a period. Switch names must not exceed 80 characters in length.
Note: If you are unsure of the correct information, or if you make a mistake, you can change the switch information after you finish the installation.
b. In the Switch IP Address box, type the IP address for the switch.
c. In the Network Node box, type the network node information.
d. In the Service ID box, type the service ID information.
e. In the Application ID box, type the identifier for the application.
f. In the Service Version box, type the SCAI protocol that you plan to use as defined by the application.
614 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
g. In the Business Group box, type the name of the business group.
h. In the Linkset Name box, type the name for the Contact Center Manager Server as it is known to the switch (uppercase only). The linkset name creates a logical pathway to the server on the Ethernet Interface Unit (EIU).
i. In the Password box, type the password for the switch.
j. Click Next.
Result: One of the following results occurs:
If you are using a Communication Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX switch, the Voice Services window appears.
If you are using a Communication Server 2x00/DMS switch, the Voice Services window does not appear. Proceed to step 31 on page 616.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 615
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
30 Perform one of the following tasks:
If you are not using an integrated voice-processing system (Meridian Mail or CallPilot), for Voice Connection Type, select Serial, and click Next.
Note: If your computer is not configured with COM2, for Voice Connection Type, select TCP, type a dummy IP address and port number, and click Next.
If you are using Meridian Mail as your voice-processing system, for Voice Connection Type, select Serial, and click Next.
If you are using CallPilot, for Voice Connection Type, select TCP, specify the ELAN subnet IP address of the CallPilot server, and set the CallPilot Server Port to 10008. Click Next.
ATTENTION If you have a campus redundancy scenario, use the same ELAN subnet IP address on the Standby Server as on the Active Server. If you have a geographic redundancy scenario, enter different ELAN subnet IP address for the secondary site.
616 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Note: Although you can install Contact Center Manager Server on a server without a COM 2 serial port, the hard-coded dependency in the Media Application Server (MAS) Access Link service can cause the Access Link Handler to restart constantly if you do not configure the COM2 port. For a Contact Center Manager Server that does not require the Access Link connection to Meridian Mail, type a dummy IP address and port number in the Voice Connection Type.
Result: The RSM IP Address window appears.
31 In the RSM IP Address box, type the Real-time Statistics Multicast (RSM) IP address that you want to associate with sending real-time statistical data.
Note: Do not confuse the RSM IP address with the Nortel server subnet or ELAN subnet addresses for the server.
ATTENTION The IP multicast addresses that you select for RSM sending and receiving must be within the 224.0.1.0 and 239.255.255.255 range. The default is 230.0.0.1. Check with your network administrator for acceptable IP multicast addresses for your specific network.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 617
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
32 Click Next.
Result: The Database Replication window appears.
33 For Warm Standby type, select Standby.
34 Verify the information for the Replication Server. Ensure that the Replication Server name is all written in uppercase.
Attention: This information must match the Active Server information.
35 Enter the CCMS Listener Port Number, or accept the default value. If the value is changed from the default, you must type the new value on the Replication Server.
36 Click Next.
Result: The following window appears.
618 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
37 Click OK.
Result: The CCT Server window appears.
38 Click Next.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 619
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
39 Wait for the Site Name window to appear.
Result: The Site Name window appears.
40 In the Site Name box, type the site name for the server.
The site name must not contain spaces or non-alphabetical characters except for - (hyphen) and _ (underscore). The first character must be a letter. The site name must be unique and can consist of any combination of a minimum of 6 and up to 15 characters.
Note: You must use the same site name you used on the Active Server.
41 Click Finish.
Result: The Information window appears.
620 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
42 Click Continue.
Result: The Contact Center Manager Server Setup Configuration Utility Information window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 621
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
43 Review the tabs and make any necessary changes, and click OK.
Result: The Ready to Install the Program window appears.
44 Click Begin.
Result: The Installing Contact Center Manager Server window appears.
After a few seconds, the Sybase installation window appears. The system copies the Sybase software files to the server. After 3 to 5 minutes, the system restarts and the Sybase installation window appears.
Stage 1
622 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
The installation of the Sybase software and the Contact Center Manager Server software continues. The system windows appear showing the different stages (Stage 1 to 5) of the installation. During Sybase installation, the server restarts.
Note: If you are prompted to click Continue to complete the installation, do do now. You have to click Continue a several times.
45 Log on as Administrator.
Result: The installation of the Sybase software and the Contact Center Manager Server software continues.
Note: You do not require Terminal Services on the server; however, if you installed Terminal Services on the server, you must click Continue to continue with installing the database.
Stage 2
Stage 3
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 623
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Stage 4
The system copies files to drive D and installs the Service Updates.
Stage 5 (This stage has six parts during which the database is created.)
624 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
46 Wait for the Database Restore Utility window to appear.
Result: The following window appears.
47 Select Local Tape Drive or Network Disk.
48 Perform one of the following tasks based on which method you are using to restore your backed up files.
If you selected Network Disk, proceed to “Option 1” on page 625.
If you selected Local Tape Drive, proceed to “Option 2” on page 627.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 625
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Option 1If you choose Network Disk, the following window appears.
49 Verify the details of the network disk, and click Next.
Result: The following window appears.
Note: If you performed a database integrity check on the Active Server and you know that your database is working properly, you can choose to skip the database verification during the restore. The database verification takes about 30 minutes. If you want to skip the database verification, select the Do not verify the restored database check box.
626 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
50 Click Start Restore.
Result: The following window appears.
Stage 1
Stage 2
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 627
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Option 2If you choose Local Tape Drive, the following window appears.
51 Ensure that the database backup tape is in the tape drive.
Note: If you performed a database integrity check on the Active Server and you know that your database is working properly, you can choose to skip the database verification during the restore. The database verification takes about 30 minutes. If you want to skip the database verification, select the Do not verify the restored database check box.
52 Click Start Restore.
Result: The following window appears.
628 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Stage 1
Stage 2
53 When the restore is complete, click Done.
Result: The services start.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 629
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
54 Wait for the Server Configuration Utility window to appear.
Result: The Server Configuration Utility window appears. The configuration continues from Stage 1 to Stage 14.
630 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
This utility completes the Contact Center Manager Server installation.
Example: The Nortel Contact Center - Manager Server installation success window appears.
55 Click OK.
Result: The Nortel Contact Center - Manager Server Platform Recovery Disk window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 631
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
56 Click Cancel. You can create the Platform Recovery Disk after you install the remaining components on the server (when you complete the postinstallation tasks).
Result: The following window appears.
57 Click No.
Result: The InstallShield Wizard Completed window appears.
58 Click Finish.
Result: The Standby Server software is installed.
59 Perform one of the following tasks:
If you did not configure the Standby Server during the installation, do so now. Continue with Step 20. “Configure your CCMS settings on the Standby Server (optional)” on page 632.
If you configured your server settings during the installation, skip to Step 21. “Install the License Manager” on page 649.
632 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Step 20. Configure your CCMS settings on the Standby Server (optional)
If you did not configure your server settings during the installation, do so now. If you already configured your server settings, skip to Step 21. “Install the License Manager” on page 649.
Configuring your Contact Center Manager Server settings on the Standby Server (optional)
1 Wait for the Customer Information window to appear.
2 Verify the information in the Customer Name box.
3 Verify the information in the Company Name box.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 633
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
4 Click Next.
Result: The Switch Type window appears.
5 Ensure that the appropriate switch type is selected, and click Next.
Result: The License Manager Package Configuration window appears.
634 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
6 Verify the settings for the switch.
Note: If you are working in a Campus Redundancy setup, type the same switch information you used on your Active Server. If you are working in a Geographic Redundancy setup, type the information for your new switch.
7 From the CCMS Package list, select the Standby Server package.
Note: You can find the license file in the D:\Nortel\lm\bin folder on the server. The license file is called plservrc.
8 In the Serial Number box, type the serial number for the switch (for Communication Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX only).
If you are using Campus Redundancy, type the same serial number you used on the Active Server.
If you are using Geographic Redundancy, type the serial number for the secondary switch.
9 In the Primary License Manager IP box, type the IP address for the server on which you plan to install the License Manager.
Note: If the License Manager resides on the Standby Server, type the IP address for the Standby Server.
10 In the Port box, confirm the port number. The default port is 3998.
Note: You can change the Primary License Manager IP address when the installation is complete.
11 In the Secondary License Manager IP box, type the Secondary License Manager IP address (corporate only).
Note: You can change the Secondary License Manager IP address when the installation is complete.
12 In the Port box, confirm the port number (corporate only). The default port is 3998.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 635
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
13 Click View Features to display package features.
Result: The Package Feature window appears.
14 Check that the features that appear in the CCMS Package Features list match the product that you purchased, and then perform one of the following tasks:
If the information is not correct, verify that you selected the correct package. Click OK, and then select the correct package.
If the information is correct, click OK to close the window.
636 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Note: The features that appear in the CCMS Package Feature window can differ depending on the switch and the package you chose on the License Manager window.
Result: The Local Area Network IP window appears.
15 From the IP Address list, choose the IP address for the Nortel server subnet.
Note: If you are using two network interface cards, select the ELAN subnet check box, and then from the IP Address list, choose the IP address for the ELAN subnet.
16 Click Next.
17 Perform one of the following tasks depending on which switch you chose in step 5 on page 633:
“Option One (CS 1000)” on page 637
“Option Two (CS 2x00)” on page 613
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 637
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Option One (CS 1000)If you selected CS 1000 (M1), the following window appears.
If you selected CS 2x00 (DMS/SL-100), continue with “Option Two (CS 2x00)” on page 613.
a. In the Switch Name box, type the name of the switch.
Valid characters for switch names are A–Z, a–z, 0–9, underscore (_), and period (.). Switch names must begin with an alphabetical character and cannot contain spaces. The last character must not be an underscore or a period. Switch names must not exceed 80 characters in length.
Note: If you are unsure of the correct information, or if you make a mistake, you can change the switch information after you finish the installation.
b. In the Switch IP Address box, type the IP address for the switch.
c. In the Switch Customer Number box, type the customer number for the switch.
ATTENTION If you have a campus redundancy scenario, use the same switch information on the Standby Server as on the Active Server. If you have a geographic redundancy scenario, enter different switch information for the secondary site.
638 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
d. Click Next.
Option Two (CS 2x00)If you select CS 2x00 (DMS/SL-100), the following window appears.
If you selected CS 1000 (M1), see “Option One (CS 1000)” on page 637.
a. In the Switch Name box, type the name of the switch.
Valid characters for switch names are A–Z, a–z, 0–9, underscore (_), and period (.). Switch names must begin with an alphabetical character and cannot contain spaces. The last character must not be an underscore or a period. Switch names must not exceed 80 characters in length.
Note: If you are unsure of the correct information, or if you make a mistake, you can change the switch information after you finish the installation.
b. In the Switch IP Address box, type the IP address for the switch.
c. In the Network Node box, type the network node information.
d. In the Service ID box, type the service ID information.
e. In the Application ID box, type the identifier for the application.
f. In the Service Version box, type the SCAI protocol that you plan to use as defined by the application.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 639
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
g. In the Business Group box, type the name of the business group.
h. In the Linkset Name box, type the name for the Contact Center Manager Server as it is known to the switch (uppercase only). The linkset name creates a logical pathway to the server on the Ethernet Interface Unit (EIU).
i. In the Password box, type the password for the switch.
j. Click Next.
Result: One of the following results occurs:
If you are using a Communication Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX switch, the Voice Services window appears.
If you are using a Communication Server 2x00/DMS switch, the Voice Services window does not appear. Proceed to step 19 on page 641.
640 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
18 Perform one of the following tasks:
If you are not using an integrated voice-processing system (Meridian Mail or CallPilot), for Voice Connection Type, select Serial, and click Next.
Note: If your computer is not configured with COM2, for Voice Connection Type, select TCP, type a dummy IP address and port number, and click Next.
If you are using Meridian Mail as your voice-processing system, for Voice Connection Type, select Serial, and click Next.
If you are using CallPilot, for Voice Connection Type, select TCP, specify the ELAN subnet IP address of the CallPilot server, and set the CallPilot Server Port to 10008. Click Next.
ATTENTION If you have a campus redundancy scenario, use the same ELAN subnet IP address on the Standby Server as on the Active Server. If you have a geographic redundancy scenario, enter different ELAN subnet IP address for the secondary site.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 641
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Note: Although you can install Contact Center Manager Server on a server without a COM 2 serial port, the hard-coded dependency in the Media Application Server (MAS) Access Link service can cause the Access Link Handler to restart constantly if you do not configure the COM2 port. For a Contact Center Manager Server that does not require the Access Link connection to Meridian Mail, type a dummy IP address and port number in the Voice Connection Type.
Result: The RSM IP Address window appears.
19 In the RSM IP Address box, type the Real-time Statistics Multicast (RSM) IP address that you want to associate with sending real-time statistical data.
Note: Do not confuse the RSM IP address with the Nortel server subnet or ELAN subnet addresses for the server.
ATTENTION The IP multicast addresses that you select for RSM sending and receiving must be within the 224.0.1.0 and 239.255.255.255 range. The default is 230.0.0.1. Check with your network administrator for acceptable IP multicast addresses for your specific network.
642 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
20 Click Next.
Result: The Database Replication window appears.
21 For Warm Standby type, select Standby.
22 Verify the information for the Replication Server. Ensure that the Replication Server name is all written in uppercase.
Attention: This information must match the Active Server information.
23 Enter the CCMS Listener Port Number, or accept the default value. If the value is changed from the default, you must type the new value on the Replication Server.
24 Click Next.
Result: The following window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 643
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
25 Click OK.
Result: The CCT Server window appears.
26 Click Next.
644 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
27 Wait for the Site Name window to appear.
Result: The Site Name window appears.
28 In the Site Name box, type the site name for the server.
The site name must not contain spaces or nonalphabetical characters except for hyphens (-) and underscores (_). The first character must be a letter. The site name must be unique and can consist of 6 to 15 characters.
Note: You must use the same site name that you used on the Active Server.
29 Click Finish.
Result: The Information window appears.
30 Click Continue.
Result: The Contact Center Manager Server Setup Configuration Utility Information window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 645
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
31 Review the tabs and make any necessary changes, and click OK.
Result: The Nortel Contact Center Management Server Setup Configuration Utility window appears.
32 Review the tabs and make any changes as required, and click OK.
33 Wait for the Server Configuration Utility window to appear.
646 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
This utility completes the Contact Center Manager Server installation.
The Nortel Contact Center - Manager installation success window appears.
34 Click OK.
Result: The Nortel Contact Center - Manager Platform Recovery Disk window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 647
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
35 Click Cancel. You can create the Platform Recovery Disk and backup the database after you install the remaining components on the server (when you complete the postinstallation tasks).
Result: The InstallShield Wizard Completed window appears.
36 Click Finish.
Result: The following window appears.
648 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
37 Click No. You can restart the server after you install the remaining components.
Result: The INSTALLATION ORDER window appears.
38 Perform one of the following tasks:
If you plan to install License Manager now, click Continue. Proceed to Step 21. “Install the License Manager” on page 649.
If you do not plan to install any other Nortel Contact Center components on this server, click Cancel. Proceed to Section D: “Post-installation,” on page 659.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 649
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Step 21. Install the License Manager
This procedure is a continuation from Step 19. “Migrate the Active CCMS to the Standby Server” on page 602.
Installing the License Manager
1 On the INSTALLATION ORDER window, click Continue.
Result: The License Manager InstallShield Wizard window appears.
650 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
2 Click Next.
Result: The Custom Installation Information window appears.
3 Select the type of installation you require, and click Next.
Result: The License File location window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 651
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
4 Locate the license file, and click Next.
Result: The Ready to Install the Program window appears.
5 Click Begin.
Result: The Installing License Manager window appears.
652 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
The InstallShield Wizard Completed window appears.
6 Click Finish.
Result: The INSTALLATION ORDER window appears.
7 Perform one of the following tasks:
If you plan to install the Server Utility on the same server on which you installed Standby Server, click Continue. Proceed to Step 22. “Install the Server Utility (optional)” on page 653.
If you do not plan to install any other Nortel Contact Center components on this server, click Cancel. Proceed to Section D: “Post-installation,” on page 659.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 653
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Step 22. Install the Server Utility (optional)
This procedure is a continuation from Step 21. “Install the License Manager” on page 649.
Installing the Server Utility
1 On the INSTALLATION ORDER window, click Continue.
Result: The Windows Installer window appears, and then the Server Utility - InstallShield Wizard window appears.
654 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
2 Click Next.
Result: The Customer Information window appears.
3 In the User Name box, type your user name.
4 In the Organization box, type the name of your organization.
5 Click Next.
Result: The Destination Folder window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 655
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
6 Verify the destination folder, and click Next.
Result: The Ready to Install the Program window appears.
656 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
7 Click Install.
Result: The Server Utility installation progress window appears.
Result: When the installation is complete, the InstallShield Wizard Completed window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 657
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
8 Click Finish.
Result: The INSTALLATION ORDER window appears.
9 Click Finish.
Result: The installation is complete.
10 Restart the server.
658 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 659
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Section D: Post-installation
In this sectionStep 23. Change the NGenDist, NGenDesign, and NGenSys passwords 660
Step 24. Configure the NGen user groups for remote access 664
Step 25. Add NGen names to pcAnywhere 666
Step 26. Add the server to domain (optional) 669
Step 27. Install and configure Real-time Statistics Multicast 679
660 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Step 23. Change the NGenDist, NGenDesign, and NGenSys passwords
To protect your system from unauthorized access, change the passwords for the Nortel user accounts on the Standby Server as soon as you finish the installation.
NGenDist, NGenDesign, and NGenSys are Windows remote access accounts that enable the distributor or Nortel customer support to remotely log on to the server if requested by the customer. These accounts are created during the server software installation. To ensure server security, change the NGenDist, NGenDesign, and NGenSys passwords.
Assign new passwords
To assign new passwords, you do not need to know the default passwords for NGenDist, NGenDesign, and NGenSys.
Password security
Write down the new passwords you create, and store them in a safe, secure place away from the server. Give the passwords only to those who need them.
Default accounts and passwords
The following Windows accounts are created on the server during the installation procedure:
NGenSys
NGenDist
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 661
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
NGenDesign
Changing the NGenDist, NGenDesign, or NGenSys password
You are not required to change the NGenSys password. If you change the NGenSys password, you must apply the same password change to the Meridian Application Server (MAS) Backup and Restore service.
1 Log on to the Standby Server as Administrator.
2 Click Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Computer Management.
Result: The Computer Management window appears.
3 Click Local users and groups, and then click Users.
Result: The Computer Management window displays a list of available user accounts, including NGenDist and NGenDesign.
4 Right-click NGenDist.
ATTENTION The on-site installer is instructed to change all default passwords as part of the on-site installation procedures.
You can change all passwords with the procedures in this section. Nortel recommends that you change all passwords regularly to maintain system security.
If the server software is reinstalled, the default accounts and passwords are recreated and passwords must be changed.
662 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
5 Click Set Password.
Result: The Set Password window appears.
6 Click Proceed.
Result: The Properties window appears.
7 In the Password box, type the new password.
Note: Ensure that you use a password that contains a combination of numbers and letters.
8 In the Confirm Password box, type the same password you entered in the Password box.
9 Click OK.
Result: The following window appears.
10 Click OK
11 Repeat steps 4 to 10 for NGenDesign and NGenSys.
12 Click Exit to save changes.
13 Record these passwords and store them in a secure place away from the server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 663
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
If you changed the NGenSys password, continue with the following procedure.
Changing the NGenSys password for the MAS Backup and Restore service
This procedure is required only if you change the Windows user account password for NGenSys.
1 On the Standby Server, click Start > Settings > Control Panel > Administrative Tools.
2 Click Services.
Result: The Services window appears.
3 Scroll to the MAS Backup and Restore service, and then select it.
4 From the Action menu, choose Properties.
Result: The Service window appears.
5 Click the Log On tab, and then type the current NGenSys password in the Password and Confirm Password boxes.
Note: Use the same password you assigned to NGenSys in “Changing the NGenDist, NGenDesign, or NGenSys password” on page 661.
6 Click OK.
ATTENTION When you finish changing passwords, remember to log on as NGenSys. You must log on as NGenSys to monitor and manage the server.
ATTENTION When you are finished, remember to log on as NGenSys. You must log on as NGenSys to monitor and manage the server.
664 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Step 24. Configure the NGen user groups for remote access
Contact Center Manager Server software creates three users: NGenSys, NGenDesign, and NGenDist. Set up these user accounts for support personnel to remotely access the server.
Configuring NGenSys, NGenDesign, and NGenDist for remote access
1 On the Standby Server, from the Start menu, choose Control Panel.
Result: The Control Panel window appears.
2 Double-click Network Connections.
Result: The Network Connections window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 665
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
3 Right-click the incoming connection that you created in Step 15. “Configure the operating system for remote access” on page 578, and then choose Properties.
Result: The Incoming Connections Properties window for your connection appears.
4 Click the Users tab.
5 Select the check box beside the users NGenDesign, NgenDist, and NGenSys.
6 Click OK to close the window, and then close the Network Connections window.
666 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Step 25. Add NGen names to pcAnywhere
Adding NGenDist and NGenDesign to pcAnywhere 11.5
1 On the Standby Server, log on to Windows as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Symantec pcAnywhere.
3 On the pcAnywhere manager (left side), select the Hosts option.
4 Click the File menu, and then choose New > Item > Advanced.
Note: Do not use the Wizard option.
Result: The Host Properties: New Host window appears.
ATTENTION If your server is in a workgroup, complete this step. If you intend to add your server to a domain, see Step 26. “Add the server to domain (optional)” on page 669 for information about configuring the NGen user groups for remote access in a domain environment.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 667
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
5 Click the Callers tab.
Result: The Callers tab appears.
6 From the Authentication type list, select NT.
7 Below the Caller list heading, click the New item icon( ).
Result: The pcAnywhere Caller Properties: New Caller window appears.
8 On the Identification tab, select User.
9 From the Domain list, select the name of the server for Standby Server.
668 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
10 From the Account list, select NGenDist.
Note: The NGenDist and NGenDesign user accounts are automatically created on the server as Windows user accounts when you install the Contact Center Manager Server software. To allow authorized remote personnel to use pcAnywhere to log on and administer the server with either account, you must designate these Windows accounts as valid pcAnywhere caller accounts. By creating this link between Windows and pcAnywhere, you never have to change the passwords for these accounts in pcAnywhere; when you change the passwords in Windows, the information is automatically updated in pcAnywhere.
11 Click the Privileges tab.
12 Select the Superuser option.
13 Click OK to save the NGenDist caller account settings.
Result: The Callers tab in the pcAnywhere Host Properties window reappears.
14 Perform steps 7 to 13 again to add the NGenDesign caller account.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 669
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Step 26. Add the server to domain (optional)
This step shows you how to add your Standby Server to an existing domain, and perform other necessary tasks to make your server work in a domain. To perform this step, you need domain administrator’s privileges, or ask the domain administrator to assign you a domain user account for remote access.
Adding Standby Server to your domain
1 On the Standby Server, right-click My Computer, and then select Properties.
2 In the System Properties window, click the Computer Name tab.
3 Click Change.
4 In the Computer Name Changes window, change the computer's name and its domain or workgroup affiliation.
5 To add the server to an existing domain:
a. Click the Domain option.
b. Type the domain name (you must provide the Fully Qualified Domain Name of the domain, which includes the prefix and suffix).
6 Click OK.
Result: When the system processes your change successfully, it notifies you that the server now belongs to the domain that you specified.
7 Restart the server when you are prompted to do so.
ATTENTION Nortel recommends that the servers be in a workgroup rather than on a domain to eliminate the process of removing the computer name and IP address on the domain controller.
670 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Configure the operating system for remote access (domain)
In a Windows Server 2003 domain environment, you must create a dial-up user as a domain user on the domain controller and assign dial-in access permissions to this user. When you dial in to the Standby Server RAS configuration, the domain controller authenticates the user. Because no local dial-in account is created on Standby Server, the system no longer uses the accounts NGenDist and NGenDesign for dial-up access. However, after you establish dial-up connection using the domain user account, the pcAnywhere user accounts can still use the NGenDist or NGenDesign accounts.
Configuring the operating system for remote access (domain)
1 On the Standby Server, from the Start menu, choose Administrative Tools > Routing and Remote Access.
Result: The Routing and Remote Access window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 671
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
2 Right-click the local server name, and then select Configure and Enable Routing and Remote Access.
Result: The Welcome window appears.
3 Click Next.
Result: The Configuration window appears.
672 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
4 Make sure Remote Access (dial-up or VPN) is selected, and then click Next.
Result: The Remote Access window appears.
5 Click Dial-up, and then click Next.
Result: The Network Selection window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 673
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
6 Select the network connection that represents your Nortel server subnet, and then click Next.
Result: The IP Address Assignment window appears.
7 Select From a specified range of addresses, and then click Next.
Result: The Address Range Assignment window appears.
674 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
8 Click New.
Result: The New Address Range window appears.
9 Enter the ranges of the IP addresses provided by your domain administrator, and then click OK.
Result: The Address Range Assignment window appears showing the address ranges you entered.
10 Click Next.
Result: The Managing Multiple Remote Access Servers window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 675
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
11 Select No, use Routing and Remote Access to authenticate requests, and then click Next.
Result: The Completing the Routing and Remote Access Server Setup Wizard window appears.
12 Click Finish.
Result: The Routing and Remote Access service starts and is successfully installed on your server.
676 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Set up your user accounts for remote access
After you install the Routing and Remote Access service on your server, you must set up your user accounts for remote access. Choose from one of the following two options.
Option 1: Creating a domain user while using NGenDist account for pcAnywhereThis option requires that you create a domain user account on the domain controller with dial-in access privileges, while retaining the NGenDist or NGenDesign accounts at a pcAnywhere level.
1 On the domain controller, create a new domain user account and allow dial-in access.
Note: Nortel recommends using a user name and password that are different from NGenDist and NGenDesign. The network administrator may be required to carry out this step. Record the user name and password carefully as they are required to remotely support the Contact Center Manager Server Release 6.0 server.
2 On the Contact Center Manager Server Release 6.0 server, no changes are required to the operating system, RAS configuration, server software, or pcAnywhere installation.
3 When you dial in to the Release 6.0 server of Contact Center Manager Server, the system prompts the remote user for a domain user account and password. After the domain controller authenticates the domain user account and password, you can start the pcAnywhere session.The pcAnywhere logon can still use the NGenDist or NGenDesign account.
Note: Since there is no local record of the domain user account, you must maintain two user accounts, one is the domain user account, and the other is the local pcAnywhere account.
Option 2: Using the domain user account for pcAnywhereThis option requires that you create a domain user account on the domain controller with dial-in access, as in Option 1. However, you also use the same domain user account instead of NgenDist for pcAnywhere access. The NGenDist or NGenDesign accounts are no longer used at any level.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 677
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
1 On the domain controller, create a new domain user account and allow dial-in access.
Note: Nortel recommends that you use a user name and password that are different from NGenDist and NGenDesign. The network administrator may be required to carry out this step. Record the user name and password carefully as they are required to remotely support Contact Center Manager Server.
2 On the Contact Center Manager Server, no changes are required to the operating system, RAS configuration, or server software, except for the pcAnywhere configuration.
3 On the pcAnywhere configuration, you must select a domain user account from the domain controller in the pcAnywhere Add Users window.
Note: The Contact Center Manager Server user must be logged on using an account with domain Administrator privileges before configuring pcAnywhere users.
Stop and disable the Windows Time Service (Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX switch)
If you are using a Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX switch, stop and disable the Windows Time Service.
Stopping and disabling the Windows Time ServiceCheck that the Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX time is within 10 seconds of the domain controller time. If the time is not within 10 seconds, adjust the Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX time to match the domain controller time.
1 On the Standby Server, on the Windows desktop, right-click My Computer and choose Manage > Services and Applications > Services.
2 In the right pane, right-click Windows Time Service, and then select Stop.
3 When the Windows Time Service stops, right-click Windows Time Service again, and then select Properties.
4 On the General tab, change the Startup Type to Disabled.
5 Click Apply, and then click OK.
678 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
6 On the Computer Management window, check that Windows Time Service Startup Type is disabled.
7 Close the window.
Nortel recommends that the time difference between the Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX and the domain controller time be kept within a few seconds (+/- 10 seconds). The maximum difference is 5 minutes before Kerberos authentication problems may arise. Check the times on the Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX and the domain once a month to ensure that the 5-minute tolerance is not exceeded.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 679
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Step 27. Install and configure Real-time Statistics Multicast
As part of the migration of the Active Server to Standby Server, you must configure the Standby Server so the Real-Time Statistics IP address, Real-Time Display Multicast Controller Utility (MulticastCtrl.exe), and Real-Time Display Multicast Configuration Utility (RSMConfg.exe) are set up as same as the Active Server.
You can begin using the RSM service with the default RSM settings, or you can modify RSMs settings to conform to the requirements of your RSM-dependent applications.
Installing Real-time Statistics Multicast
During the installation, you are prompted to enter the IP multicast address that you want RSM to use to send real-time statistical data. Use the same IP multicast address for both the Active Server and Standby Server.
ATTENTION RSM compression is supported on Contact Center Manager Server, but it is not supported with Contact Center Manager Administration. If RSM compression is configured on Active Server, Contact Center Manager Administration real-time displays will not work.
680 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
The RSM IP Address window appears whenever RSM is detected during any one of the following scenarios:
an initial installation of Contact Center Manager Server
an upgrade or reinstallation of Contact Center Manager Server
For more information about installing the RSM feature in Contact Center Manager Server, see the Contact Center Manager Server Installation and Maintenance Guide.
After completing the installation, you can perform the following tasks:
Use the mRcv.exe utility on both the Active Server and Standby Server to verify that the RSM service is sending data to the appropriate ports. The information must match on both server. For more information, see the Contact Center Manager Server Installation and Maintenance Guide.
ATTENTION The IP multicast addresses that you select for RSM sending and receiving must be within the 224.0.1.0 and 239.255.255.255 range. The default is 230.0.0.1. Check with your network administrator for acceptable IP multicast addresses for your specific network.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 681
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Accept the default RSM settings provided by the Active Server installation, and begin using the RSM service. Ensure the information matches on the Standby Server.
Modify the default settings on the Active Server and Standby Server to values recommended by your RSM-dependent applications. The information must match on both server. For more information, see the Contact Center Manager Server Installation and Maintenance Guide.
Modifying Real-time Statistics Multicast settings
After installing the optional Real-Time Statistics Multicast (RSM) feature, you can modify the RSM component default settings on the Active Server and Standby Server to reflect the requirements of your organization. You can modify the following settings:
the IP multicast address to which each server in the Contact Center Manager Server configuration sends real-time statistics
the ports at which real-time statistics are received
the multicast Time To Live (TTL) value for RSM
the default multicast rate for each port at which real-time statistics are received
The TTL value in the ICMP protocol is measured in seconds or hops. For Standby Server, it is measured in hops (for example, the number of routers).
This section describes how to modify and then enable changes to the RSM service on the Active Server or Standby Server.
The RSM service consists of the configuration and the data propagation components. RSM settings are configured through the RSM configuration and multicast control utilities. The RSM statistics are transmitted through the Statistical Data Propagator (SDP).
ATTENTION The IP multicast addresses that you select for RSM sending and receiving must be within the 224.0.1.0 and 239.255.255.255 range. The default is 230.0.0.1. Check with your network administrator for acceptable IP multicast addresses for your specific network.
682 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
When you complete your modifications, you must stop and restart the SDP service on Active Server or Standby Server. This service must be aware of IP multicast changes to send the appropriate data.
When you modify multicast rates in the Multicast Configuration utility, you must open the Multicast Controller utility and click Apply to activate your changes.
Modifying the Real-Time Statistics Multicast serviceAfter the RSM component is installed on both the Active Server and Standby Server, you can use the following utilities to reconfigure RSM:
RTD Multicast Controller Utility (MulticastCtrl.exe)—Use this utility to modify settings for those applications that require that real-time statistics be turned on manually.
Note: The real-time statistics groups that you need to turn on or off vary depending upon the applications that receive data from the RSM service. Nortel highly recommends that you review the documentation for each RSM-dependent application in Contact Center Manager Server before modifying the RSM settings.
RTD Multicast Configuration Utility (RSMConfg.exe)—Use this utility to change
the IP multicast address
the Time To Live (TTL) value for the IP multicast data
the IP ports that send the real-time statistics
the multicast rates for the IP ports that send the real-time statistics
Modifying real-time statistics settings for applications that use the RSM serviceThe RTD Multicast Controller indicates which statistics are sent and how they are collected. Some applications that use RSM set this data automatically while others require manual configuration.
If you need to modify the default settings based on application requirements, or if you want to customize statistics to be sent to match the needs of your users, use the RTD Multicast Controller window to select or deselect the appropriate settings.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 683
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Ensure you perform this procedure on both the Active Server and Standby Server.
1 From the windows Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Multicast Stream Control.
Result: The RTD Multicast Controller window appears.
2 Click the Moving Window or Interval To Date check boxes, or both, for each real-time statistics group.
The Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX switch and SIP switch real-time statistics groups are:
Skillset
Application
Agent
Nodal
IVR
Route
Compression
The Communication Server 2x00/DMS real-time statistics groups are:
Skillset
Application
684 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Agent
Nodal
Compression
3 Click Apply.
Tip: You must also use the controller utility’s Apply button to activate changes to multicast rates made in the configuration utility. Refer to “Activate modifications to the RSM service in Contact Center Manager Server” on page 687 for more information.
4 Click Close.
5 To activate new RSM settings on Contact Center Manager Server (except the multicast rates), stop and start the Statistical Data Propagator (SDP) service.
Modifying the IP multicast settings in Contact Center Manager ServerPerform the following steps to modify the multicast IP settings on the Active Server and Standby Server.
ATTENTION Nortel highly recommends that you review the documentation for each RSM-dependent application that use the RSM service in Contact Center Manager Server before modifying the RSM IP multicast settings.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 685
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
1 From the windows Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server >Multicast Address and Port Configuration.
Result: The RTD Multicast Configuration window appears.
2 In the Multicast IP group box, type the IP multicast address that was designated as the sending address for IP multicasting in Contact Center Manager Server.
3 In the IP Port boxes, type the IP port for each statistics group.
ATTENTION The IP multicast addresses that support multicasting are 224.0.1.0 through 239.255.255.255, but the IP multicast addresses between 224.0.0.0 and 224.0.0.255 inclusive are reserved for routing and topology discovery protocols. Addresses between 239.0.0.0 and 239.255.255.255 are reserved for administrative scoping.The IP multicast addresses that you select for RSM sending and receiving must be within the 224.0.1.0 and 239.255.255.255 range.
ATTENTION If you change the IP port settings, this can cause some applications that are dependent upon the RSM service to malfunction.
686 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
4 Change the Multicast time to live (TTL) value to a value that is appropriate for your network.
5 To increase or decrease the default multicast rate, enter a new rate in milliseconds for each port in the Multicast Rate boxes.
Note: If you enter 0 in the Multicast Rate box, you disable the statistic.
Tip: If you have made an error in modifying the multicast IP group, TTL, IP ports, or the multicast rates for each port, you can restore the original values by clicking Registry Value or Default Value. Note that if you modify any of these values and click OK or Apply, the appropriate registries are updated with your changes. If you click Registry Value after the modifications are saved to the registry, it has no effect.
Click Registry Value before you click Apply to retrieve the values stored in the registries. Use this option if you want to cancel a change without having to remember and retype the original values.
Click Default Value to restore the values that are set when Contact Center Manager Server is installed. Use this option if you save changes to the registry that caused RSM-dependent applications to malfunction, and you want to begin again with the default RSM configuration.
ATTENTION If packets are traveling through more than one router to reach their destination, it is important to change the Multicast time to live (TTL) value to a value that is appropriate for your network and the number of routers that you use. If the TTL value is set too low and the packets have to go through many routers, the real-time multicast statistics may not reach your application.
ATTENTION If you change the Multicast Rate for any display in RTD Multicast Configuration, it may not produce the refresh rate changes that you anticipate. Refresh rates depend on the settings in other applications, as well as those set in the configuration window. The minimum refresh rate for RSM is 5000 ms (5 seconds). In addition, certain applications require a specific multicast rate. Before changing a multicast rate, check the documentation for each application to verify that all applications that receive RSM data are not affected by the change.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 687
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
6 Click OK.
7 To activate new multicast rate settings on Contact Center Manager Server, you must open the configuration utility and click Apply. Refer to the following procedure, “Activate modifications to the RSM service in Contact Center Manager Server”, for more information.
Activating a multicast rate modificationWhen you change a multicast rate in the configuration utility, you modify only the default value, not the current transmission rate. RSM continues to transmit data at the current rate until you open the Controller utility and click Apply.
Perform this procedure on both the Active Server and the Standby Server.
1 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Windows Explorer.
2 Navigate to the folder in which the RSM component is installed:
D:\Nortel\iccm\bin
3 Double-click MulticastCtrl.exe.
Result: The RTD Multicast Controller window appears.
4 Click Apply.
5 Click Close.
6 Stop and start the Statistical Data Propagator (SDP) service to activate new RSM settings on Contact Center Manager Server except multicast rates).
Result: The new multicast rates are retrieved from the appropriate registry, and RSM begins transmitting at the new rate.
Activate modifications to the RSM service in Contact Center Manager Server
When you modify the RSM service multicast IP group, TTL, and IP port settings, you must activate the new values on Contact Center Manager Server by stopping and starting the Statistical Data Propagator (SDP) service.
Perform this procedure on both the Active Server and the Standby Server.
688 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Activating the Contact Center Manager Server settings
1 From the Start menu, choose Control Panel.
2 Click Services.
Result: The Services window appears.
3 From the list of services, select SDP_Service.
4 Click Stop.
5 Click Start.
6 Click Close.
Tip: If you have problems stopping and starting the SDP Service, you can temporarily disable SDP Service to stop it. After the service stops, reset the service to start manually, and then restart the service.
a. In the Services window, click SDP_Service.
b. Click Properties.
Result: The Service Properties window appears.
c. On the Startup Type menu, select Disabled.
Result: The SDP_Service is disabled.
d. Click OK to return to the Services window.
e. Select SDP_Service and click Stop.
Result: The SDP_Service stops.
f. Click Properties.
Result: The Service Properties window appears.
g. On the Startup Type menu, select Manual.
Result: The SDP_Service is set to manually start when the system starts.
h. Click OK to return to the Services window.
i. Select SDP_Service and click Start to restart the service.
j. Click Close.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 689
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Testing the Real-time Statistics Multicast service
After you install RSM on the Active or Standby Server or modified RSM and restarted SDP_Service, you can use the Multicast Receive utility (mRcv.exe) to test the RSM service. mRcv.exe displays statistical information according to the settings specified in a configuration file called mRcv.ini.
Configure the Multicast Receive utilityThe mRcv.exe utility tests the RSM service send capabilities one port at a time. You can specify which IP address and port the utility monitors in the [MCast] section of the mRcv.ini file.
Perform this procedure on both the Active Server and the Standby Server.
Modifying the mRcv.ini file
1 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Windows Explorer.
2 Navigate to the folder in which the RSM component is installed:
<drive>:\Nortel\iccm\bin
3 Use a text editor to open mRcv.ini.
4 Modify the IP address or the port number, or both.
Note: The port numbers listed within the section bordered by pound (#) symbols in the .ini file are for reference only and list all of the acceptable port numbers that you can use in your test. Refer to “Sample mRcv.ini file” on page 690 for an example of the information in a standard mRcv.ini file.
For example, if you want to test receipt of Skillset - Interval to date data using mRcv.exe, check the port number for Skillset - Interval to date in the .ini file, and then change the Port= setting in the [MCast] section to that port number. If Skillset - Interval to date = 6040 in the .ini file, the [MCast] section of the .ini file must be modified as follows:
[MCast]IP=234.5.6.7Port=6040
ATTENTION The IP= value must match your IP multicast address.
690 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
5 Save the mRcv.ini file. After setting the parameters for your test, you can start mRcv.exe to begin the test. Refer to “Starting the mRcv application” on page 691 for more information.
Sample mRcv.ini fileThe sample below is the default mRcv.ini file provided by the Contact Center Manager Server installation. If you run the mRcv.exe utility using this .ini file, it displays Skillset - Moving window data sent by RSM, based on the settings in the [MCast] section at the bottom of the file (IP = 234.5.6.7 Port = 6050).
The list of port numbers in the mRcv.ini file is for reference only, and each line is marked with the pound (#) symbol. You can use these port numbers as an easy-to-access list of valid ports that are used in the system to display data. The only portion of the .ini file that can be modified is the [MCast] section at the bottom of the file.
######################################################## mRcv.ini file## Valid port numbers are:# Application - Interval to date = 6020# Application - Moving window = 6030# Skillset - Interval to date = 6040# Skillset - Moving window = 6050# Agent - Interval to date = 6060# Agent - Moving window = 6070# Nodal - Interval to date = 6080# Nodal - Moving window = 6090# IVR - Interval to date = 6100# IVR - Moving window = 6110# Route - Interval to date = 6120# Route - Moving window = 6130#######################################################[MCast]IP = 234.5.6.7Port = 6050
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 691
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Starting the mRcv applicationEnsure you perform this procedure on both the Active Server and Standby Server.
1 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Windows Explorer.
2 Navigate to the folder in which the RSM component is installed:
<drive>:\Nortel\iccm\bin
3 Double-click mRcv.exe. The mRcv.exe utility appears in a console window displaying data from the port and IP address that you specified in the mRcv.ini file.
Note: The mRcv.exe utility displays all data received on the selected port, including data that is not recognizable by RSM. All non-RSM data is identified as Not recognized by RSM.
692 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 693
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Section E: Set up and test Warm Standby
In this sectionStep 28. Set up the Warm Standby configuration on the Replication Server694
Step 29. Test the Standby Server configuration 711
694 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Step 28. Set up the Warm Standby configuration on the Replication Server
Follow this procedure to set up the Warm Standby configuration on the Replication Server.
Setting up the Warm Standby configuration on the Replication Server
1 On the Standby Server, from the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Replication Server > Replication Server Management.
Result: The following window appears.
ATTENTION If you must restore your Active Server database, first remove the warm standby setup, restore the database, then reconfigure your warm standby setup. If you do not, the restoration fails and you receive a database user login error.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 695
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
2 Click Create.
Result: The following window appears.
3 In the Primary CCMS box, type the name and Nortel server subnet IP address for the Active Server.
4 In the Secondary CCMS box, type the name and Nortel server subnet IP address for the Standby Server, and click OK.
Note: Enter names for only the Active and Standby Servers that were configured correctly on the Server Setup Configuration Site Name tab. The name for each Active and Standby Server must match the computer name configured on the server. If no Active and Standby Servers are configured to use the Warm Standby feature, or if you want to create a Warm Standby configuration at a later time, click Cancel.
Result: The following window appears.
696 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
The Warm Standby configuration takes several minutes. Several Setup windows appear, and the Initialize Standby CCMS Database window appears.
.
Attention: Do not click OK until you complete the backup and restore procedures in the following step.
5 Use the Database Backup utility on the Active Server to back up the Active Contact Center Manager Server database. After you complete the back up, use the Database Restore utility on the Standby Server to restore this database backup. This initializes the Standby Server database.
To back up the database to tape, proceed to “Backing up the database to tape” on page 696.
To back up the database to a remote directory, proceed to “Backing up the database to a remote directory” on page 699.
Backing up the database to tape
a. On the Active Server, insert a blank tape into the tape drive.
b. Ensure the services on the server are up.
Note: A database backup uses the CCMS HDM service. If this service is down, the database backup cannot start.
ATTENTION To initialize the Standby Server database correctly, ensure you do the following:
Back up the Active Server database only after you are prompted to do so. For more information about backing up the server, see “Back up data” on page 907. For more information about restoring the database, see “Restore data” on page 953.
Use the backup utility to initialize the Standby Server database. Do not use a previous or subsequent backup.
Ensure the backup is not overwritten by subsequent backups until after you initialize the Standby Server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 697
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
c. From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Database Backup.
Result: The Database Backup Utility window appears.
d. Select Local Tape Drive, and click Next.
e. Verify that the database tape is in the tape drive, and click Start Backup.
Result: A DOS window appears showing the progress of the database backup.
698 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
The remote backup process begins. This can take from 30 minutes to 3 hours to complete, depending on the size of your database, the speed of your server, and network traffic. Leave the DOS window open so you can see the backup completion message.
f. Wait until the completed OK message appears in the DOS window.
g. Press Enter, type quit, and press Enter again.
Result: The Remember to schedule regular database backups window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 699
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
h. Click OK.
i. After the database backup is complete, remove the backup tape and save it.
j. Check whether any events are recorded in the event log on the client PC from which you scheduled the backup. If there are any errors, check the database backup log files on the server. These files are located at the following paths: C:\Windows\System32\Backup.log and D:\Sybase\ASE-12_5\Install\backup.log.
k. Proceed to “Restoring the database from a tape backup” on page 704.
Backing up the database to a remote directory
a. On the Active Server, ensure the services on the server are running.
Note: A database backup uses the HDM service. If this service is down, the database backup cannot start.
b. Select Start > Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Database Backup.
Result: The Database Backup Utility window appears.
700 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
c. Ensure Network Disk is selected, and click Next.
Result: The configuration window appears.
d. In the Account box, type the user name you recorded in the worksheet on page 543. This must be the same user name you assigned to the account on both the network computer and the server.
e. In the Password box, type the password you recorded in the worksheet on page 543. This must be the same password you assigned to the account on both the network computer and the server.
f. In the Network Path box, type the network path for the shared directory you created on the network computer. Use the following format:
computername\sharename
Refer to the computer name and share name that you recorded in the worksheet on page 543.
g. Click Next.
Result: Contact Center Manager Server is now set to back up the database from the remote directory on the network computer.
h. If your backup is already scheduled, the system automatically sends the database backup files to the remote directory.
Result: The following window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 701
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
i. If your backup is not scheduled, click Start Backup.
Result: The services start, and then the following window appears.
j. To start your backup, skip to step k; otherwise, click Cancel to save your settings and exit.
k. Click Start Backup.
Result: A DOS window appears showing the progress of the database backup.
702 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
The remote backup process begins. This can take from 30 minutes to 3 hours to complete, depending on the size of your database, the speed of your server, and network traffic. Leave the DOS window open so you can see the backup completion message.
l. Wait until the completed OK message appears in the DOS window.
m. Press Enter, type quit, and press Enter again.
Result: The following window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 703
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
n. Click OK.
Result: The backup is complete.
The backup log for your backup is located atD:\Nortel\data\backup\BackupLogs\dbbackup.log.
o. Navigate to D:\Nortel\data\backup\BackupLogs\ and open the file dbbackup.log (with Notepad). If your database backup succeeded, the log contains the following lines of text:
[SERVER MESSAGE]:Backup Server: 3.42.1.1: DUMP is complete (database cbc).
[SERVER MESSAGE]:Backup Server: 3.42.1.1: DUMP is complete (database blue).
[SERVER MESSAGE]:Backup Server: 3.42.1.1: DUMP is complete (database master).
This database backup log does not have any errors or warnings.
p. Perform one of the following tasks:
If your database backup log contains the text in the previous example, your backup succeeded. Close the log file.
If your database backup log contains any messages or errors, this can indicate a problem with the backup. Navigate to the folder D:\sybase\ASE-12_5\install and open the file backup.log (with Notepad). This file can indicate the source of the problem. Retry the backup and check the backup log again. If the log still contains messages or errors, contact Nortel product support.
q. Proceed to “Restoring the database from a remote directory backup” on page 706.
704 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Restoring the database from a tape backup
a. Log on to the Standby Server as NGenSys.
b. From the Start menu, choose Programs > Standby Server > Database Restore.
Result: The Database Restore Utility window appears.
c. Select Local Tape Drive, and click Next.
d. Insert the tape containing the database backup.
Result: The system first shuts down the Standby Server services that you installed. Then the database restore begins. During this time, the Database Restore window remains visible and displays numerous status messages about the progress of the restore.
e. Wait until the Database Restore Utility window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 705
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
f. When the tape in the drive stops moving, click Start Restore to begin the database restore process.
Note: A log file is created with the following path name after the database restore is complete: D:\Nortel\data\backup\RestoreLogs\restore.log.
Result: The following window appears.
g. Click Done.
h. Eject the backup tape from the tape drive.
706 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
i. Click OK to exit the Database Restore utility.
Attention: You must wait for the Database Restore Utility window to close. It can seem like there is no activity, but the system must complete its processes and close this window. This can take up to 2 minutes to complete. Do not restart the system.
j. Proceed to step 6.
Restoring the database from a remote directory backup
a. Log on to the Standby Server as NGenSys.
b. Ensure that you have a network connection to the computer containing the remote directory backup.
c. From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Database Restore.
Result: The Database Restore Utility window appears.
d. Select Network Disk, and click Next.
Result: The following window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 707
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
e. In the Account box, type the account name for the remote backup location.
f. In the Password box, type the password for the remote backup location.
g. In the Network Path box, type the path of the remote backup location.
h. Check that the path is correct.
i. Click Next.
Result: The following window appears.
708 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
j. Click Start Restore to begin the database restore process.
Result: The database restore process begins. This can take 1 to 3 hours, depending on the amount of data and the CPU speed of the server. During this time, the Database Restore Utility window remains in view and displays numerous status messages about the progress of the restore.
Note: The restore can take longer if you store your call-by-call records for longer than the recommended interval.
k. Wait until the following window appears, indicating that the restore is complete.
Note: A log file with the following path name is created after the database restore is complete: D:\Nortel\data\backup\RestoreLogs\restore.log
l. Click Done.
Result: The following window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 709
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
m. Click OK to exit the Database Restore utility.
Attention: You must wait for the Database Restore Utility window to close. It can seem as if there is no activity, but the system must complete its processes and close this window. Nortel recommends that you do not restart the server at this time.
n. Proceed to step 6.
6 After you back up and restore the database, click OK on the Initialize Standby CCMS Database window.
Result: The Standby Server database initializes by performing the backup and restore. This can take several minutes. Then the Initialization Complete? window appears.
7 Click Yes.
Result: The Warm Standby Properties window appears.
8 Choose one of the following:
Option One—Uses the enhanced switchover procedure. For more information, see “Switchover options” on page 719.
Option Two—Requires you to configure the computer name and IP address manually. For more information, see “Switchover options” on page 719.
710 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
9 Select the Switch Over automatically checkbox, to enable the automatic switchover.
You can only enable the automatic switchover if you choose Option One.
If you choose Option Two, the Switch Over automatically checkbox is unavailable.
When you select an automatic switchover, the switchover from the Active Server to the Standby Server starts automatically when the heartbeat between the Replication Server and the Active Server fails for a duration in excess of the Alarm Switch Over/Timeout value.
Note: Automatic switchover is limited to the operation of the Standby Server and does not take into account additional application servers such as Contact Center Manager Administration, Contact Center Multimedia, and CallPilot.
10 In the Alarm/Switch Over Timeout box, type the number of seconds that the heartbeat can fail before the switchover takes place.
Attention: Ensure that you type an appropriate timeout value in this box. Too short a time can cause a switchover to start when the Active Server is unavailable for a short time, for example, if the server is restarted. The default timeout is 5 minutes. The minimum value is 30 seconds.
11 In the CCM Server Port Number box, type the port number to which the Replication Server connects during a switchover.
Note: You must type the same value that you entered in the CCMS Listener Port field. Ensure that the value you enter does not interfere with a port used by any other application.
12 Click OK.
Result: The Warm Standby configuration is complete. The Replication Server Management window appears.
13 Click OK to exit the Replication Server Management window.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 711
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
Step 29. Test the Standby Server configuration
It is important to test the Standby Server configuration. In order to properly test your Standby Server configuration, set up the switchover using Option One. Once you test the configuration, you can change to Option Two if you desire.
Option One—Option One switchover is invoked manually, or it is used in conjunction with the Automatic Switchover option if it is enabled. This option configures the Secondary Server for use and launches its Contact Center Manager services without further user intervention.
Use Option One for Geographic Redundancy scenarios. You can also use Option One for Campus Redundancy scenarios if you are updating Nortel or third-party applications with the address of the Secondary Server, and doing so does not involve significant overhead.
Option Two—Option Two switchover is invoked manually only. If you use Option Two, you must change the computer name and Nortel server subnet IP address on each server during switchover. The remaining steps are automated. Use this method for Campus Redundancy scenarios where updating Nortel or third-party applications with the address of the Secondary Server involves significant overhead
Use the following procedure to test your Standby Server configuration prior to switch over. For more information on switching over from Active Server to Standby Server, see “Switch over to the Standby Server” on page 717.
Testing the Standby Server configuration
1 Log on to the Replication Server as Administrator.
2 Go to Start > Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Replication Server > Replication Server Management.
3 Select the Active and Standby Servers you want to switch from the list.
4 Click Edit.
Result: The Replication Properties window appears.
5 Select Option One.
712 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
6 Click OK.
Result: The Replication Server Management window appears.
7 Click Switchover.
Result: A message prompts you to shutdown the Active Server services.
8 Log on to Active Server.
9 Go to Start > Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Shutdown.
10 Accept the shut down of services when prompted.
11 On Replication Server, select OK in the Shutdown Active CCMS window
Result: The system begins to switch Active Server and Standby Server. Once completed, you are prompted with a Stage one complete window.
12 Click OK.
Result: The Replication Server completes the switch over.
13 Go to Start > Programs > Contact Center Standby Server > Replication Server Monitor.
Result: The Replication Server Monitor window appears.
Note: For more information on the Replication Server Monitor, see “Running the Replication Server Monitor” on page 885.
14 Ensure that the former Standby Server is listed under the Active Database heading.
15 Ensure that the former Active Server is listed under the Standby Database heading.
16 Ensure the status is Active for both servers.
17 Log on to the former Standby Server, now the Active Server.
18 Go to Start > Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Server Monitor.
Result: The Server Monitor window appears.
19 Ensure that all services are running.
20 Log on to the former Active Server, now the Standby Server.
21 Go to Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Services.
Result: The Services window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 713
January 2008 Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment
22 Ensure that all Contact Center Manager Server services are stopped.
At this point you can assume the system has successfully switched over. You can switch the system back to the original setup by repeating this procedure.
Once completed, you can edit the system configuration select Option Two, if desired. You can, also, select Automatic Switchover for Option One, if desired. For more information on Option One, Option Two, and switchover, see “Switch over to the Standby Server” on page 717.
714 Contact Center Standby Server
Add a Standby Server to an existing CCMS environment Standard 10.12
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 715
Pa r t 3
Switch over the servers
716 Contact Center Standby Server
Standard 10.12
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 717
C h a p t e r 7
Switch over to the Standby Server
In this chapterOverview 718
Section A: Option One switchover 725
Section B: Option Two switchover 787
Section C: Restore the Primary Server to active mode 837
718 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Overview
A Warm Standby configuration ensures that the content of the Secondary Server (standby mode) database mirrors the Primary Server (active mode) database. When required, you can use the Secondary Server in place of the Primary server to operate the Contact Center Manager Server application. When the Secondary Server (standby mode) operates as the Secondary Server (active mode), it runs the Contact Center Manager Server application, and its database is updated as part of normal contact processing. To have the Secondary Server run the Contact Center Manager Server application, you perform a switchover on the Replication Server so that the Secondary Server (standby mode) becomes active and transactions are copied from the Secondary Server (active mode) to the Primary Server (standby mode).
You can switch over to the Secondary Server (standby mode) for the following reasons:
1. The Primary Server requires maintenance, preventing it from running the Contact Center Manager Server application.
2. The Primary Server has a hardware failure such as disk failure or memory failure.
3. The Primary Server has a network failure.
4. You want to test your Secondary Server configuration.
ATTENTION In this chapter, the terms Active Server and Standby Server are replaced with the terms Primary Server and Secondary Server. This is due to the switching over of the active and standby roles of the servers. The terms Primary Server and Secondary Server refer to the physical servers, and do not change. These labels are followed by the server state, either active mode or standby mode, which does change.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 719
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
Switchover options
The two switchover options are as follows:
Option One—Option One switchover is invoked manually, or it is used in conjunction with the Automatic Switchover option if it is enabled. This option configures the Secondary Server for use and launches its Contact Center Manager services without further user intervention.
Use Option One for Geographic Redundancy scenarios. You can also use Option One for Campus Redundancy scenarios if you are updating Nortel or third-party applications with the address of the Secondary Server, and doing so does not involve significant overhead.
Option Two—Option Two switchover is invoked manually only. If you use Option Two, you must change the computer name and Nortel server subnet IP address on each server during switchover. The remaining steps are automated. Use this method for Campus Redundancy scenarios where updating Nortel or third-party applications with the address of the Secondary Server involves significant overhead.
ATTENTION If you are using LinkPlexer, you must select Option 2 so that the IP address and the computer name of the Active Contact Center Manager Server, which coresides with the License Manager in a nodal license environment, remains the same after the switchover. If you do not select Option 2, you will have to reconfigure LinkPlexer. For more information, see the Nortel LinkPlexer Installation and Configuration Guide (297-2183-964).
ATTENTION If the Primary and Secondary Servers are members of a Windows domain, the domain administrator must remove the Secondary Server computer name from Active Directory Users and Computers on the domain controller. You can then change the name of the Secondary Server to that of the Primary Server.
720 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Stage One and Stage Two
During the switchover procedure, this document refers to Stage One and Stage Two. Stage One is complete when the Secondary Server is active and running the Contact Center. At this point the Primary Server is neither in active nor standby mode.
Stage Two is complete when the Primary Server is set in standby mode and data is replicated from the Secondary Server (active mode) to the Primary Server (standby mode).
When Stage One is complete, decide when and if to proceed to Stage Two. This depends on the outage scenario.
At the end of Stage One, you must check the multicast configuration on the Secondary Server (active mode), otherwise Real-Time Displays (RTD) do not work. If this is the first time the Secondary Server is configured as active, the multicast is not configured because it is not retained in the database restore procedure. To check the multicast configuration, go to Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Multicast Stream Control and Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Multicast Address and Port Configuration.
Outage scenarios
Three outage scenarios are documented for each option.
Planned outage—Use this procedure in the event of a planned outage due to testing in the lab or at a customer site. You can continue to Stage Two immediately after Stage One is complete.
Short-term failure—Use this procedure in the event of a short-term failure or shutdown. You do not necessarily continue to Stage Two immediately after Stage One is complete. First, you must decide whether to remove the Warm Standby configuration. Decide based on the size of the Stable Queue.
After Stage One of the switchover is complete, the Secondary Server replicates transactions to the Replication Server. The transactions are buffered in the Stable Queues on the Replication Server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 721
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
If the outage of the Primary Server is likely to approach or exceed the worst-case duration provided for by the Stable Queues, remove the Warm Standby configuration. The Secondary Server operates in the nonredundant mode until the Primary Server is recovered; you can reconfigure the Warm Standby configuration.
If the outage of the Primary Server does not exceed the worst-case duration provided for by the Stable Queues, when the Primary Server is recovered, you can continue with Stage Two of the switchover procedure.
Long-term failure—Use this procedure in the event that the Primary Server suffers a long-term or permanent outage or shutdown. You do not continue to Stage Two immediately after Stage One is complete.
You must remove the Warm Standby configuration for the Secondary Server. For more information, see “Remove Warm Standby configurations” on page 833.
When a new platform for the Primary Server is available, you can reconfigure the Warm Standby configuration. Initially the Secondary Server operates in active mode; therefore you must use the switchover utility to switch the recovered Primary Server to active mode.
Host name
The Primary host name is the host name originally configured on the Primary Server (active mode). The Secondary Server (standby mode) is configured with a separate host name. Other Contact Center components, such as Contact Center Manager Administration and Contact Center Multimedia, connect to the Primary Server (active mode) using the Primary host name.
When you use the Option One switchover, each physical server keeps its original host name. You must reconfigure the other Contact Center components to point to the Secondary Server (active mode) host name.
When you use the Option Two switchover, you must reconfigure the Secondary Server with the Primary host name during the switchover. The other Contact Center components continue to use the same Primary Server host name that they used before the switchover.
722 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Nortel server subnet IP address
Use only one active Nortel server subnet IP address with the active server (Primary or Secondary) for Contact Center Manager Server. The active Nortel server subnet IP address is the Nortel server subnet IP address that you originally configured on the Primary Server (active mode). Components, such as Contact Center Manager Server, that are connected to the Nortel server subnet always connect to the active server (Primary or Secondary) using the active Nortel server subnet IP address.
When you use the Option One switchover, each physical server keeps its original Nortel server subnet IP address. You must reconfigure the other Contact Center components to point to the new Secondary Server (active mode) IP address.
When you use the Option Two switchover, you must reconfigure the Secondary Server with the active Nortel server subnet IP address during the switchover. The other Contact Center components continue to use the Nortel server subnet IP address that they used before the switchover.
ELAN subnet IP address (optional)
You can configure the Primary and Secondary Servers with unique or identical ELAN subnet IP addresses. If your system is connected directly to the Communication Server 2x00/DMS/SL-100 switch , you must configure the Secondary Server with the same ELAN subnet IP address as the Primary Server. If you configure the Primary and Secondary severs with the same ELAN subnet IP address, you need to disconnect the Secondary Server from the ELAN subnet if the ELAN subnet IP address was configured in DNS.
If your Primary and Secondary servers are connected to the Communication Server 2x00/DMS/SL-100 switch using LinkPlexer, you can use unique IP addresses for each server. LinkPlexer allows you to have both the Primary and Secondary servers connected to the network with unique IP addresses.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 723
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
License Manager
If you are using nodal licensing, you must install the License Manager on the Primary Server (active mode) and on the Secondary Server (standby mode). After the switchover is complete, the License Manager on the Secondary Server (active mode) is left running.
If you are using corporate licensing, Nortel recommends that you do not install the backup License Manager on the Secondary Server. In this scenario, install the backup License Manager on a separate computer.
724 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 725
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
Section A: Option One switchover
In this section Overview 726
Switch over the servers for a planned outage (Option One) 728
Switch over the servers for a short-term failure (Option One) 745
Switch over the servers for a long-term failure (Option One) 765
726 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Overview
When you use the Option One switchover, both the Primary Server (active mode) and the Secondary Server (standby mode) are configured with unique IP addresses and computer names. The Secondary Server (standby mode) retains its original IP address and computer name after the switchover; therefore, less user intervention is required.
You invoke Option One switchover manually, or use it in conjunction with the Automatic Switchover option, if this is enabled. Option One configures the Secondary Server for use and launches the Secondary Server services without further user intervention.
Option One must be used in Geographic Redundancy scenarios. With Geographic Redundancy, the Primary and Secondary Contact Center Manager Servers are geographically dispersed. They are likely in different network subnets. The entire setup is duplicated at the secondary site (including CS1000, CallPilot, and Contact Center Manager Administration). Therefore, you perform fewer post-switchover steps, as all of the entities that connect to Contact Center Manager Server at the secondary site are already configured with the IP address of the Secondary Server.
ATTENTION In this chapter, the terms Active Server and Standby Server are replaced with the terms Primary Server and Secondary Server. This is due to the switching over of the active and standby roles of the servers. The terms Primary Server and Secondary Server refer to the physical servers, and do not change. These labels are followed by the server state, either active mode or standby mode, which does change.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 727
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
You can also use Option One in Campus Redundancy scenarios if updating Nortel or third-party applications with the address of the Secondary Server does not involve significant overhead.
Deciding which scenario to useIf the Stable Queue has enough space to handle replication, use the short-term option. If not, use the long-term option.
ATTENTION If you are using LinkPlexer, you must select Option 2 so that the IP address and the computer name of the Active Contact Center Manager Server, which coresides with the License Manager in a nodal license environment, remains the same after the switchover. If you do not select Option 2, you will have to reconfigure LinkPlexer. For more information, see the Nortel LinkPlexer Installation and Configuration Guide (297-2183-964).
.
CAUTION
Risk of malfunctionThe Stable Queue stores transactions temporarily until the Replication Server executes the transactions to the Secondary Server (standby mode) database. If the Secondary Server is unavailable, for example, because it is now operating in active mode, the Stable Queue eventually fills up. As a result, the Secondary Server (active mode) cannot send transactions to the Replication Server.
The length of time that the Stable Queue can store transactions depends on the size of your Stable Queue. Ensure that you configure sufficient Stable Queue space using the Standby Server Stable Queue tool.
To avoid data loss, restore the Primary Server to standby mode and complete the switchover as soon as possible. If the Primary Server is unavailable for an extended period, remove the Warm Standby configuration. For more information about removing a Warm Standby configuration, see “Remove Warm Standby configurations” on page 833.
728 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Switch over the servers for a planned outage (Option One)
Follow these procedures for a planned outage, such as due to testing in the lab or customer site. You can continue to Stage Two immediately after Stage One is complete.
The procedures for a planned outage are:
Switching over the server—At the end of this procedure, Stage One is complete.
Completing post-switchover tasks on other components:
Server Utility
Contact Center Manager Administration
Network Control Center
CallPilot
Contact Center Multimedia
Communication Control Toolkit
third-party applications
Completing the switchover—At the end of this procedure, Stage Two is complete.
Each page of this switchover procedure is marked with this icon:
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 729
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
Switching over the serverStage One begins
Stage One of the switchover is complete when Contact Center Manager Server services start on the Secondary Server.
1 Log on to the Replication Server as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Replication Server > Replication Server Management.
3 From the list, select the Primary and Secondary Servers you want to switch.
4 Click Switchover.
730 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Result: A message prompts you to shut down the Primary Server (active mode).
a. Close any sessions of all Contact Center Manager Server clients and any third-party clients that can update the database.
b. From the Start menu on the Primary Server (active mode), choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Shutdown.
Note: If the Primary Server (active mode) stopped running due to a loss of power supply or similar malfunction, you can assume that the Contact Center Manager Server application stopped running.
5 Click OK.
Note: If you do not want to continue, click Cancel.
.
CAUTION
Risk of malfunctionAfter you complete this step, you cannot stop the switchover.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 731
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
Result: The following window appears.
The Replication Server connects to the Secondary Server (standby mode) and configures it as the Secondary Server (active mode).
732 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
The Replication Server starts the Contact Center Manager Server services on the Secondary Server (active mode).
Result: The following window appears.
Stage One is complete
Stage One of the switchover is complete when Contact Center Manager Server services start and the Secondary Server is active and running the Contact Center.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 733
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
At the end of Stage One, you must check the multicast configuration on the Secondary Server (active mode), otherwise RTDs will not work. If this is the first time the Secondary Server is configured as active, multicast is not configured because it is not retained in the database restore procedure.
To check the multicast configuration, go to Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Multicast Stream Control and Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Multicast Address and Port Configuration.
6 Do not click OK or Cancel on this window. Leave this window open and complete the post-switchover steps.
Note: When you complete the post-switchover steps, return to this window and click OK to complete the switchover. For more information, see “Post-switchover tasks” on page 733.
Post-switchover tasks
You must complete the following tasks on other system components.
Launching the Server UtilityOnly complete this task the first time you perform the switchover to the Secondary Server.
734 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
1 Log on to the server on which you installed the Server Utility.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Server Utility > Server Utility.
Result: The Nortel Contact Center Manager Server Utility Login window appears.
3 Enter the sysadmin user ID and password and the server name or IP address.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 735
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
4 Click OK.
Result: The End User License Agreement window appears.
5 Read the End User License Agreement.
6 Click Accept.
Result: The Server Utility launches.
Configuring Contact Center Manager AdministrationYou must configure Contact Center Manager Administration with the name of the Secondary Server.
1 Log on to Contact Center Manager Administration.
2 Select Configuration.
3 Select the name of the Primary Server.
4 From the Server menu, select Edit Properties.
736 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
5 In the Server Name box, type the name of the Secondary Server (active mode).
6 In the IP Address box, ensure that the IP address of the Secondary Server (active mode) appears.
7 Click Submit.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 737
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
Result: The server name is updated. Now you can use Contact Center Manager Administration to manage the Secondary Server (active mode).
Updating the Network Control CenterYou must update the IP address on the Network Control Center if the Secondary Server is a node in a Contact Center network.
1 On the Network Control Center, run the Configuration utility (nbconfig -admin).
2 On the Site Table tab, select the site name corresponding to the Secondary Server (active mode).
3 Select Edit.
4 Enter the IP address of the Secondary Server (active mode).
738 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
5 Click Verify to check the connection to the Secondary Server (active mode).
6 Click Apply. This synchronizes the other nodal servers with the IP address of the Secondary Server (active mode).
7 Click Refresh to check the progress of the synchronization. The synchronization is complete when all nodes show S in the Flags column.
Updating the CallPilot serverIf you are using CallPilot in the Contact Center to provide treatments and IVR, you must update the CallPilot server with the Nortel server subnet IP address of the Secondary Server (active mode).
1 Run the Configuration Wizard on the CallPilot server.
2 Enter the new Nortel server subnet IP address.
3 When you complete the configuration, restart the CallPilot server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 739
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
Updating the Contact Center Multimedia serverYou must edit the server settings in Contact Center Multimedia.
1 In the Contact Center Multimedia Administration window, expand Contact Center Multimedia.
2 Expand General Administration.
740 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
3 Double-click Server Settings.
Result: The Server Settings window appears.
4 Select Contact Center Manager Server.
5 Click Edit.
Result: The Server Properties window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 741
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
6 In the Server Name box, change the name to the Secondary Server (active mode) name. The default server port depends on the server you are configuring.
7 Click Save.
Result: A warning appears describing potential errors for changing this server.
8 Click OK.
9 In the Server Settings window, click the Contact Center License Server.
10 Click Edit.
11 In the Server Name box, change the name of the Contact Center License server.
12 In the Server Port box, change the port number for the Contact Center License server. The default port number is 3998.
13 In the Backup Server box, type the name for the backup License Manager server, if you have one.
14 Click Save.
Result: A warning appears describing potential errors for changing this server.
15 Click OK.
16 Click Close.
742 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
17 Stop and restart the Contact Center Multimedia services.
a. On the Windows Start menu, click Programs > Administrative Tools > Services.
b. Stop the CCMM Starter service.
c. Stop the CCMM License service.
d. Start the CCMM License service.
e. Start the CCMM Starter service.
Updating the Communication Control Toolkit serverYou must update the Communication Control Toolkit server CMF mode with the new host name.
1 Go to Start > Programs > Nortel > Communication Control Toolkit > Console.
2 Select CCT Server.
3 Select the CMF configuration tab.
4 In the CCMS server name box, type the new host name.
5 Click OK.
6 Close the console.
Reconfiguring third-Party applicationsYou must reconfigure any third-party applications that are configured with the computer name or IP address of the Primary Server (active mode) with the server name and IP address of the Secondary Server (active mode). You can retrieve the IP address information from the appropriate SNMP trap.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 743
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
Completing the switchover
This procedure is a continuation of the procedure “Switching over the server” on page 729.
1 Click OK to complete the switchover.
Note: You can click Cancel if you want to complete the switchover at a later time.
Stage Two begins
Stage Two is complete when the Primary Server is set in standby mode and data is replicated from the Secondary Server (active mode) to the Primary Server (standby mode).
744 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Result: The Primary Server (active mode) becomes the Primary Server (standby mode). The following window appears.
Stage Two is complete
Stage Two is complete when the Primary Server is set in standby mode and data is replicated from the Secondary Server (active mode) to the Primary Server (standby mode).
Result: The switchover is complete
2 Click Done.
What is next?
The servers have now switched roles. The Primary Server is in standby mode and the Secondary Server is in active mode. To switch back, so the Primary Server is in active mode and the Secondary Server is in standby mode, repeat this set of procedures.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 745
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
Switch over the servers for a short-term failure (Option One)
Complete these procedures for a short-term failure or shutdown. For a short-term failure, you do not necessarily continue to Stage Two immediately after Stage One is complete. First, you must decide whether to remove the Warm Standby configuration. Decide based on the size of the Stable Queue.
After Stage One of the switchover is complete, the Secondary Server replicates transactions to the Replication Server. The transactions are buffered in the Stable Queues on the Replication Server.
If the outage of the Primary Server is likely to approach or exceed the worst-case duration provided for by the Stable Queues, remove the Warm Standby configuration. The Secondary Server operates in the nonredundant mode until the Primary Server is recovered; you can reconfigure the Warm Standby configuration.
If the outage of the Primary Server does not exceed the worst-case duration provided for by the Stable Queues, when the Primary Server is recovered, you can continue with Stage Two of the switchover procedure.
The procedures for a short-term failure are:
Switching over the server—At the end of this procedure, Stage One is complete.
Removing Warm Standby configurations
Completing post-switchover tasks on other components:
Server Utility
Contact Center Manager Administration
Network Control Center
CallPilot
Contact Center Multimedia
Communication Control Toolkit
third-party applications
746 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Each page of this switchover procedure is marked with this icon:
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 747
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
Switching over the serverStage One begins
Stage One of the switchover is complete when Contact Center Manager Server services start on the Secondary Server.
1 Log on to the Replication Server as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Replication Server > Replication Server Management.
3 From the list, select the Primary and Secondary Servers you want to switch.
4 Click Switchover.
748 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Result: A message prompts you to shut down the Primary Server (active mode).
a. Close any sessions of all Contact Center Manager Server clients and any third-party clients that can update the database.
b. From the Start menu on the Primary Server (active mode), choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Shutdown.
Note: If the Primary Server (active mode) stopped running due to a loss of power supply or similar malfunction, you can assume that the Contact Center Manager Server application stopped running.
5 Click OK.
Note: If you do not want to continue, click Cancel.
.
CAUTION
Risk of malfunctionAfter you complete this step, you cannot stop the switchover.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 749
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
Result: The following window appears.
The Replication Server connects to the Secondary Server (standby mode) and configures it as the Secondary Server (active mode).
750 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
The Replication Server starts the Contact Center Manager Server services on the Secondary Server (active mode).
Result: The following window appears.
Stage One is complete
Stage One of the switchover is complete when Contact Center Manager Server services start and the Secondary Server is active and running the Contact Center.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 751
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
At the end of Stage One, you must check the multicast configuration on the Secondary Server (active mode), otherwise RTDs will not work. If this is the first time the Secondary Server is configured as active, multicast is not configured because it is not retained in the database restore procedure.
To check the multicast configuration, go to Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Multicast Stream Control and Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Multicast Address and Port Configuration.
6 Perform one of the following tasks:
Note: Only complete this task the first time you perform the switchover to the Secondary Server.
If the Primary Server is ready to switch over to standby mode, click OK and continue with step 7 on page 752.
If the Primary Server is unavailable, click Cancel. The switchover is suspended. You must still complete the post-switchover tasks on 754.
ATTENTION If the outage of the Primary Server is likely to approach or exceed the worst-case duration provided for by the Stable Queues, remove the Warm Standby configuration. The Secondary Server (active mode) operates in the non-redundant mode until the Primary Server is recovered; then you can reconfigure the Warm Standby configuration.
Otherwise, when the Primary Server is recovered, you can continue with Stage Two of the switchover procedure. The database updates are replicated from the Secondary Server to the Primary Server. Thereafter, to switch back to the Primary Server you must invoke the switchover utility on the Replication Server. For more information, see “Remove Warm Standby configuration” on page 775.
752 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Result: If you clicked Cancel, the following window appears.
If you clicked OK, the Replication Server Management window appears.
7 Click OK to close the Replication Server Management window.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 753
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
8 To continue with the switchover, click OK in the Switchover - Stage One Complete window.
Stage Two begins
Stage Two is complete when the Primary Server is set in standby mode and data is replicated from the Secondary Server (active mode) to the Primary Server (standby mode).
Result: The Primary Server (active mode) becomes Primary Server (standby mode). The following window appears.
754 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
The configuration continues, and then the following window appears.
Stage Two is complete
Stage Two is complete when the Primary Server is set in standby mode and data is replicated from the Secondary Server (active mode) to the Primary Server (standby mode).
Result: The switchover is complete
9 Click Done.
10 Continue with the post-switchover tasks.
Post-switchover tasks
You must complete the following tasks on other system components.
Launching the Server UtilityOnly complete this task the first time you perform the switchover to the Secondary Server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 755
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
1 Log on to the server on which you installed the Server Utility.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Server Utility > Server Utility.
Result: The Nortel Contact Center Manager Server Utility Login window appears.
3 Enter the sysadmin user ID and password and the server name or IP address.
756 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
4 Click OK.
Result: The End User License Agreement window appears.
5 Read the End User License Agreement.
6 Click Accept.
Result: The Server Utility launches.
Configuring Contact Center Manager AdministrationYou must configure Contact Center Manager Administration with the name of the Secondary Server.
1 Log on to Contact Center Manager Administration.
2 Select Configuration.
3 Select the name of the Primary Server.
4 From the Server menu, select Edit Properties.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 757
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
5 In the Server Name box, type the name of the Secondary Server (active mode).
6 In the IP Address box, ensure that the IP address of the Secondary Server (active mode) appears.
7 Click Submit.
758 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Result: The server name is updated. Now you can use Contact Center Manager Administration to manage the Secondary Server (active mode).
Updating the Network Control CenterYou must update the IP address on the Network Control Center if the Secondary Server is a node in a Contact Center network.
1 On the Network Control Center, run the Configuration utility (nbconfig -admin).
2 On the Site Table tab, select the site name corresponding to the Secondary Server (active mode).
3 Select Edit.
4 Enter the IP address of the Secondary Server (active mode).
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 759
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
5 Click Verify to check the connection to the Secondary Server (active mode).
6 Click Apply. This synchronizes the other nodal servers with the IP address of the Secondary Server (active mode).
7 Click Refresh to check the progress of the synchronization. The synchronization is complete when all nodes show S in the Flags column.
Updating the CallPilot serverIf you are using CallPilot in the Contact Center to provide treatments and IVR, you must update the CallPilot server with the Nortel server subnet IP address of the Secondary Server (active mode).
1 Run the Configuration Wizard on the CallPilot server.
2 Enter the new Nortel server subnet IP address.
3 When you complete the configuration, restart the CallPilot server.
760 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Updating the Contact Center Multimedia serverYou must edit the server settings in Contact Center Multimedia.
1 In the Contact Center Multimedia Administration window, expand Contact Center Multimedia.
2 Expand General Administration.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 761
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
3 Double-click Server Settings.
Result: The Server Settings window appears.
4 Select Contact Center Manager Server.
5 Click Edit.
Result: The Server Properties window appears.
762 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
6 In the Server Name box, change the name to the Secondary Server (active mode) name. The default server port depends on the server you are configuring.
7 Click Save.
Result: A warning appears describing potential errors for changing this server.
8 Click OK.
9 In the Server Settings window, click the Contact Center License Server.
10 Click Edit.
11 In the Server Name box, change the name of the Contact Center License server.
12 In the Server Port box, change the port number for the Contact Center License server. The default port number is 3998.
13 In the Backup Server box, type the name for the backup License Manager server, if you have one.
14 Click Save.
Result: A warning appears describing potential errors for changing this server.
15 Click OK.
16 Click Close.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 763
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
17 Stop and restart the Contact Center Multimedia services.
a. On the Windows Start menu, click Programs > Administrative Tools > Services.
b. Stop the CCMM Starter service.
c. Stop the CCMM License service.
d. Start the CCMM License service.
e. Start the CCMM Starter service.
Updating the Communication Control Toolkit serverYou must update the Communication Control Toolkit server CMF mode with the new host name.
1 Go to Start > Programs > Nortel > Communication Control Toolkit > Console.
2 Select CCT Server.
3 Select the CMF configuration tab.
4 In the CCMS server name box, type the new host name.
5 Click OK.
6 Close the console.
Reconfiguring third-Party applicationsYou must reconfigure any third-party applications that are configured with the computer name or IP address of the Primary Server (active mode) with the server name and IP address of the Secondary Server (active mode). You can retrieve the IP address information from the appropriate SNMP trap.
What is next?
At this point, both Stage One and Stage Two are complete. The Secondary Server is operating in active mode and the Primary Server is operating in standby mode, if the Primary Server is recovered.
764 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
If you did not complete the switchover procedure, when the Primary Server is recovered, you can continue with Stage Two of the switchover procedure. The database updates are replicated from the Secondary Server (active mode) to the Primary Server (standby mode). Thereafter, to switch back to the Primary Server (active mode), you must invoke the switchover utility on the Replication Server.
To continue with Stage Two of the procedure, complete the following steps:
1. On the Replication Server, from the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Replication Server > Replication Server Management.
2. From the list, select the Primary and Secondary Servers you want to switch.
3. Click Switchover. The Stage One Complete window appears.
4. To continue with the switchover, click OK in the Switchover - Stage One Complete window.
5. Follow the procedures starting with step 8 on page 753.
To switch the servers back to their original modes, so the Primary Server is in active mode and the Secondary Server is in standby mode, see “Switch over the servers for a planned outage (Option One)” on page 728.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 765
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
Switch over the servers for a long-term failure (Option One)
Follow these procedures in the event that the Primary Server suffers a long-term or permanent outage or shutdown. You do not continue to Stage Two immediately after Stage One is complete.
You must remove the Warm Standby configuration for the Secondary Server. For more information, see “Remove Warm Standby configurations” on page 833.
When a new platform for the Primary Server is available, you can reconfigure the Warm Standby configuration. Initially the Secondary Server operates in active mode; therefore you must use the switchover utility to switch the recovered Primary Server to active mode.
The procedures for a long-term failure are:
Switching over the server—At the end of this procedure, Stage One is complete.
Removing the Warm Standby configuration
Completing post-switchover tasks on other components:
Server Utility
Contact Center Manager Administration
Network Control Center
CallPilot
Contact Center Multimedia
Communication Control Toolkit
third-party applications
Each page of this switchover procedure is marked with this icon:
766 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Switching over the server
Stage One begins
Stage One of the switchover is complete when Contact Center Manager Server services start on the Secondary Server.
.
CAUTION
Risk of malfunctionThe Stable Queue stores transactions temporarily until the Replication Server executes the transactions to the Secondary Server (standby mode) database. If the Secondary Server is unavailable, for example, because it is now operating in active mode, the Stable Queue eventually fills up. As a result, the Secondary Server (active mode) cannot send transactions to the Replication Server.
The length of time that the Stable Queue can store transactions depends on the size of your Stable Queue. Ensure that you configure sufficient Stable Queue space using the Standby Server Stable Queue tool.
To avoid data loss, restore the Primary Server to standby mode and complete the switchover as soon as possible. If the Primary Server is unavailable for an extended period, remove the Warm Standby configuration. For more information about removing a Warm Standby configuration, see “Remove Warm Standby configurations” on page 833.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 767
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
1 Log on to the Replication Server as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Replication Server > Replication Server Management.
3 From the list, select the Primary and Secondary Servers you want to switch.
4 Click Switchover.
768 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Result: A message prompts you to shut down the Contact Center Manager Server services on the Primary Server (active mode).
a. Close any sessions of all Contact Center Manager Server clients and any third-party clients that can update the database.
b. From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Shutdown.
Note: If the Primary Server (active mode) stopped running due to a loss of power supply, you can assume that the Contact Center Manager Server application stopped running.
.
CAUTION
Risk of malfunctionAfter you complete this step, you cannot stop the switchover.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 769
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
5 Click OK.
Note: If you do not want to continue, click Cancel.
Result: If you clicked OK, the following window appears.
The Replication Server connects to the Secondary Server (standby mode) and configures it as the Secondary Server (active mode).
770 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
The Replication Server starts the Contact Center Manager Server services on the Secondary Server (active mode).
Result: The following window appears.
Stage One is complete
Stage One of the switchover is complete when Contact Center Manager Server services start and the Secondary Server is active and running the Contact Center. At this point, the Primary Server is neither in active nor standby mode.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 771
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
At the end of Stage One, you must check the multicast configuration on the Secondary Server (active mode), otherwise RTDs will not work. If this is the first time the Secondary Server is configured as active, multicast is not configured because it is not retained in the database restore procedure.
To check the multicast configuration, go to Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Multicast Stream Control and Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Multicast Address and Port Configuration.
6 Perform one of the following tasks:
If the Primary Server is ready to switch over to standby mode, click OK and continue with step 7 on page 772.
If the server is unavailable, click Cancel. The switchover is suspended. If the switchover is suspended, you still must complete the post-switchover tasks on page 777.
ATTENTION If the outage of the Primary Server is likely to approach or exceed the worst-case duration provided for by the Stable Queues, remove the Warm Standby configuration. The Secondary Server (active mode) operates in the non-redundant mode until the Primary Server is recovered; then you can reconfigure the Warm Standby configuration.
Otherwise, when the Primary Server is recovered, you can continue with Stage Two of the switchover procedure. The database updates are replicated from the Secondary Server to the Primary Server. Thereafter, to switch back to the Primary Server you must invoke the switchover utility on the Replication Server. For more information, see “Remove Warm Standby configuration” on page 775.
772 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Result: If you clicked Cancel, the following window appears.
If you clicked OK, the Replication Server Management window appears.
7 Click OK to close the Replication Server Management window.
8 To continue with the switchover, click OK in the Switchover - Stage One Complete window.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 773
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
Stage Two begins
Stage Two is complete when the Primary Server is set in standby mode and data is replicated from the Secondary Server (active mode) to the Primary Server (standby mode).
Result: The Primary Server (active mode) becomes the Primary Server (standby mode). The following window appears.
774 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
The configuration continues, and then the following window appears.
Stage Two is complete
Stage Two is complete when the Primary Server is set in standby mode and data is replicated from the Secondary Server (active mode) to the Primary Server (standby mode).
Result: The switchover is complete
9 Click Done.
10 Continue with the post-switchover tasks on page 777.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 775
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
Remove Warm Standby configuration
Complete this procedure only if the outage of the Primary Server is likely to approach or exceed the worst-case duration provided for by the Stable Queues.
When you remove the servers from the Warm Standby configuration, the system must update the replication configuration data in the active and standby Server databases. Therefore, ensure that the servers for Contact Center Manager Server are connected to the Nortel server subnet and that the Sybase SQL service is running on both servers before you remove them from the Warm Standby configuration. This procedure can take several minutes to complete.
Removing a Warm Standby configuration
1 On the Replication Server, run the Replication Server Management utility.
2 Select the Primary and Secondary servers, and click Remove.
Result: The following window appears.
776 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
3 Click Yes.
Result: The replication between the Secondary Server (active mode) and the Primary Server (standby mode) stops. The Warm Standby configuration is removed. The contact center data remains intact on both servers. The following window appears.
4 Click OK.
Result: The Replication Server configuration is updated to remove the servers for Contact Center Manager Server as a Warm Standby pair. This action only removes the servers from the Warm Standby configuration. It does not remove any contact center data from either server, or any data copied from the Primary Server (active mode) to the Secondary Server (standby mode).
Note: For more information about recreating a Warm Standby configuration, see Step 32. “Set up the Warm Standby configuration on the Replication Server” on page 472.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 777
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
Post-switchover tasks
You must complete the following tasks on other system components.
Launching the Server UtilityOnly complete this task the first time you perform the switchover to the Secondary Server.
1 Log on to the server on which you installed the Server Utility.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Server Utility > Server Utility.
Result: The Nortel Contact Center Manager Server Utility Login window appears.
3 Enter the sysadmin user ID and password and the server name or IP address.
778 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
4 Click OK.
Result: The End User License Agreement window appears.
5 Read the End User License Agreement.
6 Click Accept.
Result: The Server Utility launches.
Configuring Contact Center Manager AdministrationYou must configure Contact Center Manager Administration with the name of the Secondary Server.
1 Log on to Contact Center Manager Administration.
2 Select Configuration.
3 Select the name of the Primary Server.
4 From the Server menu, select Edit Properties.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 779
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
5 In the Server Name box, type the name of the Secondary Server (active mode).
6 In the IP Address box, ensure that the IP address of the Secondary Server (active mode) appears.
7 Click Submit.
780 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Result: The server name is updated. Now you can use Contact Center Manager Administration to manage the Secondary Server (active mode).
Updating the Network Control CenterYou must update the IP address on the Network Control Center if the Secondary Server is a node in a Contact Center network.
1 On the Network Control Center, run the Configuration utility (nbconfig -admin).
2 On the Site Table tab, select the site name corresponding to the Secondary Server (active mode).
3 Select Edit.
4 Enter the IP address of the Secondary Server (active mode).
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 781
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
5 Click Verify to check the connection to the Secondary Server (active mode).
6 Click Apply. This synchronizes the other nodal servers with the IP address of the Secondary Server (active mode).
7 Click Refresh to check the progress of the synchronization. The synchronization is complete when all nodes show S in the Flags column.
Updating the CallPilot serverIf you are using CallPilot in the Contact Center to provide treatments and IVR, you must update the CallPilot server with the Nortel server subnet IP address of the Secondary Server (active mode).
1 Run the Configuration Wizard on the CallPilot server.
2 Enter the new Nortel server subnet IP address.
3 When you complete the configuration, restart the CallPilot server.
782 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Updating the Contact Center Multimedia serverYou must edit the server settings in Contact Center Multimedia.
1 In the Contact Center Multimedia Administration window, expand Contact Center Multimedia.
2 Expand General Administration.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 783
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
3 Double-click Server Settings.
Result: The Server Settings window appears.
4 Select Contact Center Manager Server.
5 Click Edit.
Result: The Server Properties window appears.
784 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
6 In the Server Name box, change the name to the Secondary Server (active mode) name. The default server port depends on the server you are configuring.
7 Click Save.
Result: A warning appears describing potential errors for changing this server.
8 Click OK.
9 In the Server Settings window, click the Contact Center License Server.
10 Click Edit.
11 In the Server Name box, change the name of the Contact Center License server.
12 In the Server Port box, change the port number for the Contact Center License server. The default port number is 3998.
13 In the Backup Server box, type the name for the backup License Manager server, if you have one.
14 Click Save.
Result: A warning appears describing potential errors for changing this server.
15 Click OK.
16 Click Close.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 785
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
17 Stop and restart the Contact Center Multimedia services.
a. On the Windows Start menu, click Programs > Administrative Tools > Services.
b. Stop the CCMM Starter service.
c. Stop the CCMM License service.
d. Start the CCMM License service.
e. Start the CCMM Starter service.
Updating the Communication Control Toolkit serverYou must update the Communication Control Toolkit server CMF mode with the new host name.
1 Go to Start > Programs > Nortel > Communication Control Toolkit > Console.
2 Select CCT Server.
3 Select the CMF configuration tab.
4 In the CCMS server name box, type the new host name.
5 Click OK.
6 Close the console.
Reconfiguring third-Party applicationsYou must reconfigure any third-party applications that are configured with the computer name or IP address of the Primary Server (active mode) with the server name and IP address of the Secondary Server (active mode). You can retrieve the IP address information from the appropriate SNMP trap.
What is next?
At this point, both Stage One and Stage Two are complete. The Secondary Server is operating in active mode and the Primary Server is operating in standby mode, if the Primary Server is recovered.
786 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
If you did not complete the switchover procedure, when the Primary Server is recovered, you can continue with Stage Two of the switchover procedure. The database updates are replicated from the Secondary Server (active mode) to the Primary Server (standby mode). Thereafter, to switch back to the Primary Server (active mode), you must invoke the switchover utility on the Replication Server.
To continue with Stage Two of the procedure, complete the following steps:
1. On the Replication Server, from the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Replication Server > Replication Server Management.
2. From the list, select the Primary and Secondary Servers you want to switch.
3. Click Switchover. The Stage One Complete window appears.
4. To continue with the switchover, click OK in the Switchover - Stage One Complete window.
5. Follow the procedures starting with step 8 on page 772.
To switch the servers back to their original modes, so the Primary Server is in active mode and the Secondary Server is in standby mode, see “Switch over the servers for a planned outage (Option One)” on page 728.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 787
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
Section B: Option Two switchover
In this section Overview 788
Switch over the servers for a planned outage (Option Two) 790
Switch over the servers for a short-term failure (Option Two) 803
Switch over the servers for a long-term failure (Option Two) 818
788 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Overview
When you use Option Two switchover, you use the same IP address and computer name on the Secondary Server (active mode) that you used for the Primary Server (active mode).
You invoke Option Two switchover manually. If you use Option Two, you must change the computer name and Nortel server subnet IP address on each server during switchover. The remaining steps are automated. This option must be used in Campus Redundancy scenarios where updating Nortel or third-party applications with the address of the Secondary Server (standby mode) can involve significant overhead.
ATTENTION In this chapter, the terms Active Server and Standby Server are replaced with the terms Primary Server and Secondary Server. This is due to the switching over of the active and standby roles of the servers. The terms Primary Server and Secondary Server refer to the physical servers, and do not change. These labels are followed by the server state, either active mode or standby mode, which does change.
ATTENTION If the Primary and Secondary Servers are members of a Windows domain, it is necessary for the domain administrator to remove the Secondary Server computer name from Active Directory Users and Computers on the domain controller. You can then change the name of the Secondary Server to that of the Primary Server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 789
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
Deciding which scenario to useIf the Stable Queue has enough space to handle replication, use the short-term option. If not, use the long-term option.
ATTENTION If you are using LinkPlexer, you must select Option 2 so that the IP address and the computer name of the Active Contact Center Manager Server, which coresides with the License Manager in a nodal license environment, remains the same after the switchover. If you do not select Option 2, you will have to reconfigure LinkPlexer. For more information, see the Nortel LinkPlexer Installation and Configuration Guide (297-2183-964).
.
CAUTION
Risk of malfunctionThe Stable Queue stores transactions temporarily until the Replication Server executes the transactions to the Secondary Server (standby mode) database. If the Secondary Server is unavailable, for example, because it is now operating in active mode, the Stable Queue eventually fills up. As a result, the Secondary Server (active mode) cannot send transactions to the Replication Server.
The length of time that the Stable Queue can store transactions depends on the size of your Stable Queue. Ensure that you configure sufficient Stable Queue space using the Standby Server Stable Queue tool.
To avoid data loss, restore the Primary Server to standby mode and complete the switchover as soon as possible. If the Primary Server is unavailable for an extended period, remove the Warm Standby configuration. For more information about removing a Warm Standby configuration, see “Remove Warm Standby configuration” on page 893.
790 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Switch over the servers for a planned outage (Option Two)
Follow these procedures for a planned outage, such as due to testing in the lab or at a customer site. You can continue to Stage Two immediately after Stage One is complete.
Switching over the server—At the end of this procedure, Stage One is complete.
Configuring the Secondary Server as the active server
Continuing with the switchover on the Replication Server
Completing the switchover—At the end of this procedure, Stage Two is complete.
Each page of this switchover procedure is marked with this icon:
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 791
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
Switching over the serverStage One begins
Stage One of the switchover is complete when Contact Center Manager Server services start on the Secondary Server.
1 Log on to the Replication Server as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Replication Server > Replication Server Management.
3 From the list, select the Primary and Secondary Servers you want to switch.
4 Click Switchover.
Result: A message prompts you to shut down the Primary Server (active mode).
ATTENTION You cannot stop the switchover after this step.
792 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
5 If your server is part of a domain, you must remove it from the network before proceeding. If your server is not part of a domain, proceed to step 6.
Attention: You need Windows domain administrator privileges to remove a server from the domain.
a. On the domain server, from the Start menu, select Control Panel.
b. Double-click Administrative Tools.
c. Double-click Active Directory Users and Computers.
d. In the console tree, click Computers under the domain node, or click the folder in which the computer is located. In the details pane, right-click the computer, and click Delete.
6 Perform the following tasks:
a. Shut down the services on the Primary Server (active mode). From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Shutdown. Click OK.
b. Disconnect the Nortel Server subnet and the ELAN subnet (optional) cables from the Primary Server.
c. Disconnect any clients.
7 If you do not want to continue, click Cancel to exit the Shutdown Active CCMS window on the Replication Server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 793
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
If you want to continue, click OK.
Result: If you click OK, the following window appears.
When the activity completes, the Reconfigure Server as Active window appears and the OK button is active.
8 Before you click OK, you must complete the next procedure “Configuring the Secondary Server as the active server” on page 794.
794 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
The Reconfigure Server as Active window reads:
Before continuing:
1) Change the computer name of SYBTEST to SYBACTIVE and restart the server
2) Run the Computer Name Sync utility and restart the server
3) Configure the SYBACTIVE with the Active CCMS IP address
When these steps are completed, click OK to continue with the switchover.
Click Cancel to suspend the switchover.
Configuring the Secondary Server as the active server
1 Log on to the Secondary Server (standby mode) as Administrator.
2 Go to My Computer > Properties.
3 On the Computer Name tab, click Change
4 Change the computer name to the Primary host name.
5 Restart the server.
6 Log on to the Secondary Server (standby mode) as Administrator.
7 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Computer Name Sync.
8 Click OK.
Result: A window appears indicating the name synchronization is a success.
9 Click OK.
10 Restart the server.
11 Log on to the Secondary Server (standby mode) as Administrator.
12 In Windows Network and Dial-up Connections, change the Nortel server subnet IP address on the Secondary Server (standby mode) to the active Nortel server subnet IP address.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 795
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
13 (optional) In Windows Network and Dial-up Connections, change the ELAN subnet IP address on the Secondary Server (standby mode) to the active ELAN subnet IP address.
14 Connect the Secondary Server (standby mode) to the ELAN subnet (if it is not already connected).
15 If necessary, switch the Meridian Mail cable and modem cable.
16 Go back to the Replication Server and click OK on the Reconfigure Server as Active Window.
Continuing with the switchover on the Replication Server
1 On the Replication Server, on the Reconfigure Server as Active window, ensure that you clicked OK to continue the switchover.
Result: A window appears asking you to confirm that you completed the configuration of the Secondary Server (standby mode).
2 Click Yes.
Result: The Replication Server connects to the Secondary Server (standby mode) and configures it as the Secondary Server (active mode).
796 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
The Replication Server starts the Contact Center Manager Server services on the Secondary Server (active mode).
Result: The configuration continues, and then the following window appears.
Stage One is complete
Stage One of the switchover is complete when Contact Center Manager Server services start and the Secondary Server is active and running the Contact Center. At this point, the Primary Server is neither in active nor standby mode.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 797
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
3 Click OK.
Result: The following window appears.
The Reconfigure Server as Standby window reads:
If the previously Active Server is available for use as Standby:
1) Set the CCM Server services to Manual by running D:\nortel\iccm\bin\serman man
2) Change the computer name from SYBACTIVE to SYBTEST and restart the server
3) Run the Computer Name Sync utility and restart the server
4) Configure SYBTEST with the Standby CCMS IP address
5) Connect SYBTEST to the network
When the Server has been configured, click OK to complete the switchover.
Click Cancel if you perform this task at a later time.
4 Complete the tasks listed in the Reconfigure Server as Standby window.
a. Log on to the Primary Server as Administrator.
b. From the Start menu, choose Run.
798 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
c. Type D:\nortel\iccm\bin\serman man, and click OK.
Result: The Standby Server services are set to manual.
d. From My Computer > Properties, change the computer name to the secondary host name.
Note: The computer name is the original host name of the Secondary Server; use it now as the name of the Primary Server.
e. Restart the server.
f. Log on to the Primary Server as Administrator.
g. From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Computer Name Sync to synchronize the new name of the Primary Server.
h. Click OK.
Result: A window appears indicating the name synchronization is a success.
i. Click OK.
j. Restart the server.
k. Log on to the Primary Server as Administrator.
l. In Windows Network and Dial-up Connections, change the Nortel server subnet IP address on the Primary Server to the original IP address of the Secondary server. Use this IP address for the Primary Server.
m. (optional) In Windows Network and Dial-up Connections, change the ELAN subnet IP address on the Primary Server to the original address of the Secondary Server. ELAN subnet IP address.
n. Connect the Primary Server to the Nortel server subnet and ELAN subnet (if used).
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 799
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
Completing the switchover
1 When the Primary Server is configured, go back to the Replication Server and click OK to complete the switchover.
Note: You can click Cancel if you want to complete the switchover at a later time.
Result: A window appears asking you if you completed the configuration of the Server as Standby CCM.
2 Click Yes.
Stage Two continues
Stage Two is complete when the Primary Server is set in standby mode and data is replicated from the Secondary Server (active mode) to the Primary Server (standby mode).
800 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Result: The Primary Server becomes the Primary Server (standby mode). The following window appears.
The configuration continues.
Result: The following window appears.
3 Initialize the Primary Server (standby mode) database by backing up the Secondary Server (active mode) database and restoring it on the Primary Server (standby mode).
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 801
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
For more information about backing up the server, see “Back up data” on page 907. For more information about restoring the database, see “Restore data” on page 953.
4 Click OK on the Initialize Standby CCMS database window when the backup and restore are complete.
Result: The following window appears.
5 After you complete the initialization, click Yes.
.
CAUTION
Risk of malfunctionYou must back up and restore the database on the Secondary Server again to initialize the Primary Server. If you do not perform this backup and restore on the Primary Server, the database cannot initialize.
To initialize the Primary Server database correctly, ensure you do the following:
Back up the Secondary Server database only after you are prompted to do so. For more information about backing up the server, see Chapter , “Back up data,” For more information about restoring the database, see Chapter , “Restore data,”
Use the backup utility to initialize the Primary Server database. Do not use a previous or subsequent backup.
Ensure that the backup is not overwritten by subsequent backups until the Primary Server is initialized.
802 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Stage Two is complete
Stage Two is complete when the Primary Server is set in standby mode and data is replicated from the Secondary Server (active mode) to the Primary Server (standby mode).
Result: The switchover is complete
6 Click Done.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 803
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
Switch over the servers for a short-term failure (Option Two)
Complete these procedures for a short-term failure or shutdown. For a short-term failure, you do not necessarily continue to Stage Two immediately after Stage One is complete. First, you must decide whether to remove the Warm Standby configuration. Decide based on the size of the Stable Queue.
After Stage One of the switchover is complete, the Secondary Server replicates transactions to the Replication Server. The transactions are buffered in the Stable Queues on the Replication Server.
If the outage of the Primary Server is likely to approach or exceed the worst-case duration provided for by the Stable Queues, remove the Warm Standby configuration. The Secondary Server operates in the nonredundant mode until the Primary Server is recovered; you can reconfigure the Warm Standby configuration.
If the outage of the Primary Server does not exceed the worst-case duration provided for by the Stable Queues, when the Primary Server is recovered, you can continue with Stage Two of the switchover procedure.
Switching over the server—At the end of this procedure, Stage One is complete.
Configuring the Secondary Server as the active server
Continuing with the switchover on the Replication Server
Removing Warm Standby configurations
Completing the switchover—At the end of this procedure, Stage Two is complete.
Each page of this switchover procedure is marked with this icon:
804 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Switching over the serverStage One begins
Stage One of the switchover is complete when Contact Center Manager Server services start on the Secondary Server.
1 Log on to the Replication Server as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Replication Server > Replication Server Management.
3 From the list, select the Primary and Secondary Servers you want to switch.
4 Click Switchover.
Result: A message prompts you to shut down the Primary Server (active mode).
ATTENTION You cannot stop the switchover after this step.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 805
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
5 If your server is part of a domain, you must remove it from the network before proceeding. If your server is not part of a domain, proceed to step 6.
Attention: You need Windows domain administrator privileges to remove a server from the domain.
a. On the domain server, from the Start menu, select Control Panel.
b. Double-click Administrative Tools.
c. Double-click Active Directory Users and Computers.
d. In the console tree, click Computers under the domain node, or click the folder in which the computer is located. In the details pane, right-click the computer, and click Delete.
6 Perform the following tasks:
a. Shut down the services on the Primary Server (active mode). From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Shutdown. Click OK.
b. Disconnect the Nortel Server subnet and the ELAN subnet (optional) cables from the Primary Server.
c. Disconnect any clients.
7 If you do not want to continue, click Cancel to exit the Shutdown Active CCMS window on the Replication Server.
806 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
If you want to continue, click OK.
Result: The following window appears if you clicked OK.
When the activity completes, the Reconfigure Server as Active window appears and the OK button is active.
8 Before you click OK, you must complete the next procedure “Configuring the Secondary Server as the active server” on page 807.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 807
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
The Reconfigure Server as Active window reads:
Before continuing:
1) Change the computer name of SYBTEST to SYBACTIVE and restart the server
2) Run the Computer Name Sync utility and restart the server
3) Configure the SYBACTIVE with the Active CCMS IP address
When these steps have been completed, click OK to continue with the switchover.
Click Cancel to suspend the switchover.
Configuring the Secondary Server as the active server
1 If your server is part of a domain, you must remove the active computer name from the Active Directory Users on the domain controller.
Attention: You need Windows domain administrator privileges to complete this step.
a. On the domain server, from the Start menu, select Control Panel.
b. Double-click Administrative Tools.
c. Double-click Active Directory Users and Computers.
d. In the console tree, click Computers under the domain node, or click the folder in which the computer is located. In the details pane, right-click the computer, and click Delete.
2 Log on to the Secondary Server (standby mode) as Administrator.
3 Go to My Computer > Properties.
4 On the Computer Name tab, click Change.
5 Change the computer name to the Primary host name.
6 Restart the server.
7 Log on to the Secondary Server (standby mode) as Administrator.
808 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
8 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Computer Name Sync.
9 Click OK.
Result: A window appears indicating the name synchronization is a success.
10 Click OK.
11 Restart the server.
12 Log on to the Secondary Server (standby mode) as Administrator.
13 In Windows Network and Dial-up Connections, change the Nortel server subnet IP address on the Secondary Server (standby mode) to the Primary Nortel server subnet IP address.
14 (optional) In Windows Network and Dial-up Connections, change the ELAN subnet IP address on the Secondary Server (standby mode) to the active ELAN subnet IP address.
15 Connect the Secondary Server (standby mode) to the ELAN subnet (if it is not already connected).
16 If necessary, switch the Meridian Mail cable and modem cable.
17 Go back to the Replication Server and click OK on the Reconfigure Server as Active window.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 809
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
The Reconfigure Server as Active window reads:
Before continuing:
1) Change the computer name of SYBTEST to SYBACTIVE and restart the server
2) Run the Computer Name Sync utility and restart the server
3) Configure the SYBACTIVE with the Active CCMS IP address
When these steps have been completed, click OK to continue with the switchover.
Click Cancel to suspend the switchover.
Continuing with the switchover on the Replication Server
1 On the Replication Server, on the Reconfigure Server as Active window, ensure that you clicked OK to continue the switchover.
Result: A window appears asking you to confirm that you completed the configuration of the Secondary Server (standby mode).
810 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
2 Click Yes.
Result: The Replication Server connects to the Secondary Server (standby mode) and configures it as the Secondary Server (active mode).
The Replication Server starts the Contact Center Manager Server services on the Secondary Server (active mode).
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 811
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
Result: The configuration continues, and then the following window appears.
Stage One is complete
Stage One of the switchover is complete when Contact Center Manager Server services start and the Secondary Server is active and running the Contact Center. At this point, the Primary Server is neither in active nor standby mode.
3 Perform one of the following tasks:
If the Primary Server is ready to switch over to standby mode, click OK.
If the server is unavailable, click Cancel. The switchover is suspended.
812 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Result: If you click OK, the following window appears.
The Reconfigure Server as Standby window reads:
If the previously Active Server is available for use as Standby:
1) Set the CCM Server services to Manual by running D:\nortel\iccm\bin\serman man
2) Change the computer name from SYBACTIVE to SYBTEST and restart the server
3) Run the Computer Name Sync utility and restart the server
4) Configure SYBTEST with the Standby CCMS IP address
5) Connect SYBTEST to the network
When the Server has been configured, click OK to complete the switchover.
Click Cancel if you Perform this task at a later time.
4 Complete the tasks listed in the Reconfigure Server as Standby window.
a. Log on to the Primary Server as Administrator.
b. From the Start menu, choose Run.
c. Type D:\nortel\iccm\bin\serman man, and click OK.
Result: The Standby Server services are set to manual.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 813
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
d. From My Computer > Properties, change the computer name to the Secondary host name.
Note: The computer name is the original host name of the Secondary Server; use it now as the name of the Primary Server.
e. Restart the server.
f. Log on to the Primary Server as Administrator.
g. From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Computer Name Sync to synchronize the new name of the Primary Server.
h. Click OK.
Result: A window appears indicating the name synchronization is a success.
i. Click OK.
j. Restart the server.
k. Log on to the Primary Server as Administrator
l. In Windows Network and Dial-up Connections, change the Nortel server subnet IP address on the Primary Server to the original IP address of the Secondary server. Use this IP address for the Primary Server.
m. (optional) In Windows Network and Dial-up Connections, change the ELAN subnet IP address on the Primary Server to the original IP address of the Secondary server ELAN subnet.
n. Connect the Primary Server to the Nortel server subnet and ELAN subnet (if used).
814 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Completing the switchover
1 When the Secondary Server (active mode) is configured, click OK to complete the switchover.
Note: You can click Cancel if you want to complete the switchover at a later time.
Result: A window appears asking you if you completed the configuration of the Server as Standby CCM.
2 Click Yes.
Stage Two continues
Stage Two is complete when the Primary Server is set in standby mode and data is replicated from the Secondary Server (active mode) to the Primary Server (standby mode).
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 815
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
Result: The Primary Server becomes the Primary Server (standby mode). The following window appears.
The configuration continues.
Result: The following window appears.
3 Initialize the Primary Server (standby mode) database by backing up the Secondary Server (active mode) database and restoring it on the Primary Server (standby mode).
816 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
For more information about backing up the server, see “Back up data” on page 907. For more information about restoring the database, see “Restore data” on page 953.
4 Click OK on the Initialize Standby CCMS database window when the backup and restore are complete.
Result: The following window appears.
5 After you complete the initialization, click Yes.
.
CAUTION
Risk of malfunctionYou must back up and restore the database on the Secondary Server again to initialize the Primary Server. If you do not perform this backup and restore on the Primary Server, the database cannot initialize.
To initialize the Primary Server database correctly, ensure you do the following:
Back up the Secondary Server database only after you are prompted to do so. For more information about backing up the server, see Chapter , “Back up data”. For more information about restoring the database, see Chapter , “Restore data”.
Use the backup utility to initialize the Primary Server database. Do not use a previous or subsequent backup.
Ensure that the backup is not overwritten by subsequent backups until the Primary Server is initialized.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 817
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
Stage Two is complete
Stage Two is complete when the Primary Server is set in standby mode and data is replicated from the Secondary Server (active mode) to the Primary Server (standby mode).
Result: The switchover is complete
6 Click Done.
What is next?
At this point, both Stage One and Stage Two are complete. The Secondary Server is operating in active mode and the Primary Server is operating in standby mode, if the Primary Server is recovered.
If you did not complete the switchover procedure, when the Primary Server is recovered, you can continue with Stage Two of the switchover procedure. The database updates are replicated from the Secondary Server (active mode) to the Primary Server (standby mode). Thereafter, to switch back to the Primary Server (active mode), you must invoke the switchover utility on the Replication Server.
To continue with Stage Two of the procedure, complete the following steps:
1. On the Replication Server, from the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Replication Server > Replication Server Management.
2. From the list, select the Primary and Secondary Servers you want to switch.
3. Click Switchover. The Stage One Complete window appears.
4. To continue with the switchover, click OK in the Switchover - Stage One Complete window.
5. Follow the procedures starting with step 3 on page 811.
To switch the servers back to their original modes, so the Primary Server is in active mode and the Secondary Server is in standby mode, see “Switch over the servers for a planned outage (Option Two)” on page 790.
818 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Switch over the servers for a long-term failure (Option Two)
Follow these procedures in the event that the Primary Server suffers a long-term or permanent outage or shutdown. You do not continue to Stage Two immediately after Stage One is complete.
You must remove the Warm Standby configuration for the Secondary Server. For more information, see “Remove Warm Standby configurations” on page 833.
When a new platform for the Primary Server is available, you can reconfigure the Warm Standby configuration. Initially the Secondary Server operates in active mode; therefore you must use the switchover utility to switch the recovered Primary Server to active mode.
Switching over the server—At the end of this procedure, Stage One is complete.
Configuring the Secondary Server as the active server
Continuing with the switchover on the Replication Server
Removing Warm Standby configurations
Each page of this switchover procedure is marked with this icon:
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 819
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
Switching over the server
Stage One begins
Stage One of the switchover is complete when Contact Center Manager Server services start on the Secondary Server.
.
CAUTION
Risk of malfunctionThe Stable Queue stores transactions temporarily until the Replication Server executes the transactions to the Secondary Server (standby mode) database. If the Secondary Server is unavailable, for example, because it is now operating in active mode, the Stable Queue eventually fills up. As a result, the Secondary Server (active mode) cannot send transactions to the Replication Server.
The length of time that the Stable Queue can store transactions depends on the size of your Stable Queue. Ensure that you configure sufficient Stable Queue space using the Standby Server Stable Queue tool.
To avoid data loss, restore the Primary Server to standby mode and complete the switchover as soon as possible. If the Primary Server is unavailable for an extended period, remove the Warm Standby configuration. For more information about removing a Warm Standby configuration, see “Remove Warm Standby configurations” on page 833.
820 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
1 Log on to the Replication Server as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Replication Server > Replication Server Management.
3 From the list, select the Primary and Secondary Servers you want to switch.
4 Click Switchover.
Result: A message prompts you to shut down the Primary Server (active mode).
ATTENTION You cannot stop the switchover after this step.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 821
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
5 If your server is part of a domain, you must remove it from the network before proceeding. If your server is not part of a domain, proceed to step 6.
Attention: You need Windows domain administrator privileges to remove a server from the domain.
a. On the domain server, from the Start menu, select Control Panel.
b. Double-click Administrative Tools.
c. Double-click Active Directory Users and Computers.
d. In the console tree, click Computers under the domain node, or click the folder in which the computer is located. In the details pane, right-click the computer, and click Delete.
6 Perform the following tasks:.
a. Shut down the services on the Primary Server (active mode). From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Shutdown. Click OK.
b. Disconnect the Nortel Server subnet and the ELAN subnet (optional) cables from the Primary Server.
c. Disconnect any clients.
7 If you do not want to continue, click Cancel to exit the Shutdown Active CCMS window on the Replication Server.
822 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
If you want to continue, click OK.
Result: The following window appears if you clicked OK.
When the activity completes, the Reconfigure Server as Active window appears and the OK button is active.
8 Before you click OK, you must complete the next procedure “Configuring the Secondary Server as the active server” on page 794.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 823
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
The Reconfigure Server as Active window reads:
Before continuing:
1) Change the computer name of SYBTEST to SYBACTIVE and restart the server
2) Run the Computer Name Sync utility and restart the server
3) Configure the SYBACTIVE with the Active CCMS IP address
When these steps have been completed, click OK to continue with the switchover.
Click Cancel to suspend the switchover.
Configuring the Secondary Server as the active server
1 If your server is part of a domain, you must remove the active computer (Primary Server) name from the Active Directory Users on the domain controller.
Attention: You need Windows domain administrator privileges to complete this step.
a. On the domain server, from the Start menu, select Control Panel.
b. Double-click Administrative Tools.
c. Double-click Active Directory Users and Computers.
d. In the console tree, click Computers under the domain node, or click the folder in which the computer is located. In the details pane, right-click the computer, and click Delete.
2 Log on to the Secondary Server (standby mode) as Administrator.
3 Go to My Computer > Properties.
4 On the Computer Name tab, click Change.
5 Change the computer name to the Primary host name.
6 Restart the server.
7 Log on to the Secondary Server (standby mode) as Administrator.
824 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
8 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Computer Name Sync.
9 Click OK.
Result: A window appears indicating the name synchronization is a success.
10 Click OK.
11 Restart the server.
12 Log on to the Secondary Server (standby mode) as Administrator
13 In Windows Network and Dial-up Connections, change the Nortel server subnet IP address on the Secondary Server to the active Nortel server subnet IP address.
14 (optional) In Windows Network and Dial-up Connections, change the ELAN subnet IP address on the Secondary Server to the active ELAN subnet IP address.
15 Connect the Secondary Server to the ELAN subnet (if it is not already connected).
16 If necessary, switch the Meridian Mail cable and modem cable.
17 Go back to the Replication Server and click OK on the Configure Server as Active window.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 825
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
Continuing with the switchover on the Replication Server
1 On the Replication Server, on the Reconfigure Server as Active window, ensure that you clicked OK to continue the switchover.
Result: A window appears asking you to confirm that you completed the configuration of the Secondary Server (standby mode).
2 Click Yes.
Result: The Replication Server connects to the Secondary Server (standby mode) and configures it as the Secondary Server (active mode).
826 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
The Replication Server starts the Contact Center Manager Server services on the Secondary Server (active mode).
Result: The configuration continues, and then the following window appears.
3 Click Cancel.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 827
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
Result: The following window appears.
Stage one is complete
Note: In the event that the Primary Server suffered a permanent failure or shutdown, the Secondary Server is brought into service in active mode.
Stage One of the switchover is complete when Contact Center Manager Server services start and the Secondary Server is active and running the Contact Center. At this point, the Primary Server is neither in active nor standby mode.
4 Perform one of the following tasks:
If the Primary Server is ready to switch over to standby mode, click OK.
If the server is unavailable, click Cancel. The switchover is suspended.
828 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Result: If you click OK, the following window appears.
The Reconfigure Server as Standby window reads:
If the previously Active Server is available for use as Standby:
1) Set the CCM Server services to Manual by running D:\nortel\iccm\bin\serman man
2) Change the computer name from SYBACTIVE to SYBTEST and restart the server
3) Run the Computer Name Sync utility and restart the server
4) Configure SYBTEST with the Standby CCMS IP address
5) Connect SYBTEST to the network
When the Server has been configured, click OK to complete the switchover.
Click Cancel if you Perform this task at a later time.
5 Complete the tasks listed in the Reconfigure Server as Standby window.
a. Log on to the Primary Server as Administrator.
b. From the Start menu, choose Run.
c. Type D:\nortel\iccm\bin\serman man, and click OK.
Result: The Standby Server services are set to manual.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 829
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
d. From My Computer > Properties, change the computer name to the Secondary host name.
Note: The computer name is the original host name of the Secondary Server; use it now as the name of the Primary Server.
e. Restart the server.
f. Log on to the Primary Server as Administrator.
g. From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Computer Name Sync to synchronize the new name of the Primary Server.
h. Click OK.
Result: A window appears indicating the name synchronization is a success.
i. Click OK.
j. Restart the server.
k. Log on to the Primary Server as Administrator
l. In Windows Network and Dial-up Connections, change the Nortel server subnet IP address on the Primary Server to the original IP address of the Secondary server. Use this IP address for the Primary Server.
m. (optional) In Windows Network and Dial-up Connections, change the ELAN subnet IP address on the Primary Server to the original IP address of the Secondary server ELAN subnet.
n. Connect the Primary Server to the Nortel server subnet and ELAN subnet (if used).
830 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Completing the switchover
1 When the Secondary Server (active mode) is configured, click OK to complete the switchover.
Note: You can click Cancel if you want to complete the switchover at a later time.
Result: A window appears asking you if you completed the configuration of the Server as Standby CCM.
2 Click Yes.
Stage Two continues
Stage Two is complete when the Primary Server is set in standby mode and data is replicated from the Secondary Server (active mode) to the Primary Server (standby mode).
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 831
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
Result: The Primary Server becomes the Primary Server (standby mode). The following window appears.
The configuration continues.
Result: The following window appears.
3 Initialize the Primary Server (standby mode) database by backing up the Secondary Server (active mode) database and restoring it on the Primary Server (standby mode).
832 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
For more information about backing up the server, see “Back up data” on page 907. For more information about restoring the database, see “Restore data” on page 953.
4 Click OK on the Initialize Standby CCMS database window when the backup and restore are complete.
Result: The following window appears.
5 After you complete the initialization, click Yes.
.
CAUTION
Risk of malfunctionYou must back up and restore the database on the Secondary Server again to initialize the Primary Server. If you do not perform this backup and restore on the Primary Server, the database cannot initialize.
To initialize the Primary Server database correctly, ensure you do the following:
Back up the Secondary Server database only after you are prompted to do so. For more information about backing up the server, see Chapter , “Back up data”. For more information about restoring the database, see Chapter , “Restore data”.
Use the backup utility to initialize the Primary Server database. Do not use a previous or subsequent backup.
Ensure that the backup is not overwritten by subsequent backups until the Primary Server is initialized.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 833
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
Stage Two is complete
Stage Two is complete when the Primary Server is set in standby mode and data is replicated from the Secondary Server (active mode) to the Primary Server (standby mode).
Result: The switchover is complete
6 Click Done.
Remove Warm Standby configurations
Complete this procedure only if the outage of the Primary Server is likely to approach or exceed the worst-case duration provided for by the Stable Queues.
When you remove the servers from the Warm Standby configuration, the system must update the replication configuration data in the Primary and Secondary Server databases. Therefore, ensure that the servers for Contact Center Manager Server are connected to the Nortel server subnet, and that the Sybase SQL service is running on both servers before you remove them from the Warm Standby configuration. This procedure can take several minutes to complete.
834 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Removing a Warm Standby configuration
1 Run the Replication Server Management utility.
2 Select the servers, and click Remove.
Result: The following window appears.
3 Click Yes.
Result: The replication between the Secondary Server (active mode) and the Primary Server (standby mode) is stopped. The Warm Standby configuration is removed. The contact center data remains intact on both servers. The following window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 835
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
4 Click Done.
Result: The Replication Server configuration is updated to remove the servers for Contact Center Manager Server as a Warm Standby pair. This action removes only the servers from the Warm Standby configuration. It does not remove any contact center data from either server, or any data copied from the Primary Server (active mode) to the Secondary Server (standby mode).
Note: For more information about recreating a Warm Standby configuration, see Step 32. “Set up the Warm Standby configuration on the Replication Server” on page 472.
What is next?
At this point, Stage One is complete. The Secondary Server is operating in active mode.
836 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
When the Primary Server is recovered, you can continue with Stage Two of the switchover procedure. The database updates are replicated from the Secondary Server (active mode) to the Primary Server (standby mode). Thereafter, to switch back to the Primary Server (active mode), you must invoke the switchover utility on the Replication Server.
To continue with Stage Two of the procedure, complete the following steps:
1. On the Replication Server, from the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Replication Server > Replication Server Management.
2. From the list, select the Primary and Secondary Servers you want to switch.
3. Click Switchover. The Stage One Complete window appears.
4. To continue with the switchover, click OK in the Switchover - Stage One Complete window.
5. Follow the procedures starting with step 3 on page 811.
To switch the servers back to their original modes, so the Primary Server is in active mode and the Secondary Server is in standby mode, see “Switch over the servers for a planned outage (Option One)” on page 728.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 837
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
Section C: Restore the Primary Server to active mode
In this section Restore options 838
Rebuild the software on the Primary Server after a failure 840
838 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Restore options
This section assumes the Primary Server is taken out of service. It is not currently in active or standby mode.
After the Primary Server is available for service, complete the switchover procedure to place the Primary Server in standby mode. This completes Stage Two. Do not repair the Primary Server and place it into service immediately in active mode. You must complete Stage Two and place the Primary Server in standby mode first.
After the Primary Server is in standby mode and the Secondary Server is in active mode, you have three options for continuing:
Option one—Complete the entire switchover procedure for a planned outage. This includes data replication.
Option two—Complete the switchover procedure for a short-term failure, including removing the Warm Standby configuration. This includes data replication.
Option three—Complete the switchover procedure for a planned outage without data replication. No database is restored.
If the Primary Server suffered a major failure, rebuild the software before you bring it into service. For details, see “Rebuild the software on the Primary Server after a failure” on page 840.
Option one (data restore)
For the first option, after the Primary Server is in standby mode, invoke the switchover utility on the Replication Server. This ensures your data is replicated onto the Primary Server from the Secondary Server (active mode).
After the data is replicated, switch over the servers so the Primary Server is in active mode and the Secondary Server is in standby mode according to the planned outage procedures.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 839
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
For detailed procedures, see “Switch over the servers for a planned outage (Option One)” on page 728 or “Switch over the servers for a planned outage (Option Two)” on page 790, depending on your nodal configuration.
Option two (data restore)
For the second option, after Stage One is complete and the Primary Server is in neither active nor standby mode, remove the Warm Standby configuration. This stops data replication, but the Secondary Server is in active mode and running the Contact Center.
Repair the Primary Server to working status and set up the Warm Standby configuration again. Enter the information with the Primary Server as the standby Server and the Secondary Server as the active server.
Perform the server switchover procedure for a short-term failure. The Primary Server becomes the active server and the Secondary Server becomes the standby server.
For detailed procedures, see “Switch over the servers for a short-term failure (Option One)” on page 745 or “Switch over the servers for a short-term failure (Option Two)” on page 803, depending on your nodal configuration.
Option three (no data restore)
For the third option, back up the data on the Secondary Server (active mode). Repair the Primary Server to working status. Restore the data to the Primary Server and shut down the Secondary Server. Data is lost during this restoration process.
Run the server setup procedures on the Primary Server as a new server in active mode. Run the server setup procedures on the Secondary Server as the standby server. Do not perform a switchover operation.
840 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
Rebuild the software on the Primary Server after a failure
If the Primary Server suffers a major failure (for example, a disk permanently fails), you must rebuild the software. Follow these steps to rebuild the software on the Primary Server.
Removing a Warm Standby configuration
1 Run the Replication Server Management utility.
2 Select the servers, and click Remove.
Result: The following window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 841
January 2008 Switch over to the Standby Server
3 Click Yes.
Result: The replication between the Secondary Server (active mode) and the Primary Server (standby mode) is stopped. The Warm Standby configuration is removed. The contact center data remains intact on both servers. The following window appears.
4 Click Done.
Result: The Replication Server configuration is updated to remove the servers for Contact Center Manager Server as a Warm Standby pair. This action removes only the servers from the Warm Standby configuration. It does not remove any contact center data from either server, or any data copied from the Primary Server (active mode) to the Secondary Server (standby mode).
Rebuilding the software on the Primary Server after a failure
1 Perform a platform migration using a Platform Recovery Disk and backup taken from the Secondary Server (active mode).
2 Set up the Primary Server as the standby server.
a. Select the options for a Standby Server because the Primary Server is initially in standby mode. For example, in the server setup wizard, select Standby.
842 Contact Center Standby Server
Switch over to the Standby Server Standard 10.12
b. In the server setup, enter the server name and IP address depending on which switchover option you are use.
If you are using the Option One switchover, set the active server name and IP address to that of the Primary Server.
If you are using the Option Two switchover, set the standby server name and IP address to that of the Primary Server.
3 Set up the License Manager using the same procedure as that used for the original build of the Standby Server. For detailed procedures, see “Install and configure the Standby Server” on page 247.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 843
C h a p t e r 8
Restart replication
In this chapterOverview 844
Restart replication 845
Problems restarting replication 863
844 Contact Center Standby Server
Restart replication Standard 10.12
Overview
You may need to restart replication. This occurs if you are reenabling replication after it is temporarily disabled during a planned or unplanned outage.
Planned outage—Use this procedure in the event of a planned outage due to testing in the lab or at a customer site. You can continue to Stage Two immediately after Stage One is complete.
Short-term failure—Use this procedure in the event of a short-term failure or shutdown. You do not necessarily continue to Stage Two immediately after Stage One is complete. First, you must decide whether to remove the Warm Standby configuration. Decide based on the size of the Stable Queue.
After Stage One of the switchover is complete, the Secondary Server replicates transactions to the Replication Server. The transactions are buffered in the Stable Queues on the Replication Server.
If the outage of the Primary Server is likely to approach or exceed the worst-case duration provided for by the Stable Queues, remove the Warm Standby configuration. The Secondary Server operates in the nonredundant mode until the Primary Server is recovered; you can reconfigure the Warm Standby configuration.
If the outage of the Primary Server does not exceed the worst-case duration provided for by the Stable Queues, when the Primary Server is recovered, you can continue with Stage Two of the switchover procedure.
If you experience problems restarting the Replication Server, see “Restart replication” on page 845.
ATTENTION In this chapter, the terms Active Server and Standby Server are replaced with the terms Primary Server and Secondary Server. This is due to the switching over of the active and Standby roles of the servers. The terms Primary Server and Secondary Server refer to the physical servers, and do not change. These labels are followed by the server state, either active mode or standby mode, which does change.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 845
January 2008 Restart replication
Restart replication
Follow this procedure to restart replication if it is temporarily turned off.
Restarting replication
1 On the Replication Server, from the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Replication Server > Replication Server Management.
Result: The following window appears.
2 Click Create.
Result: The following window appears.
3 In the Primary CCMS box, type the name and Nortel server subnet IP address for the Primary Server.
846 Contact Center Standby Server
Restart replication Standard 10.12
4 In the Secondary CCMS box, type the name and Nortel server subnet IP address for the Secondary Servers, and click OK.
Note: Enter names for only the Primary and Secondary Servers that were configured correctly on the Server Setup Configuration Site Name tab. The name for each Primary and Secondary Server must match the computer name configured on the server. If no Primary and Secondary Servers are configured to use the Warm Standby feature, or if you want to create a Warm Standby configuration at a later time, click Cancel.
Result: The following window appears.
The Warm Standby configuration takes several minutes. Several Setup windows appear, and the Initialize Standby CCMS Database window appears.
.
Attention: Do not click OK until you complete the backup and restore procedures in the following step.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 847
January 2008 Restart replication
5 Use the Database Backup utility on the Primary Server to back up the active Contact Center Manager Server database. After you complete the back up, use the Database Restore utility on the Secondary Server to restore this database backup. This initializes the Secondary Server database.
To back up the database to tape, proceed to “Backing up the database to tape” on page 847.
To back up the database to a remote directory, proceed to “Backing up the database to a remote directory” on page 850.
Backing up the database to tape
a. On the Primary Server, insert a blank tape into the tape drive.
b. Ensure the services on the server are up.
Note: A database backup uses the CCMS HDM service. If this service is down, the database backup cannot start.
c. From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Database Backup.
Result: The Database Backup Utility window appears.
ATTENTION To initialize the Secondary Server database correctly, ensure you do the following:
Back up the Primary Server database only after you are prompted to do so. For more information about backing up the server, see “Back up data” on page 907. For more information about restoring the database, see “Restore data” on page 953.
Use the backup utility to initialize the Secondary Server database. Do not use a previous or subsequent backup.
Ensure the backup is not overwritten by subsequent backups until after you initialize the Secondary Server.
848 Contact Center Standby Server
Restart replication Standard 10.12
d. Select Local Tape Drive, and click Next.
e. Verify that the database tape is in the tape drive, and click Start Backup.
Result: A DOS window appears showing the progress of the database backup.
The remote backup process begins. This can take from 30 minutes to 3 hours to complete, depending on the size of your database, the speed of your computer, and network traffic. Leave the DOS window open so you can see the backup completion message.
f. Wait until the completed OK message appears in the DOS window.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 849
January 2008 Restart replication
g. Press Enter, type quit, and press Enter again.
Result: The Remember to schedule regular database backups window appears.
h. Click OK.
i. After the database backup is complete, remove the backup tape and save it.
j. Check whether any events are recorded in the event log on the client PC from which you scheduled the backup. If there are any errors, check the database backup log files on the server. These files are located at the following paths: C:\Windows\System32\Backup.log and D:\Sybase\ASE-12_5\Install\backup.log.
k. Proceed to “Restoring the database from a tape backup” on page 855.
850 Contact Center Standby Server
Restart replication Standard 10.12
Backing up the database to a remote directory
a. On the Primary Server, ensure the services on the server are running.
Note: A database backup uses the HDM service. If this service is down, the database backup cannot start.
b. Select Start > Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Database Backup.
Result: The Database Backup Utility window appears.
c. Ensure Network Disk is selected, and click Next.
Result: The configuration window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 851
January 2008 Restart replication
d. In the Account box, type the user name you recorded in the worksheet on page 543. This must be the same user name you assigned to the account on both the network computer and the server.
e. In the Password box, type the password you recorded in the worksheet on page 543. This must be the same password you assigned to the account on both the network computer and the server.
f. In the Network Path box, type the network path for the shared directory you created on the network computer. Use the following format:
computername\sharename
Refer to the computer name and share name that you recorded in the worksheet on page 543.
g. Click Next.
Result: Contact Center Manager Server is now set to back up the database from the remote directory on the network computer.
h. If your backup is already scheduled, the system automatically sends the database backup files to the remote directory.
Result: The following window appears.
852 Contact Center Standby Server
Restart replication Standard 10.12
i. If your backup is not scheduled, click Start Backup.
Result: The services start, and then the following window appears.
j. To start your backup, skip to step k; otherwise, click Cancel to save your settings and exit.
k. Click Start Backup.
Result: A DOS window appears showing the progress of the database backup.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 853
January 2008 Restart replication
The remote backup process begins. This can take from 30 minutes to 3 hours to complete, depending on the size of your database, the speed of your computer, and network traffic. Leave the DOS window open so you can see the backup completion message.
l. Wait until the completed OK message appears in the DOS window.
m. Press Enter, type quit, and press Enter again.
Result: The following window appears.
854 Contact Center Standby Server
Restart replication Standard 10.12
n. Click OK.
Result: The backup is complete.
The backup log for your backup is located atD:\Nortel\data\backup\BackupLogs\dbbackup.log.
o. Navigate to D:\Nortel\data\backup\BackupLogs\ and open the file dbbackup.log (with Notepad). If your database backup succeeded, the log contains the following lines of text:
[SERVER MESSAGE]:Backup Server: 3.42.1.1: DUMP is complete (database cbc).
[SERVER MESSAGE]:Backup Server: 3.42.1.1: DUMP is complete (database blue).
[SERVER MESSAGE]:Backup Server: 3.42.1.1: DUMP is complete (database master).
This database backup log does not have any errors or warnings.
p. Perform one of the following tasks:
If your database backup log contains the text in the previous example, your backup succeeded. Close the log file.
If your database backup log contains any messages or errors, this can indicate a problem with the backup. Navigate to the folder D:\sybase\ASE-12_5\install and open the file backup.log (with Notepad). This file can indicate the source of the problem. Retry the backup and check the backup log again. If the log still contains messages or errors, contact Nortel product support.
q. Proceed to “Restoring the database from a remote directory backup” on page 857.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 855
January 2008 Restart replication
Restoring the database from a tape backup
a. Log on to the Secondary Server as NGenSys.
b. From the Start menu, choose Programs > Standby Server > Database Restore.
Result: The Database Restore Utility window appears.
c. Select Local Tape Drive, and click Next.
d. Insert the tape containing the database backup.
Result: The system first shuts down the Standby Server services that you installed. Then the database restore begins. During this time, the Database Restore window remains visible and displays numerous status messages about the progress of the restore.
e. Wait until the Database Restore Utility window appears.
856 Contact Center Standby Server
Restart replication Standard 10.12
f. When the tape in the drive stops moving, click Start Restore to begin the database restore process.
Note: A log file is created with the following path name after the database restore is complete: D:\Nortel\data\backup\RestoreLogs\restore.log.
Result: The following window appears.
g. Click Done.
h. Eject the backup tape from the tape drive.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 857
January 2008 Restart replication
i. Click OK to exit the Database Restore utility.
Attention: You must wait for the Database Restore Utility window to close. It can seem like there is no activity, but the system must complete its processes and close this window. This can take up to 2 minutes to complete. Do not restart the system.
j. Proceed to step 6.
Restoring the database from a remote directory backup
a. Log on to the Secondary Server as NGenSys.
b. Ensure that you have a network connection to the computer containing the remote directory backup.
c. From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Database Restore.
Result: The Database Restore Utility window appears.
d. Select Network Disk, and click Next.
Result: The following window appears.
858 Contact Center Standby Server
Restart replication Standard 10.12
e. In the Account box, type the account name for the remote backup location.
f. In the Password box, type the password for the remote backup location.
g. In the Network Path box, type the path of the remote backup location.
h. Check that the path is correct.
i. Click Next.
Result: The following window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 859
January 2008 Restart replication
j. Click Start Restore to begin the database restore process.
Result: The database restore process begins. This can take 1 to 3 hours, depending on the amount of data and the CPU speed of the server. During this time, the Database Restore Utility window remains in view and displays numerous status messages about the progress of the restore.
Note: The restore can take longer if you store your call-by-call records for longer than the recommended interval.
k. Wait until the following window appears, indicating that the restore is complete.
Note: A log file with the following path name is created after the database restore is complete: D:\Nortel\data\backup\RestoreLogs\restore.log
l. Click Done.
Result: The following window appears.
860 Contact Center Standby Server
Restart replication Standard 10.12
m. Click OK to exit the Database Restore utility.
Attention: You must wait for the Database Restore Utility window to close. It can seem as if there is no activity, but the system must complete its processes and close this window. Nortel recommends that you do not restart the server at this time.
n. Proceed to step 6.
6 After you back up and restore the database, click OK on the Initialize Standby CCMS Database window.
Result: The Standby Server database initializes by performing the backup and restore. This can take several minutes. Then the Initialization Complete? window appears.
7 Click Yes.
Result: The Warm Standby Properties window appears.
8 Choose one of the following:
Option One—Uses the enhanced switchover procedure. For more information, see “Switchover options” on page 719.
Option Two—Requires you to configure the computer name and IP address manually. For more information, see “Switchover options” on page 719.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 861
January 2008 Restart replication
9 Select the Switch Over automatically checkbox, to enable the automatic switchover.
You can only enable the automatic switchover if you choose Option One.
If you choose Option Two, the Switch Over automatically checkbox is unavailable.
When you select an automatic switchover, the switchover from the Primary Server to the Secondary Server starts automatically when the heartbeat between the Replication Server and the Primary Server (active mode) fails for a duration in excess of the Alarm Switch Over/Timeout value.
Note: Automatic switchover is limited to the operation of the Secondary Server and does not take into account additional application servers such as Contact Center Manager Administration, Contact Center Multimedia, and CallPilot.
10 In the Alarm/Switch Over Timeout box, type the number of seconds that the heartbeat can fail before the switchover takes place.
Attention: Ensure that you type an appropriate timeout value in this box. Too short a time can cause a switchover to start when the Active Server is unavailable for a short time, for example, if the server is restarted. The default timeout is 5 minutes. The minimum value is 30 seconds.
11 In the CCM Server Port Number box, type the port number to which the Replication Server connects during a switchover.
Note: You must type the same value that you entered in the CCMS Listener Port field. Ensure that the value you enter does not interfere with a port used by any other application.
862 Contact Center Standby Server
Restart replication Standard 10.12
12 Click OK.
Result: The Replication Server Management window appears.
13 Click Done.
Result: The Warm Standby configuration is complete. The Replication Server Management window appears.
14 Click OK to exit the Replication Server Management window.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 863
January 2008 Restart replication
Problems restarting replication
There is a known issue with the Replication Server shutting down following restart.
If you restart the Replication Server, the Replication agents on the Primary Contact Center Manager Server may shut down. In this scenario, the Replication agents do not restart. Manual intervention is required to restart them.
If you plan to restart the Replication Server, complete the following procedure to avoid this problem.
If the Replication Server is restarted due to an unplanned event, for example due to a power failure, and the Replication Agents shut down, contact Nortel technical support to restart the Replication agents on the active server.
Restarting Replication services
1 Log on to the Replication Server.
2 From the Services window, shut down the Replication Server service. This service is named Sybase REP _ <computer_name>_RS.
3 From the Services window, shut down the SQL service. This service is named Sybase SQLServer _ <computer_name>.
4 Restart the server.
864 Contact Center Standby Server
Restart replication Standard 10.12
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 865
Pa r t 4
Appendixes
866 Contact Center Standby Server
Standard 10.12
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 867
A p p e n d i x A
Install and uninstall patches
In this chapterOverview 868
Install patches on the server 870
Uninstall SUs from the server using the Patch Manager 875
Problems restarting replication 881
868 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and uninstall patches Standard 10.12
Overview
Nortel supplies the following patches for Contact Center Manager Server:
Service Update (SU)
Service Update Supplement (SUS)
Service Updates
Periodically, Service Update Supplements (SUSs) are consolidated into a Service Update. You install Service Updates in the same way you install Service Update Supplements. However, Service Updates can take longer to download because they are larger. Two Service Update packs are usually available: one for the client and one for the server.
Patch type Description
Service Update (SU) This patch provides planned product updates and bug fixes. Each SU contains the latest fixes and the content of all previous SUs and SUSs. When you install the latest SU, the installation program automatically uninstalls the previous SU and all SUSs in the SU. Example of an SU name: CCMS_6.0_SU_91.
Service Update Supplement (SUS)
This patch provides urgent individual fixes required before the next SU is available. When you install an SU containing an SUS already installed on your system, the installation program automatically uninstalls the SUS from your system. Example of an SUS name: CCMS_6.0_SUS_02.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 869
January 2008 Install and uninstall patches
When you install the software (or upgrade to a new version), you must install the latest Service Update. If no Service Update pack is available, check with your Nortel customer support representative.
Obtain patches
You can obtain Service Updates and Service Update Supplements as follows:
All SU packs and SUSs are available on the Enterprise Solutions PEP Library Web site, located at http://www.nortel.com/espl.
Note: To register for this Web site, follow the instructions provided at www.nortel.com/register.
Any SU packs and SUSs that are available at the time of shipping are included on the DVD with your software.
Before you begin
If you are not installing patches from a DVD, download them from the Enterprise Solutions PEP Library Web site (www.nortel.com/espl) or obtain them from your Nortel customer support representative.
You must read the readme file associated with each Service Update you plan to install.
ATTENTION Do not perform unsupervised maintenance on the Contact Center Manager Server (Active or Standby). Nortel recommends that the Contact Center Manager Server administrator supervise all maintenance activities on the server.
870 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and uninstall patches Standard 10.12
Install patches on the server
This section shows you how to install patches (Service Updates and Service Update Supplements) on the Contact Center Manager Server.
PrerequisitesThe Service Update must be a later release than the Service Update you already installed.
You must log on to the server as NGenSys.
Installing a patch on the server (SU or SUS)
1 Use the PEP Viewer utility to ensure that the patch (SU or SUS) is not installed.
2 Ensure that you close all applications.
3 Perform one of the following tasks:
If you are downloading the patch, navigate to the Enterprise Solutions PEP Library Web site located at http://www.nortel.com/espl and download the patch you require.
If you are installing the patch, locate the patch directory on the DVD, or the directory into which you downloaded the patch from the Web.
4 Read the readme file associated with the patch.
5 Double-click the <SU _ID>.msi or <SUS_ID>.msi file associated with the patch.
ATTENTION When you install patches on a Standby Server configuration, apply the patch on the Active Server before the Standby Server. Failure to do so results in critical errors in the Standby Server configuration.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 871
January 2008 Install and uninstall patches
6 If you are prompted to view the readme file, click Yes.
7 Review the readme file and continue with the installation of the SU.
Result: The following window appears.
872 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and uninstall patches Standard 10.12
8 Click Next.
Result: The following window appears.
9 Click Install.
Result: The system installs the patch on the server, and then the following window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 873
January 2008 Install and uninstall patches
10 Click Finish.
Result: The following window may appear.
11 Click Yes to restart the server.
Result: The patch is installed.
Installing patches on servers in a replication environment
1 Follow the instructions in the patch readme files to apply the patches to the Active Server.
2 Check if the Replication Server Stable Queue usage exceeds 2 MB (this appears on the Replication Server Monitor). The higher the usage, the greater the delay in database updates received by the Standby Server.
3 Wait until the Stable Queue usage drops back to 2 MB before applying the patch to the Standby Server.
4 Follow the instructions in the patch readme files to apply the patches to the Standby Server.
Installing patches on the Replication Server
1 Ensure the Microsoft Automatic Update feature is disabled on all of the servers.
2 Verify that both the Active Server and Standby Server databases are active.
3 Verify that all of the replication agent threads are running. You should not see any entries in the Stopped Replication Server Threads box.
4 If any replication agent threads are not running, address this issue before you proceed.
5 Verify that both the Sybase Server Service and the Replication Server Service are running. If either the Sybase Server Service or the Replication Server Service is not running, address this issue before you proceed.
874 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and uninstall patches Standard 10.12
6 Follow the instructions in the Replication Server patch readme file to install the SU.
7 If you are asked to shut down all three servers, you must shut down the servers in the following order:
Active Server
Replication Server
Standby Server
When you are asked to start up the servers, you must start them up one at a time in the reverse order:
Standby Server
Replication Server
Active Server
The same sequence applies if any two of the three servers are to be shut down.
If you are asked to restart the server, apply the same order as for startup. You must ensure that the Standby Server is started and is up before you start the Replication Server.
Install the latest Windows Server 2003 service pack
After you install the required patches for Contact Center Manager Server, ensure that you install the latest Windows Server 2003 service pack that is validated with Contact Center Manager Server. You can obtain this information from the Contact Center Portfolio Service Packs Compatibility and Security Hotfixes Applicability List, available on the Partner Information Center Web site (www.nortel.com/pic).
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 875
January 2008 Install and uninstall patches
Uninstall SUs from the server using the Patch Manager
You can use the Patch Manager utility to view a list of all patches installed on the server. Use this utility before you install a new Service Update (SU) or Service Update Supplement (SUS) to verify that it is not already installed.
You can also use the Patch Manager utility to remove all SUSs and the SU installed on the server. You can use this feature when you install new patches on the system and want to remove all existing patches from the system. You can also use it as part of a recovery scenario or when you want to remove all configuration data and use the server for a different purpose.
Starting the Patch Manager
1 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > PEP Viewer.Result: The following window appears and lists the installed patches (SU and SUSs).
876 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and uninstall patches Standard 10.12
Removing patches (SU and SUSs) installed on the server
Before you can remove a patch you must shut down the services on your server.
Shutting down services on the Contact Center Manager Server
1 Log on to the server as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Shutdown.Result: The Contact Center - Manager Server Shutdown utility window appears.
3 Click OK.
Result: The utility shuts down all services. The Service Status Log window appears. This log displays any services that failed to shut down. Click Recheck to refresh the service status.
4 If any services are still running:
a. From the Start menu, choose Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services to display the Services window.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 877
January 2008 Install and uninstall patches
b. Manually shut down the listed services.
c. Close the Services window.
d. Click Recheck to update the status log.
5 After all services on the Contact Center Manager Server are shut down, click Accept on the Server Status Log to exit the utility.
Removing the latest patch (SUS or SU) installed on the server
1 Log on to the server as Administrator.
2 Ensure no services are running on Contact Center Manager Server.
878 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and uninstall patches Standard 10.12
3 Start the Patch Manager. From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > PEP Viewer.Result: The Patch Manager - Server 6.0 window appears, displaying the SU and SUSs installed.
4 Select an SU or SUS, and then click Read Me.
Result: The readme file appears.
5 Read the section Uninstallation Instructions for special uninstallation instructions.
6 Close the readme file.
7 Click Uninstall Last to remove the last applied patch (the last SUS or the SU, if no SUSs are installed).
Result: A caution window appears.
8 Click Yes to uninstall the last patch.
Result: When uninstallation is complete, one of two windows appears:
If the system requires a reboot, an information window appears. Click OK to close the window.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 879
January 2008 Install and uninstall patches
If the system does not require a reboot, the Patch Manager - Server 6.0 window appears. Click OK to close the Patch Manager - Server 6.0 window.
Note: If you are not performing a complete uninstallation, you must restart the system to ensure that all the changes take effect.
Removing all patches (SUSs and SU) installed on the server
1 Log on to the server as Administrator.
2 Ensure no services are running on Contact Center Manager Server.
3 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > PEP Viewer.Result: The Patch Manager - Server 6.0 window appears, displaying the SU and SUSs installed.
4 Select an SU or SUS and click Read Me.
Result: The readme file appears.
5 Read the section Uninstallation Instructions for special uninstallation instructions.
6 Close the readme file.
880 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and uninstall patches Standard 10.12
7 Click Uninstall All to remove all applied patches (all SUSs and the SU).
Result: A caution window appears.
8 Click Yes to uninstall all patches.
Result: When uninstallation is complete, there are two possible windows that appear:
If the system must be rebooted, an information window appears. Click OK to close the window.
If the system does not require a reboot, the Patch Manager - Server 6.0 window appears. Click OK to close the Patch Manager - Server 6.0 window:
Note: If you are not performing a complete uninstallation, you must restart the system to ensure that all the changes take effect.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 881
January 2008 Install and uninstall patches
Problems restarting replication
There is a known issue with the Replication Server shutting down following restart.
If you restart the Replication Server, the Replication agents on the Primary Contact Center Manager Server may shut down. In this scenario, the Replication agents do not restart. Manual intervention is required to restart them.
If you plan to restart the Replication Server, follow this procedure to avoid this problem.
If the Replication Server is restarted due to an unplanned event, for example due to a power failure, and the Replication Agents shut down, contact Nortel technical support to restart the Replication agents on the active server.
Restarting Replication services
1 Log on to the Replication Server.
2 From the Services window, shut down the Replication Server service. This service is named Sybase REP _ <computer_name>_RS.
3 From the Services window, shut down the SQL service. This service is named Sybase SQLServer _ <computer_name>.
4 Restart the server.
882 Contact Center Standby Server
Install and uninstall patches Standard 10.12
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 883
A p p e n d i x B
Maintain the Replication Server
In this chapterMonitor the Replication Server 884
Maintain the Replication Server 892
Remove Warm Standby configuration 893
Stop and resume replication 895
Add Stable Queue partitions 898
Upgrade the Standby Server 901
Uninstall the Replication Server 902
Restart replication after maintenance 905
884 Contact Center Standby Server
Maintain the Replication Server Standard 10.12
Monitor the Replication Server
Monitor the status of the Replication Server and the Warm Standby system using the Replication Server Monitor.
ATTENTION Do not perform unsupervised maintenance on the Contact Center Manager Server (Active or Standby). Nortel recommends that the Contact Center Manager Server administrator supervise all maintenance activities on the server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 885
January 2008 Maintain the Replication Server
Running the Replication Server Monitor
1 On the Replication Server, from the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Replication Server > Replication Server Monitor.
Result: The Replication Server Monitor window appears.
2 Click Refresh to update the display between the intervals. The Replication Server Monitor is updated at 30-second intervals.
Result: The Replication Server Monitor displays information in four sections.
886 Contact Center Standby Server
Maintain the Replication Server Standard 10.12
Contact Center database connections
The Warm Standby properties window displays the status of the connections between the Replication Server and the Active and Standby Server databases. The servers appear in pairs, with the Active Server on the left, and the Standby Server on the right. Under normal conditions, the status of all connections must be Active.
The following table lists possible status values and their causes.
Status Cause
Active Normal operation.
Down The connection failed due to error.
Suspended The connection was suspended manually or due to an error in the Standby Server database.
Suspended/Waiting for Enable Marker
The connection to the Standby Server database is suspended. The Replication Server is waiting to receive the Enable marker from the Active Server database.
Suspended/Waiting for Dump Marker
The connection to the Standby Server database is suspended. The Replication Server is waiting to receive the Dump marker from the Active Server database.
Switching Over The Replication Server is in the process of the switching the Active Server and Standby Server connections.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 887
January 2008 Maintain the Replication Server
Stable Queue partitionsThis section of the Warm Standby properties window displays the status of the Stable Queues and their usage. The summary information displays the number of Stable Queue partitions, the total size of the Stable Queues in megabytes, the total usage in megabytes, and the overall percentage usage. The normal partition status is Online.
Stopped Replication Server threadsThis section of the Warm Standby properties window displays Replication Server threads that are in an abnormal state. Under normal operating conditions, no data appears in this section.
Under particular conditions, certain Replication Server threads appear as described in the following table. The presence of the Replication Server threads in this list indicates an error in the Replication Server application.
Thread name Status Cause
DSI/DSI EXEC Connecting A DSI thread is unable to connect to the Standby Server database as the connection between the Replication Server and the Standby Server database was disrupted, for example, due to a network problem. The DSI thread resumes when the cause of the disruption is removed.
DSI/DSI EXEC Down A DSI thread used to connect to a Standby Server database is down due to error.
DSI/DSI EXEC Suspended A DSI thread used to connect to a Standby Server database is suspended due to manual intervention or error.
888 Contact Center Standby Server
Maintain the Replication Server Standard 10.12
Replication Server ServicesThis section of the Warm Standby properties window displays the name and status of the Sybase SQL Server and the Replication Server. Under normal conditions, the status for both must be Running.
Alarms and events
The following is a complete list of Replication Server-related alarms and events on the Standby Server.
Replication Server alarmsThe following alarms are reported on the CCMS Server Utility.
REP AGENT Down The connection between the Active Server database and the Replication Server is disrupted. The Rep Agent thread can show this status for several minutes, even after the connection is restored, until the Replication Agent on the Active Server connects to the Replication Server.
Event Severity Description
51175 Major The transaction log for the specified database is becoming full.
51176 Critical The transaction log for the specified database is becoming critically full.
51177 Critical Replication was stopped for the specified database.
51178 Critical It was not possible to stop replication for the specified database.
Thread name Status Cause
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 889
January 2008 Maintain the Replication Server
Replication Server eventsThe following events alert the administrator of the Replication Server error conditions and events. These events are logged to the Windows Event Log on the Replication Server only. The following events are logged to the Application Log under the source Database Replication.
51179 Major The CCM Server thread that monitors the health of the Replication Server encountered an error during startup.
51180 Information The Replication Server monitoring thread was started.
51181 Information The Replication Server monitoring thread was shut down.
51182 Critical Connection to the Replication Server was lost.
Event Severity Description
1000 Error Replication Server DSI Connection to the Standby Server is suspended.
1001 Information Replication Server DSI Connection to the Standby Server is resumed.
1002 Error Replication Server Threads are down.
1003 Information Replication Server Threads are up.
1004 Warning Replication Server Stable Queue usage is at or above n%.
1005 Information Replication Server Stable Queue usage dropped below n%.
Event Severity Description
890 Contact Center Standby Server
Maintain the Replication Server Standard 10.12
1006 Error SQL Server on Replication Server is stopped.
1007 Information SQL Server on Replication Server is running.
1008 Error Replication Server is stopped.
1009 Information Replication Server is running.
1010 Error Replication Server failed to poll the Active Server.
1011 Information Replication Server successfully polled the Active Server.
1012 Information Replication Server switchover from the Active Server started.
1013 Information Replication Server switched to the new Active Server.
Active Computer name: NAME
IP Address: a.b.c.d
1014 Information Replication Server switchover is complete.
Active Computer name: NAME IP Address: a.b.c.d
Standby Computer name: NAME
IP Address: a.b.c.d
1015 Error Replication Server switchover failed.
1016 Error Replication Server service failed.
1017 Error Replication Server monitor failed. The Replication Server is unable to monitor the Active Server.
Event Severity Description
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 891
January 2008 Maintain the Replication Server
Events reported on the Windows Event Log on the Replication Server can be converted to SNMP traps by using the Windows Event to Trap Translator (evntwin) utility.
1018 Warning Replication Server invoked automatic switchover from the Active Server.
1019 Error Replication Server status monitor failed. Unable to monitor the status of the Replication System
Event Severity Description
892 Contact Center Standby Server
Maintain the Replication Server Standard 10.12
Maintain the Replication Server
This section contains instructions for maintaining the Replication Server.
Modifying a Warm Standby configuration
You can modify the switchover properties at any time except during the switchover itself.
1 On the Replication Server, run the Replication Server Management utility.
2 Select the servers, and click Edit.
Result: The Warm Standby properties window appears.
3 Modify the properties and click OK to save your changes.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 893
January 2008 Maintain the Replication Server
Remove Warm Standby configuration
When you remove the servers from the Warm Standby configuration, the system must update the replication configuration data in the Active and Standby Server databases. Therefore, ensure that the servers for Contact Center Manager Server are connected to the Nortel server subnet and that the Sybase SQL service is running on both servers before you remove them from the Warm Standby configuration. This procedure can take several minutes to complete.
Removing a Warm Standby configuration
1 On the Replication Server, run the Replication Server Management utility.
2 Select the servers, and click Remove.
Result: The following window appears.
894 Contact Center Standby Server
Maintain the Replication Server Standard 10.12
3 Click Yes.
Result: The replication between the Active Server and the Standby Server stops. The Warm Standby configuration is removed. The contact center data remains intact on both servers. The Replication Server Management window appears.
4 Click OK.
Result: The Replication Server configuration is updated to remove the servers for Contact Center Manager Server as a Warm Standby pair. This action only removes the servers from the Warm Standby configuration. It does not remove any contact center data from either server, or any data copied from the Active Server to the Standby Server.
Note: For more information about recreating a Warm Standby configuration, see Step 32. “Set up the Warm Standby configuration on the Replication Server” on page 472.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 895
January 2008 Maintain the Replication Server
Stop and resume replication
Two alternative methods for stopping replication are available:
Stopping replication from the Active Server
Shutting down replication automatically
Stopping replication from the Active Server
In most situations, you can stop the replication and remove the Warm Standby configuration using the Replication Server Management utility on the Replication Server. However, if the Replication Server fails or if the network connection to the Replication Server is disrupted, you may not be able to stop the replication process using the remove Warm Standby configuration method. In this situation, perform the following procedure to stop the replication process.
Stopping the replication process
1 On the Active Server, select Start > Run.
2 Type d:\nortel\iccm\bin\wsstoprep.exe.
3 Click OK.
Result: The following message appears.
.
CAUTION
Risk of failureYou can only run this utility on the Active Server.
896 Contact Center Standby Server
Maintain the Replication Server Standard 10.12
4 Click Yes.
Result: The utility stops replication on the Active Server and removes the Warm Standby configuration from this server. This process takes several minutes. The following message appears in the command window while the process is running:
5 After the system removes the Warm Standby configuration, the following message appears.
6 Click OK to close the utility.
Note: This procedure only removes the Warm Standby configuration from the Active Server. You must remove this configuration from the Replication Server using the Replication Server Management Utility to remove the Warm Standby configuration from the Standby Server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 897
January 2008 Maintain the Replication Server
Resume replication
To resume replication, you must remove the Warm Standby configuration from the Replication Server and then create the Warm Standby configuration from the start again. To do this, follow the procedure Step 31. “Install the Replication Server software” on page 465.
Shutting down replication automatically
The Standby Server database contains a mechanism to disable replication automatically if the Replication Agent on the Active Server database is unable to connect to the Replication Server for a prolonged period, for example, due to a network failure or a failure of the Replication Server. This mechanism prevents the database transaction log from filling up beyond a critical level.
Replication is disabled automatically from the Active Server if it detects that the database transaction log is more than 70 percent full.
The Active Server issues the following alarms when the transaction log fills up and when the system automatically disables replication:
51175 (MAJOR): Transaction log for the blue/cbc database is x% full.
51176 (CRITICAL): Transaction log for the blue/cbc database is x% full.
51177 (CRITICAL): Replication stopped for the blue/cbc database.
51178 (CRITICAL): Failed to disable replication for the blue/cbc database (Error code x).
The system issues the first alarm when the transaction log is 30 percent full. The system then issues alarms at intervals of 10 percent if the transaction log continues to fill up. The system disables replication when the transaction log is over 70 percent full.
To resume replication after the system disables replication automatically, you must remove the Warm Standby configuration from the Replication Server and then create the Warm Standby configuration again. To do this, follow the procedure Step 31. “Install the Replication Server software” on page 465.
898 Contact Center Standby Server
Maintain the Replication Server Standard 10.12
Add Stable Queue partitions
The Replication Server uses Stable Queues to store transactions before the transactions are executed in the Standby Server database. Stable Queues are system files that reside on one or more disk partitions. The Contact Center Replication Monitor service generates warning events to the Windows Application Event Log when the total Stable Queue usage exceeds 50 percent, and for every 10 percent in excess of this. The Replication Server is initially configured with a single partition of up to 2 040 MB for the Stable Queues. Partition space is allocated and released in 1-MB segments. If the Replication Server runs out of Stable Queue space, the Active Server cannot send transactions to the Replication Server.
The Replication Server also generates warning messages to the Replication Server log file whenever the partition reaches 50, 60, 70, 80 and 90 percent capacity, or when a single queue occupies more than 70 percent of the available space. The Replication Server cancels the warnings when usage drops below these thresholds.
Use the Stable Queues Expansion utility to increase the size of the Stable Queues.
Running the Stable Queues Expansion utility does not affect replication of data.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 899
January 2008 Maintain the Replication Server
Expanding the Stable Queues
1 On the Replication Server, from the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Replication Server > Stable Queues Expansion.
Result: The Stable Queues Expansion window appears.
2 Select one or more drives listed in the Stable Queues Expansion window.
Result: As you select each drive, the total disk space appears.
900 Contact Center Standby Server
Maintain the Replication Server Standard 10.12
3 Click Expand.
Result: A confirmation message appears.
4 Click Yes.
Result: The Stable Queues are expanded on the selected drives. All of the available space on the selected drives is used.
Result: The length of this operation depending on the speed of your server and the size of the additional Stable Queue space to be allocated.
When the Stable Queue expansion is complete, the total additional space allocated appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 901
January 2008 Maintain the Replication Server
Upgrade the Standby Server
Complete the procedures listed in the following checklist to upgrade the Standby Server.
Upgrade Standby Server checklist
Follow this checklist to upgrade your Contact Center Standby Server 5.0 to Contact Center Standby Server 6.0.
Step Procedure location ✔
Stop the replication of the Active Server.
“Stop and resume replication” on page 895.
Uninstall Replication Server 5.0. “Uninstall the Replication Server” on page 902.
Install the Replication Server 6.0 software.
Section C: “Postinstallation,” on page 391.
Upgrade the Active Server from Release 5.0 to Release 6.0.
Nortel Contact Center Manager Server Installation and Maintenance Guide.
Upgrade the Standby Server software from Release 5.0 to Release 6.0.
Ensure that you choose the Standby Server option and configure the Database Replication window during the upgrade.
Nortel Contact Center Manager Server Installation and Maintenance Guide.
Configure the Replication Server. Step 31. “Install the Replication Server software” on page 465.
902 Contact Center Standby Server
Maintain the Replication Server Standard 10.12
Uninstall the Replication Server
You can uninstall the Replication Server software if you want to use the server for another purpose. The uninstallation is carried out in a single step.
Uninstalling the Replication Server
This procedure removes all Nortel software, Sybase software, databases, Stable Queue devices, and Warm Standby configurations from the Replication Server.
The removal of a Warm Standby configuration requires updates to the Active and Standby Server databases. Ensure network connectivity between the Replication Server and the Active and Standby Servers. Ensure that the Sybase SQL service is running on the Active and Standby Servers.
1 Log on to the Replication Server as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, select Control Panel.
Result: The Control Panel window appears.
3 Double-click Add or Remove Programs.
Result: The Add or Remove Programs window appears.
4 Select the appropriate Service Update (for example, REPS_6.0_SU_01), and click Remove.
Result: A message asks you to confirm your choice.
5 Click Yes.
6 If you have any other patches on your server, repeat steps 4 and 5.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 903
January 2008 Maintain the Replication Server
7 In the Add or Remove Programs window, select Replication Server.
8 Click Remove.
Result: A message asks you to confirm your choice.
9 Click Yes.
Result: The Replication Server window appears, displaying the progress of the uninstallation.
904 Contact Center Standby Server
Maintain the Replication Server Standard 10.12
When the uninstallation is complete, the Add or Remove Programs window reappears. This can take several minutes.
10 Check that the D:\Nortel and D:\SybaseRS directories were removed. If not, remove the directories and their contents.
11 Check that the Nortel directory was removed from drives F (and other additional drives). If not, remove the directory and its contents from each drive.
Result: The Replication Server is now uninstalled.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 905
January 2008 Maintain the Replication Server
Restart replication after maintenance
There is a known issue with the Replication Server shutting down following restart.
If you restart the Replication Server, the Replication agents on the Primary Contact Center Manager Server may shut down. In this scenario, the Replication agents do not restart. Manual intervention is required to restart them.
If you plan to restart the Replication Server, follow this procedure to avoid this problem.
If the Replication Server is restarted due to an unplanned event, for example due to a power failure, and the Replication Agents shut down, contact Nortel technical support to restart the Replication agents on the active server.
Restarting Replication services
1 Log on to the Replication Server.
2 From the Services window, shut down the Replication Server service. This service is named Sybase REP _ <computer_name>_RS.
3 From the Services window, shut down the SQL service. This service is named Sybase SQLServer _ <computer_name>.
4 Restart the server.
Reconnecting the CLAN
If the CLAN is broken and then connected again for the Replication server, note the following:
906 Contact Center Standby Server
Maintain the Replication Server Standard 10.12
If a database appears to be unavailable in the Replication Monitor, you can try to update the database to get the database to connect between the Active Server and the Replication Server. For example, make calls to Contact Center to add data to the database.
Do not perform the switch from one database to the other. You must wait for the transactions to be transferred and the Stable Queue usage is constant before you switch the databases in the Replication Server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 907
A p p e n d i x C
Back up data
In this chapterOverview 908
Backup speeds 912
Requirements for backups 917
Checklist to perform backups 920
Create a Platform Recovery Disk 921
Calculate the capacity requirements for database backups 924
Backup options 927
Set up tape backups 929
Set up remote directory backups 932
Prepare for third-party backups 948
908 Contact Center Standby Server
Back up data Standard 10.12
Overview
Your backup strategy is a critical part of your disaster recovery program. Backups minimize the data loss resulting from catastrophic failure.
Your backup strategy can include the following types of backups:
database backup (the server remains online)
full backup (the server is taken offline)
RAID1 backup
When to use a database backup
Nortel recommends that you perform a daily database backup using the Contact Center Manager Server backup utility. A database backup occurs while the server is online. In conjunction with a Platform Recovery Disk (see “Create a Platform Recovery Disk” on page 921), a database backup allows you to restore all system data (scripts and statistics) after a crash.
ATTENTION Do not perform unsupervised maintenance on the Contact Center Manager Server (Active or Standby). Nortel recommends that the Contact Center Manager Server administrator supervise all maintenance activities on the server.
.
CAUTION
Risk of malfunction
To keep data synchronized between Contact Center Multimedia and Contact Center Manager Server, you must ensure that when you back up Contact Center Manager Server, you back up Contact Center Multimedia at the same time.
For more information about backing up Contact Center Multimedia, see the Contact Center Multimedia Installation and Maintenance Guide.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 909
January 2008 Back up data
If your server is equipped with a mirrored Redundant Array of Independent Disks (RAID1) system, recovery from a single drive failure does not require a database backup. However, Nortel recommends that you still continue to perform daily backups.
Backup destinationsYou can direct your database backup to the following destinations:
a remote directory on a network computer
a tape in a local tape drive
Use multiple backup tapes on a rotation basis, with tapes rotating off-site for protection in the event of a catastrophic disaster.
Daily maintenance and database backups The daily maintenance process consolidates statistics. It runs on the server at midnight and takes several hours, depending on the system configuration. Frequent delays occur if you schedule a backup at the same time as the daily maintenance process. The server puts the backup on hold until the maintenance process is complete. The delay is logged in the backup log file, and does not impact the system or backup.
When to use a full backup
A full backup allows you to restore the server to its state at the time of the backup. It is useful for recovery from a catastrophic failure in the server disk subsystem. In combination with a current database backup, a full backup can help you minimize your data loss.
ATTENTION You do not require a full backup of your Contact Center Manager Server if you maintain a current database backup and Platform Recovery Disk. If you want to do a full backup of your server, you must use a third-party backup utility.
910 Contact Center Standby Server
Back up data Standard 10.12
A full backup occurs while the server is offline. You must create a full backup:
after the installation and configuration of a Standby Server
before and after a major server upgrade (for example, from Release 4.2 to Release 6.0)
before and after any major hardware upgrades (such as a disk expansion, BIOS upgrade, or platform migration)
When to use a RAID1 backup
RAID1 backups are recommended for platforms with hot-swap disk configurations. RAID1 backups provide a fast mechanism to back up and restore your system. Used in conjunction with a database backup, a RAID1 backup allows you to restore your system to its condition preceding a crash.
The Contact Center Manager Server backup utility backs up the server database. You need a database backup to recover from database corruption, or to perform an upgrade or migration on your server. The backup utility is not intended to restore individual pieces of information or files that were deleted by accident.
Backup best practices
To help you recover your database in the case of a system failure, create a new Platform Recovery Disk after you expand your database using the Database Expansion Utility, after you restore your database, and each time you change any of the following information about the server:
Customer Information—If you change your customer name or company name.
Switch Information (Communcation Server 1000/Meridian 1 PBX or Communication Server 2x00/DMS)—If you update switch information, such as the switch name, IP address, and customer number.
IP Addresses (ELAN subnet/Nortel server subnet)—If you update the ELAN subnet or Nortel server subnet IP address of the server.
Voice Connection—If you update the connection to the voice-processing system (CallPilot or Meridian Mail).
RSM IP Address—If you update the Real-Time Statistics Multicast (RSM) IP address of the server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 911
January 2008 Back up data
Site Name—If you change the site name for Contact Center Manager Server.
912 Contact Center Standby Server
Back up data Standard 10.12
Backup speeds
The following table provides an summary description of the backup types and speeds.
For more information on back ups:
To help calculate the speed of database backups before an upgrade (to tape or a remote directory), it is a good idea to perform a trial run of the backup at least several days before the upgrade. Keep in mind that the time required to do a database backup can vary between the trial run and the actual backup day due to several factors.
For a list of variables that can affect the speed of your backup and restore, see “Variables affecting backup and restore speed” on page 913.
Backup type Definition ResultApproximate speed of backup
Database backup Backs up all information stored in the Contact Center Manager Server database to a remote directory or to tape.
Online operation:Call processing continues as the backup executes. No Contact Center Manager Server services are stopped.
See notes following the table.
Full backup
Full backup requires a third-party backup utility.
Backs up the entire system using a third-party backup utility.
Offline operation: Allows you to restore the system to its state at the time of the backup.
See the documentation for the third-party backup utility.
RAID1 drive backup
Backs up drives to a spare drive pack.
Offline operation:Fast system backup and simple restore.
See the supplier’s documentation.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 913
January 2008 Back up data
To calculate the speed for database backups to tape (based on your configuration), see the Contact Center Manager Planning and Engineering Guide.
To see sample time measurements for tape backup and restore, see “Requirements for backups” on page 917.
To help you calculate the disk space requirements before you back up your database, see details about the DBSpace utility in the section “Calculate the capacity requirements for database backups” on page 924.
Variables affecting backup and restore speed
Because Contact Center Manager Server runs on a Platform Vendor Independence (PVI) platform, the factors that affect backup speeds can vary from server to server. The factors shown in the following table can affect backup and restore speed for both remote directory and tape backups. To improve the backup/restore speed on your server, note the recommendations in the last column of the table.
Backup/restore variable
Impact of variable on backup/restore Recommendation
Contact Center Manager Server CPU speed
Faster CPU means more free processing time available for the backup and restore.
Use a higher CPU speed on your PVI server.
Contact Center Manager Server database disk speed
Faster database disk speed allows for a higher data transfer rate for the backup and restore task.
Use a faster disk.
Contact Center Manager Server processing time
Because database backup and restore is a low-priority background task on the server, more call traffic, real-time displays, or scheduled reports slow down the backup/restore task.
Back up and restore your database during low traffic hours, or during periods of low server activity.
914 Contact Center Standby Server
Back up data Standard 10.12
Contact Center Manager Server local tape type
Different tape drives have different data transfer rates. Faster tape drives allow faster database backup and restore on a local tape.
Use a faster tape drive type for local tape backup and restore.
Remote PC CPU speed Faster CPU speed on the remote PC means more free processing time available for the remote backup and restore task on the remote PC.
Use a remote PC with a higher CPU speed.
Remote PC disk type Different disk types have different data transfer rates (for example, SCSI is usually faster than IDE, or a newer ATA interface is faster than an older IDE type). Remote database backup and restore speed depends on the total data transfer rate of the remote PC disk.
Use a faster disk type on the remote PC.
Remote PC disk speed A faster disk speed allows for a higher data transfer rate for the remote backup and restore task on the remote PC.
Use a faster disk on the remote PC.
Backup/restore variable
Impact of variable on backup/restore Recommendation
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 915
January 2008 Back up data
Remote PC processing time
The more processes run on the remote PC, the more the remote database backup and restore task on the remote PC is slowed down.
Do not run other processes or applications on the remote PC during remote database backup/restore.
LAN bandwidth The speed of the remote database backup/restore is proportional to the network bandwidth (speed). A higher LAN speed has a higher bandwidth to handle the additional network traffic for the backup/restore.
Use a LAN with a higher bandwidth.
LAN traffic The speed of the remote database backup and restore is highly dependant on the actual LAN traffic at the time of the backup and restore. Additional traffic in the network delays the backup/restore packets between Contact Center Manager Server and the remote PC.
Back up and restore your database during low LAN traffic hours.
Backup/restore variable
Impact of variable on backup/restore Recommendation
916 Contact Center Standby Server
Back up data Standard 10.12
Contact Center Manager Server database data
The total length of backup time is proportional to the actual amount of physical data in the database at the time of the backup. The length of the backup time is shorter if less data is in the database.
Keep the minimum call statistical data required (for example, do not keep 10 days of data if you only need to keep 2 days of data).
Backup/restore variable
Impact of variable on backup/restore Recommendation
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 917
January 2008 Back up data
Requirements for backups
This section contains information on both remote directory and tape backups.
Remote directory requirements
If you are using a remote directory to back up your database, you must meet the remote computer requirements and the network requirements.
Remote computer requirementsThe remote computer for your database backup can be either a server or a workstation that meets the following requirements:
The operating system must be Windows Server 2003, Windows 2000 Server, Windows 2000 Professional, or Windows XP Professional.
The drive partition for the remote directory must be NTFS.
The directory you use for the backup must contain enough available space to hold the backup files. For more information about calculating disk space requirements, see “Calculate the capacity requirements for database backups” on page 924.
Network requirementsThe network you use for your database backup must meet the following requirements:
The remote computer must be on the same network as the Contact Center Manager Server.
The network connection must be through the Nortel server subnet. Ensure that the Nortel server subnet has low traffic during the scheduled time for the database backup. If you run the backup when Nortel server subnet traffic is high, the database backup can take longer than planned.
918 Contact Center Standby Server
Back up data Standard 10.12
Tape drive requirements and maintenance
If you are using a tape to back up your database, you must meet the tape drive requirements and perform maintenance steps.
Tape drivesUse a SCSI tape drive listed on the Microsoft Compatibility List for Windows Server 2003 or Windows 2000 on the Microsoft Web site. Ensure that the SCSI ID for the tape drive does not conflict with existing SCSI IDs configured for other server devices.
You can use 1/4-inch cartridge and 4-mm and 8-mm digital audio (DAT) format drives.
The drive can be internal or external to the server.
Head-cleaning kitNortel recommends that you purchase a head-cleaning kit to prolong the life of your tape heads and ensure the quality of your backups. You must clean tape drives based on how often they are used.
Most cleaning kits suggest how often heads must be cleaned.
Tape cartridges used per day Cleaning interval
1 weekly
2 every other day
3 every other day
4 or more daily
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 919
January 2008 Back up data
Dedicated tapes for backup typesUse one backup tape for each backup, regardless of whether extra space is available on the tape. Ensure you have enough backup tapes available so that you can save backups for a safe period of time before you overwrite an old backup.
Tape sizeEnsure that the backup tape is large enough to store the data you are backing up. You cannot use multiple backup tapes for a single backup. For more information about calculating tape capacity requirements, see “Calculate the capacity requirements for database backups” on page 924.
Tape rotationRotate tapes daily and store them at an off-site location. Do not keep a tape in the tape drive for more than one or two days for the following reasons:
The next backup can overwrite existing data on the tape. If you are using the same tape for several consecutive nightly backups and the tape becomes damaged, no other backup is available to restore lost data.
Consistent reuse of the same tape accelerates wear on the tape. Tapes may need replacement earlier than their normal life span.
Nortel recommends that you store backup tapes off-site for as long as possible before reusing them. Store tapes for at least two weeks.
.
CAUTION
Risk of overwriting dataAfter a backup, the tape is not ejected from the tape drive. Ensure that you eject the tape after each backup to prevent the next backup from overwriting the data.
920 Contact Center Standby Server
Back up data Standard 10.12
Checklist to perform backups
Follow the steps in this checklist to perform backups.
Step ✔
After you install your server or make changes to your server configuration (for example, IP addresses), create a Platform Recovery Disk. For more information, see “Creating a Platform Recovery Disk” on page 921.
Decide whether to use tape backups or remote directory backups, and configure the setting on Contact Center Manager Server. For more information, see “Set up tape backups” on page 929 and “Set up remote directory backups” on page 932.
If you are backing up to a tape, ensure that you have the following:
enough backup tapes to rotate them. See page “Tape rotation” on page 919.
a head-cleaning kit. Also ensure that you clean the tape drive regularly. See page “Head-cleaning kit” on page 918.
.
CAUTION
Risk of data lossThe server does not contain a default backup schedule. Perform a backup after all system hardware and software are installed, and before and after any upgrade. Schedule a daily database backup.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 921
January 2008 Back up data
Create a Platform Recovery Disk
When you create a Platform Recovery Disk, the system saves both server and database configuration data into a series of text files. You must keep an up-to-date Platform Recovery Disk available in case you need to recover your server software, database, or both. You also need this disk for upgrade and migration procedures. Nortel recommends that you create a Platform Recovery disk after any major modifications to the system.
You can create a Platform Recovery Disk on either a floppy disk or a remote directory on a network computer.
If you want to use a remote computer, you must first map the directory on the network computer to a network drive on your server. The name of the remote directory into which you save the Platform Recovery Disk must not contain any spaces. Spaces in the remote directory name cause errors.
Creating a Platform Recovery Disk
1 Log on to the server as NGenSys.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Server Setup Configuration.
Result: The Contact Center Manager Server Setup Configuration Utility window appears.
922 Contact Center Standby Server
Back up data Standard 10.12
3 Click the Utilities tab.
Result: The following page appears.
4 In the Create Platform Recovery Disk section, perform one of the following tasks:
If you want to create a Platform Recovery Disk on a floppy disk:
a. Ensure the path shows A:\.
b. Insert a blank floppy disk in drive A.
c. Click Create Disk.
Result: The following message appears.
d. Click OK.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 923
January 2008 Back up data
If you want to create a Platform Recovery Disk in a directory on a network computer:
a. Ensure you mapped a network drive to the remote directory in which you want to save the Platform Recovery Disk.
Note: The name of the remote directory into which you save the Platform Recovery Disk must not contain any spaces. Spaces in the remote directory name cause errors.
b. Click Browse and navigate to the mapped drive.
c. Select the directory, and click OK.
Result: The drive you select appears to the left of the Browse button.
d. Click Create Disk.
Result: The system exports files containing the server setup record and database configuration to the disk or remote directory. When the process is complete, the following window appears.
Note: The system also checks for database segmentation problems. If it finds any problems, it displays a message indicating the type of problem.
If the system finds a database data segmentation overlapping problem, it advises you to contact Nortel customer support before you proceed with the migration procedure. After customer support fixes the problem, you must create a new Platform Recovery Disk before you proceed with the migration.
If the system finds a database log segmentation overlapping problem, you can still use the Platform Recovery Disk that you just created. The system prompts you to shut down the Contact Center Manager Server services so it can fix the problem. Follow the on-screen prompt to shut down the services.
5 If you used a floppy disk, remove it from the drive, and ensure it is labeled clearly.
6 Close the Contact Center Manager Server Setup Configuration Utility window.
7 Store the Platform Recovery Disk in a safe place.
924 Contact Center Standby Server
Back up data Standard 10.12
Calculate the capacity requirements for database backups
Before you back up the database, you must ensure that the tape or remote directory used for a database backup has enough capacity to hold the backup files.
To calculate the amount of space required in the tape or remote directory, you have two options:
use the DBSpace utility
use the SCCSDBSpace view
Calculating the capacity requirements for database backups using the DBSpace utility
You can use the DBSpace utility to calculate the amount of data is stored in each of the Blue, CBC, and Master databases, and then calculate the total amount of data stored, in megabytes.
The amount of data stored can change between the time when you run this utility and the time when you back up your database. As an extra precaution, it is a good idea to add a 15 to 30 percent buffer to the amount shown in the Total row of the UsedDBSpace column in the utility window.
1 In Windows, open an MS-DOS window.
2 Navigate to D:\Nortel\iccm\bin\dbspace.exe.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 925
January 2008 Back up data
3 Type dbspace.exe <sysadmin password>, and then press Enter. For example, if the sysadmin password for your server is nortel1, then type dbspace.exe nortel1, and press Enter.
Note: Leave a space between the file name and the sysadmin password.
Result: The Database Space Utility appears and calculates the amount of data stored in the database.
4 In the window, note the values in the UsedDBSpace column. These values show the amount of data stored in each database (Blue, CBC, and Master). Use the scroll bar to view the lower portion of the pane where the total amount is listed. The total value shown in the UsedDBSpace column is the amount of space that you need available in a tape or remote directory before you back up the database (plus the 15 to 30 percent buffer to safely perform the database backups without any space constraints).
5 Click OK to close the window.
Tip: For your reference, the system creates a replica of the utility results and stores it in a text file called dbspace.txt.
Calculate the capacity requirements for database backups using the SCCSDBSpace view
On servers running Release 6.0 of Contact Center Manager Server, you can create a custom report to access the contents of the SCCSDBSpace view. For more information about reports, see the Nortel Contact Center Historical Reporting and Data Dictionary.
When you generate your custom report, the following information appears:
926 Contact Center Standby Server
Back up data Standard 10.12
the amount of space allocated to the Contact Center Manager Server databases (Blue, Master, and CBC)
the amount of space used by the databases
the amount of allocated space that is unused
1 Create a custom report with the report writing application of your choice (for example, Crystal Reports).
The custom report must point to the SCCSDBSpace view on the server.
For information about creating custom reports, see the documentation included with your report writing application.
2 Generate the report to view the capacity requirements for your database backup.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 927
January 2008 Back up data
Backup options
Before you schedule your database backups, you must determine which backup option you want to use and set it up on Contact Center Manager Server. Your options are:
backing up to a remote directory on a network computer
backing up to a tape in a local tape drive
If required, you can switch between these methods; however, you cannot use both methods simultaneously.
You set your database backup option on Contact Center Manager Server using the procedures in this section.
928 Contact Center Standby Server
Back up data Standard 10.12
Tape backups and remote directory backups
Following are the pros and cons of tape backups versus remote directory backups.
Tape backups
Remote directory backups
Pros Cons
not affected by network instability
no dependency on low network traffic
requires maintenance of tape drive and tapes
possibility of mechanical failure of tapes and drives
backup data is readable only by Sybase backup server; cannot be read by Windows backup utility
for technical support, tapes must be handed off or shipped; data cannot be transmitted electronically
Pros Cons
for technical support, backup data can be transmitted electronically
backup data files are recognized by the Windows file system
low maintenance and not prone to mechanical failure
requires a stable network
must be scheduled when network traffic is low
requires an archiving plan for backup files after each backup to ensure the files are not overwritten
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 929
January 2008 Back up data
Set up tape backups
You can back up your database to a tape in a local tape drive on your Contact Center Manager Server. You choose the tape backup option through a window in the server software.
When you do a new installation of the Contact Center Manager Server software, the default setting is tape backup. If you want to confirm that your server is set to tape backup, or if you want to change from remote directory backup to tape backup, use the following procedure.
After you complete these steps, the next scheduled backup goes to the tape drive.
Setting up a tape backup
1 Log on to the server as NGenSys.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Standby Server > Database Backup Utility.
Result: The Database Backup Utility window appears.
930 Contact Center Standby Server
Back up data Standard 10.12
3 Select Local Tape Drive, and click Next.
Result: The following window appears.
4 Verify that the backup tape is in the tape drive, and click Start Backup.
5 Wait until the following message appears in the DOS window.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 931
January 2008 Back up data
6 Press Enter, type quit, and press Enter again.
Result: The following window appears.
7 Click OK.
Result: The backup is complete.
The backup log for your backup is located atD:\Nortel\data\backup\BackupLogs\dbbackup.log.
8 Navigate to D:\Nortel\data\backup\BackupLogs and open the file dbbackup.log file (with Notepad). If your database backup succeeds, the log contains the following lines of text:
[SERVER MESSAGE]:Backup Server: 3.42.1.1: DUMP is complete (database cbc).
[SERVER MESSAGE]:Backup Server: 3.42.1.1: DUMP is complete (database blue).
[SERVER MESSAGE]:Backup Server: 3.42.1.1: DUMP is complete (database master).
This database backup log does not have any errors or warnings.
9 Perform one of the following tasks:
If your database backup log contains the text in the previous example, your backup was successful. Close the log file.
If your database backup log contains any messages or errors, this can indicate a problem with the backup. Navigate to the folder D:\sybase\ASE-12_5\install and open the file backup.log (with Notepad). This file can indicate the source of the problem. Retry the backup and check the backup log again. If the log still contains messages or errors, contact Nortel product support.
932 Contact Center Standby Server
Back up data Standard 10.12
Set up remote directory backups
You can back up your database to a remote directory on a network computer. You choose this option through a window on Contact Center Manager Server. However, you must first complete a series of steps to set up the connection between the server in Contact Center Manager Server and the remote directory. To set up a remote directory backup, you must complete the following tasks:
1. Prepare the network computer:
Create a local Windows user account with administrator privileges.
Create a shared directory to contain the remote database backup files.
2. Prepare Contact Center Manager Server:
Create an identical local Windows user account with administrator privileges.
Add the account to the policy Log on as a service.
Enter the account and path information through a window in Contact Center Manager Server, and deactivate the tape backup option.
After you complete these steps, the next scheduled backup goes to the remote directory. See the following detailed procedures.
ATTENTION After you configure the remote directory for backup and restore, check your configuration before you back up or restore the database by following the guidelines listed in the section “Test the remote directory backup and restore configuration” on page 944.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 933
January 2008 Back up data
Files created during remote directory backup
The backup process creates the following files.
Before you start
Ensure the remote computer and the network meet the requirements identified in “Requirements for backups,” on page 917.
File Description
blue.dmp Contains the contents of the Blue database.
cbc.dmp Contains the contents of the CBC database.
master.dmp Contains the contents of the Master database.
miginfo.txt Contains configuration details.
rbackup.txt Includes details about the user name, password, and path used when you perform a database backup to a remote directory.
dbseg.txt Contains information about the data and log segments in your database.
dbdvc.txt Contains information about the size and location of your database files.
.
CAUTION
Risk of database restoration error
If you need to restore your database, the restore program looks for the exact file names in the preceding list. If you change the file names for archiving purposes—for example, by adding a date to the name—you must change the names back to their original state before you try to restore the database. Otherwise, the restore process fails.
934 Contact Center Standby Server
Back up data Standard 10.12
Worksheet for setting up a remote directory backup
You must set up accounts, passwords, and a shared directory in preparation for remote directory backups. Create names for these items ahead of time and record them in the following table.
ItemFill in the required information
User name
You must create a name and assign it to two user accounts—one on the network computer and the other on Contact Center Manager Server. The names must be identical on both computers.
User account password
You must create a password and assign it to the two accounts described in the previous step. The passwords must be identical on both computers.
Computer name of the network computer
Obtain and record this name so you have it available when you set up the remote directory backup on the server.
Share name for the remote directory
You must create and assign a share name to the directory on the remote computer. The share name can be the directory name (this is the default in Windows) or a different name.
The share name for the remote directory must not contain any spaces. Spaces in the remote directory name cause errors.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 935
January 2008 Back up data
Prepare the network computer for remote directory backup
When you determine which network computer you want to use for the remote directory backup, you must create a local Windows user account on it, and then create a shared directory to contain the remote backup. Use the following basic steps, along with the documentation that came with the operating system, to correctly set up the user account and shared directory.
The following procedures do not provide detailed steps because they differ depending on the operating system on your network computer.
1 Create a new user account in Windows using the user name and password that you recorded in the worksheet.
a. From the Start menu, choose Programs > Administrative Tools > Computer Management.
b. In the left panel, navigate to Local Users and Groups > Users.
c. Right-click Users and select New User from the shortcut menu.
d. Enter the user account details in the New User window.
936 Contact Center Standby Server
Back up data Standard 10.12
2 Make the user account a member of the Administrators group.
Creating and sharing the remote directory on the network computer
1 On the network computer, create a directory (folder) to contain the database backup. Use the share name you recorded in the worksheet.
Note: The name of the remote directory must not contain any spaces. Spaces in the remote directory name cause errors.
2 Ensure file sharing is enabled on the network computer.
3 Make the directory shared, and assign the share name that you recorded in the worksheet.
4 For the shared directory permissions, grant Full Control access rights to the user account that you created in the previous procedure.
Result: The network computer is now set up for remote directory backups. You must now prepare the server using the following procedures.
5 Record the computer name of the network computer in the worksheet.
Prepare Contact Center Manager Server for remote directory backup
On your Contact Center Manager Server, you must create a local Windows user account that is identical to the one you created on the network computer. You then add the account to the policy Log on as a service. To complete preparation of the server, you type the account information and the path of the remote directory in Contact Center Manager Server and turn off the tape backup option. See the following detailed procedures.
.
CAUTION
Risk of database backup failure
When you create the new user account in Windows, you must clear the check box for User must change password at next logon. If this check box is selected, Standby Server cannot connect to the remote computer.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 937
January 2008 Back up data
Setting up the local Windows user account on Contact Center Manager Server
1 Log on to the Standby Server as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Administrative Tools > Computer Management.
Result: The Computer Management window appears.
3 In the left panel, navigate to Local Users and Groups > Users.
4 Right-click Users and select New User from the shortcut menu.
Result: The New User window appears.
5 In the User Name box, type the same user name you assigned to the account on the network computer.
6 In the Password box, type the same password you assigned to the account on the network computer.
7 In the Confirm Password box, type the password again.
8 Clear the check box for User must change password at next logon.
Note: If you do not remove this check mark, the restore can fail because Contact Center Manager Server cannot access the network computer.
9 Click Create.
10 Click Close.
938 Contact Center Standby Server
Back up data Standard 10.12
11 In the left panel of the Computer Management window, click the Users folder to display its contents in the right panel.
12 In the right panel, right-click the new user you just created, and select Properties.
Result: The Properties window for the user appears.
13 Click the Member Of tab.
14 Click Add.
Result: The Select Groups window appears.
15 In the Name column, click Administrators, and click Add.
Result: The group appears at the bottom of the list.
16 Click OK.
17 When the Member Of tab reappears, click Apply and then click Close.
18 Close all windows that remain open.
Setting up the local security settings
1 On the server, select Start > Administrative Tools > Local Security Policy.
Result: The Local Security Settings window appears.
2 In the left panel, navigate to Local Policies > User Rights Assignment. Click User Rights Assignment to view the Local Security Settings in the right panel.
3 In the right panel, double-click Log on as a service.
Result: The Log on as Service window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 939
January 2008 Back up data
4 Click Add User or Group.
Result: The Select Users or Groups window appears.
5 Click Advanced.
6 Click Find Now.
7 In the Name column, select the user account that you just created, and then click OK.
Result: The account appears in the text box.
8 Close the Local Security Settings window.
940 Contact Center Standby Server
Back up data Standard 10.12
Completing the remote backup settings on Contact Center Manager Server
1 On the server, select Start > Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Database Backup.
Result: The Database Backup Utility window appears.
2 Ensure Network Disk is selected, and click Next.
Result: The configuration window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 941
January 2008 Back up data
3 In the Account box, type the user name you recorded in the worksheet on page 934. This must be the same user name you assigned to the account on both the network computer and the server.
4 In the Password box, type the password you recorded in the worksheet on page 934. This must be the same password you assigned to the account on both the network computer and the server.
5 In the Network Path box, type the network path for the shared directory you created on the network computer. Use the following format:
computername\sharename
Refer to the computer name and share name that you recorded in the worksheet on page 934.
6 Click Next.
Result: Contact Center Manager Server is now set to back up the database from the remote directory on the network computer.
7 If your backup is already scheduled, the system automatically sends the database backup files to the remote directory.
Result: The following window appears.
942 Contact Center Standby Server
Back up data Standard 10.12
8 If your backup is not scheduled, click Start Backup.
Result: The services start, and then the following window appears.
9 To start your backup, skip to step 10; otherwise, click Cancel to save your settings and exit.
10 Click Start Backup.
Result: A DOS window appears showing the progress of the database backup.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 943
January 2008 Back up data
The remote backup process begins. This can take from 30 minutes to 3 hours to complete, depending on the size of your database, the speed of your computer, and network traffic. Leave the DOS window open so you can see the backup completion message.
11 Wait until the completed OK message appears in the DOS window.
12 Press Enter, type quit, and press Enter again.
Result: The following window appears.
13 Click OK.
Result: The backup is complete.
The backup log for your backup is located atD:\Nortel\data\backup\BackupLogs\dbbackup.log.
14 Navigate to D:\Nortel\data\backup\BackupLogs\ and open the file dbbackup.log (with Notepad). If your database backup succeeded, the log contains the following lines of text:
[SERVER MESSAGE]:Backup Server: 3.42.1.1: DUMP is complete (database cbc).
944 Contact Center Standby Server
Back up data Standard 10.12
[SERVER MESSAGE]:Backup Server: 3.42.1.1: DUMP is complete (database blue).
[SERVER MESSAGE]:Backup Server: 3.42.1.1: DUMP is complete (database master).
This database backup log does not have any errors or warnings.
15 Perform one of the following tasks:
If your database backup log contains the text in the previous example, your backup succeeded. Close the log file.
If your database backup log contains any messages or errors, this can indicate a problem with the backup. Navigate to the folder D:\sybase\ASE-12_5\install and open the file backup.log (with Notepad). This file can indicate the source of the problem. Retry the backup and check the backup log again. If the log still contains messages or errors, contact Nortel product support.
Test the remote directory backup and restore configuration
To ensure that you configured the remote directory backup correctly, after you complete the previous configuration procedure, perform the following steps before backing up to, or restoring from, the remote directory. Before a migration, it is important that you perform these steps on both the Active Server (before backing up your database) and the Standby Server (before restoring the database).
Checking the physical connection between the server and the remote PC
1 On the Contact Center Manager Server, use the remote PC computer name to ping the remote PC. This enables you to check the physical network connection between the server and the remote PC.
2 If you cannot ping the remote PC from the server in Contact Center Manager Server, check the remote PC computer name, the DNS configuration, and the physical network connection between the server and the remote PC (for example, the IP address and router configuration).
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 945
January 2008 Back up data
Checking the access to the shared folder
1 On the server, log on to Windows using the local Windows user account that you created on the server. For more information about this account, see “Setting up the local Windows user account on Contact Center Manager Server” on page 937.
2 On the server, temporarily map to the shared folder on the remote PC as a mapped network drive.
3 To check the access level to this mapped folder, on the server, copy any small file (for example, a text file) and paste it into this mapped drive. Then delete this file from the mapped drive.
4 If the system prompts you to type the user name and password for the shared folder, check that the user name and password for the Windows user accounts are synchronized on the server and the remote PC.
5 If you cannot paste the copied file into the shared folder, or delete the file from the shared file, check that the Windows user account is granted Full Control access rights on the remote PC.
6 On the server, unmap the shared folder and log off the server.
Performing a test backupAfter you configure the remote backup, you can schedule a backup and check the results in the backup log file when the backup is complete.
Ensure you perform the test when there is low network traffic.
946 Contact Center Standby Server
Back up data Standard 10.12
Guidelines for third-party backup software
The third-party backup software must meet the requirements listed in this section.
Requirements for third-party backup software
The following requirements apply to third-part backup software:
The third-party backup software must not reduce the hard disk space available to the server and the Windows Server 2003 operating system below the minimum required.
The installation or uninstallation of the third-party backup software must not impact or conflict with the server software (for example, it must not cause .DLL conflicts). If such conflicts are discovered, you might have to rebuild the server.
If the third-party backup software has its own database, it must not impact the database.
The third-party backup software must not interfere with services in any way (for example, causing improper or out-of-sequence shutdowns).
During run-time, the third-party backup software must not degrade the system beyond an average 50 percent CPU utilization.
You must run the third-party backup manually. Do not schedule the third-party backup to run in automatic mode.
If you are using a tape drive for your backups, the third-party backup system can use a dedicated tape drive, or it can share the tape drive used for database backups.
If the third-party backup and the database backup have dedicated tape drives, the tape drive used for the database backup must be configured with the device name “Tape0.”
ATTENTION Services associated with the third-party backup must not run while Contact Center Manager Server is running.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 947
January 2008 Back up data
If the third-party backup and the database backup share a tape drive, the drive must meet the requirements of Contact Center Manager Server.
For backups to a remote directory, the third-party backup must not interfere with the server ports used for network connections by the server.
Before you put the server in operation, perform comprehensive coresidency testing of the server and the third-party backup utility.
Disk imaging is supported.
948 Contact Center Standby Server
Back up data Standard 10.12
Prepare for third-party backups
The customer must define a backup and restore process based on the third-party utility used (for example, Windows backup). This section describes procedures that you must complete before you begin a full backup using a third-party utility. For more information about full backup procedures, refer to the documentation for your third-party utility.
When you perform a full backup, you must perform the following steps in the order listed below. Each step is detailed in the following pages:
1. Stop the database services from running by using the Stop Sybase Services utility.
2. Perform the full backup using the third-party utility of your choice.
3. Start the database services using the Start Sybase Services utility.
4. Start the services using the Startup utility.
Preparing your server for a full backup
1 Stop the database services using the Stop Sybase Services utility as follows:
a. From the Start menu, choose Programs > Sybase > Stop Sybase Services.
b. If the Start/Stop option does not appear on your Standby Server, go to Start > Settings > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services and stop your Sybase services.
Result: The Standby Server Shutdown window appears.
ATTENTION You must shut down the Standby Server Services before you shut down the database services. Failure to do so can result in database corruption.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 949
January 2008 Back up data
c. Click OK.
Result: The utility shuts down the Sybase backup server, monitor server, and the Sybase server. When all services are shut down, the Service Status Log appears.
d. Verify that all services successfully shut down. If you cannot shut down any services, contact Nortel support personnel.
e. After you shut down the services, click Accept to exit the shutdown utility, and then proceed with the full backup.
2 To back up the entire system (for example, if you want to back up all of the operating system files in addition to the database files), then, depending on the backup utility you are using, you may need to use the Services window in the Control Panel to ensure the services listed below are shut down.
Note: Some third-party backup utilities require that you manually shut down the following services. If you do not shut them down as follows, then some Windows files may not be backed up.
Click Start > Settings > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services.
Result: The following services are shown:
Telephony
TCP/IP NetBIOS Helper Service
SNMP Service
Simple TCP/IP Services
Server
Protected Storage
Messenger
License Logging Service
To shut down the services, select the service, and then click Stop.
3 After the services are shutdown, click Close on the Services control panel.
4 Back up the server. You must select the following options before starting the full backup:
verify backup—This ensures that the backup was made successfully.
950 Contact Center Standby Server
Back up data Standard 10.12
back up local registry—A required option to back up all the server configuration details. The third-party backup utility must support registry backups.
Note: You may want to use the compression option (if available) to ensure all the data on the server can be backed up.
The following drives must be backed up:
C:\—Windows operating system, pcAnywhere
D:\—Contact Center Manager Server, SysOps.log file, Sybase executables
all drives greater than and including F:\ - Database drives
Preparing to back up the Replication server
1 From the Start menu choose, Settings > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services.
2 Stop the Sybase REP_<server_name>_RS service.
3 Stop the rest of your Sybase services.
4 Verify that all services successfully shut down. If you cannot shut down any services, contact Nortel support personnel.
5 To back up the entire system (for example, if you want to back up all of the operating system files in addition to the database files), then, depending on the backup utility you are using, you may need to use the Services window in the Control Panel to ensure the services listed below are shut down.
Note: Some third-party backup utilities require that you manually shut down the following services. If you do not shut them down as follows, then some Windows files may not be backed up.
Click Start > Settings > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services.
Result: The following services are shown:
Telephony
ATTENTION You must stop the Sybase Rep_<server_name>_RS service before you stop any other services on your server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 951
January 2008 Back up data
TCP/IP NetBIOS Helper Service
SNMP Service
Simple TCP/IP Services
Server
Protected Storage
Messenger
License Logging Service
To shut down the services, select the service, and then click Stop.
6 After the services are shutdown, click Close on the Services control panel.
7 Back up the server. You must select the following options before starting the full backup:
verify backup—This ensures that the backup was made successfully.
back up local registry—A required option to back up all the server configuration details. The third-party backup utility must support registry backups.
Note: You may want to use the compression option (if available) to ensure all the data on the server can be backed up.
The following drives must be backed up:
C:\—Windows operating system, pcAnywhere
D:\—Contact Center Manager Server, SysOps.log file, Sybase executables
all drives greater than and including F:\ - Database drives
952 Contact Center Standby Server
Back up data Standard 10.12
Performing the backup
1 Start the backup from the third-party utility.
Note: For more information, see the documentation for your third-party utility.
2 When the backup is complete, restart your server.
3 When the server is restarted, restart the database services.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 953
A p p e n d i x D
Restore data
In this chapterOverview 954
Recover a recent backup of the database 955
Restore the database 958
Recover the database with a third-party backup 975
954 Contact Center Standby Server
Restore data Standard 10.12
Overview
A number of recovery methods are available for your system. The method you choose depends on the problem you encounter and the backup data and media available to you.
Before using these recovery procedures, check your regional Contact Center Manager Server technical Web site for updated customer documentation.
The procedures in this section provide instructions to recover a system using a Platform Recovery Disk, a database backup, or both.
ATTENTION If you must restore your Active Server database, first remove the warm standby setup, restore the database, then reconfigure your warm standby setup. If you do not, the restoration fails and you receive a database user login error.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 955
January 2008 Restore data
Recover a recent backup of the database
If you suspect that data in your Contact Center Manager Server (Active or Standby) database is corrupt or if you recently migrated your server, you can restore an existing database backup to the system using the Database Restore utility.
Use one of the following procedures:
“Restoring the database from a tape backup” on page 961
“Restoring the database from a remote directory backup” on page 963
One you restore the database, proceed to the following sections for additional information concerning recent backups.
During the restore process, the connection between the Server Utility and the server is lost, and the services on the server are shut down. After the restore process is finished, restart the system, and reconnect the Server Utility.
Restore a more recently backed-up database
You can restore a more recently backed-up database (4.2 or 5.0) than the database when your new Release 6.0 server is ready to go live. For example, if you upgrade from Contact Center Manager Server Release 4.2 to Release 6.0, but keep the original Release 4.2 server active, when your Release 6.0 server goes live, you can restore a more recently backed-up database. You do not need to perform another migration.
Use the Database Restore utility to restore the database.When the database is restored, the Contact Center Manager Server Database Restore utility automatically launches the Server Setup Configuration Utility. Verify the configuration information, and then complete the configuration process. Running the server configuration repopulates the database with Release 6.0 data.
When you restore a more recently backed-up Release 6.0 database, you do not need to run the Server Setup Configuration Utility again.
956 Contact Center Standby Server
Restore data Standard 10.12
For more information, see “Recover a recent backup of the database” on page 955.
Deal with call statistics during an upgrade
During the upgrade procedure, you must create a backup of your Active Server database. The database backup is an online operation, so the server remains in service during the backup. However, if the contact center continues to respond to calls after the database backup, call statistics recorded after the database backup of the Active Server are missing from the restored database of the new or reconfigured server.
If your server continues to receive calls after the backup, some call statistics and data pegging are missing from the backup. If it is important that all call statistics and data pegging be migrated to Standby Server, take the Active Server offline immediately following the database backup. Ensure that the Active Server remains offline until you install Release 6.0 and successfully migrate the database back to the same server.
If you must transfer all of your call statistics to the Standby Server, Nortel recommends that you complete the following tasks:
1 Stop the HDM service on the live server. The call statistics files are stored in the file system for use on the migrated Standby Server.
2 Create a new database back up of the Active Server.
3 Restore the new database backup onto the Release 6.0 server.
4 Copy the Active Server interval files to the Standby Server.
5 Bring the new Release 6.0 server online. The HDM service on the Standby Server adds the interval file data to the Standby Server database. The call statistics are restored.
ATTENTION Do not perform unsupervised maintenance on the Contact Center Manager Server (Active or Standby). Nortel recommends that the Contact Center Manager Server administrator supervise all maintenance activities on the server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 957
January 2008 Restore data
Perform a Database Integrity Check
Nortel recommends that you perform a Database Integrity Check after you restore your database to ensure the data is not corrupted before you return your system to full service.
958 Contact Center Standby Server
Restore data Standard 10.12
Restore the database
This section contains recovery procedures that are used in more than one recovery scenario. See this section for specific restore procedures that are referenced from other sections in this chapter.
Import database information from a Platform Recovery Disk
This procedure imports database information from a Platform Recovery Disk into your Contact Center Manager Server (Active or Standby).
Importing database information from the Platform Recovery Disk
1 Log on to the server as Administrator or NGenSys.
2 Perform one of the following tasks:
a. If your Platform Recovery Disk is on a floppy disk, insert it into drive A.
b. If your Platform Recovery Disk is in a directory on a remote computer, map a network drive to that directory.
ATTENTION If you must restore your Active Server database, first remove the warm standby setup, restore the database, then reconfigure your warm standby setup. If you do not, the restoration fails and you receive a database user login error.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 959
January 2008 Restore data
3 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Migration.
Result: The Platform Migration Utility window appears.
4 In the Import Platform Recovery Disk section, perform one of the following tasks:
If your Platform Recovery Disk is on a floppy disk:
a. Ensure the drive shown is A:\.
b. Insert the floppy disk into the drive.
If your Platform Recovery Disk is on a remote directory:
a. Click Browse and navigate to the mapped drive for the remote directory.
b. Click the drive, and click OK.
c. Ensure the mapped drive appears in the Platform Migration Utility window.
960 Contact Center Standby Server
Restore data Standard 10.12
5 Click Import.
Result: The system imports the files from your Platform Recovery Disk. A DOS window appears during the import with the text Importing database information. When the import is complete, the following window appears.
6 Click OK.
7 Close the Platform Migration Utility window.
8 Remove the Platform Recovery Disk from the drive.
Restore a system database from tape or from a remote directory
These procedures restore a database backup from either a tape or from a remote directory. Use one of following procedures:
For a list of variables that can affect the speed of your backup and restore, see “Variables affecting backup and restore speed” on page 913.
To see sample time measurements for tape backup and restore, see “Requirements for backups” on page 917.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 961
January 2008 Restore data
Restoring the database from a tape backup
1 Log on to the server as NGenSys.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Standby Server > Database Restore.
Result: The Database Restore Utility window appears.
3 Select Local Tape Drive, and click Next.
4 Insert the tape containing the database backup.
Result: The system first shuts down the Contact Center Manager Server services that you installed. Then the database restore begins. During this time, the Database Restore window remains visible and displays numerous status messages about the progress of the restore.
962 Contact Center Standby Server
Restore data Standard 10.12
5 Wait until the Database Restore Utility window appears.
6 When the tape in the drive stops moving, click Start Restore to begin the database restore process.
Note: A log file is created with the following path name after the database restore is complete: D:\Nortel\data\backup\RestoreLogs\restore.log.
Result: The following window appears.
7 Click Done.
8 Eject the backup tape from the tape drive.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 963
January 2008 Restore data
9 Click OK to exit the Database Restore utility.
Attention: You must wait for the Database Restore Utility window to close. It can seem like there is no activity, but the system must complete its processes and close this window. This can take up to 2 minutes to complete. Do not restart the system.
Restoring the database from a remote directory backup
1 Log on to the system as NGenSys.
2 Ensure that you have a network connection to the computer containing the remote directory backup.
3 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Database Restore.
Result: The Database Restore Utility window appears.
ATTENTION Before you restore the database from a remote directory, check your remote folder configuration by following the guidelines listed in the section “Test the remote directory backup and restore configuration” on page 944.
964 Contact Center Standby Server
Restore data Standard 10.12
4 Select Network Disk, and click Next.
Result: The following window appears.
5 In the Account box, type the account name for the remote backup location.
6 In the Password box, type the password for the remote backup location.
7 In the Network Path box, type the path of the remote backup location.
8 Check that the path is correct.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 965
January 2008 Restore data
9 Click Next.
Result: The following window appears.
10 Click Start Restore to begin the database restore process.
Result: The database restore process begins. This can take 1 to 3 hours, depending on the amount of data and the CPU speed of the server. During this time, the Database Restore Utility window remains in view and displays numerous status messages about the progress of the restore.
Note: The restore can take longer if you store your call-by-call records for longer than the recommended interval.
966 Contact Center Standby Server
Restore data Standard 10.12
11 Wait until the following window appears, indicating that the restore is complete.
Note: A log file with the following path name is created after the database restore is complete: D:\Nortel\data\backup\RestoreLogs\restore.log
12 Click Done.
Result: The following window appears.
13 Click OK to exit the Database Restore utility.
Attention: You must wait for the Database Restore Utility window to close. It can seem as if there is no activity, but the system must complete its processes and close this window.
Nortel recommends that you do not restart the server at this time. You need not restart the server until after you configure the server software and database. Instead, proceed with “Configure your system software and database by importing configuration data from the Platform Recovery Disk” on page 967 to perform a database integrity check.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 967
January 2008 Restore data
Configure your system software and database by importing configuration data from the Platform Recovery Disk
The file MigInfo.txt on your Platform Recovery Disk contains all configuration data for your Active or Standby Contact Center Manager Server. To configure your server software and database, you can import this information directly into the Server Setup Configuration Utility using a command, as described in the following procedure.
Configuring your server software and database by importing configuration data from the Platform Recovery Disk
1 Ensure you are logged on to the server as Administrator or NGenSys.
2 Perform one of the following tasks:
If your Platform Recovery Disk is on a floppy disk, insert it into the floppy drive.
If your Platform Recovery Disk is in a remote directory, map a network drive to the remote directory.
3 From the Start menu, choose Run.
4 Perform one of the following tasks
If your Platform Recovery Disk is on a floppy disk, type d:\nortel\iccm\bin\svrconfig.exe -i -w a:\MigInfo.txt.
If your Platform Recovery Disk is in a remote directory, type d:\nortel\iccm\bin\svrconfig.exe -i -w x:\MigInfo.txt, where x is the letter of the mapped remote directory.
968 Contact Center Standby Server
Restore data Standard 10.12
5 Click OK.
Result: The Customer Information window appears.
This step is the first of several windows in the Setup Configuration Utility in which you enter your system configuration. However, because you imported your Platform Recovery Disk, the data boxes in each window in this utility are already filled with the configuration data of the original system.
6 Check the information in the Customer Information window, and click Next.
7 Check the information in each subsequent window, and then click Next to move through the configuration utility.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 969
January 2008 Restore data
8 When you reach the Site Name window, check the data, and then click Finish.
Result: The Server Setup Configuration Utility window appears. Each tab represents a window that you just viewed. Different tabs appear depending on your configuration.
9 When you are satisfied with the configuration details, click OK.
Result: The following window appears.
970 Contact Center Standby Server
Restore data Standard 10.12
10 Click Yes to continue.
Result: The Server Configuration Utility configures your server using the data you entered. It displays a status for each stage that the configuration passes through.
Note: This process can take 20 to 30 minutes to complete, depending on your system CPU and database size. Do not close any windows during the configuration.
11 Wait until you see the following message.
12 Click OK.
Result: The following window appears.
13 Perform one of the following tasks.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 971
January 2008 Restore data
Click OK to use the Platform Migration Utility to create a Platform Recovery Disk. Proceed to 15.
Result: The following window appears.
Click Cancel. If you click Cancel, remember to use the Platform Migration Utility to create a Platform Recovery Disk when the installation is complete.
Result: The Do you wish to reboot now window appears.
14 Click Yes.
Result: The server reboots. The Nortel Contact Center Management Server Setup Configuration Utility window does not appear.
Note: If you do not want the server to reboot, click No. The window closes.
972 Contact Center Standby Server
Restore data Standard 10.12
15 Click the Utilities tab.
16 In the Create Platform Recovery Disk section, perform one of the following tasks:
To save the Platform Recovery Disk to a floppy disk:
a. Ensure the path shows A:\.
b. Insert a blank floppy disk in drive A.
c. Click Create Disk.
Result: The following message appears.
d. Click OK.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 973
January 2008 Restore data
To save the Platform Recovery Disk to a remote directory:
a. Map a network drive to the remote directory.
Note: The name of the remote directory into which you save the Platform Recovery Disk must not contain any spaces. Spaces in the remote directory name cause errors.
b. Click Browse, and then navigate to the mapped network drive.
c. Select the drive, and click OK.
d. Click Create Disk.
Result: The system creates the Platform Recovery Disk. The following window appears.
e. Click OK.
Note: The system also checks for database segmentation problems. If it finds any problems, it displays a message indicating the type of problem.
If the system finds a database data segmentation overlapping problem, it advises you to contact Nortel customer support before you proceed with the migration procedure. After customer support fixes the problem, you must create a new Platform Recovery Disk before you proceed with the migration.
If the system finds a database log segmentation overlapping problem, you can still use the Platform Recovery Disk that you just created. The system prompts you to shut down the services on the Active Server so it can fix the problem. Follow the on-screen prompt to shut down the services.
17 If you used a floppy disk, remove it from the drive, and ensure it is labeled clearly.
18 Close the Contact Center Manager Server Setup Configuration Utility window.
974 Contact Center Standby Server
Restore data Standard 10.12
19 Store the Platform Recovery Disk in a safe place.
Result: The following message appears.
20 Click OK.
Result: The system automatically restarts.
21 Log on as NGenSys.
Note: It can take several minutes for the desktop to appear.
Result: The MAS Trace Window appears. The server and database configuration is complete, and Contact Center Manager Server is ready for use.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 975
January 2008 Restore data
Recover the database with a third-party backup
Customers must define their own full backup and restore process based on the third-party backup utility of their choice.
You can use a full restore if a catastrophic failure occurs when the latest database backup and the initial system setup data records and database configuration are not available for the reinstallation of the Standby Server or the Replication server.
Do not use a restore from a full backup without reinstalling the Standby Server or Replication server in the following situations:
A full backup tape is not available.
The failed system is replaced with a new system that may have slightly different hardware configuration.
The failed system is replaced with a different platform.
976 Contact Center Standby Server
Restore data Standard 10.12
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 977
A p p e n d i x E
Manage security
In this chapterMicrosoft security guidelines 978
Password guidelines 979
Change Nortel user account passwords 980
Protect pcAnywhere settings 983
Check server events for suspicious activity 985
Configure Data Execution Prevention 986
Use Security Configuration Wizard and enable Windows Firewall 989
Activate the Nortel Contact Center Security Template 1019
978 Contact Center Standby Server
Manage security Standard 10.12
Microsoft security guidelines
You must ensure that you are running your server with the most current Microsoft patches.
Review the Nortel Contact Center Portfolio Service Packs Compatibility and Security Hotfixes Applicability List (available from Nortel Technical Support Web site) for the list of applicable Microsoft security hotfixes that should be applied.
Backup the entire Contact Center Multimedia server (operating system, server software, and multimedia database), then shut down all Contact Center Multimedia services before you apply any Microsoft security hotfixes using the Microsoft instructions.
Apply Microsoft security updates on a timely basis.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 979
January 2008 Manage security
Password guidelines
This section provides guidelines for selecting passwords for Contact Center Manager Server.
Password format
Write down any new passwords and store them in a secure place for future reference. Passwords are case-sensitive.
New passwords must be:
unique
alphanumeric (they must contain at least one number)
a minimum of six characters
not nouns
Examplexyd45fst
When to change passwords
Change passwords at the following times:
during the initial system setup after the operating system is installed
at regular intervals for maximum security
if you experience trouble logging on to Windows
if server software is reinstalled (the default accounts and passwords are recreated, so passwords must be changed)
If you require support from Nortel or your distributor, you must tell them the new passwords.
980 Contact Center Standby Server
Manage security Standard 10.12
Change Nortel user account passwords
To maintain system security, change passwords regularly and store them in a secure location.
To make changes to the Administrator or any other Windows passwords, see the documentation provided with your operating system.
Default accounts and passwords
The following Windows accounts are created on the server during the installation procedure:
NGenSys
NGenDist
NGenDesign
Changing the NGenDist, NGenDesign, or NGenSys passwords
You are not required to change the NGenSys password. If you change the NGenSys password, you must apply the same password change to the Meridian Application Server (MAS) Backup and Restore service.
1 Log on to the server as Administrator.
2 Click Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Computer Management.
Result: The Computer Management window appears.
ATTENTION The on-site installer is instructed to change all default passwords as part of the on-site installation procedures.
You can change all passwords with the procedures in this section. Nortel recommends that you change all passwords regularly to maintain system security.
If server software is reinstalled, the default accounts and passwords are recreated and passwords must be changed.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 981
January 2008 Manage security
3 Click Local users and groups, and then click Users.
Result: The Computer Management window displays a list of available user accounts, including NGenDist and NGenDesign.
4 Right-click NGenDist.
5 Click Set Password.
Result: The Set Password window appears.
6 Click Proceed.
Result: The Properties window appears.
7 In the Password box, type the new password.
Note: Ensure that you use a password that contains a combination of numbers and letters (see “Password format” on page 979).
8 In the Confirm Password box, type the same password entered in the Password box.
9 Click OK.
Result: The following window appears.
10 Click OK
11 Repeat steps 4 to 10 for NGenDesign and NGenSys.
12 Select Exit to save changes.
982 Contact Center Standby Server
Manage security Standard 10.12
13 Record these passwords and store them in a secure place away from the server.
If you have changed the NGenSys password, continue with the following procedure.
Changing the NGenSys password for MAS Backup and Restore service
This procedure is required only if you change the Windows user account password for NGenSys.
1 Click Start > Settings > Control Panel > Administrative Tools.
2 Click Services.
Result: The Services window appears.
3 Scroll to MAS Backup and Restore service, and then select it.
4 From the Action menu, choose Properties.
Result: The Service window appears.
5 Click the Log On tab, and then fill in the Password and Confirm Password boxes with the current NGenSys password.
Note: Use the same password you assigned to NGenSys in “Changing the NGenDist, NGenDesign, or NGenSys passwords” on page 980.
6 Click OK.
ATTENTION When you finish changing passwords, remember to log on as NGenSys. You must be logged on as NGenSys to monitor and manage the server.
ATTENTION When you are finished, remember to log on as NGenSys. You must be logged on as NGenSys to monitor and manage the server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 983
January 2008 Manage security
Protect pcAnywhere settings
This section describes how to create a password to protect the pcAnywhere settings on the server.
Adding a password to protect pcAnywhere settings
1 Log on to the server as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Symantec pcAnywhere.
Result: pcAnywhere starts.
3 If necessary, select Be a Host PC.
4 Click Network.
Note: Do not double-click the icon or you will begin a pcAnywhere session.
5 From the File menu, choose Properties.
Result: The pcAnywhere HOST Properties window appears.
ATTENTION If you select the option Required to modify properties, you must enter the password each time a setting is changed. You should record the password and keep a copy of it in a safe place. If you forget the password, you cannot change any settings.
984 Contact Center Standby Server
Manage security Standard 10.12
6 Click the Protect Item tab.
Result: The following property page appears.
7 In the Password box, type a password that protects the pcAnywhere network settings.
8 In the Confirm password box, type the password again.
9 Check the appropriate check boxes for the level of security you desire.
10 Click Apply to save the changes.
11 Click OK.
ATTENTION When you are finished, remember to log on as NGenSys. You must be logged on as NGenSys to monitor and manage the server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 985
January 2008 Manage security
Check server events for suspicious activity
Security auditing is enabled on the server. Suspicious actions by a user are logged as event code 40593 in the Event Browser in the Server Utility window on the client, and in the security log in the Windows Event Viewer. The severity of the event depends on the severity of the condition that caused the event. If the severity is Information, the event does not appear in the Alarm Monitor.
986 Contact Center Standby Server
Manage security Standard 10.12
Configure Data Execution Prevention
Windows Server 2003 with the latest supported service pack contains security enhancements that impact Contact Center Manager Administration.
Data Execution Prevention (DEP) is a set of hardware and software technologies that perform additional checks on memory to protect against malicious code exploitation. In the latest supported service pack for Windows Server 2003, DEP is enforced by both hardware and software.
For Contact Center Manager Administration to function correctly, you must change the default DEP settings to be turned on for essential Windows programs and services only.
Configuring Data Execution Prevention (DEP) on Contact Center Manager Administration
Nortel recommends that you perform this procedure before you install Contact Center Manager Administration.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 987
January 2008 Manage security
1 Log on to Windows as Administrator.
2 Click Start > Control Panel > System.
Result: The System Properties window appears.
3 Click the Advanced tab.
988 Contact Center Standby Server
Manage security Standard 10.12
4 In the Performance section of the window, click Settings.
Result: The Performance Options window appears.
5 In the Performance Options window, click the Data Execution Prevention tab.
Result: The Data Execution Prevention tab appears.
6 On the Data Execution Prevention tab, select Turn on DEP for essential Windows programs and services only.
7 Click OK.
Result: A warning window appears notifying that you must restart the computer for changes to take effect.
8 Click OK.
Result: The System Properties window reappears.
9 Click OK to exit the System Properties window.
10 Restart the server to activate the change to the Data Execution Prevention settings.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 989
January 2008 Manage security
Use Security Configuration Wizard and enable Windows Firewall
Windows Server 2003 with the latest supported service pack contains new security enhancements that impact Contact Center Manager Administration.
Security Configuration Wizard allows you to configure server security based on existing server roles. The wizard identifies and stops services which are not required to perform existing server roles, reducing Windows 2003 exposure to attack.
Windows Firewall is the successor to Internet Connection Firewall. Windows Firewall is a host (or software) firewall around each client and server in the network. You must ensure that Windows Firewall is enabled so that it can protect your network systems.
Nortel recommends that you install and run the Security Configuration Wizard on the Contact Center Manager Administration server after Contact Center Manager Administration is successfully installed and configured (including the required multicast and unicast configurations).
Ensuring Security Configuration Wizard is installed on your server
Depending on your version of the service pack for Windows 2003, the Security Configuration Wizard may or may not be installed by default on the operating system. Perform the following procedure to ensure Security Configuration Wizard is installed.
1 Click Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.
Result: The Add or Remove programs window appears.
2 In the left pane, click Add/Remove Windows Components.
Result: The Windows Components Wizard appears.
3 In the list of components, find Security Configuration Wizard.
990 Contact Center Standby Server
Manage security Standard 10.12
4 If the check box next to Security Configuration Wizard is selected, then Security Configuration Wizard is installed, and you can proceed to “Using Security Configuration Wizard to secure the server” on page 990. If the check box next to Security Configuration Wizard is not selected, proceed to step 5.
5 In the list of components, select Security Configuration Wizard.
6 Click Next.
Result: The Configuring Components window appears, followed by the Completing the Windows Components Wizard.
7 Click Finish.
8 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
Using Security Configuration Wizard to secure the server
1 Log on to Windows as Administrator.
2 Click Start > Administrative Tools > Security Configuration Wizard.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 991
January 2008 Manage security
Note: Security Configuration Wizard is not installed by default in all versions of Windows service packs. To install the Security Configuration Wizard, see “Ensuring Security Configuration Wizard is installed on your server” on page 989.
Result: The Welcome to Security Configuration Wizard window appears.
992 Contact Center Standby Server
Manage security Standard 10.12
3 Click Next.
Result: The Configuration Action window appears.
4 Select Create a new security policy.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 993
January 2008 Manage security
5 Click Next.
Result: The Select Server window appears.
6 In the Server field, ensure your local computer name is selected.
7 Click Next.
Result: A progress bar appears indicating that the system is processing.
994 Contact Center Standby Server
Manage security Standard 10.12
8 When processing is complete, click Next.
Result: The Role-Based Server Configuration window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 995
January 2008 Manage security
9 Click Next.
Result: The Select Server Roles window appears.
10 In the list of installed roles, ensure the File server role is selected.
996 Contact Center Standby Server
Manage security Standard 10.12
11 Click Next.
Result: The Select Client Features window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 997
January 2008 Manage security
12 Click Next.
Result: The Select Administration and Other Options window appears.
13 In the list of installed options, ensure the following options are selected:
Task Scheduler
14 Click Next.
Result: The Select Additional Services window appears.
15 In the list of additional services that the selected server requires, ensure the following services are selected:
CC License Manager
CC Replication Service
CCMS ASM_Service
CCMS Audit_Service
CCMS Control Service
CCMS DBNotifier_Service
CCMS EB_Service
998 Contact Center Standby Server
Manage security Standard 10.12
CCMS ES_Service
CCMS HDC_Service
CCMS HDM_Service
CCMS Host Application Integration
CCMS IS_Service
CCMS MAS Backup and Restore
CCMS MAS Configuration Manager
CCMS MAS Event Scheduler
CCMS MAS Fault Manager
CCMS MAS LinkHandler Port #2
CCMS MAS OM Server
CCMS MAS Security
CCMS MAS Daemon
CCMS MAS Service Manager
CCMS MAS Time Service
CCMS MLSM_Service
CCMS NBMSM_Service (This service is not selected by default. Select it if integration with Contact Center Multimedia 6.0 application is enabled.)
CCMS NBNM_Service
CCMS NBTSM_Service
CCMS NCCOAM_Service (This service is not select by default. Select it if the server is a NCC server.)
CCMS NDLOAM_Service
CCMS NINCCAudit_Service (This service is deselected by default. Select it if the server is a NCC server.)
CCMS NITSM_Service
CCMS OAM_Service
CCMS OAMCMF_Service (This service is deselected by default. Select it if Integration for Contact Center Multimedia 6.0 application is enabled.)
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 999
January 2008 Manage security
CCMS RDC_Service
CCMS RSM_Service
CCMS SDMCA_Service
CCMS SDP_Service
CCMS SIP_Service (This service is deselected by default. Select it if integration with SIP application is enabled.)
CCMS TFA_Service
CCMS TFABRIDGE_Service
CCMS TFE Bridge Connector
CCMS TFE_Service
CCMS UNE_Service (This service is deselected by default. Select it if integration with Universal Networking application is enabled.)
CCMS VSM_Service
pcAnywhere Host Service (This service exists if pcAnywhere is installed.)
Sybase BCKServer_<computername>_BS
Sybase MONServer_<computername>_MS
Sybase SQLServer_<computername>
Sybase SPServer_<computername>_XP
SybProtect
TAO NT Naming Service
1000 Contact Center Standby Server
Manage security Standard 10.12
16 Click Next.
Result: The Handling Unspecified Services window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1001
January 2008 Manage security
17 Click Next.
Result: The Confirm Service Changes window appears.
1002 Contact Center Standby Server
Manage security Standard 10.12
18 Click Next.
Result: The Network Security window appears.
19 On the Network Security window, ensure that the check box next to Skip this section is cleared.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1003
January 2008 Manage security
20 Click Next.
Result: The Open Ports and Approve Applications window appears.
21 In the list of ports that the selected server requires, ensure the following ports are selected:
Port 135 (RPC endpoint mapper/DCOM)
Port 137 (NetBIOS name service)
Port 139 (NetBIOS session service)
Port 161 (SNMP) (if customer SNMP NMS is connected to monitor CCMS SNMP traps)
Port 161 (SNMP Traps) (if customer SNMP NMS is connected to monitor CCMS SNMP traps)
Port 445 (SMB)
Port 3389 (Remote Desktop Protocol) (if Remote Desktop Connection is used as a remote access connection tool)
Ports used by CCMS ASM_Service
Ports used by CCMS Audit_Service
Ports used by Sybase BCKServer_<computername>_BS
1004 Contact Center Standby Server
Manage security Standard 10.12
Ports used by CCMS Control Service (This may not be selected as the default.)
Ports used by CCMS TFABRIDGE_Service
Ports used by CCMS TFA_Service
Ports used by CCMS MLSM_Service
Ports used by Sybase MONServer_<computername>_MS (This may not be selected as the default.)
Ports used by CCMS MAS LinkHandler Port #2
Ports used by CCMS MAS Backup and Restore
Ports used by CCMS MAS Configuration
Ports used by CCMS MAS Fault Manager
Ports used by CCMS NBNM_Service
Ports used by CCMS MAS OM Server
Ports used by CCMS MAS Event Scheduler
Ports used by CCMS MAS Service Daemon (This may not be selected as the default)
Ports used by CCMS MAS Service Manager (This may not be selected as the default.)
Ports used by CCMS MAS Security
Ports used by CCMS MAS Time Service (This may not be selected as the default.)
Ports used by CCMS NBTSM_Service (This may not be selected as the default.)
Ports used by CCMS DBNotifier_Service
Ports used by CCMS SDP_Service
Ports used by CCMS EB_Service
Ports used by CCMS ES_Service
Ports used by CCMS Host Application Integration
Ports used by CCMS HDC_Service
Ports used by CCMS HDM_Service
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1005
January 2008 Manage security
Ports used by CCMS IS_service
Ports used by CCMS NDLOAM_Service (This may not be selected as the default.)
Ports used by CCMS OAM_Service
Ports used by CCMS RDC_Service
Ports used by CC Replication Service (This may not be selected as the default if Replication service is not configured and enabled prior to running SCW.)
Ports used by CCMS RSM_Service
Ports used by CCMS SDMCA_Service
Ports used by CCMS TFE_Service
Ports used by CCMS TFE Bridge Connector
Ports used by CCMS NITSM_Service
Ports used by pcAnywhere Host Service
Ports used by TAO NT Naming Service
Ports used by CC License Manager
Ports used by SybProtect
Ports used by System RPC application
Ports used by VSM_Service
Ports used by Sybase XPServer_<computername>_XP
1006 Contact Center Standby Server
Manage security Standard 10.12
22 Click Next.
Result: The Confirm Port Configuration window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1007
January 2008 Manage security
23 Click Next.
Result: The Registry Settings window appears.
24 On the Registry Settings window, ensure that the check box next to Skip this section is cleared.
1008 Contact Center Standby Server
Manage security Standard 10.12
25 Click Next.
Result: The Require SMB Security Signature window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1009
January 2008 Manage security
26 Click Next.
Result: The Outbound Authentication Methods windows appears.
1010 Contact Center Standby Server
Manage security Standard 10.12
27 Click Next.
Result: The Inbound Authentication Methods window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1011
January 2008 Manage security
28 Click Next.
Result: The Registry Settings Summary window appears.
1012 Contact Center Standby Server
Manage security Standard 10.12
29 Click Next.
Result: The Audit Policy window appears.
30 On the Audit Policy window, ensure that the check box next to Skip this section is cleared.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1013
January 2008 Manage security
31 Click Next.
Result: The System Audit Policy window appears.
1014 Contact Center Standby Server
Manage security Standard 10.12
32 Click Next.
Result: The Audit Policy Summary window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1015
January 2008 Manage security
33 Click Next.
Result: The Save Security Policy window appears.
1016 Contact Center Standby Server
Manage security Standard 10.12
34 Click Next.
Result: The Security Policy File name window appears.
35 In the Security policy file name field, append a file name to the default policy directory (for example, CCMS 6.0 SCW Policy).
36 Type a short description in the Description box.
37 Click Next.
Result: The Security Configuration Wizard Warning window appears warning that you must reboot the server after applying the policy.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1017
January 2008 Manage security
38 Click OK.
Result: The Apply Security Policy window appears.
39 Select Apply now.
40 Click Next.
Result: Security Configuration Wizard applies the security policy.
1018 Contact Center Standby Server
Manage security Standard 10.12
41 When the progress bar shows Application complete, click Next.
Result: The Completing the Security Configuration Wizard window appears.
42 Click Finish.
43 Restart your server to activate the new security policy.
Additional Windows Firewall manual exceptions
Security Configuration Wizard configures Windows Firewall by scanning all currently running services and acquired ports. Some Contact Center Manager utilities (for example, TraceControl utility) do not run at all times and therefore, may not be added to the Windows Firewall when you run Security Configuration Wizard. Nortel recommends that you manually add the program to the Windows Firewall exception list if you are prompted when you launch the program.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1019
January 2008 Manage security
Activate the Nortel Contact Center Security Template
Nortel Contact Center 6.0 is provides a set of predefined Windows Server 2003 Security Templates that you can deploy quickly to secure the Nortel Contact Center 6.0 suite of servers.
You can activate the Nortel Contact Center security template locally or as a group policy in an Active Directory in which the Standby Server is located. You can deploy the Security Template either before or after you install the server software.
If you activate the Nortel Contact Center Security Template locally (on the server on which you installed Standby Server), you must select the applicable Security Template for the Nortel Contact Center application server and download the selected template from the Meridian PEP Library Web site (http://www.nortel.com/espl) to the local disk drive. When the file is downloaded, you can import and configure the Security Template using the Microsoft Security Configuration and Analysis utility.
For more information on activating and deactivating the template, see the Nortel Contact Center 6.0 Security Templates User Guide located on the Partner Information Web site.
Activating the Nortel Contact Center Security Template
1 Log on to the server as Administrator.
2 On the Start menu, click Run.
1020 Contact Center Standby Server
Manage security Standard 10.12
3 Type mmc, and then click OK.
Result: The Console1 window appears.
4 From the File menu, choose Add/Remove Snapin.
Result: The Add/Remove Snap-in window appears.
5 Click Add.
6 The following window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1021
January 2008 Manage security
7 Select Security Configuration and Analysis, and then click Add.
Result: Security Configuration and Analysis appears in the Add/Remove Snap-in window.
8 Click OK.
9 On the Console window, right-click Security Configuration and Analysis.
1022 Contact Center Standby Server
Manage security Standard 10.12
10 Click Open Database.
Result: The following window appears.
11 In the File Name box, enter a new database name. For example CCMS 6.0 Security Template.
12 Click Open.
Result: The Import Template window appears.
13 Select CCMS Security Template.inf, and then click Open.
14 On the Console window, right-click Security Configuration and Analysis.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1023
January 2008 Manage security
15 Click Analyze Computer Now.
Result: The Perform Analysis window appears.
Note: The default location for the Security Template log is C:\Documents and Setttings\Administrator\My Documents\Security\Logs\. If you want to change the location in which the Security Template log is stored, do so now.
16 Click OK.
17 Right-click Security Configuration and Analysis, and then choose Configure Computer Now...
Result: The Configure System window appears.
Note: The default location for the configuration log file is C:\Documents and Setttings\Administrator\My Documents\Security\Logs\. If you want to change the location in which the Security Template log is stored, do so now
18 Click OK.
19 Restart the server to activate the new security policy and configuration.
1024 Contact Center Standby Server
Manage security Standard 10.12
Applying the Security Template in a network domain
You can apply the Nortel Contact Center Security Templates in a network domain environment by importing the template into a group policy object of an organizational unit (OU) where the Contact Center 6.0 server is a member.
1 Open Group Policy Management Console (GPMC).
2 In the console tree, expand the domain or OU where you want to import the Security Template.
3 Right-click the Group Policy object that you want to edit, and then click Edit.
4 On the Group Policy Object Editor console tree, click Computer Configuration.
5 Click Windows Settings, and then right-click Security Settings.
6 Click Import Policy.
7 Select the Contact Center 6.0 Security Template that you want to import, and then click Open.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1025
A p p e n d i x F
Work with alarms and events
In this chapterOverview 1026
Change the Windows EventLog size 1028
Use the Windows Event Viewer 1030
Configure SNMP on the server 1031
1026 Standby Server
Work with alarms and events Standard 10.12
Overview
You can use two tools to view events that occur on your Standby Server:
the Event Browser on the client (supplied with Standby Server)
the Event Viewer on the server (supplied with the Windows operating system)
This chapter provides guidelines for viewing events with the Windows Event Viewer on the server, and describes recommended sizes for the event logs. It also explains how to configure the Windows Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) on the server.
For details about viewing events through the Event Browser on the client, refer to the Contact Center Manager Administrator’s Guide.
Events
Events are log entries that record activities on Standby Server, such as
sending or receiving messages
opening or closing applications
errors
Some events are for information purposes only, while others can indicate problems. Events are categorized by severity.
Event severity
Events are assigned a default severity of Information, Minor, Major, or Critical. The Alarm Monitor does not report Information-level events.
InformationThese events indicate that something noteworthy has happened on the system, but do not mean that there is a problem. For example, an information-level event can indicate that a service has started or stopped. These events appear in the Event Browser but not in the Alarm Monitor.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1027
January 2008 Work with alarms and events
MinorThese events indicate that a non-service-affecting fault condition exists and that you must take corrective action to prevent a more serious fault. For example, a minor event is generated when the file system is 90 percent full.
MajorThese events indicate that a service-affecting condition has developed and an urgent corrective action is required. The event condition can cause severe degradation in server performance, and you must restore full capacity. For example, a major event is generated when the file system is 100 percent full.
CriticalThese events indicate that a service-affecting condition has occurred and an immediate corrective action is required. Critical events are reported when a component is completely out of service and you must take immediate action to restore it. For example, a critical event is generated when the file system crashes.
Simple Network Management Protocol
Standby Server also supports Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) traps. You can use SNMP to send events to a Network Management System (NMS) on your network.
1028 Standby Server
Work with alarms and events Standard 10.12
Change the Windows EventLog size
The Windows EventLog resides on the server and stores a record of all events that occur on the server. When you install Standby Server, the installation program sets certain default sizes for the various Windows log files. If you change the size settings, the results affect the entire server.
Event wraparound
The EventLog size is fixed. It does not increase in size as new events are added to the log. When the log is full and a new event is generated, the server removes the oldest event report in the log and replaces that report with the newest one.
Change the size of the log files
If you reduce the size of the event logs, the server can store fewer events. If you increase the size of the event logs, you reduce the amount of available disk space on the server, which may slow response times for retrieving events from the Event Browser.
Default event log sizeDuring a Contact Center Manager Server installation, the log settings are set to the values in the following table.
.
CAUTION
Risk of data lossOnly qualified technicians should make changes to these settings.
Log name Size Event log wrapping
Application Log 8192 KB Overwrite events as needed.
System Log 512 KB Overwrite events as needed.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1029
January 2008 Work with alarms and events
Make changes to the default Application Log sizeApplication events, such as Standby Server events, are stored in the Application Log. You can adjust the size of the Application Log to suit the size of your contact center. When you change the Application Log size, you also change the number of Standby Server events that are stored.
Nortel recommends the following size settings for the Application Log:
For a small contact center, set the log size to 512 KB.
For a medium-sized contact center, set the log size to 6015 KB or greater, depending on the number of days you want to keep the events.
For a large contact center, set the value at 10 048 KB or greater, depending on the number of days you want to keep events.
Do not change the event log wrapping settings.
For information about how to adjust the size of Windows event logs, refer to the documentation supplied with the Windows operating system.
Security Log 512 KB Overwrite events as needed.
Log name Size Event log wrapping
1030 Standby Server
Work with alarms and events Standard 10.12
Use the Windows Event Viewer
Most information provided by the Windows Event Viewer on the server is also accessible through the Event Browser on the server. The following type of information is not available on the client:
database events (from the Application Log)
MAS debug events (from the Application Log)
When to use
Use the Windows Event Viewer on the server to view information that you cannot view through the Event Browser on the client. For more information about the Event Viewer, refer to the documentation supplied with the Windows operating system.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1031
January 2008 Work with alarms and events
Configure SNMP on the server
Windows provides a Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) agent, which runs as a service on Standby Server. You can use this service to forward events to a Network Management System (NMS) on your network. To do so, you must do the following tasks:
Configure the Windows SNMP service on the server (refer to “Configuring the Windows SNMP service to forward traps to an NMS” on page 1031).
Configure the NMS (refer to “Configure the NMS” on page 1033).
Override event filtering for individual events
When you configure the server, you choose the types of events to be forwarded to the NMS. For example, you may choose to forward only Unknown and Critical events. However, you may also be interested in tracking a Minor event, such as 41553. If you configure the server to forward all Minor events, a significant amount of traffic is generated on your Nortel server subnet. To avoid this, but still track event 41553, you can use the Event Preferences feature. This feature allows you to temporarily assign event 41553 a priority of Critical. After you do so, the event is automatically forwarded to the NMS.
For detailed instructions, refer to the Contact Center Manager Administrator’s Guide.
Configuring the Windows SNMP service to forward traps to an NMS
1 Log on to the server as NGenSys.
2 From the Start menu, choose Programs > Administrative Tools > Services.
Result: The Services window appears.
3 From the list of Services, select the SNMP Service.
4 Click Action > Properties.
Result: The SNMP Service Properties window appears.
1032 Standby Server
Work with alarms and events Standard 10.12
5 Click the Traps tab.
6 If no community name is defined, in the Community name box, type public.
7 Click Add to list.
8 Click Add to add the IP address of the NMS to which the server sends traps.
Result: The SNMP Service Configuration window appears.
9 Type the IP address of the NMS.
10 Click Add.
Result: The SNMP Service Configuration window closes.
11 In the SNMP Service Properties window, click OK.
Result: The SNMP Service Properties window closes.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1033
January 2008 Work with alarms and events
12 In the Services window, right-click the SNMP Trap Service.
13 From the pop-up menu, click Start.
Result: The SNMP Trap Service starts.
14 Close the Services window.
Configure the NMS
After you configure the server, you must configure the NMS to receive and interpret traps (including identification to the NMS, and the origin and format of the Standby Server traps). To do so, you must load or compile the Management Information Block (MIB) files in the NMS.
The following MIB files describe the format of the traps generated by the server:
nt-ref.mib (MIB-II)
nbflt.mib (NGen MIB)
You can use these files on the NMS system. They are SNMP v1 MIB files.
The files are available in the following locations:
on the Server Application DVD, in the data folder (E:\CCMS\data)
on the Standby Server, in the path D:\nortel\data
For more information about configuring your NMS, refer to your NMS documentation.
Format of the NGen MIB
Contact Center Manager Server supports the Windows standard MIB-II. In addition, it provides its own MIB, the NGen MIB.
Converting Windows Events to SNMP traps
Note: Nortel only supports evntwin to trap database replication events.
1 Log on to Standby Server as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose Run.
1034 Standby Server
Work with alarms and events Standard 10.12
3 Type evntwin.exe, and then click OK.
4 The Event To Trap Translator window appears.
5 Select the Custom.
6 Click Edit.
7 In the Event sources pane, expand Application.
8 Select the Database Replication event source. The Database Replication Windows events are listed in the Events pane.
9 Select one or more events from the list.
10 Click Add.
Result: The Properties window appears.
11 Modify the event count threshold as required. Click OK.
12 The events you selected appear in the Events to be translated to traps pane.
13 Exit the Event To Trap Translator.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1035
A p p e n d i x G
Use server features
In this chapterOverview 1036
Database Expansion utility 1037
1036 Standby Server
Use server features Standard 10.12
Overview
Contact Center Manager Server utilities are automatically installed when you install Contact Center Manager Server. Use these utilities to perform system operations not available on the Contact Center Manager Server client.
You can access the server utilities from the Windows Start menu by choosing All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server.
Utility name and function overview
The following table lists the utility names and functions.
Utility name Function
Database Expansion utility Expand the size of your Contact Center Manager Server database.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1037
January 2008 Use server features
Database Expansion utility
Use the Database Expansion utility to expand the size of your Contact Center Manager Server database by:
expanding it into a new partition
expanding it into additional space on an enlarged partition following an upgrade or platform migration
You can also use the Database Expansion utility to reserve new partitions for non-database use.
Before you begin
Ensure that you create a Platform Recovery Disk and back up the database.
If there is a hardware problem with an added partition or a segmentation problem in the database, a database expansion will fail, and you will not be able to recover your system without a Platform Recovery Disk and a database backup.
For more information about creating a Platform Recovery Disk and a database backup, see Appendix C, “Back up data.”
Expand the database in Contact Center Manager Standby Server
If you expand the database to make use of a larger partition in Contact Center Manager Standby Server, you must perform the database expansion on the Active Server then rebuild the warm standby.
1 On the Replication Server, remove the warm standby configuration using the following steps:
a. On the Start menu, click Program > Nortel Contact Center > Replication Server > Replication Server Management.
Result: The Replication Server Management dialog box appears.
1038 Standby Server
Use server features Standard 10.12
b. Select the servers that are being replicated, and then click Remove.
Result: The Confirm Remove dialog box appears.
Note: If you get an error, Failed to start the Active CCMM Server Monitor, during the process to remove the warm standby configuration, restart the CC Rep Service on the Replication Server.
c. Click Yes.
Result: The replication between the Active Server and the Standby Server is stopped. The Warm Standby configuration is removed. The contact center data is intact on both servers.
d. Click Done.
2 On the Active Server, click Start > All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Database Expansion Utility.
Result: The Database expansion utility window appears.
In this example, the Database expansion utility has detected that partition G is usable for expansion and has assumed that you want to use it. The system assigns the value ADD in the Usage field to the partition G. (It shows the existing database partition, F, as IN-USE.)
Note: If you have added a partition into which you do not want your database to expand (for example, if you want to reserve a partition for trace files or third-party full backup images), you must tell the Database expansion utility not to use this partition. To do this, click the check box beside Custom select drives for the database expansion, select the partition letter you want to change from the list, and click “Do Not Create Database.” This marks the drive letter as unavailable, and the Usage field changes to “---”.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1039
January 2008 Use server features
3 To expand the database to partition G, click Apply Changes.
Result: A series of windows appear stating that services are shutting down.
When the expansion is complete, the following window appears.
4 Click OK.
Result: The Database Expansion utility closes.
1040 Standby Server
Use server features Standard 10.12
5 Remove the Contact Center Manager Server software from the Standby server using the steps in Appendix H, “Uninstallation.”
6 Migrate the Active Server database to the Standby Server using the steps in Step 16. “Migrate the Active CCMS to the Standby Server” on page 334.
7 Set up the warm standby configuration on the Replication Server using the steps in Step 32. “Set up the Warm Standby configuration on the Replication Server” on page 472.
Usage column entry meanings
Each line in the Usage column displays one of the following entries.
Usage entry Meaning
IN-USE The drive is currently in use for the database.
EXPAND The drive is currently in use, but you have indicated that you want to expand the database to take advantage of more disk space.
This entry is only necessary when performing an upgrade or a platform migration, and one or more database partitions on the new server is larger than the original database partition. During an upgrade or a platform migration, database expansion is not automatic. If you want to expand the database to take advantage of extra space, do it manually using this utility.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1041
January 2008 Use server features
ADD The drive is currently not in use, but you want to use it. When you add a new partition to the server, the system automatically assigns it the value ADD.
--- The drive is currently not in use because you have reserved it for something other than database use. This drive is not selected for database expansion, but you can select it if it:
has at least 2.1 GB of free space
is formatted as NTFS
Usage entry Meaning
1042 Standby Server
Use server features Standard 10.12
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1043
A p p e n d i x H
Uninstallation
In this chapterUninstall the database and Contact Center Manager Server 1044
Reinstall the database software 1057
Uninstall License Manger 1058
Uninstall Server Utility 1062
1044 Contact Center Standby Server
Uninstallation Standard 10.12
Uninstall the database and Contact Center Manager Server
You can uninstall the Contact Center Manager Server and database if you want to use your server for another purpose or if you need to reinstall the Contact Center Manager Server as part of a recovery procedure.
The Contact Center Manager Server installation consists of the following:
Contact Center Manager Server software
Service Updates (SU) and Service Update Supplements (SUS)
Contact Center Manager Server database file-system
Sybase software
Options and procedures for uninstalling the database and Contact Center Manager Server
Use the following table to determine the types of uninstallation procedures that are available, what they do, and which procedures in this section you must follow to accomplish your goals.
For information about how uninstallation procedures relate to various recovery scenarios, see “Overview” on page 954.
Type of uninstallation What it does Procedures to follow
Uninstall SU and SUSs
Remove patches or Service Updates
Complete the procedure “Removing patches (SU and SUSs) installed on the server” on page 1046
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1045
Complete uninstallation
Removes all Contact Center Manager Server, Sybase, and database files and folders
Complete the following procedures in this order:
1. Uninstall any SU and SUSs. Follow the procedure in “Removing patches (SU and SUSs) installed on the server,” on page 1046.
2. Uninstall the server software. Follow the procedure in “Perform a complete uninstallation” on page 1048.
Database removal (excluding Sybase)
Removes all database folders and files on all installed database drives
Does not remove
Sybase ASE 12.5 software
Contact Center Manager Server software files, folders, registries, services, and shortcuts
Complete the procedure “Remove the Contact Center Manager Server database,” on page 1050.
Sybase removal Removes Sybase files and folders
Complete the procedure “Uninstall the Sybase ASE 12.5” on page 1054.
Type of uninstallation What it does Procedures to follow
1046 Contact Center Standby Server
Uninstallation Standard 10.12
Removing patches (SU and SUSs) installed on the server
This procedure removes a Service Update (SU) and Service Update Supplements (SUS) from Contact Center Manager Server.
1 Log on to the server as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Shutdown.Result: The Contact Center Manager Server Shutdown utility window appears.
3 Click OK.
Result: The utility shuts down all of the Standby Server services. The Service Status Log window appears. This log displays any services that failed to shut down. Click Recheck to refresh the status of the services.
If any services are still running:
a. From the Start menu, choose Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services to display the Services window.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1047
January 2008 Uninstallation
b. Select any service with a status of Started.
c. Right-button click and select Stop from the menu.
Result: Status column is blank for this service.
d. Repeat until all services are stopped.
Result: Status column is blank for all services.
e. Close the Services window.
f. Click Recheck to update the status log.
If you cannot shut down the Standby Server services, you can use serman man to set the services to Manual so that when you restart the server the Standby Server services do not restart.
From the Start menu, choose Run.
Type D:\nortel\iccm\bin\serman man, and then click OK.
Standby Server services are set to Manual. When the server is restarted, the Standby Server services will not start automatically.
If you type D:\nortel\iccm\bin\serman auto, and then click OK, you can change the services back to Automatic.
4 After all services on the Contact Center Manager Server are shut down, click Accept on the Server Status Log to exit the utility.
1048 Contact Center Standby Server
Uninstallation Standard 10.12
Perform a complete uninstallation
This procedure removes the Contact Center Manager Server files, folders, registries, services, database files, and Sybase files and folders.
Performing a complete uninstallationDo not log on as NGenSys. When you uninstall the software, you remove the NGenSys account, and you may encounter problems.
1 Log on to the server as Administrator.
2 Uninstall any patches that are installed on the server.
For instructions, see “Removing patches (SU and SUSs) installed on the server” on page 1046. If you plan to reinstall your server, take note of the patches you uninstall so you can reinstall them later.
3 From the Start menu, choose Control Panel > Add Remove Programs.Result: The Add or Remove Programs window appears.
4 Select Contact Center Manager Server.
5 Click Remove.
Result: A window appears prompting you to confirm the Remove action.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1049
January 2008 Uninstallation
6 Click Yes.
Result: The Contact Center Manager Server window appears, displaying the progress of the uninstallation.
When the uninstall is complete, the Add or Remove Programs window reappears. This may take a few seconds.
7 Verify that Contact Center Manager Server does not appear in this window.
8 Close all open windows, and then restart the server.
Result: The software is uninstalled.
9 Check drive D to ensure that the D:\Nortel and D:\Sybase directories were removed. If they were not removed, delete the directories and their contents.
Note: You do not have to remove the D:\Sybase_old directory. However, if you choose to remove this directory, you must stop the SNMP service first before deleting the directory.
1050 Contact Center Standby Server
Uninstallation Standard 10.12
Remove the Contact Center Manager Server database
This procedure removes all database folders and files on all installed database drives. It does not remove Sybase ASE 12.5.
Removing the Contact Center Manager Server database
1 Log on to the server as NGenSys or Administrator.
2 Shut down all services on the server.
3 Close all windows and exit all applications.
4 From the Start menu, choose Control Panel > Add Remove Programs.Result: The Add or Remove Programs window appears.
5 Select Contact Center Manager Server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1051
January 2008 Uninstallation
6 Click Change.
Result: The Contact Center Manager Server - InstallShield Wizard window appears.
7 Click Next.
Result: A window appears showing the three Contact Center Manager Server components.
1052 Contact Center Standby Server
Uninstallation Standard 10.12
8 Select Database File-system, and then from the list select This feature will not be available.
9 Click Next.
Result: The program maintenance program searches for the original installation media.
If the installation media is found, then program maintenance continues at the next step.
If the installation media is not found, then a browse window is displayed:
a. Browse and select the installation media.
b. Select OK.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1053
January 2008 Uninstallation
10 If the installation DVD is located, then uninstallation continues.
Result: A window appears showing that the system is ready to modify the program.
11 Click Begin.
Result: A progress indicator appears.
12 When the uninstallation is complete, click Close to exit the Add or Remove Programs window, and restart the server computer.
Note: Do not bypass this restart or you may encounter problems with the remaining steps in this procedure.
13 After the server reboots, log on to the server as Administrator.
14 Perform the following tasks to ensure all the database folders and files on the database partitions are removed:
a. Open Windows Explorer, and navigate to the F partition (first database partition).
b. Delete all files or folders in the database partitions.
c. If you have additional database partitions (G, H, I, and so on), repeat steps a and b for each partition.
15 Close Windows Explorer.
Result: The database is removed.
1054 Contact Center Standby Server
Uninstallation Standard 10.12
Uninstall the Sybase ASE 12.5
This procedure removes the Sybase ASE 12.5 software.
Uninstalling the Sybase ASE 12.5
1 Log on to the server as NGenSys or Administrator.
2 Shut down all services on the server.
3 Close all windows and exit all applications.
4 From the Start menu, choose Control Panel > Add Remove Programs.Result: The Add or Remove Programs window appears.
5 Select Contact Center Manager Server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1055
January 2008 Uninstallation
6 Click Change.
Result: The Contact Center Manager Server - InstallShield Wizard window appears.
7 Click Next.
Result: A window appears showing the three Contact Center Manager Server components.
1056 Contact Center Standby Server
Uninstallation Standard 10.12
8 Select the Sybase Software component, and then select This feature will not be available.
9 Click Next.
Result: A window appears showing that the system is ready to modify the program.
10 Click Begin.
Result: A progress indicator appears.
11 When the uninstallation is complete, click Close to exit the Add or Remove Programs window, and restart the server computer.
Note: Do not bypass this restart or you may encounter problems with the remaining steps in this procedure.
12 Log on to the server as NGenSys or Administrator.
13 Check to ensure that the D:\Sybase directory was removed. If not, delete the directory and its contents.
14 Close Windows Explorer.
Result: Sybase is now uninstalled.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1057
January 2008 Uninstallation
Reinstall the database software
You can reinstall the server software only on a server that was installed properly. For example, if you have a working server that suddenly has problems in the database software, you can try to uninstall and then reinstall the database software.
You cannot downgrade features (that is, remove features or reduce the number of purchased agents) with this procedure.
For more information about reinstalling the database software, see the following section in Chapter , “Restore data.” and “Restore the database” on page 958
ATTENTION If License Manager does not start after reinstall, uninstall and reinstall License Manager. Refer to “Licensing” on page 51 for more information.
1058 Contact Center Standby Server
Uninstallation Standard 10.12
Uninstall License Manger
Use this procedure to uninstall the License Manager. The procedure consists of several subprocedures:
Remove each SUS from last to first in Patch Manager
Remove SU in Patch Manager
Remove License Manager in Add or Remove Programs
For information on reinstalling License Manager, see “Install License Manager” on page 66.
Remove each SUS from last to first in Patch Manager
1 Log on to the Contact Center Manager Server as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Shutdown.
Result: The Contact Center - Manager Server Shutdown utility window appears.
ATTENTION If License Manager is removed, all Contact Center servers enter the license grace period. A new License Manager will be required for servers to continue to operate after grace period ends. Contact Nortel Technical Support for further assistance.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1059
January 2008 Uninstallation
3 Click OK.
Result: The utility shuts down all services. The Service Status Log window appears. This log displays any services that failed to shut down. Click Recheck to refresh the service status.
If any services are still running:
a. From the Start menu, choose Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services to display the Services window.
b. Select any CCMS service with a status of Started.
c. Right-button click and select Stop from the menu.
Result: Status column is blank for this service.
d. Repeat until all services are stopped.
Result: Status column is blank for all services.
1060 Contact Center Standby Server
Uninstallation Standard 10.12
e. Close the Services window.
f. Click Recheck to update the status log.
4 After all Contact Center services on the Contact Center Manager Server are shut down, click Accept on the Server Status Log to exit the utility and close the Server Status window.
5 Log onto the server where License Manager is installed as Administrator.
6 Proceed to “Remove SU in Patch Manager” on page 1060.
Remove SU in Patch Manager
1 From the Start menu, choose All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > License Manager > Patch Viewer.Result: The Patch Manager - Server 6.0 window appears, displaying the SU and SUSs installed.
2 View the Read Me file for each SU and SUS.
3 Select an SU or SUS and click Read Me.
Result: The Read Me file appears.
4 Read the section Uninstallation Instructions for special uninstallation instructions.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1061
January 2008 Uninstallation
5 Close the Read Me file.
6 Click Uninstall Last to remove the last SU or SUS applied.
Attention: Uninstall SU and SUS in last to first order.
Result: A caution window appears.
7 Click Yes to uninstall the patch.
Result: When uninstallation is completed, the Patch Manager - Server 6.0 window appears.
8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 until all SU and SUS are removed.
9 Click Exit to close the Patch Manager - Server 6.0 window:
Note: You must restart the system to ensure that all the changes take effect. However, if you plan to perform a complete uninstallation, you do not have to restart the system.
10 Proceed to “Remove License Manager in Add or Remove Programs” on page 1061.
Remove License Manager in Add or Remove Programs
1 From the Start menu, choose Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.
Result: The Add or Remove Programs dialog box appears.
2 Select License Manager.
3 Click Remove.
Result: A window appears prompting you to confirm the Remove action.
4 Click Yes.
Result: The License Manager window appears, displaying the progress of the uninstallation.
When the uninstall is complete, the Add or Remove Programs window reappears. This may take a few seconds.
5 Verify that License Manager does not appear in this window.
6 Close all open windows, and then restart the server.
Result: The software is uninstalled.
1062 Contact Center Standby Server
Uninstallation Standard 10.12
Uninstall Server Utility
Use this procedure to uninstall the Server Utility. The procedure consists of several subprocedures:
Remove each SUS from last to first in Patch Manager
Remove SU in Patch Manager
Remove Server Utility in Add or Remove Programs
For information on reinstalling Server Utility, see Step 8. “Install the Server Utility” on page 176.
Remove each SUS from last to first in Patch Manager
1 Log on to the Contact Center Manager Server as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Shutdown.Result: The Contact Center - Manager Server Shutdown utility window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1063
January 2008 Uninstallation
3 Click OK.
Result: The utility shuts down all services. The Service Status Log window appears. This log displays any services that failed to shut down. Click Recheck to refresh the service status.
If any services are still running:
a. From the Start menu, choose Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services to display the Services window.
b. Select any CCMS service with a status of Started.
c. Right-button click and select Stop from the menu.
Result: Status column is blank for this service.
d. Repeat until all services are stopped.
Result: Status column is blank for all services.
1064 Contact Center Standby Server
Uninstallation Standard 10.12
e. Close the Services window.
f. Click Recheck to update the status log.
4 After all Contact Center services on the Contact Center Manager Server are shut down, click Accept on the Server Status Log to exit the utility and close the Server Status window.
5 Log onto the server where License Manager is installed as Administrator.
6 Proceed to “Remove SU in Patch Manager” on page 1060.
Remove SU in Patch Manager
1 From the Start menu, choose All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Server Utility > Patch Manager.
Result: The Patch Manager - Server 6.0 window appears, displaying the SU and SUSs installed.
2 View the Read Me file for each SU and SUS.
3 Select an SU or SUS and click Read Me.
Result: The Read Me file appears.
4 Read the section Uninstallation Instructions for special uninstallation instructions.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1065
January 2008 Uninstallation
5 Close the Read Me file.
6 Click Uninstall Last to remove the last SU or SUS applied.
Attention: Uninstall SU and SUS in last to first order.
Result: A caution window appears.
7 Click Yes to uninstall the patch.
Result: When uninstallation is completed, the Patch Manager - Server 6.0 window appears.
8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 until all SU and SUS are removed.
9 Click Exit to close the Patch Manager - Server 6.0 window:
Note: You must restart the system to ensure that all the changes take effect. However, if you plan to perform a complete uninstallation, you do not have to restart the system.
10 Proceed to “Remove Server Utility in Add or Remove Programs” on page 1065.
Remove Server Utility in Add or Remove Programs
1 From the Start menu, choose Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.
Result: The Add or Remove Programs dialog box appears.
2 Select Server Utility.
3 Click Remove.
Result: A window appears prompting you to confirm the Remove action.
4 Click Yes.
Result: The Server Utility window appears, displaying the progress of the uninstallation.
When the uninstall is complete, the Add or Remove Programs window reappears. This may take a few seconds.
5 Verify that Server Utility does not appear in this window.
6 Close all open windows, and then restart the server.
Result: The software is uninstalled.
1066 Contact Center Standby Server
Uninstallation Standard 10.12
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1067
A p p e n d i x I
Reserved Standby Server names
In this chapterReserved words 1068
1068 Standby Server
Reserved Standby Server names Standard 10.12
Reserved words
The following table provides a list of Replication Server reserved words
abort action activate active
add admin _af after
all allow alter always_rep
always_replicate and ap article
articles _apd append applied
_ar as assign at
before begin _bf bg
changed _ch check ci
class _cm columns commit
configure connect connection connections
debug define definition deliver
description disconnect distribute distribution
distributor _dr drop drop_repdef
_ds dsi_suspended dump enable
error exec execute _fi
first for from function
get grant _ha hastext
holdlock ignore in incrementally
internal_use_only into installjava _instj
_isbinary _isb _jar key
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1069
January 2008 Reserved Standby Server names
language large last load
log logical loss maintenance
map marker materialization message
_mbf min_before minimal min_row
move _mr name named
_ne never_rep new next
no no_password none not
notrep nowait npw _nr
_nu null nullable of
off on only open_xact
or output overwrite owner
parameters parent partition passthru
password primary public publication
purge queue queues _rc
rebuild reconfigure recover recovery
reject remove repfunc replay
rep_if_changed replicate replicate_if_changed replication
resume retry revoke _rf
_rl rollback route row
rpc rsrpc scan search
segment select send sendallxacts
seq server set shutdown
site size skip source
1070 Standby Server
Reserved Standby Server names Standard 10.12
All keywords and identifiers beginning with rs_ are also reserved.
sqlddl standby starting string
subscribe subscription suspend suspension
switch sysadmin sys_sp system
table tables textcol textlen
_tl _tn to _tp
tpinit tpnull _tr trace
tran transaction transfer truncate
truncation twosave update use
user username using validate
verify vers wait warmstdb
_wh where with without
writetext _yd yielding zerolen
_zl
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1071
A p p e n d i x J
Change the names or IP addresses of servers
In this appendixOverview 1072
Change the Contact Center Manager Server name 1073
Change the Contact Center Manager Server IP address 1087
Change the Contact Center Manager Standby Server name 1104
Change the Contact Center Manager Standby server IP address 1124
Change the co-resident server name 1148
Change the co-resident server IP address 1171
Change the Contact Center Manager Administration server name 1182
Change the Contact Center Manager Administration server IP address 1199
Change the Communication Control Toolkit server name 1206
Change the Communication Control Toolkit IP address 1216
Change the Contact Center Multimedia server name 1220
Change the Contact Center Multimedia IP address 1232
Change the Contact Center Multimedia Standby server name 1239
1072 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
Overview
Contact Center 6.0 includes many server software applications that control the routing, handling, and reporting of contacts. This chapter describes the procedures required to change the computer name or IP address on each server in the Contact Center 6.0 suite.
If you change the name or IP address of one server software application, you must update the other server applications in your contact center with the new information.
Your contact center can include the following set of server software applications, depending on your licensed features:
Contact Center Manager Server
Contact Center License Manager server
Contact Center Manager Standby Server (and Replication Server)
Contact Center Manager Administration server
Communication Control Toolkit server
Contact Center Multimedia server
Contact Center Multimedia Standby server
You can install one or more server software applications on the same server.
ATTENTIONIf your servers are all on a network, you can use a Domain Name Service (DNS) server to resolve name and IP address translations for your servers. If you do not use a DNS in your network, you must manually update the HOSTS file on every server in your network. This chapter provides the instructions for both a DNS and a non-DNS network. Ensure you follow the instructions appropriate for your network configuration.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1073
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
Change the Contact Center Manager Server name
You can change the Contact Center Manager Server name if the new server name meets the following requirements:
The name cannot be the same as any other computer or domain name in the network.
The name must contain 6 to 15 characters (A through Z, 0 through 9).
The first character of the name must be alphabetical.
No other characters are allowed. For example, the name cannot include any underscores (_).
Hyphens (-) are not permitted in the Contact Center Manager Server name.
After you change the Contact Center Manager Server name, you must update the other servers in the Contact Center suite to ensure the servers work together.
If Contact Center Manager Server and Contact Center Manager Administration are installed on the same server, see “Change the co-resident server name” on page 1148.
Complete the following tasks described in this section:
1. Change the Contact Center Manager Server name within the operating system of Contact Center Manager Server.
2. If you have a Domain Name Service (DNS) server in your network, update the DNS with the new server name of the Standby Server.
3. On the Contact Center Manager Administration server, update the server HOSTS file, if required, and configure the new Contact Center Manager Server name properties.
4. Synchronize the name on the operating system with the Contact Center Manager Server name.
5. On the Communication Control Toolkit server, update the HOSTS file, if required, and configure the Content Management Framework for the new Contact Center Manager Server name.
1074 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
6. On the Contact Center Multimedia server, update the HOSTS file, if required. Also update the server settings with the new Contact Center Manager Server name, and License Manager server, if required.
Changing the Contact Center Manager Server name on the operating system
1 On the Contact Center Manager Server, select Start > Control Panel > System.
2 Click the Computer Name tab.
3 Click Change.
4 Enter the new server name.
5 Click OK.
Result: The system prompts you to restart the server.
6 Click Yes.
Result: The server restarts.
Updating the Domain Name Service server
If you configure a Domain Name Service (DNS) server for name resolution in your network, you must contact your local network prime to update the DNS with the new computer name.
To verify that the new IP address is up to date on the DNS, use the ping <server name> DOS command with the new server name to confirm that the system responds with the corresponding IP address.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1075
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
Synchronizing the operating system name with the Contact Center Manager Server name
1 Log on to the Contact Center Manager Server as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Computer Name Sync.Result: The Contact Center Manager Server Computer Name Synchronization Utility dialog box appears.
3 Click OK.
Result: The utility compares the server name with the database server name. If the names match, continue with step 5. If the names do not match, the following message appears.
1076 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
4 Click OK.
Result: The utility shuts down the Contact Center Manager Server services and then synchronizes the server name with the database server name. When the process is complete, the following message appears.
5 Click OK.
Result: The following dialog box appears.
6 Click OK.
7 Restart the server.
Updating the Contact Center Manager Administration server
On the Contact Center Manager Administration server, after you change the Contact Center Manager Server name, you must update the HOSTS file if you do not have a DNS server. You must also configure the new server name in Contact Center Manager Administration.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1077
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on the Contact Center Manager Administration server with the new computer name. If you do have a DNS server, continue with “Changing the server name in the Administration tool” on page 1078.
1 On the Contact Center Manager Administration server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory: <x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor. The HOSTS file consists of a list of IP addresses followed by a server name. The HOSTS file in the following figure is a sample and does not indicate exactly how the HOSTS file is configured.
3 Update the file to reflect the new server name of the Contact Center Manager Server.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
1078 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
Changing the server name in the Administration toolYou must update the Configuration component in Contact Center Manager Administration with the new Contact Center Manager Server name.
1 Log on to the Contact Center Manager Administration server as the webadmin user.
2 Launch the Configuration component.
3 In the left pane, right-click the Contact Center Manager Server name that you are changing.
4 Click Edit Properties.
Result: The server name, IP address, logon ID, and password boxes are enabled.
5 Enter the new details and click Submit.
Updating the Communication Control Toolkit server
On the Communication Control Toolkit server, after you change the Contact Center Manager Server name, you must update the HOSTS file if you do not have a DNS server. You must also configure the Contact Management Framework with the new server name.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1079
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on Communication Control Toolkit server with the new computer name. If you do have a DNS server, proceed with “Configuring the Contact Management Framework settings” on page 1079.
1 On the Communication Control Toolkit server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory: <x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor.
3 Update the file to reflect the new server name of the Contact Center Manager Server.
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
Configuring the Contact Management Framework settingsUpdate the Contact Management Framework component in Communication Control Toolkit with the new Contact Center Manager Server name.
1 Log on to the Communication Control Toolkit server.
2 Open the NCCT 6.0 Console by clicking Start > All Programs > Nortel > Communication Control Toolkit > NCCT 6.0 Console.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
1080 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
3 Expand NCCT Admin.
4 Double-click CCT Server in the right pane of the NCCT 6.0 Console.
Result: The CCT Server Properties dialog box appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1081
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
5 Click the CMF Configuration tab.
Result: The CMF Configuration page appears.
6 In the CCMS Server Name box, type the new name of the Contact Center Manager Server.
7 Click Apply to save the Contact Management Framework settings.
8 Click OK to close the window.
9 Restart the services on the Communication Control Toolkit server by performing the following steps:
a. Log on to the Communication Control Toolkit server as Administrator.
b. On the NCCT 6.0 Console, expand NCCT Maintenance.
c. In the left pane, click Services.
1082 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
d. In the right pane of the NCCT 6.0 Console, double-click Services.
Result: The Services dialog box appears.
e. Click to stop the services.
f. Click to restart the services.
g. The services are restarted.
Updating the Contact Center Multimedia server
On the Contact Center Multimedia server, after you change the Contact Center Manager Server name, you must update the HOSTS file if you do not have a DNS server and then configure the server settings in the Multimedia Administrator application.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1083
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on the Contact Center Multimedia server with the new Contact Center Manager Server name. If you do have a DNS server, proceed with “Configuring the server settings” on page 1083.
1 On the Contact Center Multimedia server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory: <x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor.
3 Update the file to reflect the new server name of the Contact Center Manager Server.
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
Configuring the server settingsYou must update the server settings in the Contact Center Multimedia Administrator with the new Contact Center Manager Server name and then restart the Multimedia services.
1 Log on to the Contact Center Multimedia server.
2 Log on to the Contact Center Multimedia Administrator using an administration user ID and password.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
1084 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
3 In the Contact Center Multimedia Administrator window, expand Contact Center Multimedia.
4 Expand General Administration.
5 Double-click Server Settings.
Result: The Server Settings dialog box appears.
6 Click Contact Center Manager Server to select it.
7 Click Edit.
Result: The Server Properties dialog box appears.
8 In the Server Name box, change the name of the Contact Center Manager Server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1085
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
9 Click Save.
Result: A warning appears describing potential errors for changing this server.
10 Click OK.
11 If the License Manager server is installed on the same server as Contact Center Manager Server, in the Server Settings window, click Contact Center License Server.
12 Click Edit.
Result: The Server Properties dialog box appears.
13 In the Server Name box, change the name of the Contact Center License Manager server.
14 If you have a backup Contact Center License Manager server, type the name in the Backup Server box.
15 Click Save.
Result: A warning appears describing potential errors for changing this server. Click OK to accept.
16 Restart the Multimedia services using the following steps:
a. On the Start menu, click All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Multimedia Server > CCMM Services Control.
Result: The CCMM Service Control window appears.
1086 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
b. Click Stop All.
c. Click Start All.
d. Click Exit to close the CCMM Service Control window.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1087
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
Change the Contact Center Manager Server IP address
This section describes how to change the Contact Center Manager Server IP address of a Nortel server subnet and an ELAN subnet.
If Contact Center Manager Server and Contact Center Manager Administration is installed on the same server, see “Change the co-resident server IP address” on page 1171.
Nortel server subnetIf you are changing the IP address of a Nortel server subnet, you must complete the following tasks:
1. Change the Contact Center Manager Server IP address on the Contact Center Manager Server.
2. Update the Contact Center Manager Server IP address in the Server Configuration Utility.
3. If you have a Domain Name Service (DNS) server in your network, update the DNS with the IP address of Contact Center Manager Server and License Manager.
4. If you are using a Network Control Center, on the Network Control Center, update the Contact Center Manager Server IP address.
5. On the Contact Center Manager Administration server, update the HOSTS file, if required, and configure the Contact Center Manager Server IP address.
6. On the Communication Control Toolkit server, update the HOSTS file, if required, the license information, the TAPI settings and restart the services.
7. On the Contact Center Multimedia server, update the HOSTS file, if required.
1088 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
ELAN subnetIf you are changing the IP address of an ELAN subnet card, you must change the ELAN subnet IP address on the Contact Center Manager Server. See “Changing the ELAN subnet IP address on the Contact Center Manager Server” on page 1102.
Changing the Nortel server subnet IP address in the operating system
Complete the following procedure if you change the Nortel server subnet IP address.
1 Log on to the Contact Center Manager Server.
2 From the Start menu, select Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Shutdown.
Result: A dialog box appears prompting you to shut down services.
3 Click OK.
Result: The services shut down.
4 Click Accept.
5 From the Start menu, select Control Panel.
6 Right-click Network Connections.
7 Right-click the LAN connection of the Nortel server subnet network interface card, and then click Properties.
8 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and then click Properties.
9 Enter the new IP address, and then click OK.
10 In the Properties window, click Close.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1089
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
Configure the Contact Center Manager Server with the new IP address
1 From the Start menu, choose All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Server Setup Configuration.
Result: The following dialog box appears. This dialog box remains open for 20 to 30 seconds.
If you have a co-resident License Manager, an Information dialog box appears.
2 If the Information dialog box appears, click Continue.
Result: The Server Setup Configuration Utility initializes.
1090 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
3 Click the Local Area Network IP tab.
4 From the IP Address list, select the new Nortel server subnet IP address.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1091
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
5 If the License Manager server is installed with Contact Center Manager Server, click the License Manager tab.
6 Verify that the Primary License Manager IP Address is the new Contact Center Manager Server IP Address.
7 Click OK.
8 Click Yes to start the Server Setup Configuration Utility.
Result: The Server Setup Configuration Utility starts. This takes 10 to 15 minutes to complete. A message box confirms the configuration is complete.
9 Click OK.
Result: The system prompts you to restart the server.
10 Click Yes.
1092 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
Updating the Domain Name Service server
If you configure a Domain Name Service (DNS) server for name resolution in your network, you must contact your local network prime to update the DNS with the new IP address of the Contact Center Manager Server.
To verify that the new IP address is up to date on the DNS, use the ping <server name> DOS command with the server name to confirm that the system responds with the corresponding IP address.
Updating the Network Control Center server
If you have a network of Contact Center Manager Servers connected to a Network Control Center server, you must update the IP address for the Contact Center Manager Server on the Network Control Center server.
1 On the Network Control Center server, from the Start menu, select Run.
2 In the Open box, type nbconfig -admin.
ATTENTIONConsult your network administrator to ensure your DNS is updated with the new IP address of your Standby Server. If you do not have a DNS server in your network, you must update the hosts file on the servers as described in the following steps to reflect this change.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1093
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
3 Press Enter.
Result: The Nbconfig dialog box appears.
4 Click the Site Table tab.
5 On the Site Table tab, select the site name and click Edit.
Result: The Edit Site dialog box appears.
6 In the CLAN IP Address box, type the new IP address.
7 Click OK.
8 On the Nbconfig dialog box, click Verify.
Result: The Network Control Center server synchronizes with the Contact Center Manager Server and updates the IP address.
1094 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
9 On the Nbconfig dialog box, click OK.
10 Verify that the correct IP address appears in the Site Table tab.
11 Click OK to close all windows.
Updating the Contact Center Manager Administration server
On the Contact Center Manager Administration server, after you change the Contact Center Manager Server IP address, you must update the HOSTS file if you do not have a DNS server and configure the new IP address in Contact Center Manager Administration.
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on the Contact Center Manager Administration server with the new IP address. If you do have a DNS server, continue with “Changing the Contact Center Manager Administration server” on page 1095.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1095
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
1 On the Contact Center Manager Administration server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory: <x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor. The HOSTS file consists of a list of IP addresses followed by a server name. The HOSTS file in the following figure is a sample and does not indicate exactly how the HOSTS file is configured.
3 Update the file to reflect the new IP address of the Contact Center Manager Server.
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
Changing the Contact Center Manager Administration serverUpdate the IP address of the Contact Center Manager Server in Contact Center Manager Administration.
1096 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
1 Log on to the Contact Center Manager Administration server as the webadmin user.
2 Open the Configuration component.
3 In the left pane, right-click the name of the updated Contact Center Manager Server.
4 Click Edit Properties.
5 In the IP Address box, type the new IP address.
6 Click Submit.
7 Click Launchpad > Logout to exit.
Changing the License Manager IP address on Contact Center Manager AdministrationIf the License Manager server is installed on the same server as Contact Center Manager Server, use this procedure to modify the primary or secondary License Manager server IP address.
1 Log on to the Contact Center Manager Administration server.
2 Click Start > All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Administration > Configuration.
Result: The Nortel Networks Applications Configuration window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1097
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
3 In the right pane, click the LM Service Configuration icon.
Result: The LM Service – Configuration Setup dialog box appears.
4 In the Primary License Manager Server's IP Address box, type the new IP address.
5 Click OK to submit the information.
Result: The Configuration Setup Completed dialog box appears.
6 Click OK.
Result: A message box appears, prompting you to restart the License Manager service.
7 Click Yes to restart the License Manager service.
Result: A message box appears telling you that the License Manager service has restarted.
8 Click OK.
9 Click File > Exit to close the window.
1098 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
Updating the Communication Control Toolkit server
On the Communication Control Toolkit server, after you change the Contact Center Manager Server IP address, you must update the HOSTS file if you do not have a DNS server then update the License Manager IP address, configure TAPI, and restart all Communication Control Toolkit services.
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on the Communication Control Toolkit server with the new IP address. If you do have a DNS server, proceed with “Updating the Communication Control Toolkit license” on page 1099.
1 On the Communication Control Toolkit server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory: <x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor. The HOSTS file consists of a list of IP addresses followed by a server name.
3 Update the file to reflect the new IP address of the Contact Center Manager Server.
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1099
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
Updating the Communication Control Toolkit licenseIf the License Manager server is co-resident with the Contact Center Manager Server, use the following procedure to configure the License Manager IP address for the Communication Control Toolkit server.
1 Log on to the Communication Control Toolkit server.
2 Open the NCCT 6.0 Console by clicking Start > All Programs > Nortel > Communication Control Toolkit > NCCT 6.0 Console.
3 Expand NCCT Admin.
4 In the right pane of the NCCT 6.0 Console, double-click CCT Server.
Result: The CCT Server Properties dialog box appears.
1100 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
5 Click the Licensing tab.
Result: The Licensing page appears.
6 Under Primary License Manager Server, in the IP Address box, type the new IP address.
7 Click File > Exit to close the NCCT 6.0 Console.
If prompted, save the Console settings.
Changing the TAPI SP host address settingIf your Communication Control Toolkit server Telephony Application Programming Interface (TAPI) points to your Contact Center Manager Server, change the IP address in the TAPI Meridian 1 configuration.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1101
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
1 From the Start menu, select All Programs > Nortel > Symposium TAPI Provider > Configure Database.
Result: The Symposium TAPI SP for Meridian 1 Configuration window appears.
2 Click the Meridian 1 Host tab.
3 In the Host Address box, type the new Nortel server subnet IP address for the Contact Center Manager Server.
4 Click OK.
Restart all Communication Control Toolkit servicesRestart all services, including Telephony, ACDProxy, and all Communication Control Toolkit services.
1 From the Start menu, select All Programs > Nortel > Communication Control Toolkit > NCCT 6.0 Console.
2 Expand NCCT Maintenance.
3 Select Services.
4 In the right pane, double-click Services.
Result: The Services Properties dialog box appears.
5 Click Restart All.
6 Click OK.
7 Click File > Exit to close the NCCT 6.0 Console.
If prompted, save the Console settings.
Updating the Contact Center Multimedia server
On the Contact Center Multimedia server, after you change the Contact Center Manager Server IP address, you must update the HOSTS file if you do not have a DNS server.
1102 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on the Contact Center Multimedia server with the new IP address. If you do have a DNS server, updating your Contact Center suite is complete.
1 On the Contact Center Multimedia server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory: <x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor. The HOSTS file consists of a list of IP addresses followed by a server name.
3 Update the file to reflect the new IP address of the Contact Center Manager Server.
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
Changing the ELAN subnet IP address on the Contact Center Manager Server
Complete the following procedure if you change the ELAN subnet IP address.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1103
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
1 Log on to the Contact Center Manager Server.
2 From the Start menu, select Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Shutdown.
Result: A dialog box appears prompting you to shut down services.
3 Click OK.
Result: The services shut down.
4 Click Accept.
5 From the Start menu, choose Control Panel.
6 Right-click Network Connections.
7 Right-click the LAN connection on the ELAN subnet network interface card, and then click Properties.
8 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and then click Properties.
9 Enter the new IP address, and then click OK.
10 On the Properties window, click Close.
11 From the Start menu, select All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Server Setup Configuration.
12 Click the Local Area Network IP tab.
13 On the IP Address list, select the new ELAN IP address.
14 Click OK.
15 Click Yes to start the Server Setup Configuration Utility.
Result: The Server Setup Configuration Utility launches. This takes 10 to 15 minutes to complete. A dialog box confirms the configuration is complete.
16 Click OK.
Result: The system prompts you to restart the server.
17 Click Yes.
1104 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
Change the Contact Center Manager Standby Server name
This section describes how to change the Contact Center Manager Standby server name. Because the Contact Center Manager Standby Server software uses three servers, you can change the name on one or more separate servers. For example, you can do one of the following:
change the Active Server name
change the Standby Server name
change the Replication Server name
change the Active Server, Standby Server, and Replication Server name
If you change the name of any of the Contact Center Manager Standby servers, you do not have to disable the replication process.
If you change the Active Server name, the Standby Server name, or the Replication Server name, you must update the Replication Server name on all servers.
Changing the Active Server name
To change the Active Server name, complete the following procedure.
1 On the Replication Server, remove the warm standby configuration on the Replication Server using the following steps:
a. On the Start menu, click Program > Nortel Contact Center > Replication Server > Replication Server Management.
Result: The Replication Server Management dialog box appears.
b. Select the servers that are being replicated, and then click Remove.
Result: The Confirm Remove dialog box appears.
c. Click Yes.
Result: The replication between the Active Server and the Standby Server is stopped. The Warm Standby configuration is removed. The contact center data is intact on both servers.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1105
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
d. Click Done.
2 On the Active Server, change the Active Server name using the following steps:
a. On the Active Server, select Start > Control Panel > System.
b. Click the Computer Name tab.
c. Click Change.
d. Enter the new server name.
e. Click OK.
Result: The system prompts you to restart the server.
f. Click Yes.
Result: The server restarts.
3 On the Active Server, update the Active Server name on all of the other servers using the procedures in “Changing the Contact Center Manager Server name” on page 1111.
4 Restart the Active Server.
5 Ensure that you can ping the Replication Server.
6 On the Replication Server, recreate the warm standby configuration on the Replication Server with the new Active Server IP address using the following steps:
a. Click Start > Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Replication Server > Replication Server Management.
Result: The Replication Server Management dialog box appears.
b. Click Create.
Result: The Warm Standby Servers dialog box appears.
c. In the Primary CCMS box, type the name and Nortel server subnet IP address for the Primary Server.
d. In the Secondary CCMS box, type the name and Nortel server subnet IP address for the Secondary Server, and click OK.
Result: The Warm Standby configuration takes several minutes. At the end of the process, the Initialize Standby CCMS Database dialog box appears.
1106 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
e. Back up the Active CCMS database and restore it on the Standby Server. For more information about backing up and restoring the CCMS database, see the Nortel Contact Center Manager Server Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server.
f. Click OK.
Changing the Standby Server name
To change the Standby Server name, complete the following procedure.
1 On the Replication Server, remove the warm standby configuration on the Replication Server using the following steps:
a. On the Start menu, click Program > Nortel Contact Center > Replication Server > Replication Server Management.
Result: The Replication Server Management dialog box appears.
b. Select the servers that are being replicated, and then click Remove.
Result: The Confirm Remove dialog box appears.
c. Click Yes.
Result: The replication between the Active Server and the Standby Server is stopped. The Warm Standby configuration is removed. The contact center data is intact on both servers.
d. Click Done.
2 On the Standby Server, change the Standby Server name using the following steps:
a. On the Standby Server, select Start > Control Panel > System.
b. Click the Computer Name tab.
c. Click Change.
d. Enter the new server name.
e. Click OK.
Result: The system prompts you to restart the server.
f. Click Yes.
Result: The server restarts.
3 Restart the Standby Server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1107
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
4 Ensure that you can ping the Replication Server.
5 On the Replication Server, recreate the warm standby configuration on the Replication Server with the new Active Server IP address using the following steps:
a. Click Start > Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Replication Server > Replication Server Management.
Result: The Replication Server Management dialog box appears.
b. Click Create.
Result: The Warm Standby Servers dialog box appears.
c. In the Primary CCMS box, type the name and Nortel server subnet IP address for the Primary Server.
d. In the Secondary CCMS box, type the name and Nortel server subnet IP address for the Secondary Server, and click OK.
Result: The Warm Standby configuration takes several minutes. At the end of the process, the Initialize Standby CCMS Database dialog box appears.
e. Back up the Active CCMS database and restore it on the Standby Server. For more information about backing up and restoring the CCMS database, see the Nortel Contact Center Manager Server Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server.
f. Click OK.
Changing the Replication Server name
To change the Replication Server name, complete the following procedure.
On the Replication Server
1 Click Start > Administrative Tools > Services to shut down the following Replication Server services:
Sybase REP_<Server Name>_RS
Sybase SQLServer_<Server Name>
Sybase BCKServer_<Server Name>_BS (if it is running)
CC Rep Service
2 Change the Replication Server name using the following steps:
1108 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
a. On the Replication Server, select Start > Control Panel > System.
b. Click the Computer Name tab.
c. Click Change.
d. Enter the new server name.
e. Click OK.
Result: The system prompts you to restart the server.
f. Click Yes.
Result: The server restarts.
3 Click Start > Administrative Tools > Services to restart the following services:
Sybase BCKServer_<Server Name>_BS (if it was running)
Sybase SQLServer_<Server Name>
Sybase REP_<Server Name>_RS
CC Rep Service
4 Ensure that you can ping both the Standby and Active Servers.
On the Active Server 5 In the Server Setup Configuration Utility, change the Replication Server
name on the Database Replication tab.
6 Restart the server.
7 Ensure that you can ping the Replication Server.
On the Standby Server
8 In the Server Setup Configuration Utility, change the Replication Server name on the Database Replication tab.
9 Restart the server.
10 Ensure that you can ping the Replication Server.
Changing the name of all three servers
To change the Active Server name, the Standby Server name, and the Replication Server name, complete the following procedures.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1109
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
On the Replication Server
1 Click Start > Administrative Tools > Services to shut down the following Replication Server services:
Sybase REP_<Server Name>_RS
Sybase SQLServer_<Server Name>
Sybase BCKServer_<Server Name>_BS (if it is running)
CC Rep Service
2 Change the Replication Server name using the following steps:
a. On the Replication Server, select Start > Control Panel > System.
b. Click the Computer Name tab.
c. Click Change.
d. Enter the new server name.
e. Click OK.
Result: The system prompts you to restart the server.
f. Click Yes.
Result: The server restarts.
3 Click Start > Administrative Tools > Services to restart the following services:
Sybase BCKServer_<Server Name>_BS (if it was running)
Sybase SQLServer_<Server Name>
Sybase REP_<Server Name>_RS
CC Rep Service
4 Ensure that you can ping both the Standby and Active Servers.
5 On the Replication Server, recreate the warm standby configuration on the Replication Server with the new Active Server IP address using the following steps:
a. Click Start > Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Replication Server > Replication Server Management.
Result: The Replication Server Management dialog box appears.
1110 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
b. Click Create.
Result: The Warm Standby Servers dialog box appears.
c. In the Primary CCMS box, type the name and Nortel server subnet IP address for the Primary Server.
d. In the Secondary CCMS box, type the name and Nortel server subnet IP address for the Secondary Server, and click OK.
Result: The Warm Standby configuration takes several minutes. At the end of the process, the Initialize Standby CCMS Database dialog box appears.
e. Back up the Active CCMS database and restore it on the Standby Server. For more information about backing up and restoring the CCMS database, see the Nortel Contact Center Manager Server Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server.
f. Click OK.
On the Active Server6 Change the name of the Active Server using the following steps:
7 Change the Active Server name using the following steps:
a. On the Active Server, select Start > Control Panel > System.
b. Click the Computer Name tab.
c. Click Change.
d. Enter the new server name.
e. Click OK.
Result: The system prompts you to restart the server.
f. Click Yes.
Result: The server restarts.
8 Change the name of the Active Server on the other servers in the contact center using the procedures in “Changing the Contact Center Manager Server name” on page 1111.
9 In the Server Setup Configuration Utility, change the Replication Server name on the Database Replication tab.
10 Restart the server.
11 Ensure that you can ping the Replication Server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1111
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
On the Standby Server12 Change the Standby Server name using the following steps:
a. On the Standby Server, select Start > Control Panel > System.
b. Click the Computer Name tab.
c. Click Change.
d. Enter the new server name.
e. Click OK.
Result: The system prompts you to restart the server.
f. Click Yes.
Result: The server restarts.
13 In the Server Setup Configuration Utility, change the Replication Server IP address on the Database Replication tab.
14 Restart the server.
15 Ensure that you can ping the Replication Server.
Changing the Contact Center Manager Server name
Complete the following tasks described in this section:
1. If you have a Domain Name Service (DNS) server in your network, update the DNS with the new server name of the Standby Server.
2. On the Contact Center Manager Administration server, update the server HOSTS file, if required, and configure the new Contact Center Manager Server name properties.
3. Synchronize the name on the operating system with the Contact Center Manager Server name.
4. On the Communication Control Toolkit server, update the HOSTS file, if required, and configure the Content Management Framework for the new Contact Center Manager Server name.
5. On the Contact Center Multimedia server, update the HOSTS file, if required. Also update the server settings with the new Contact Center Manager Server name, and License Manager server, if required.
1112 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
Updating the Domain Name Service server
If you configure a Domain Name Service (DNS) server for name resolution in your network, you must contact your local network prime to update the DNS with the new computer name.
To verify that the new IP address is up to date on the DNS, use the ping <server name> DOS command with the new server name to confirm that the system responds with the corresponding IP address.
Synchronizing the operating system name with the Contact Center Manager Server name
On the Replication Server, the Active Server, and the Standby Server, depending on which server name you changed, perform the following steps:
1 Log on to the Contact Center Manager Server as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Computer Name Sync.Result: The Contact Center Manager Server Computer Name Synchronization Utility dialog box appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1113
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
3 Click OK.
Result: The utility compares the server name with the database server name. If the names match, continue with step 5. If the names do not match, the following message appears.
4 Click OK.
Result: The utility shuts down the Contact Center Manager Server services and then synchronizes the server name with the database server name. When the process is complete, the following message appears.
5 Click OK.
Result: The following dialog box appears.
6 Click OK.
1114 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
7 Restart the server.
Updating the Contact Center Manager Administration server
On the Contact Center Manager Administration server, after you change the Contact Center Manager Server name, you must update the HOSTS file if you do not have a DNS server. You must also configure the new server name in Contact Center Manager Administration.
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on the Contact Center Manager Administration server with the new computer name. If you do have a DNS server, continue with “Changing the server name in the Administration tool” on page 1115.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1115
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
1 On the Contact Center Manager Administration server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory: <x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor. The HOSTS file consists of a list of IP addresses followed by a server name. The HOSTS file in the following figure is a sample and does not indicate exactly how the HOSTS file is configured.
3 Update the file to reflect the new server name of the Contact Center Manager Server.
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
Changing the server name in the Administration toolYou must update the Configuration component in Contact Center Manager Administration with the new Contact Center Manager Server name.
1116 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
1 Log on to the Contact Center Manager Administration server as the webadmin user.
2 Launch the Configuration component.
3 In the left pane, right-click the Contact Center Manager Server name that you are changing.
4 Click Edit Properties.
Result: The server name, IP address, logon ID, and password boxes are enabled.
5 Enter the new details and click Submit.
Updating the Communication Control Toolkit server
On the Communication Control Toolkit server, after you change the Contact Center Manager Server name, you must update the HOSTS file if you do not have a DNS server. You must also configure the Contact Management Framework with the new server name.
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on Communication Control Toolkit server with the new computer name. If you do have a DNS server, proceed with “Configuring the Contact Management Framework settings” on page 1117.
1 On the Communication Control Toolkit server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory: <x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1117
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
3 Update the file to reflect the new server name of the Contact Center Manager Server.
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
Configuring the Contact Management Framework settingsUpdate the Contact Management Framework component in Communication Control Toolkit with the new Contact Center Manager Server name.
1 Log on to the Communication Control Toolkit server.
2 Open the NCCT 6.0 Console by clicking Start > All Programs > Nortel > Communication Control Toolkit > NCCT 6.0 Console.
3 Expand NCCT Admin.
1118 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
4 Double-click CCT Server in the right pane of the NCCT 6.0 Console.
Result: The CCT Server Properties dialog box appears.
5 Click the CMF Configuration tab.
Result: The CMF Configuration page appears.
6 In the CCMS Server Name box, type the new name of the Contact Center Manager Server.
7 Click Apply to save the Contact Management Framework settings.
8 Click OK to close the window.
9 Restart the services on the Communication Control Toolkit server by performing the following steps:
a. Log on to the Communication Control Toolkit server as Administrator.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1119
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
b. On the NCCT 6.0 Console, expand NCCT Maintenance.
c. In the left pane, click Services.
d. In the right pane of the NCCT 6.0 Console, double-click Services.
Result: The Services dialog box appears.
e. Click to stop the services.
f. Click to restart the services.
g. The services are restarted.
Updating the Contact Center Multimedia server
On the Contact Center Multimedia server, after you change the Contact Center Manager Server name, you must update the HOSTS file if you do not have a DNS server and then configure the server settings in the Multimedia Administrator application.
1120 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on the Contact Center Multimedia server with the new Contact Center Manager Server name. If you do have a DNS server, proceed with “Configuring the server settings” on page 1120.
1 On the Contact Center Multimedia server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory: <x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor.
3 Update the file to reflect the new server name of the Contact Center Manager Server.
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
Configuring the server settingsYou must update the server settings in the Contact Center Multimedia Administrator with the new Contact Center Manager Server name and then restart the Multimedia services.
1 Log on to the Contact Center Multimedia server.
2 Log on to the Contact Center Multimedia Administrator using an administration user ID and password.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1121
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
3 In the Contact Center Multimedia Administrator window, expand Contact Center Multimedia.
4 Expand General Administration.
5 Double-click Server Settings.
Result: The Server Settings dialog box appears.
6 Click Contact Center Manager Server to select it.
7 Click Edit.
Result: The Server Properties dialog box appears.
8 In the Server Name box, change the name of the Contact Center Manager Server.
1122 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
9 Click Save.
Result: A warning appears describing potential errors for changing this server.
10 Click OK.
11 If the License Manager server is installed on the same server as Contact Center Manager Server, in the Server Settings window, click Contact Center License Server.
12 Click Edit.
Result: The Server Properties dialog box appears.
13 In the Server Name box, change the name of the Contact Center License Manager server.
14 If you have a backup Contact Center License Manager server, type the name in the Backup Server box.
15 Click Save.
Result: A warning appears describing potential errors for changing this server. Click OK to accept.
16 Restart the Multimedia services using the following steps:
a. On the Start menu, click All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Multimedia Server > CCMM Services Control.
Result: The CCMM Service Control window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1123
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
b. Click Stop All.
c. Click Start All.
d. Click Exit to close the CCMM Service Control window.
1124 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
Change the Contact Center Manager Standby server IP address
This section describes how to change the Contact Center Manager Standby server IP address. Because the Contact Center Manager Standby Server software uses three servers, you can change the IP address on one or more servers. For example, you can do one of the following:
change the Active Server IP address
change the Standby Server IP address
change the Replication Server IP address
change the Active Server, Standby Server, and Replication Server IP addresses
If you change the IP address on either the Active and Standby Servers in Contact Center Manager Standby Server, you must perform steps to remove and recreate the warm standby configuration on the Replication Server.
Any one of the IP address changes means that you must stop the replication process, perform all of the steps required to change the IP address of the Contact Center Manager Standby Server, and then update the IP address on the other servers in your contact center.
Changing the Active Server IP address
To change the Active Server IP address, complete the following procedure.
1 On the Replication Server, remove the warm standby configuration on the Replication Server using the following steps:
a. On the Start menu, click Program > Nortel Contact Center > Replication Server > Replication Server Management.
Result: The Replication Server Management dialog box appears.
b. Select the servers that are being replicated, and then click Remove.
Result: The Confirm Remove dialog box appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1125
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
c. Click Yes.
Result: The replication between the Active Server and the Standby Server is stopped. The Warm Standby configuration is removed. The contact center data is intact on both servers.
d. Click Done.
2 On the Active Server, change the Active Server IP address using the procedures in “Changing the Contact Center Manager Server IP address” on page 1131, depending on your Nortel server subnet or ELAN subnet configuration.
3 Restart the Active Server.
4 Ensure that you can ping the Replication Server.
5 On the Replication Server, recreate the warm standby configuration on the Replication Server with the new Active Server IP address using the following steps:
a. Click Start > Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Replication Server > Replication Server Management.
Result: The Replication Server Management dialog box appears.
b. Click Create.
Result: The Warm Standby Servers dialog box appears.
c. In the Primary CCMS box, type the name and Nortel server subnet IP address for the Primary Server.
d. In the Secondary CCMS box, type the name and Nortel server subnet IP address for the Secondary Server, and click OK.
Result: The Warm Standby configuration takes several minutes. At the end of the process, the Initialize Standby CCMS Database dialog box appears.
e. Back up the Active CCMS database and restore it on the Standby Server. For more information about backing up and restoring the CCMS database, see the Nortel Contact Center Manager Server Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server.
f. Click OK.
1126 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
Changing the Standby Server IP address
To change the Standby Server IP address, complete the following procedure.
1 On the Replication Server, remove the warm standby configuration on the Replication Server using the following steps:
a. On the Start menu, click Program > Nortel Contact Center > Replication Server > Replication Server Management.
Result: The Replication Server Management dialog box appears.
b. Select the servers that are being replicated, and then click Remove.
Result: The Confirm Remove dialog box appears.
c. Click Yes.
Result: The replication between the Active Server and the Standby Server is stopped. The Warm Standby configuration is removed. The contact center data is intact on both servers.
d. Click Done.
2 On the Standby Server, change the IP address of the Standby Server using the procedures in “Changing the Contact Center Manager Server IP address” on page 1131, depending on your Nortel server subnet or ELAN subnet configuration.
3 Restart the Standby Server.
4 Ensure that you can ping the Replication Server.
5 On the Replication Server, recreate the warm standby configuration on the Replication Server with the new Active Server IP address using the following steps:
a. Click Start > Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Replication Server > Replication Server Management.
Result: The Replication Server Management dialog box appears.
b. Click Create.
Result: The Warm Standby Servers dialog box appears.
c. In the Primary CCMS box, type the name and Nortel server subnet IP address for the Primary Server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1127
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
d. In the Secondary CCMS box, type the name and Nortel server subnet IP address for the Secondary Server, and click OK.
Result: The Warm Standby configuration takes several minutes. At the end of the process, the Initialize Standby CCMS Database dialog box appears.
e. Back up the Active CCMS database and restore it on the Standby Server. For more information about backing up and restoring the CCMS database, see the Nortel Contact Center Manager Server Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server.
f. Click OK.
Changing the Replication Server IP address
To change the Replication Server IP address, complete the following procedure.
On the Replication Server
1 On the Replication Server, remove the warm standby configuration on the Replication Server using the following steps:
a. On the Start menu, click Program > Nortel Contact Center > Replication Server > Replication Server Management.
Result: The Replication Server Management dialog box appears.
b. Select the servers that are being replicated, and then click Remove.
Result: The Confirm Remove dialog box appears.
c. Click Yes.
Result: The replication between the Active Server and the Standby Server is stopped. The Warm Standby configuration is removed. The contact center data is intact on both servers.
d. Click Done.
2 Click Start > Administrative Tools > Services to shut down the following Replication Server services:
Sybase REP_<Server Name>_RS
Sybase SQLServer_<Server Name>
Sybase BCKServer_<Server Name>_BS (if it is running)
CC Rep Service
1128 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
3 Use the Windows Network Connection interface to change the Replication Server IP address.
4 Click Start > Administrative Tools > Services to restart the following services:
Sybase BCKServer_<Server Name>_BS (if it was running)
Sybase SQLServer_<Server Name>
Sybase REP_<Server Name>_RS
CC Rep Service
5 Ensure that you can ping both the Standby and Active Servers.
On the Active Server 6 In the Server Setup Configuration Utility, change the Replication Server IP
address on the Database Replication tab.
7 Restart the server.
8 Ensure that you can ping the Replication Server.
On the Standby Server 9 In the Server Setup Configuration Utility, change the Replication Server IP
address on the Database Replication tab.
10 Restart the server.
11 Ensure that you can ping the Replication Server.
On the Replication Server 12 On the Replication Server, recreate the warm standby configuration on the
Replication Server with the new Active Server IP address using the following steps:
a. Click Start > Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Replication Server > Replication Server Management.
Result: The Replication Server Management dialog box appears.
b. Click Create.
Result: The Warm Standby Servers dialog box appears.
c. In the Primary CCMS box, type the name and Nortel server subnet IP address for the Primary Server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1129
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
d. In the Secondary CCMS box, type the name and Nortel server subnet IP address for the Secondary Server, and click OK.
Result: The Warm Standby configuration takes several minutes. At the end of the process, the Initialize Standby CCMS Database dialog box appears.
e. Back up the Active CCMS database and restore it on the Standby Server. For more information about backing up and restoring the CCMS database, see the Nortel Contact Center Manager Server Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server.
f. Click OK.
Changing the IP address of all three servers
To change the Active Server IP address, the Standby Server IP address, and the Replication Server IP address, complete the following procedures.
On the Replication Server
1 On the Replication Server, remove the warm standby configuration on the Replication Server using the following steps:
a. On the Start menu, click Program > Nortel Contact Center > Replication Server > Replication Server Management.
Result: The Replication Server Management dialog box appears.
b. Select the servers that are being replicated, and then click Remove.
Result: The Confirm Remove dialog box appears.
c. Click Yes.
Result: The replication between the Active Server and the Standby Server is stopped. The Warm Standby configuration is removed. The contact center data is intact on both servers.
d. Click Done.
2 Click Start > Administrative Tools > Services to shut down the following Replication Server services:
Sybase REP_<Server Name>_RS
Sybase SQLServer_<Server Name>
Sybase BCKServer_<Server Name>_BS (if it is running)
1130 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
CC Rep Service
3 Use the Windows Network Connection interface to change the Replication Server IP address.
4 Click Start > Administrative Tools > Services to restart the following services:
Sybase BCKServer_<Server Name>_BS (if it was running)
Sybase SQLServer_<Server Name>
Sybase REP_<Server Name>_RS
CC Rep Service
5 Ensure that you can ping both the Standby and Active Servers.
On the Active Server6 Change the IP address of the Active Server using the procedures in
“Changing the Contact Center Manager Server IP address” on page 1131, depending on your Nortel server subnet or ELAN subnet configuration.
7 In the Server Setup Configuration Utility, on the Local Area Network IP tab, change the Nortel Server Subnet IP address or the ELAN Subnet IP address to the new address defined, depending on which address you are changing.
8 In the Server Setup Configuration Utility, change the Replication Server IP address on the Database Replication tab.
9 Restart the server.
10 Ensure that you can ping the Replication Server.
On the Standby Server11 Change the Standby Server IP address using the procedures in “Changing
the Contact Center Manager Server IP address” on page 1131, depending on your Nortel server subnet or ELAN subnet configuration.
12 In the Server Setup Configuration Utility, on the Local Area Network IP tab, change the Nortel Server Subnet IP address or the ELAN Subnet IP address to the new address defined, depending on which address you are changing.
13 In the Server Setup Configuration Utility, change the Replication Server IP address on the Database Replication tab.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1131
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
14 Restart the server.
15 Ensure that you can ping the Replication Server.
On the Replication Server16 On the Replication Server, recreate the warm standby configuration on the
Replication Server with the new Active Server IP address using the following steps:
a. Click Start > Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Replication Server > Replication Server Management.
Result: The Replication Server Management dialog box appears.
b. Click Create.
Result: The Warm Standby Servers dialog box appears.
c. In the Primary CCMS box, type the name and Nortel server subnet IP address for the Primary Server.
d. In the Secondary CCMS box, type the name and Nortel server subnet IP address for the Secondary Server, and click OK.
Result: The Warm Standby configuration takes several minutes. At the end of the process, the Initialize Standby CCMS Database dialog box appears.
e. Back up the Active CCMS database and restore it on the Standby Server. For more information about backing up and restoring the CCMS database, see the Nortel Contact Center Manager Server Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server.
f. Click OK.
Changing the Contact Center Manager Server IP address
This section describes how to change the Contact Center Manager Server IP address of a Nortel server subnet and an ELAN subnet.
Nortel server subnetIf you are changing the IP address of a Nortel server subnet, you must complete the following tasks:
1132 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
1. Change the Contact Center Manager Server IP address on the Contact Center Manager Server.
2. Update the Contact Center Manager Server IP address in the Server Configuration Utility.
3. If you have a Domain Name Service (DNS) server in your network, update the DNS with the IP address of Contact Center Manager Server and License Manager.
4. If you are using a Network Control Center, on the Network Control Center, update the Contact Center Manager Server IP address.
5. On the Contact Center Manager Administration server, update the HOSTS file, if required, and configure the Contact Center Manager Server IP address.
6. On the Communication Control Toolkit server, update the HOSTS file, if required, the license information, the TAPI settings and restart the services.
7. On the Contact Center Multimedia server, update the HOSTS file, if required.
ELAN subnetIf you are changing the IP address of an ELAN subnet card, you must change the ELAN subnet IP address on the Contact Center Manager Server. See “Changing the ELAN subnet IP address on the Contact Center Manager Server” on page 1146.
Changing the Nortel server subnet IP address in the operating system
Complete the following procedure if you change the Nortel server subnet IP address of the Active server, the Standby server, or the Replication server.
1 Log on to the Contact Center Manager Server.
2 From the Start menu, select Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Shutdown.
Result: A dialog box appears prompting you to shut down services.
3 Click OK.
Result: The services shut down.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1133
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
4 Click Accept.
5 From the Start menu, select Control Panel.
6 Right-click Network Connections.
7 Right-click the LAN connection of the Nortel server subnet network interface card, and then click Properties.
8 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and then click Properties.
9 Enter the new IP address, and then click OK.
10 In the Properties window, click Close.
Configure the Contact Center Manager Server with the new IP address
Complete the following procedure if you change the Nortel server subnet IP address of the Active server, the Standby server, or the Replication server.
1 From the Start menu, choose All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Server Setup Configuration.
Result: The following dialog box appears. This dialog box remains open for 20 to 30 seconds.
If you have a co-resident License Manager, an Information dialog box appears.
2 If the Information dialog box appears, click Continue.
Result: The Server Setup Configuration Utility initializes.
1134 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
3 Click the Local Area Network IP tab.
4 From the IP Address list, select the new Nortel server subnet IP address.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1135
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
5 If the License Manager server is installed with Contact Center Manager Server, click the License Manager tab.
6 Verify that the Primary License Manager IP Address is the new Contact Center Manager Server IP Address.
7 Click OK.
8 Click Yes to start the Server Setup Configuration Utility.
Result: The Server Setup Configuration Utility starts. This takes 10 to 15 minutes to complete. A message box confirms the configuration is complete.
9 Click OK.
Result: The system prompts you to restart the server.
10 Click Yes.
1136 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
Updating the Domain Name Service server
If you configure a Domain Name Service (DNS) server for name resolution in your network, you must contact your local network prime to update the DNS with the new IP address of the Contact Center Manager Server.
To verify that the new IP address is up to date on the DNS, use the ping <server name> DOS command with the server name to confirm that the system responds with the corresponding IP address.
Updating the Network Control Center server
If you have a network of Contact Center Manager Servers connected to a Network Control Center server, you must update the IP address for the Contact Center Manager Server on the Network Control Center server.
1 On the Network Control Center server, from the Start menu, select Run.
2 In the Open box, type nbconfig -admin.
ATTENTIONConsult your network administrator to ensure your DNS is updated with the new IP address of your Standby Server. If you do not have a DNS server in your network, you must update the hosts file on the servers as described in the following steps to reflect this change.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1137
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
3 Press Enter.
Result: The Nbconfig dialog box appears.
4 Click the Site Table tab.
5 On the Site Table tab, select the site name and click Edit.
Result: The Edit Site dialog box appears.
6 In the CLAN IP Address box, type the new IP address.
7 Click OK.
8 On the Nbconfig dialog box, click Verify.
Result: The Network Control Center server synchronizes with the Contact Center Manager Server and updates the IP address.
1138 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
9 On the Nbconfig dialog box, click OK.
10 Verify that the correct IP address appears in the Site Table tab.
11 Click OK to close all windows.
Updating the Contact Center Manager Administration server
On the Contact Center Manager Administration server, after you change the Contact Center Manager Server IP address, you must update the HOSTS file if you do not have a DNS server and configure the new IP address in Contact Center Manager Administration.
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on the Contact Center Manager Administration server with the new IP address. If you do have a DNS server, continue with “Changing the Contact Center Manager Administration server” on page 1139.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1139
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
1 On the Contact Center Manager Administration server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory: <x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor. The HOSTS file consists of a list of IP addresses followed by a server name. The HOSTS file in the following figure is a sample and does not indicate exactly how the HOSTS file is configured.
3 Update the file to reflect the new IP address of the Contact Center Manager Server.
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
Changing the Contact Center Manager Administration serverUpdate the IP address of the Contact Center Manager Server in Contact Center Manager Administration.
1140 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
1 Log on to the Contact Center Manager Administration server as the webadmin user.
2 Open the Configuration component.
3 In the left pane, right-click the name of the updated Contact Center Manager Server.
4 Click Edit Properties.
5 In the IP Address box, type the new IP address.
6 Click Submit.
7 Click Launchpad > Logout to exit.
Changing the License Manager IP address on Contact Center Manager AdministrationIf the License Manager server is installed on the same server as Contact Center Manager Server, use this procedure to modify the primary or secondary License Manager server IP address.
1 Log on to the Contact Center Manager Administration server.
2 Click Start > All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Administration > Configuration.
Result: The Nortel Networks Applications Configuration window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1141
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
3 In the right pane, click the LM Service Configuration icon.
Result: The LM Service – Configuration Setup dialog box appears.
4 In the Primary License Manager Server's IP Address box, type the new IP address.
5 Click OK to submit the information.
Result: The Configuration Setup Completed dialog box appears.
6 Click OK.
Result: A message box appears, prompting you to restart the License Manager service.
7 Click Yes to restart the License Manager service.
Result: A message box appears telling you that the License Manager service has restarted.
8 Click OK.
9 Click File > Exit to close the window.
1142 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
Updating the Communication Control Toolkit server
On the Communication Control Toolkit server, after you change the Contact Center Manager Server IP address, you must update the HOSTS file if you do not have a DNS server then update the License Manager IP address, configure TAPI, and restart all Communication Control Toolkit services.
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on the Communication Control Toolkit server with the new IP address. If you do have a DNS server, proceed with “Updating the Communication Control Toolkit license” on page 1143.
1 On the Communication Control Toolkit server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory: <x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor. The HOSTS file consists of a list of IP addresses followed by a server name.
3 Update the file to reflect the new IP address of the Contact Center Manager Server.
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1143
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
Updating the Communication Control Toolkit licenseIf the License Manager server is co-resident with the Contact Center Manager Server, use the following procedure to configure the License Manager IP address for the Communication Control Toolkit server.
1 Log on to the Communication Control Toolkit server.
2 Open the NCCT 6.0 Console by clicking Start > All Programs > Nortel > Communication Control Toolkit > NCCT 6.0 Console.
3 Expand NCCT Admin.
4 In the right pane of the NCCT 6.0 Console, double-click CCT Server.
Result: The CCT Server Properties dialog box appears.
1144 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
5 Click the Licensing tab.
Result: The Licensing page appears.
6 Under Primary License Manager Server, in the IP Address box, type the new IP address.
7 Click File > Exit to close the NCCT 6.0 Console.
If prompted, save the Console settings.
Changing the TAPI SP host address settingIf your Communication Control Toolkit server Telephony Application Programming Interface (TAPI) points to your Contact Center Manager Server, change the IP address in the TAPI Meridian 1 configuration.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1145
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
1 From the Start menu, select All Programs > Nortel > Symposium TAPI Provider > Configure Database.
Result: The Symposium TAPI SP for Meridian 1 Configuration window appears.
2 Click the Meridian 1 Host tab.
3 In the Host Address box, type the new Nortel server subnet IP address for the Contact Center Manager Server.
4 Click OK.
Restart all Communication Control Toolkit servicesRestart all services, including Telephony, ACDProxy, and all Communication Control Toolkit services.
1 From the Start menu, select All Programs > Nortel > Communication Control Toolkit > NCCT 6.0 Console.
2 Expand NCCT Maintenance.
3 Select Services.
4 In the right pane, double-click Services.
Result: The Services Properties dialog box appears.
5 Click Restart All.
6 Click OK.
7 Click File > Exit to close the NCCT 6.0 Console.
If prompted, save the Console settings.
Updating the Contact Center Multimedia server
On the Contact Center Multimedia server, after you change the Contact Center Manager Server IP address, you must update the HOSTS file if you do not have a DNS server.
1146 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on the Contact Center Multimedia server with the new IP address. If you do have a DNS server, updating your Contact Center suite is complete.
1 On the Contact Center Multimedia server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory: <x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor. The HOSTS file consists of a list of IP addresses followed by a server name.
3 Update the file to reflect the new IP address of the Contact Center Manager Server.
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
Changing the ELAN subnet IP address on the Contact Center Manager Server
Complete the following procedure if you change the ELAN subnet IP address.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1147
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
1 Log on to the Contact Center Manager Server.
2 From the Start menu, select Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Shutdown.
Result: A dialog box appears prompting you to shut down services.
3 Click OK.
Result: The services shut down.
4 Click Accept.
5 From the Start menu, choose Control Panel.
6 Right-click Network Connections.
7 Right-click the LAN connection on the ELAN subnet network interface card, and then click Properties.
8 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and then click Properties.
9 Enter the new IP address, and then click OK.
10 On the Properties window, click Close.
11 From the Start menu, select All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Server Setup Configuration.
12 Click the Local Area Network IP tab.
13 On the IP Address list, select the new ELAN IP address.
14 Click OK.
15 Click Yes to start the Server Setup Configuration Utility.
Result: The Server Setup Configuration Utility launches. This takes 10 to 15 minutes to complete. A dialog box confirms the configuration is complete.
16 Click OK.
Result: The system prompts you to restart the server.
17 Click Yes.
1148 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
Change the co-resident server name
You can change the name of the server on which the Contact Center Manager Server and Contact Center Manager Administration Server co-reside, if the new server name meets the following requirements:
The name cannot be the same as any other computer or domain name in the network.
The name must contain 6 to 15 characters (A through Z, 0 through 9).
The first character of the name must be alphabetical.
No other characters are allowed. For example, the name cannot include any underscores (_).
Hyphens (-) are not permitted in the server name.
After you change the co-resident server name, you must also update the other servers in the Contact Center suite to ensure the servers work together. Complete the following tasks described in this section:
1. If you have a Domain Name Service (DNS) server in your network, update the DNS with the name of your Contact Center Manager Server.
2. Change the server name on the co-resident server.
3. Update the Contact Center Manager Administration server with the new name for the co-resident server.
4. Synchronize the server name using the Computer Name Sync Utility.
5. Change the server name of the co-resident server in Windows.
6. If you have SU03 or earlier, run the ChangeSOAPSrv utility.
7. Reset IUSR_SWC.
8. Reset the iceAdmin password.
9. Update the server name in Contact Center Manager Administration.
10. On the client PC browsers, update the shared folders for exporting scheduled reports.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1149
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
11. On the Communication Control Toolkit server, update the HOSTS file and the new server name.
12. On the Contact Center Multimedia server, update the HOSTS file and the new server name.
Updating the Domain Name Service server
If you configure a Domain Name Service (DNS) server for name resolution in your network, you must contact your local network prime to update the DNS with the new computer name.
To verify that the new IP address is up to date on the DNS, use the ping <server name> DOS command with the new server name to confirm that the system responds with the corresponding IP address.
Changing the server name on the co-resident server
1 On the Contact Center Manager Server/Contact Center Manager Administration server select Start > Control Panel > System.
2 Click the Computer Name tab.
3 Click Change.
4 Enter the new server name.
5 Click OK.
Result: The system prompts you to restart the server.
6 Click Yes.
Result: The server restarts.
1150 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
Updating the HOSTS file
If you do not have a Domain Name Service (DNS) for name resolution, you need not update the HOSTS file for name resolution. If you do have a DNS server DNS server, proceed with “Running the Computer Name Sync Utility” on page 1151.
1 On the co-resident server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory: <x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor. The HOSTS file consists of a list of IP addresses followed by a server name. The HOSTS file in the following figure is a sample and does not indicate exactly how the HOSTS file is configured.
3 Update the file to reflect the new name of the co-resident server.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1151
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server/Contact Center Manager Administration Server co-resident server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
Running the Computer Name Sync Utility
1 Log on to the co-resident server as Administrator.
2 From the Start menu, choose All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Computer Name Sync.Result: The Contact Center Manager Server Computer Name Synchronization Utility window appears.
1152 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
3 Click OK.
Result: The utility compares the server name with the database server name. If the names do not match, the following message appears.
4 Click OK.
Result: The utility shuts down the Contact Center Manager Server services and then synchronizes the server name with the database server name. When the process is complete, the following message appears.
5 Click OK.
Result: The following dialog box appears.
6 Click OK.
7 Restart the server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1153
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
Running the ChangeSOAPSrv utility
After you change the server name, SOAP processes do not function properly (because they still recognize the old server name), and you cannot work with the components that require SOAP functionality, such as Configuration.
If you have SU04 or later, proceed to “Resetting the IUSR_SWC account to reflect the new server name” on page 1153.
1 Launch the Configuration component on the co-resident server.
2 When you receive a pop-up message indicating that you must run the ChangeSOAPSrv utility, note the path that appears in the message.
Tip: If you close the message, you can make it reappear by launching the same Contact Center Manager Administration component again.
3 On the Contact Center Manager Administration server, open a command prompt and navigate to the directory C:\Program Files\Nortel Networks\WClient\Apps\Supportutil, where C is the drive on which Contact Center Manager Administration is installed.
4 At the prompt, type the following text (which includes the path that appears in the pop-up message): ChangeSOAPSrv C:\Program Files\Nortel Networks\WClient\Apps\Common\SOAP;<server name> where <server name> is the name of the server, or the fully qualified domain name, if this is what you use as the Contact Center Manager Administration default URL (for example, <computername>.<domain name>.com).
5 Press Enter.
Result: A window appears, showing the updated SOAP files.
6 Try launching and working with the same Contact Center Manager Administration component again (for example, Configuration).
Result: The component opens with no error messages.
Resetting the IUSR_SWC account to reflect the new server name
1 On the co-resident server, click Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager.
Result: The Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager window appears.
1154 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
2 In the tree, click the plus sign (+) beside <Computer_Name> (local computer).
Result: The heading expands to reveal a series of folders.
3 Click the plus sign (+) beside the Web Sites folder.
Result: The folder expands.
4 Right-click Default Web Site, and then select Properties from the resulting menu.
Result: The Default Web Site Properties dialog box appears.
5 Click the Directory Security tab.
Result: The Directory Security page appears.
6 Under the Authentication and access control heading, click Edit.
Result: The Authentication Methods dialog box appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1155
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
7 Click Browse.
Result: The Select User dialog box appears.
8 Click Advanced.
Result: The Select User dialog box expands.
1156 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
9 Click Find Now.
Result: The list of all the user accounts configured on the server appears.
10 In the list of user accounts, select IUSR_SWC, and then click OK.
Result: The Select User dialog box reappears with the IUSR_SWC account listed.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1157
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
11 Click OK.
Result: The Authentication Methods dialog box reappears with the IUSR_SWC user account shown.
12 In the Password box, type the same password that you originally used for this account when you configured it.
13 Click OK.
Result: The Confirm Password dialog box appears.
14 Type the password again, and then click OK.
Result: The system records the password.
15 Click OK to save your changes.
1158 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
Resetting the iceAdmin password
1 On the co-resident server, click Start > All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Administration > Configuration.
2 In the left pane, click Nortel Networks.
Result: The Nortel Networks Applications Configuration window appears.
3 Click IceAdmin Password Change.
Result: The iceAdmin Password Change dialog box appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1159
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
4 In the Old Password box, type the old password.
5 In the New Password box, reenter the old password for the iceAdmin user account. This resets the iceAdmin password.
6 In the Confirm Password box, type the password again.
Result: If your Contact Center Manager Administration server is a member of an active domain, the Domain Account button is enabled on the iceAdmin Password Change window.
7 If you are not going to export scheduled reports to a domain network PC, or if the Domain Account button is disabled, proceed to “Changing the server name in Contact Center Manager Administration” on page 1160.
OR
If you are going to export scheduled reports to a domain network PC, proceed to “Exporting scheduled reports” on page 1159.
Exporting scheduled reports
This procedure is a continuation of the previous procedure.
1 To export scheduled reports to a domain network PC, click Domain Account.
You can use the domain account setup function of the iceAdmin Password Change window to reset the domain account password if the administrator changes it.
Result: The Optional Domain Account Setup dialog box appears.
2 From the Select Domain Name list, select the name of the domain to add.
1160 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
3 In the Enter Domain Account box, type the domain account.
Obtain the domain account name and password from your network administrator.
4 In the Enter Domain Account Password box, type the domain account password.
You must enter the correct domain account password. If the password is incorrect, the system does not proceed.
5 In the Confirm Domain Account Password box, retype the domain account password.
6 Click OK.
Result: The iceAdmin Password Change window reappears and activates all scheduled reports using the domain account instead of the local iceAdmin account.
7 Click OK.
Result: The system verifies that you typed the same password both times, and then resets the password in all required components.
Changing the server name in Contact Center Manager Administration
1 Log on to Contact Center Manager Administration as webadmin.
2 Open the Configuration component.
3 In the left pane, right-click the name of the server with altered network settings.
4 Click Edit Properties to enable the text boxes for the server name, IP address, log on ID, and password.
5 Enter the new details and click Submit.
6 Ensure that the new server name is updated for client PCs. For details, see “Ensuring the new server name is updated for client PCs” on page 1160.
Ensuring the new server name is updated for client PCs
You must ensure that when you change the name of any server with Contact Center Manager Administration clients, the HOSTS file on all of the client PCs is updated to reflect the new name.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1161
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a Domain Name Service (DNS) server, you must configure the HOSTS file on all of the client PCs. If you have a Domain Name Service (DNS) server for name resolution, you need not update the HOSTS file for name resolution and you can proceed to “Updating client PC browsers and shared folders for exporting scheduled reports” on page 1161.
1 On the client PC, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory:
<x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor. The HOSTS file consists of a list of IP addresses followed by a server name.
3 Update the file to reflect the new name of the co-resident server.
If you do not see a server name for the co-resident server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
Updating client PC browsers and shared folders for exporting scheduled reports
After you change the co-resident server name, you must update all Contact Center Manager Administration client PCs to reference the new Contact Center Manager Administration server name in the browser.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
1162 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
If you created a shared folder for exporting scheduled report export files, when you change the co-resident server name you must update the new name of the server for all scheduled reports. Ensure you define the output options to include the new name of the co-resident server.
1 Log on to the Contact Center Manager Administration server as webadmin.
2 Double-click Historical Reporting.
3 In the Historical Reporting main window, on the system tree, click the server under which you want to modify the reports.
4 For each report associated with the co-resident server, perform the following steps:
a. Right-click the report name.
Result: The Report Properties window appears.
b. Click the Output Options heading to reveal the output options boxes.
c. Select the Output to file check box to send the report to a shared folder.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1163
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
d. In the Output path box, update the path of the report to reflect the new IP address of the co-resident server.
The path format is \\[computer name]\[shared folder name]\[file name], without the file extension. If you change the name of the Contact Center Manager Administration folder, you must change the computer name portion of the path.
e. Click Save Report to save your user-defined report.
f. Click Activate to activate the report schedule.
g. Close the report.
Updating the Communication Control Toolkit server
On the Communication Control Toolkit server, after you change the co-resident server name, you must update the HOSTS file if you do not have a DNS server and configure the server properties.
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on the Communication Control Toolkit server with the new computer name. If you do have a DNS server, continue with “Configuring the Contact Management Framework properties” on page 1164.
1 On the Communication Control Toolkit server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory: <x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor.
3 Update the file to reflect the new name of the co-resident server.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
1164 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
Configuring the Contact Management Framework properties
1 Log on to the Communication Control Toolkit server.
2 Open the NCCT 6.0 Console by clicking Start > All Programs > Nortel > Communication Control Toolkit > NCCT 6.0 Console.
3 Expand NCCT Admin.
4 In the right pane of the NCCT 6.0 Console, double-click CCT Server.
Result: The CCT Server Properties dialog box appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1165
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
5 Click the CMF Configuration tab.
Result: The CMF Configuration page appears.
6 In the CCMS Server Name box, type the name of the co-resident server.
7 Click Apply to save the Contact Management Framework settings.
8 Click OK to close the window.
9 Restart the services on the Communication Control Toolkit server by performing the following steps:
a. Log on to the Communication Control Toolkit server as Administrator.
b. On the NCCT 6.0 Console window, expand NCCT Maintenance.
c. In the left pane, click Services.
1166 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
d. In the right pane, double-click Services.
Result: The Communication Control Toolkit Services dialog box appears.
e. Click to stop the services.
f. Click to restart the services.
g. Close all of the windows and dialog boxes.
Updating the Contact Center Multimedia server
On the Contact Center Multimedia server, after you change the Contact Center Manager Server name, you must update the HOSTS file if you do not have a DNS server and configure the server properties.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1167
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on the Contact Center Multimedia server with the new computer name. If you do have a DNS server, continue with “Configuring the server settings” on page 1167.
1 On the Contact Center Multimedia server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory: <x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor.
3 Update the file to reflect the new name of the co-resident server.
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
Configuring the server settings
1 Log on to the Contact Center Multimedia server.
2 Log on to the Contact Center Multimedia Administrator using an administration user ID and password.
3 In the Contact Center Multimedia Administrator window, expand Contact Center Multimedia.
4 Expand General Administration.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
1168 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
5 Double-click Server Settings.
Result: The Server Settings dialog box appears.
6 Click Contact Center Manager Server to select it.
7 Click Edit.
Result: The Server Properties dialog box appears.
8 In the Server Name box, change the name of the Contact Center Manager Server.
9 Click Save.
Result: A warning appears describing potential errors for changing this server. Click OK to accept.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1169
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
10 Click Contact Center Administrator Server to select it.
11 Click Edit.
Result: The Server Properties dialog box appears.
12 In the Server Name box, change the name of the Contact Center Manager Administration server.
13 Click Save.
Result: A warning appears describing potential errors for changing this server. Click OK to accept.
14 Restart the Multimedia services using the following steps:
a. On the Start menu, click All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Multimedia Server > CCMM Services Control.
Result: The CCMM Service Control window appears.
1170 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
b. Click Stop All.
c. Click Start All.
d. Click Exit to close the CCMM Service Control window.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1171
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
Change the co-resident server IP address
To change a server name on a server on which Contact Center Manager Server and Contact Center Manager Administration co-reside, complete the following tasks:
1. Change the Nortel server subnet IP address on the co-resident server.
2. If you have a Domain Name Service (DNS) server in your network, update the DNS with the IP address of your Contact Center Manager Server.
3. Update the IP address in Contact Center Manager Administration.
4. Ensure the IP address is updated for client PCs.
5. Ensure historical report output files reference the correct IP address.
6. On the Communication Control Toolkit server, update the HOSTS file, if required.
7. On the Contact Center Multimedia, update the HOSTS file, if required.
Changing the IP address of a co-resident server
Perform a backup of the co-resident server before you change the IP address. For more information about backing up the co-resident server, see the Nortel Contact Center Installation and Maintenance Guide for the co-resident server.
1 Shut down the Contact Center Manager Server services.
a. Click Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Shutdown.
b. When prompted to shut down the services, click OK.
Result: The services shut down.
c. Click Accept.
2 From the Start menu, choose Control Panel.
3 Right-click Network Connections.
4 Right-click the LAN connection of the Nortel server subnet network interface card, and then click Properties.
1172 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
5 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and then click Properties.
6 Enter the new IP address, and then click OK.
7 On the Properties window, click Close.
8 From the Start menu, choose All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Server Setup Configuration.
Result: The following window appears. This window remains open for 20 to 30 seconds.
9 Click the Local Area Network IP tab.
10 From the IP Address list, select the new Nortel server subnet IP address.
11 Click OK.
12 Click Yes to start the Server Setup Configuration Utility.
Result: The Server Setup Configuration Utility launches. This takes 10 to 15 minutes to complete. A message box confirms the configuration is complete.
13 Click OK.
Result: The system prompts you to reboot the server.
14 Click Yes.
Changing the Domain Name Service server
If you configure a Domain Name Service (DNS) server for name resolution in your network, you must contact your local network prime to update the DNS with the new IP Address.
To verify that the new IP address is up to date on the DNS, use the ping <server name> DOS command with the server name to confirm that the system responds with the corresponding IP address.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1173
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
Updating the IP address in Contact Center Manager Administration
When you change the IP address of the co-resident server, you must update the IP address in Contact Center Manager Administration.
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on the Contact Center Manager Administration server with the new computer name. If you do have a DNS server, continue with “Updating the server IP address in Contact Center Manager Administration” on page 1174.
1 On the co-resident server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory: <x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor. The HOSTS file consists of a list of IP addresses followed by a server name.
3 Update the file to reflect the new IP address of the co-resident server.
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
1174 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
Updating the server IP address in Contact Center Manager Administration
1 Log on to Contact Center Manager Administration as webadmin.
2 Open the Configuration component.
3 In the left pane, right-click the name of the server with altered network settings.
4 Click Edit Properties.
Result: The server name, IP address, log on ID, and password boxes are enabled.
5 Enter the new details and click Submit.
Ensuring the IP address is updated for client PCs
You must ensure that when you change the name of any server with Contact Center Manager Administration clients, the HOSTS file on all of the client PCs is updated to reflect the new name.
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on the client PCs with the new computer name. If you do have a DNS server, continue with “Ensuring historical report output files reference the correct IP address” on page 1175.
1 On the client PC, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory: <x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor. The HOSTS file consists of a list of IP addresses followed by a server name.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1175
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
3 Update the file to reflect the new IP address of the co-resident server.
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
Ensuring historical report output files reference the correct IP address
If you scheduled a historical report output file with the Contact Center Manager Administration server IP address in the path instead of the Contact Center Manager Administration server name, then you must manually edit the IP address in the path after you change the Contact Center Manager Administration server IP address.
1 Log on to the Contact Center Manager Administration server as webadmin.
2 Double-click Historical Reporting.
3 In the Historical Reporting main window, on the system tree, click the server under which you want to modify the reports.
4 For each report associated with the co-resident server, perform the following steps:
1176 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
a. Right-click the report name.
Result: The Report Properties window appears.
b. Click the Output Options heading to reveal the output options boxes.
c. Select the Output to file check box to send the report to a shared folder.
d. In the Output path box, update the path of the report to reflect the new IP address of the co-resident server.
The path format is \\[computer name]\[shared folder name]\[file name], without the file extension. If you change the name of the Contact Center Manager Administration folder, you must change the computer name portion of the path.
e. Click Save Report to save your user-defined report.
f. Click Activate to activate the report schedule.
g. Close the report.
Updating the Communication Control Toolkit server
On the Communication Control Toolkit server, after you change the Contact Center Manager Server IP address, you must update the HOSTS file if you do not have a DNS server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1177
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on the Communication Control Toolkit server with the new IP address. If you are using a DNS server, proceed to “Updating the Communication Control Toolkit server” on page 1177.
1 On the Communication Control Toolkit server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory: <x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor. The HOSTS file consists of a list of IP addresses followed by a server name.
3 Update the file to reflect the new IP address of the co-resident server.
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
Updating the Communication Control Toolkit serverIf the License Manager server is co-resident with the Contact Center Manager Server, use the following procedure to configure the License Manager IP address for the Communication Control Toolkit server.
1 Log on to the Communication Control Toolkit server.
2 Open the NCCT 6.0 Console by clicking Start > All Programs > Nortel > Communication Control Toolkit > NCCT 6.0 Console.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
1178 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
3 Expand NCCT Admin.
4 In the right pane of the NCCT 6.0 Console, double-click CCT Server.
Result: The CCT Server Properties dialog box appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1179
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
5 Click the Licensing tab.
Result: The Licensing page appears.
6 Under Primary License Manager Server, in the IP Address box, type the new IP address.
7 Click File > Exit to close the NCCT 6.0 Console.
If prompted, save the Console settings.
Changing the TAPI SP host addressIf your Communication Control Toolkit server Telephony Application Programming Interface (TAPI) points to your Contact Center Manager Server, change the IP address in the TAPI Meridian 1 configuration.
1180 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
1 From the Start menu, select All Programs > Nortel > Symposium TAPI Provider > Configure Database.
Result: The Symposium TAPI SP for Meridian 1 Configuration window appears.
2 Click the Meridian 1 Host tab.
3 In the Host Address box, type the new Nortel server subnet IP address for the Contact Center Manager Server.
4 Click OK.
Restart all Communication Control Toolkit servicesRestart all services, including Telephony, ACDProxy, and all Communication Control Toolkit services.
1 From the Start menu, select All Programs > Nortel > Communication Control Toolkit > NCCT 6.0 Console.
2 Expand NCCT Maintenance.
3 Select Services.
4 In the right pane, double-click Services.
Result: The Services Properties dialog box appears.
5 Click Restart All.
6 Click OK.
7 Click File > Exit to close the NCCT 6.0 Console.
If prompted, save the Console settings.
Updating the Contact Center Multimedia server
On the Contact Center Multimedia server, after you change the Contact Center Manager Server IP address, you must update the HOSTS file if you do not have a DNS server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1181
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on the Contact Center Multimedia server with the new IP address.
1 On the Contact Center Multimedia server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory: <x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor. The HOSTS file consists of a list of IP addresses followed by a server name.
3 Update the file to reflect the new IP address of the co-resident server.
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
1182 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
Change the Contact Center Manager Administration server name
You can change the Contact Center Manager Administration server name if the new server name meets the following requirements:
The name cannot be the same as any other computer or domain name in the network.
The name must contain 6 to 15 characters (A through Z, 0 through 9).
The first character of the name must be alphabetical.
No other characters are allowed. For example, the name cannot include any underscores (_).
After you change the Contact Center Manager Administration Server name, you must also update the other servers in the Contact Center suite to ensure the servers work together. Complete the following tasks described in this section:
1. Change the Contact Center Manager Administration server name in Windows.
2. If you have a Domain Name Service (DNS) server in your network, update the DNS with the IP address of your Contact Center Manager Server.
3. If you have SU03 or earlier, run the ChangeSOAPSrv utility.
4. Reset the IUSR_SWC account to reflect a new server name.
5. Reset the iceAdmin password.
6. Ensure the new server name is updated for client PCs.
7. On the client PCs, update the browsers and shared folders for exporting scheduled reports with the new Contact Center Manager Administration server name.
8. On the Communication Control Toolkit server, update the HOSTS file.
9. On the Contact Center Multimedia server, update the HOSTS file and the server settings.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1183
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
Changing the Contact Center Manager Administration server name in Windows
1 On the Contact Center Manager Administration server, select Start > Control Panel > System.
2 Click the Computer Name tab.
3 Click Change.
4 Enter the new server name.
5 Click OK.
Result: The system prompts you to restart the server.
6 Click Yes.
Result: The server restarts.
Changing the Domain Name Service server
If you configure a Domain Name Service (DNS) server for name resolution in your network, you must contact your local network prime to update the DNS with the new computer name.
To verify that the new IP address is up to date on the DNS, use the ping <server name> DOS command with the new server name to confirm that the system responds with the corresponding IP address.
Running the ChangeSOAPSrv utility
If you have SU04 or later, this procedure is not applicable. This procedure is required only for SU03 or earlier.
After you change the server name, SOAP processes do not function properly (because they still refer to the old server name), and you cannot work with the components that require SOAP functionality, such as Configuration.
1 On the Contact Center Manager Administration server, double-click the Configuration component.
2 When you receive a pop-up message indicating that you must run the ChangeSOAPSrv utility, note the path that appears in the message.
1184 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
If you close the message, you can make it reappear by launching the same Contact Center Manager Administration component again (for example, Configuration).
3 On the Contact Center Manager Administration server, open a command prompt and navigate to the directory C:\Program Files\Nortel Networks\WClient\Apps\Supportutil, where C is the drive on which Contact Center Manager Administration is installed.
4 At the prompt, type the following text (which includes the path that appears in the pop-up message):
ChangeSOAPSrv C:\Program Files\Nortel Networks\WClient\Apps\Common\SOAP;<server name>
where <server name> is the name of the server, or the fully qualified domain name, if this is what you use as the Contact Center Manager Administration default URL (for example, <server name>.<domain name>.com).
5 Press Enter.
Result: A window appears, showing the updated SOAP files.
6 Start the Configuration component again to verify the component opens with no error messages.
Resetting the IUSR_SWC account to reflect the new server name
1 On the Contact Center Manager Administration server, click Start > All Programs > Administrative Tools > Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager.
Result: The Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager window appears.
2 In the tree, click the plus sign (+) beside <Computer_Name> (local computer).
Result: The heading expands to reveal a series of folders.
3 Click the plus sign (+) beside the Web Sites folder.
Result: The folder expands.
4 Right-click Default Web Site, and then select Properties from the menu.
Result: The Default Web Site Properties dialog box appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1185
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
5 Click the Directory Security tab.
Result: The Directory Security page appears.
6 Under the Authentication and access control heading, click Edit.
Result: The Authentication Methods dialog box appears.
7 Click Browse.
Result: The Select User dialog box appears.
1186 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
8 Click Advanced.
Result: The Select User dialog box expands.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1187
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
9 Click Find Now.
Result: The list of all the user accounts configured on the server appears.
1188 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
10 From the list of user accounts, select the IUSR_SWC account, and then click OK.
Result: The Select User dialog box reappears with the IUSR_SWC account listed at the bottom.
11 Click OK.
Result: The Authentication Methods dialog box reappears, with the IUSR_SWC user account shown.
12 In the Password box, type the same password that you originally used for this account when you configured it.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1189
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
13 Click OK.
Result: The Confirm Password dialog box appears.
14 Type the password again, and then click OK.
Result: The system records the password.
15 Click OK to save your changes.
Resetting the iceAdmin password
1 Click Start > All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Manager Administration > Configuration.
2 In the left pane, click Nortel Networks.
Result: The Nortel Networks Applications Configuration window appears.
1190 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
3 Click IceAdmin Password Change.
Result: The iceAdmin Password Change dialog box appears.
4 In the Old Password box, type the old password.
5 In the New Password box, reenter the old password for the iceAdmin user account. This resets the iceAdmin password.
6 In the Confirm Password box, type the password again.
7 If your Contact Center Manager Administration server is a member of an active domain, the Domain Account option is enabled on the iceAdmin Password Change window.
8 If you are not going to export scheduled reports to a domain network PC, or if the Domain Account button is disabled, proceed to “Changing the server name in Contact Center Manager Administration” on page 1160.
OR
If you are going to export scheduled reports to a domain network PC, proceed to “Exporting scheduled reports” on page 1159.
Exporting scheduled reports
This procedure is a continuation of the previous procedure.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1191
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
1 To export scheduled reports to a domain network PC, click Domain Account.
You can use the domain account setup function of the iceAdmin Password Change window to reset the domain account password if the administrator changes it.
Result: The Optional Domain Account Setup dialog box appears.
2 From the Select Domain Name list, select the name of the domain to add.
3 In the Enter Domain Account box, type the domain account.
Obtain the domain account name and password from your network administrator.
4 In the Enter Domain Account Password box, type the domain account password.
You must enter the correct domain account password. If the password is incorrect, the system does not proceed.
5 In the Confirm Domain Account Password box, retype the domain account password.
6 Click OK.
Result: The iceAdmin Password Change window reappears and activates all scheduled reports using the domain account instead of the local iceAdmin account.
7 Click OK.
Result: The system verifies that you typed the same password both times, and then resets the password in all required components.
1192 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
Ensure the new server name is updated for client PCs
You must ensure that when you change the name of any server with Contact Center Manager Administration clients, the HOSTS file on all of the client PCs is updated to reflect the new name.
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you have a Domain Name Service (DNS) server for name resolution, you need not update the HOSTS file for name resolution and you can proceed with “Updating client PC browsers and shared folders” on page 1193.
1 On the client PC, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory: <x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor. The HOSTS file consists of a list of IP addresses followed by a server name.
3 Update the file to reflect the new name of the Contact Center Manager Administration server.
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1193
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
Updating client PC browsers and shared folders
After you change the Contact Center Manager Administration server name, you must update all Contact Center Manager Administration client PCs to reference the new Contact Center Manager Administration server name in the browser.
If you created a shared folder for exporting scheduled report export files on the Contact Center Manager Administration server, after you change the Contact Center Manager Administration server name you must update the new name of the server for all scheduled jobs. Ensure you define the output options to include the new name of the co-resident server.
1 Log on to the Contact Center Manager Administration server as webadmin.
2 Double-click Historical Reporting.
3 In the Historical Reporting main window, on the system tree, click the server under which you want to modify the reports.
4 For each report associated with the co-resident server, perform the following steps:
a. Right-click the report name.
Result: The Report Properties window appears.
b. Click the Output Options heading to reveal the output options boxes.
1194 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
c. Select the Output to file check box to send the report to a shared folder.
d. In the Output path box, update the path of the report to reflect the new IP address of the co-resident server.
The path format is \\[computer name]\[shared folder name]\[file name], without the file extension. If you change the name of the Contact Center Manager Administration folder, you must change the computer name portion of the path.
e. Click Save Report to save your user-defined report.
f. Click Activate to activate the report schedule.
g. Close the report.
Updating the Communication Control Toolkit server
On the Communication Control Toolkit server, after you change the Contact Center Manager Administration server name, you must update the HOSTS file if you do not have a DNS server.
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on the Communication Control Toolkit server with the new computer name. If you do have a DNS server, continue with “Updating the Contact Center Multimedia server” on page 1195.
1 On the Communication Control Toolkit server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory: <x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1195
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
3 Update the file to reflect the new name of the Contact Center Manager Administration server.
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
Updating the Contact Center Multimedia server
On the Contact Center Multimedia server, after you change the Contact Center Manager Administration Server name, you must update the HOSTS file if you do not have a DNS server and configure the server properties.
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on the Contact Center Multimedia server with the new computer name. If you do have a DNS server continue with “Configuring the server settings” on page 1196.
1 On the Contact Center Multimedia server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory: <x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
1196 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
3 Update the file to reflect the new name of the Contact Center Manager Administration server.
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
Configuring the server settings
1 Log on to the Contact Center Multimedia server.
2 Log on to the Contact Center Multimedia Administrator using an administration user ID and password.
3 In the Contact Center Multimedia Administrator window, expand Contact Center Multimedia.
4 Expand General Administration.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1197
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
5 Double-click Server Settings.
Result: The Server Settings window appears.
6 Click Contact Center Manager Administrator Server to select it.
7 Click Edit.
Result: The Server Properties dialog box appears.
8 In the Server Name box, change the name of the Contact Center Manager Administration server.
9 Click Save.
Result: A warning appears describing potential errors for changing this server. Click OK to accept.
1198 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
10 Restart the Multimedia services using the following steps:
a. On the Start menu, click All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Multimedia Server > CCMM Services Control.
Result: The CCMM Service Control window appears.
b. Click Stop All.
c. Click Start All.
d. Click Exit to close the CCMM Service Control window.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1199
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
Change the Contact Center Manager Administration server IP address
Contact Center Manager Administration functions correctly after an IP address change on the Contact Center Manager Administration server.
If you change the IP address of a server in Contact Center Manager Server, it impacts other applications that connect to the server, such as Contact Center Manager Administration. Therefore, after you change the IP address of the Contact Center Manager Administration server, you must update the IP address of the Contact Center Manager Server.
You must complete the following steps:
1. Change the IP address on Contact Center Manager Administration server.
2. If you have a Domain Name Service (DNS) server in your network, update the DNS with the IP address of your Contact Center Manager Server.
3. On the client PCs, update the browsers and shared folders for exporting scheduled reports with the new Contact Center Manager Administration server IP address.
4. On the Communication Control Toolkit server, update the HOSTS file.
5. On the Contact Center Multimedia server, update the HOSTS file.
Changing the IP address on Contact Center Manager Administration server
Before you change the Contact Center Manager Administration IP address, back up the server. For more information about backing up the Contact Center Manager Administration server, see the Nortel Contact Center Manager Administration Installation and Maintenance Guide.
1 On the server, click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Communications > Network & Dial up Connections.
2 Right-click Local Area Connection and select Properties from the menu.
Result: The Local Area Connection Properties dialog box appears.
1200 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
3 On the General page, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and then click Properties.
Result: The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box appears.
4 In the IP Address box, type the new IP address.
5 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box.
6 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box.
7 Restart the Contact Center Manager Administration server.
Changing the Domain Name Service server
If you configure a Domain Name Service (DNS) server for name resolution in your network, you must contact your local network prime to update the DNS with the new IP Address.
To verify that the new IP address is up to date on the DNS, use the ping <server name> DOS command with the server name to confirm that the system responds with the corresponding IP address.
Ensure the IP address is updated for client PCs
You must ensure that when you change the name of any server with Contact Center Manager Administration clients, the HOSTS file on all of the client PCs is updated to reflect the new name.
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you configure a Domain Name Service (DNS) server for IP address resolution you need not update the HOSTS file.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1201
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
1 On the client PC, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory: <x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor. The HOSTS file consists of a list of IP addresses followed by a server name. The HOSTS file in the following figure is a sample and does not indicate exactly how the HOSTS file is configured.
3 Update the file to reflect the new IP address of the Contact Center Manager Administration server.
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
1202 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
Ensure historical report output files reference the correct IP address
After you schedule a historical report to send to a file, if you include the Contact Center Manager Administration server IP address in the output path instead of the server name, you must manually edit the output path after you change the Contact Center Manager Administration server IP address.
1 Log on to the Contact Center Manager Administration server as webadmin.
2 Double-click Historical Reporting.
3 In the Historical Reporting main window, on the system tree, click the server under which you want to modify the reports.
4 For each report associated with the co-resident server, perform the following steps:
a. Right-click the report name.
Result: The Report Properties window appears.
b. Click the Output Options heading to reveal the output options boxes.
c. Select the Output to file check box to send the report to a shared folder.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1203
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
d. In the Output path box, update the path of the report to reflect the new IP address of the co-resident server.
The path format is \\[computer name]\[shared folder name]\[file name], without the file extension. If you change the name of the Contact Center Manager Administration folder, you must change the computer name portion of the path.
e. Click Save Report to save your user-defined report.
f. Click Activate to activate the report schedule.
g. Close the report.
Updating the Communication Control Toolkit server
On the Communication Control Toolkit server, after you change the Contact Center Manager Administration server IP address, you must update the HOSTS file if you do not have a DNS server.
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on Communication Control Toolkit server with the new IP address. If you do have a DNS server, you are finished updating the servers for the IP address change on Contact Center Manager Administration server.
1 On the Communication Control Toolkit server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory: <x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor.
3 Update the file to reflect the new IP address of the Contact Center Manager Administration server.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
1204 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
Updating the Contact Center Multimedia server
On the Contact Center Multimedia server, after you change the Contact Center Manager Administration server IP address, you must update the HOSTS file if you do not have a DNS server and configure the server properties.
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on the Contact Center Multimedia server with the new IP address.
1 On the Contact Center Multimedia server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory: <x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor.
3 Update the file to reflect the new IP address of the Contact Center Manager Administration server.
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1205
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
1206 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
Change the Communication Control Toolkit server name
You can change the Communication Control Toolkit server name if the new server name meets the following requirements:
The name cannot be the same as any other computer or domain name in the network.
The name must contain 6 to 15 characters (A through Z, 0 through 9).
The first character of the name must be alphabetical.
No other characters are allowed. For example, the name cannot include any underscores (_).
After you change the Communication Control Toolkit server name, you must also update the other servers in the Contact Center suite to ensure the servers work together. Complete the following tasks described in this section:
1. Change the name of the Communication Control Toolkit server.
2. If you have a Domain Name Service (DNS) server in your network, update the DNS with the name of your Communication Control Toolkit server.
3. On the Communication Control Toolkit server, configure the HOSTS file, the local Windows users, the Contact Management Framework configuration, and the user mappings.
4. Configure Contact Center Manager Server to use the new Communication Control Toolkit server name.
5. If you use Contact Center Multimedia, change the name of the Communication Control Toolkit server on the Contact Center Multimedia server.
6. If you are running Contact Center Agent Desktop on the Communication Control Toolkit server for the telephony toolbar, update the Contact Center Agent Desktop on the client machines.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1207
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
Changing the Communication Control Toolkit server name on the operating system
1 On the Contact Center License Server, select Start > Control Panel > System.
2 Click the Computer Name tab.
3 Click Change.
4 Enter the new server name.
5 Click OK.
Result: The system prompts you to restart the server.
6 Click Yes.
Result: The server restarts.
Changing the Domain Name Service server
If you configure a Domain Name Service (DNS) server for name resolution in your network, you must contact your local network prime to update the DNS with the new computer name.
To verify that the new IP address is up to date on the DNS, use the ping <server name> DOS command with the new server name to confirm that the system responds with the corresponding IP address.
Changing the server name on the Communication Control Toolkit server
You must update the HOSTS file, if you do not have a DNS server on the Communication Control Toolkit server and configure the Communication Control Toolkit Windows users.
1208 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on the Communication Control Toolkit server with the new computer name. If you do have a DNS server, the process of updating the server names is complete.
1 On the Communication Control Toolkit server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory:
<x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor. The HOSTS file consists of a list of IP addresses followed by a server name.
3 Update the file to reflect the new name of the Communication Control Toolkit server.
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
Configuring the local Communication Control Toolkit Windows users
If the Communication Control Toolkit server uses local Windows users as Communication Control Toolkit users, you must reconfigure these users to use the new name of the Communication Control Toolkit server.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1209
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
For example, if the Communication Control Toolkit server is using the user ids OldName\User1 and OldName\User2, you must reconfigure these local users to use the new name of the Communication Control Toolkit server.
Nortel recommends that you rename the existing users, rather than create new users. Rename the existing users to keep the appropriate resource mappings of the old user name.
Configuring the Contact Management Framework settings
You must update the Contact Management Framework component in Communication Control Toolkit with the new Contact Center Manager Server name.
1 Log on to the Communication Control Toolkit server.
2 Open the NCCT 6.0 Console by clicking Start > All Programs > Nortel > Communication Control Toolkit > NCCT 6.0 Console.
3 Expand NCCT Admin.
4 Double-click CCT Server in the right pane of the NCCT 6.0 Console.
Result: The CCT Server Properties dialog box appears.
1210 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
5 Click the CMF Configuration tab.
Result: The CMF Configuration page appears.
6 In the CCT Server Name box, confirm the new Communication Control Toolkit server name is shown.
7 In the CCMS Server Name box, type the name of the Contact Center Manager Server.
8 Click Apply to save the Contact Management Framework settings.
9 Click OK to close the window.
10 Restart the services on the Communication Control Toolkit server by performing the following steps:
a. Log on to the Communication Control Toolkit server as Administrator.
b. On the NCCT 6.0 Console, expand NCCT Maintenance.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1211
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
c. In the left pane, click Services.
d. In the right pane of the NCCT 6.0 Console, double-click Services.
Result: The Services dialog box appears.
e. Click to stop the services.
f. Click to restart the services.
g. The services are restarted.
Mapping the new local Communication Control Toolkit users
You must ensure that the new local Communication Control Toolkit users are mapped to the appropriate addresses, terminals and groups.
For more information about mapping users, see the Communication Control Toolkit Installation and Maintenance Guide.
1212 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
Configuring Contact Center Manager Server
1 On the Contact Center Manager Server, select Nortel Contact Center > Manager Server > Server Setup Configuration.
2 Click the CCT Server tab.
3 In the CCT Host Name box, type the new name of the Communication Control Toolkit server.
4 Click Apply.
Configuring the Contact Center Multimedia server
When you change the name of the Communication Control Toolkit server, you must update the Contact Center Multimedia server.
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on the Contact Center Multimedia server with the new computer name. If you do have a DNS server, continue with “Configuring the server settings” on page 1213.
1 On the Contact Center Multimedia server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory:
<x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor. The HOSTS file consists of a list of IP addresses followed by a server name.
3 Update the file to reflect the new name of the Communication Control Toolkit server.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1213
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
Configuring the server settings
1 Log on to the Contact Center Multimedia Administrator.
2 In the Contact Center Multimedia Administrator window, expand Contact Center Multimedia.
3 Expand General Administration.
4 Double-click Server Settings.
Result: The Server Settings dialog box appears.
5 Click Communications Control Toolkit Server to select it.
1214 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
6 Click Edit.
Result: The Server Properties dialog box appears.
7 In the Server Name box, change the name of the Communication Control Toolkit server.
8 In the Server Port box, change the port number of the server as required. The default server port depends on the server you are configuring.
9 Click Save.
Result: A message box appears describing potential errors for changing this server.
10 Click OK to accept.
11 Restart the Multimedia services using the following steps:
a. On the Windows Start menu, click All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Multimedia Server > CCMM Services Control.
Result: The CCMM Service Control window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1215
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
b. Click Stop All.
c. Click Start All.
d. Click Exit to close the CCMM Service Control window.
Configuring the Contact Center Agent Desktop
The Contact Center Agent Desktop configuration file must be updated with the new Communication Control Toolkit server name. You must change the CCTSERVER key in the ccad.exe.config file in the Nortel\Contact Center Multimedia\Agent Desktop directory on the Contact Center Multimedia server.
1216 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
Change the Communication Control Toolkit IP address
After you change the Communication Control Toolkit server name, you must also update the other servers in the Contact Center suite to ensure the servers work together. Complete the following tasks described in this section:
1. Change the Communication Control Toolkit server IP address on the operating system
2. If you have a Domain Name Service (DNS) server in your network, update the DNS with the name of your Communication Control Toolkit server.
3. On the Communication Control Toolkit server, configure the HOSTS file, the local Windows users, the Contact Management Framework configuration, and the user mappings.
4. Configure Contact Center Manager Server to use the new Communication Control Toolkit server name.
5. If you use Contact Center Multimedia, change the name of the Communication Control Toolkit server on the Contact Center Multimedia server.
6. If you are running Contact Center Agent Desktop on the Communication Control Toolkit server for the telephony toolbar, update the Contact Center Agent Desktop on the client machines.
Changing the Communication Control Toolkit server IP address on the operating system
Complete the following procedure if you change the Communication Control Toolkit IP address.
1 Log on to the Communication Control Toolkit server.
2 Stop the services.
3 From the Start menu, select Control Panel.
4 Right-click Network Connections.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1217
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
5 Right-click the LAN connection, and then click Properties.
6 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and then click Properties.
7 Enter the new IP address, and then click OK.
8 In the Properties window, click Close.
9 Restart the services.
Changing the Domain Name Service server
If you configure a Domain Name Service (DNS) server for name resolution in your network, you must contact your local network prime to update the DNS with the new computer IP address.
To verify that the new IP address is up to date on the DNS, use the ping <server name> DOS command with the new server name to confirm that the system responds with the corresponding IP address.
Changing the server name on the Communication Control Toolkit server
You must update the HOSTS file, if you do not have a DNS server on the Communication Control Toolkit server.
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on the Communication Control Toolkit server with the new computer name. If you do have a DNS server, the process of updating the server names is complete.
1 On the Communication Control Toolkit server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory:
<x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
1218 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor. The HOSTS file consists of a list of IP addresses followed by a server name.
3 Update the file to reflect the new name of the Communication Control Toolkit server.
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
Configuring the Contact Center Multimedia server
When you change the name of the Communication Control Toolkit server, you must update the Contact Center Multimedia server.
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on the Contact Center Multimedia server with the new computer name. If you do have a DNS server, continue with “Configuring the server settings” on page 1213.
1 On the Contact Center Multimedia server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory:
<x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1219
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor. The HOSTS file consists of a list of IP addresses followed by a server name.
3 Update the file to reflect the new name of the Communication Control Toolkit server.
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
1220 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
Change the Contact Center Multimedia server name
You can change the Contact Center Multimedia server name if the new server name meets the following requirements:
The name cannot be the same as any other computer or domain name in the network.
After you change the Contact Center Multimedia server name, you must also update the other servers in the Contact Center suite to ensure the servers work together. Complete the following tasks described in this section:
1. Change the name on the Contact Center Multimedia server.
2. Update the name on the DNS server.
3. Update the HOSTS file on the Contact Center Multimedia server.
4. Update the e-mail attachment folders for Contact Center Multimedia.
5. If you are using an external Web server for Web communications, update the external Web server with the new server name.
6. Update the Contact Center Agent Desktop clients with the new server name.
7. Change the HOSTS file on the Contact Center Manager Administration Server.
8. Add and configure the Contact Center Multimedia server in Contact Center Manager Administration.
Changing the Contact Center Multimedia server name on the operating system
1 On the Contact Center License Server, select Start > Control Panel > System.
2 Click the Computer Name tab.
3 Click Change.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1221
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
4 Enter the new server name.
5 Click OK.
Result: The system prompts you to restart the server.
6 Click Yes.
Result: The server restarts.
Updating the Domain Name Service server
If you configure a Domain Name Service (DNS) server for name resolution in your network, you must contact your local network prime to update the DNS with the new computer name.
To verify that the new IP address is up to date on the DNS, use the ping <server name> DOS command with the new server name to confirm that the system responds with the corresponding IP address.
Changing the Contact Center Multimedia server name
When you change the Contact Center Multimedia server name, you must update the HOSTS file if you do not have a DNS server and configure the server settings to reflect the new server name.
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on the Contact Center Multimedia server with the new server name. If you do have a DNS server, continue with“Configuring the Contact Center Multimedia server name” on page 1223.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
1222 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
1 On the Contact Center Multimedia server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory:
<x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor. The HOSTS file consists of a list of IP addresses followed by a server name. A sample HOSTS file is provided in the following figure as a guideline, but is not intended to indicate exactly how the HOSTS file is configured.
3 Update the file to reflect the new name of the Contact Center Multimedia server.
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1223
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
Configuring the Contact Center Multimedia server name
1 In the Contact Center Multimedia Administrator window, expand Contact Center Multimedia.
2 Expand General Administration.
3 Double-click Server Settings.
Result: The Server Settings dialog box appears.
4 Click Contact Center Multimedia Server to select it.
5 Click Edit.
Result: The Server Properties dialog box appears.
6 In the Server Name box, type the name of the Contact Center Multimedia server.
7 In the Server Port box, change the port number of the server as required. The default server port is 1972.
8 To change the MCMC event port number, type the new number in the MCMC Event Port box. The default MCMC event port number is 7999.
9 Click Save.
Result: A warning appears describing potential errors for changing this server. Click OK to accept.
10 Click Close to close the Server Settings dialog box.
11 On the Contact Center Multimedia server, navigate to the path D:\Nortel\Contact Center Multimedia\Agent Desktop\ccad.exe.config.
12 On the appropriate line of the text file, replace the name of the old Contact Center Multimedia server with the new Contact Center Multimedia server.
1224 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
13 On the Contact Center Multimedia server, navigate to the path D:\Nortel\Contact Center Multimedia\Outbound\Manager\ocmt.exe.config.
14 On the appropriate line of the text file, replace the name of the old Contact Center Multimedia server with the new Contact Center Multimedia server.
15 On the Contact Center Multimedia server, navigate to the path D:\Nortel\Contact Center Multimedia\Common utilities\db.propertiesg.
16 On the appropriate line of the text file, replace the name of the old Contact Center Multimedia server with the new Contact Center Multimedia server.
17 Restart the Multimedia services using the following steps:
a. On the Windows Start menu, click All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Multimedia Server > CCMM Services Control.
Result: The CCMM Service Control window appears.
b. Click Stop All.
c. Click Start All.
d. Click Exit to close the CCMM Service Control window.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1225
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
Updating the e-mail attachment folders for Contact Center Multimedia
If you are licensed for e-mail messages in your contact center, you must update the e-mail attachment folders.
1 In the Multimedia Administrator, expand Contact Center Multimedia.
2 Expand E-mail Administration.
3 Double-click E-mail Configuration.
Result: The E-Mail Configuration window appears.
4 In the Attachment Files section, update the four path names to show the new server name.
5 Click Save.
6 Close the Contact Center Multimedia Administrator.
7 Restart the Multimedia services using the following steps:
a. On the Windows Start menu, click All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Multimedia Server > CCMM Services Control.
Result: The CCMM Service Control window appears.
1226 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
b. Click Stop All.
c. Click Start All.
d. Click Exit to close the CCMM Service Control window.
Configuring the external Web server
If you have an external Web server in your contact center, you must update two files and remove the cached files after you change the name of the Contact Center Multimedia server.
The following procedure describes how to perform the update for .jsp files with Apache Tomcat. If you are using a different servlet engine (for example, JRun or WebLogic) or a different technology (ASP.NET), you must use the standard procedures for your environment.
The sample customer Web installation contains the folders CI_Sample_Website and WebComms. Your custom interface folders can have different names. Ensure that you use your own folder names to locate the web.xml and .jsp files.
1 Stop Apache Tomcat using the following steps:
a. On the Start menu of your external Web server, click All Programs > Administrative Tools > Services.
b. Right-click Apache Tomcat service, and click Stop.
c. Close the services window.
2 On the external Web server, navigate to ..\webapps\CI_Sample_Website\WEB-INF.
3 Open the web.xml file in Notepad or another text editor.
4 Locate the text string <param-name>CCMM_HOSTNAME</param-name>. The following text string is <param-value>servername</param-value>, where servername is the old server name.
5 In the <param-value> line, replace the old server name with the name of the new server.
6 Save and close the file.
7 On the external Web server, navigate to ..\webapps\WebComms\WEB-INF.
8 Open the web.xml file in Notepad or another text editor.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1227
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
9 Locate the text string <param-name>CCMM_HOSTNAME</param-name>. The following text string is <param-value>servername</param-value>, where servername is the old server name.
10 In the <param-value> line, replace the old server name with the name of the new server.
11 Save and close the file.
12 Delete all files in the following folders:
..Program Files\Apache Software Foundation\Tomcat 5.5\Catalina\localhost\CI_Sample_Website\org\apache\jsp
..Program Files\Apache Software Foundation\Tomcat 5.5\Catalina\localhost\WebComms\org\apache\jsp
13 Start Apache Tomcat using the following steps:
a. On the Start menu of your external Web server, click All Programs > Administrative Tools > Services.
b. Right-click Apache Tomcat service, and click Start.
c. Close the services window.
Configure the Contact Center Agent Desktop
Clients that access the Contact Center Agent Desktop must be configured with the new Contact Center Multimedia server name. Agents access the desktop application using the URL http://<servername>/agentdesktop/ccad.exe. You must update the <servername> to reflect the new name of the server.
Updating Contact Center Manager Administration
On the Contact Center Manager Administration server, after you change the Contact Center Multimedia server name, you must update the HOSTS file and configure the new server name in the Multimedia Administrator.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
1228 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on the Contact Center Manager Administration server with the new server name. If you do have a DNS server, continue with “Updating the server information in Contact Center Manager Administration” on page 1228.
1 On the Contact Center Administration server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory:
<x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor. The HOSTS file consists of a list of IP addresses followed by a server name.
3 Update the file to reflect the new name of the Contact Center Multimedia server.
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
Updating the server information in Contact Center Manager AdministrationYou must configure Contact Center Manager Administration with the name and IP address of the renamed Contact Center Multimedia server. You can configure more than one Contact Center Multimedia server in Contact Center Manager Administration, but only one Contact Center Multimedia server can be active at a time.
You must log on as the Web administrator to add and configure the Contact Center Multimedia server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1229
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
1 In a Web browser, type http://<CCMA_ServerName>, where <CCMA_ServerName> is the name of the server where Contact Center Manager Administration is installed.
2 Log on as the Web administrator.
3 Click Configuration.
4 From the Server menu, select Add Server.
Result: The Contact Center Manager server Properties window appears.
5 In the Server Name box, type the name of the Contact Center Multimedia server.
Result: The system automatically completes the IP address and display name.
6 In the Login ID box, type the logon ID for the reporting user name for the server. The ID for the Contact Center Multimedia server is mmReport.
7 In the Password box, type the password for the reporting user name for the server. The default user password is mmRep.
8 From the Type list, select CCMM.
1230 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
9 Click Submit.
10 In the left pane, select the Contact Center Manager Server with which you want to associate the Contact Center Multimedia server.
11 Right-click the Contact Center Manager Server and then click Edit Properties.
12 Under Associated Reporting Server, select the check box next to the current active Contact Center Multimedia server name.
13 Click Submit.
14 On the Launchpad menu, click Logout.
Updating the Communication Control Toolkit server
When you change the Contact Center Multimedia server name, you must update the HOSTS file on the Communication Control Toolkit server.
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on the Communication Control Toolkit server with the new server name. If you do have a DNS server, the process of updating the server names is complete.
1 On the Communication Control Toolkit server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory:
<x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor. The HOSTS file consists of a list of IP addresses followed by a server name.
3 Update the file to reflect the new name of the Contact Center Multimedia server.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1231
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
1232 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
Change the Contact Center Multimedia IP address
You can change the Contact Center Multimedia server IP address.
After you change the Contact Center Multimedia server IP address, you must also update the other servers in the Contact Center suite to ensure the servers work together. Complete the following tasks described in this section:
1. On the Contact Center Multimedia server, change the IP address.
2. Update the name on the DNS server.
3. Update the HOSTS file on the Contact Center Multimedia server.
4. On the Contact Center Manager Administration server, change the HOSTS file, if required.
5. Add and configure the Contact Center Multimedia server in Contact Center Manager Administration.
6. On the Communication Control Toolkit server, change the HOSTS file, if required.
Changing the Contact Center Multimedia server IP address on the operating system
Complete the following procedure if you change the Contact Center Multimedia IP address.
1 Log on to the Contact Center Multimedia server.
2 Stop the Multimedia services using the following steps:
a. On the Windows Start menu, click All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Multimedia Server > CCMM Services Control.
Result: The CCMM Service Control window appears.
b. Click Stop All.
c. Click Exit to close the CCMM Service Control window.
3 From the Start menu, select Control Panel.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1233
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
4 Right-click Network Connections.
5 Right-click the LAN connection, and then click Properties.
6 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and then click Properties.
7 Enter the new IP address, and then click OK.
8 In the Properties window, click Close.
9 Restart the Multimedia services using the following steps:
a. On the Windows Start menu, click All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Multimedia Server > CCMM Services Control.
Result: The CCMM Service Control window appears.
b. Click Start All.
c. Click Exit to close the CCMM Service Control window.
Updating the Domain Name Service server
If you configure a Domain Name Service (DNS) server for name resolution in your network, you must contact your local network prime to update the DNS with the new computer name.
To verify that the new IP address is up to date on the DNS, use the ping <server name> DOS command with the new server name to confirm that the system responds with the corresponding IP address.
Changing the Contact Center Multimedia server IP address
When you change the Contact Center Multimedia server IP address, you must update the HOSTS file if you do not have a DNS server and configure the server settings to reflect the new server name.
1234 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on the Contact Center Multimedia server with the new server name. If you do have a DNS server, continue with“Configuring the Contact Center Multimedia server name” on page 1223.
1 On the Contact Center Multimedia server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory:
<x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor. The HOSTS file consists of a list of IP addresses followed by a server name.
3 Update the file to reflect the new IP address of the Contact Center Multimedia server.
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
Updating Contact Center Manager Administration
On the Contact Center Manager Administration server, after you change the Contact Center Multimedia IP address, you must update the HOSTS file and configure the new server name in the Multimedia Administrator.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1235
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on the Contact Center Manager Administration server with the new server name. If you do have a DNS server, continue with “Updating the server information in Contact Center Manager Administration” on page 1228.
1 On the Contact Center Administration server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory:
<x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor. The HOSTS file consists of a list of IP addresses followed by a server name.
3 Update the file to reflect the new IP address of the Contact Center Multimedia server.
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
Updating the server information in Contact Center Manager AdministrationYou must configure Contact Center Manager Administration with the name and IP address of the renamed Contact Center Multimedia server. You can configure more than one Contact Center Multimedia server in Contact Center Manager Administration, but only one Contact Center Multimedia server can be active at a time.
You must log on as the Web administrator to add and configure the Contact Center Multimedia server.
1236 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
1 In a Web browser, type http://<CCMA_ServerName>, where <CCMA_ServerName> is the name of the server where Contact Center Manager Administration is installed.
2 Log on as the Web administrator.
3 Click Configuration.
4 From the Server menu, select Add Server.
Result: The Contact Center Manager server Properties window appears.
5 In the Server Name box, type the name of the Contact Center Multimedia server.
Result: The system automatically completes the IP address and display name.
6 In the Login ID box, type the logon ID for the reporting user name for the server. The ID for the Contact Center Multimedia server is mmReport.
7 In the Password box, type the password for the reporting user name for the server. The default user password is mmRep.
8 From the Type list, select CCMM.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1237
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
9 Click Submit.
10 In the left pane, select the Contact Center Manager Server with which you want to associate the Contact Center Multimedia server.
11 Right-click the Contact Center Manager Server and then click Edit Properties.
12 Under Associated Reporting Server, select the check box next to the current active Contact Center Multimedia server name.
13 Click Submit.
14 On the Launchpad menu, click Logout.
Updating the Communication Control Toolkit server
When you change the Contact Center Multimedia IP address, you must update the HOSTS file on the Communication Control Toolkit server.
Updating the HOSTS fileIf you do not have a DNS server, you must manually update the HOSTS file on the Communication Control Toolkit server with the new server name. If you do have a DNS server, the process of updating the server names is complete.
1 On the Communication Control Toolkit server, browse to the HOSTS file provided with the Windows Server 2003 installation in the following directory:
<x>:\Windows\system32\drivers\etc
2 Right-click the HOSTS file and open the file with a text editor (for example, Notepad) to modify the host tables.
Result: The HOSTS file appears in the text editor. The HOSTS file consists of a list of IP addresses followed by a server name.
3 Update the file to reflect the new IP address of the Contact Center Multimedia server.
ATTENTIONIncorrectly modifying a host table can cause extensive network problems. Before you modify host tables, review the information about hosts in the supporting documentation for Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
1238 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
If you do not see a server name for the Contact Center Manager Server listed in the HOSTS file, a DNS server is configured in your network for name resolution. You do not need to update the HOSTS file.
4 Click File > Save to save your changes.
Save the file without an extension so that your system recognizes the changes.
Result: The system automatically reads the new settings.
5 Close all windows to complete the procedure.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1239
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
Change the Contact Center Multimedia Standby server name
You can change the Contact Center Multimedia Standby server name if the new server name meets the following requirements:
The name cannot be the same as any other computer or domain name in the network.
If you change the Contact Center Multimedia Standby server name, and your Standby server is not actively handling contacts, you must also update the other servers in the Contact Center suite to ensure the servers work together when you need to use the Standby server. Complete the following tasks described in this section:
1. Change the server name on the Contact Center Multimedia server.
2. Update the Domain Name Service server.
3. Change the HOSTS file on the Contact Center Manager Administration server.
4. Add and configure the Contact Center Multimedia Standby server in Contact Center Manager Administration.
If your Standby server is currently handling contacts, use the tasks in “Change the Communication Control Toolkit IP address” on page 1216.
Changing the Contact Center Multimedia Standby server name in the operating system
1 On the Contact Center License Server, select Start > Control Panel > System.
2 Click the Computer Name tab.
3 Click Change.
4 Enter the new server name.
5 Click OK.
Result: The system prompts you to restart the server.
1240 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
6 Click Yes.
Result: The server restarts.
Updating the Domain Name Service server
If you configure a Domain Name Service (DNS) server for name resolution in your network, you must contact your local network prime to update the DNS with the new computer name.
To verify that the new IP address is up to date on the DNS, use the ping <server name> DOS command with the new server name to confirm that the system responds with the corresponding IP address.
Changing the Contact Center Multimedia Standby server name
Perform the following steps on the Contact Center Multimedia Standby server.
1 In the Contact Center Multimedia Administrator window, expand Contact Center Multimedia.
2 Expand General Administration.
3 Double-click Server Settings.
Result: The Server Settings dialog box appears.
4 Click Contact Center Multimedia Standby Server to select it.
5 Click Edit.
Result: The Server Properties dialog box appears.
6 In the Server Name box, type the new name of the Contact Center Multimedia Standby server.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1241
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
7 Click Save.
Result: A warning appears describing potential errors for changing this server. Click OK to accept.
8 Click Close to close the Server settings dialog box.
Updating the Contact Center Multimedia server
On the Contact Center Multimedia server, perform the following steps:
1 In the Contact Center Multimedia Administrator window, expand Contact Center Multimedia.
2 Expand General Administration.
3 Double-click Server Settings.
Result: The Server Settings dialog box appears.
4 Click Contact Center Multimedia Server to select it.
5 Click Edit.
Result: The Server Properties dialog box appears.
6 In the Server Name box, type the name of the Contact Center Multimedia server.
7 Click Save.
Result: A warning appears describing potential errors for changing this server. Click OK to accept.
8 Click Contact Center Multimedia Standby Server to select it.
1242 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
9 Click Edit.
Result: The Server Properties dialog box appears.
10 In the Server Name box, type the new name of the Contact Center Multimedia Standby server.
11 Click Save.
Result: A warning appears describing potential errors for changing this server. Click OK to accept.
12 Click Close to close the Server Settings dialog box.
13 Restart the Multimedia services using the following steps:
a. On the Windows Start menu, click All Programs > Nortel Contact Center > Multimedia Server > CCMM Services Control.
Result: The CCMM Service Control window appears.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1243
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
b. Click Stop All.
c. Click Start All.
d. Click Exit to close the CCMM Service Control window.
Updating Contact Center Manager Administration
You must configure Contact Center Manager Administration with the name and IP address of the renamed Contact Center Multimedia Standby server. You can configure more than one Contact Center Multimedia server in Contact Center Manager Administration, but only one Contact Center Multimedia server can be active at a time.
Updating the server information in Contact Center Manager AdministrationYou must log on as the Web administrator to add and configure the Contact Center Multimedia Standby server.
1244 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
1 In a Web browser, type http://<CCMA_ServerName>, where <CCMA_ServerName> is the name of the server where Contact Center Manager Administration is installed.
2 Log on as the Web administrator.
3 Click Configuration.
4 On the Server menu, select Add Server.
Result: The Contact Center Manager server Properties window appears.
5 In the Server Name box, type the name of the Contact Center Multimedia server.
Result: The system automatically completes the IP address and display name.
6 In the Login ID box, type the logon ID for the reporting user name for the server. The logon ID for the Contact Center Multimedia server is mmReport.
7 In the Password box, type the password for the reporting user name for the server. The default user password is mmRep.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1245
January 2008 Change the names or IP addresses of servers
8 From the Type list, select CCMM.
9 Click Submit.
10 In the left pane, select the Contact Center Manager Server with which you want to associate the Contact Center Multimedia Standby server.
11 Right-click the Contact Center Manager Server and then click Edit Properties.
12 Under Associated Reporting Server, select the check box next to the current active Contact Center Multimedia server name.
13 Click Submit.
14 On the Launchpad menu, click Logout.
ATTENTIONYou must ensure that only the active Multimedia server has a check mark in the box beside the server name.
1246 Standby Server
Change the names or IP addresses of servers Standard 10.12
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1247
Glossary
A accelerator keyA key on a phoneset that an agent can use to place a call quickly. When an agent presses an accelerator key, the system places the call to the configured number associated with the key. For example, if an agent presses the Emergency key, the system places a call to the agent’s supervisor.
ACCESSAn internal protocol used by Contact Center Manager Server to directly control some of the voice services available on the CallPilot or Meridian Mail platform.
access classA collection of access levels that defines the actions a member of the access class can perform within the system. For example, a member of the Administrator access class might be given a collection of Read/Write access levels.
access levelA level of access or permission given to a particular user for a particular application or function. For example, a user might be given View Only access to historical reports.
ACCESS linkA communication channel between Contact Center Manager Server and CallPilot or Meridian Mail.
ACCESS voice portA voice port controlled by the ACCESS link.
ACD callSee automatic call distribution call.
ACD-DNSee automatic call distribution directory number.
1248 Contact Center Standby Server
Standard 10.12
ACD groupSee automatic call distribution group.
ACD routing tableSee automatic call distribution routing table.
ACD subgroupSee automatic call distribution subgroup.
acquired resourceA resource configured on the switch under the control of Contact Center Manager Server. Resources must be configured with matching values on both the switch and Contact Center Manager Server.
activated scriptA script that is processing calls or is ready to process calls. Before you can activate a script, you must first validate it.
active serverIn a system with a Replication Server, the server providing call processing and administration services.
activity codeA number that agents enter on their phoneset during a call. Activity codes provide a way of tracking the time agents spend on various types of incoming calls. They are also known as Line of Business (LOB) codes. For example, the activity code 720 might be used to track sales calls. Agents can then enter 720 on their agent desktop applications during sales calls, and this information can be generated in an Activity Code report.
adapterHardware required to support a particular device. For example, network adapters provide a port for the network wire. Adapters can be expansion boards or part of the computer’s main circuitry.
administratorA user who sets up and maintains Contact Center Manager and Contact Center Multimedia.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1249
January 2008
agentA user who handles inbound and outbound voice calls, e-mail messages, and Web communications.
agent logon IDA unique identification number assigned to a particular agent. The agent uses this number when logging on. The agent ID is not associated with any particular phoneset.
agent priority per skillsetEach agent has a priority per skillset. This priority represents their skill level within the skillset. This priority is used only in queuing the agent in the idle agent queues, thus allowing agents with greater priority in a skillset to be presented with calls before agents of lesser priority. Agent priority per skillset has a range of 1 to 48, with 1 having the greatest priority. Agent priority per skillset is not used to determine which request to present to an idle agent when the agent qualifies for more than one queue request. That presentation is based solely on the calls’ attributes.
agent-to-skillset assignmentA matrix that, when you run it, sets the priority of one or more agents for a skillset. Agent to skillset assignments can be scheduled.
agent-to-supervisor assignmentA matrix that, when you run it, assigns one or more agents to specific supervisors. Agent to supervisor assignments can be scheduled.
AIPAdvanced I/O Processor
aliasSee e-mail alias.
AMLSee Application Module Link.
ANISee automatic Number Identification.
1250 Contact Center Standby Server
Standard 10.12
APISee application program interface.
application1. A logical entity that represents a Contact Center Manager script for reporting purposes. The Master script and each primary script have an associated application. The application has the same name as the script it represents. 2. A program that runs on a computer.
Application Module LinkAn internal protocol used by Contact Center Manager Server to communicate directly with the switch.
application program interfaceA set of routines, protocols, and tools that programmers use to develop software applications. APIs simplify the development process by providing commonly used programming procedures.
application serverThe server on which the Contact Center Manager Administration software is installed. This server acts as the middle layer that communicates with Contact Center Manager Server and makes information available to the client PCs.
associated supervisorA supervisor who is available for an agent if the agent’s reporting supervisor is unavailable. See also reporting supervisor.
automatic call distributionA means of automatically distributing an organization’s incoming calls among a number of answering positions (ACD agents). Automatic call distribution is useful in operations where callers want a service rather than a specific person. Calls are serviced in the order they arrive and are distributed so that the workload at each answering position is approximately equal.
automatic call distribution callA call to an ACD-DN. ACD calls are distributed to agents in an ACD group based on the ACD routing table on the switch. See also automatic call distribution directory number.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1251
January 2008
automatic call distribution directory numberA primary or supplementary DN associated with an ACD group. Calls made to an automatic call distribution directory number are distributed to agents belonging to the group, based on the ACD routing table on the switch.
automatic call distribution groupAn entity defined on the switch for the purpose of call distribution. When a customer dials an ACD group, the call is routed to any agent who is a member of that group.
automatic call distribution routing tableA table configured on the switch that contains a list of ACD-DNs used to define routes for incoming calls. This ensures that incoming calls not processed by Contact Center Manager Server are queued to ACD groups and handled by available agents.
automatic call distribution subgroupAn entity defined on the switch to assign supervisory responsibilities. Each subgroup has one supervisor phoneset and a number of agent phonesets associated with it. Agents can log on to any phoneset within their ACD subgroup. The supervisor must log on to the supervisor phoneset to monitor assigned agents.
automatic Number IdentificationA telephony feature that provides the originating local telephone number of the caller.
auto-responseA message sent to a customer with no agent interaction. An auto-response can be an intelligent response, such as a sales promotion flyer, or an acknowledgement, such as, “We received your e-mail and will respond to you within three days.”
B basic callA simple unfeatured call between two 2500 phonesets, on the same switch, using a four-digit dialing plan.
1252 Contact Center Standby Server
Standard 10.12
BBUABack-to-Back User Agent
C call ageThe amount of time a call waits in the system before being answered by an agent.
call destinationThe site to which an outgoing network call is sent. See also call source.
Calling Line IdentificationAn optional service that identifies the telephone number of the caller. This information can then be used to route the call to the appropriate agent or skillset. The CLID can also be displayed on an agent’s phoneset.
call intrinsicA script element that stores call-related information assigned when a call enters Contact Center Manager Server. See also intrinsic, skillset intrinsic, time intrinsic, traffic intrinsic.
call presentation classA collection of preferences that determines how calls are presented to an agent. A call presentation class specifies whether a break time between calls is allowed, whether an agent can put DN calls on hold for incoming ACD calls, and whether an agent phoneset displays that the agent is reserved for a network call.
call priorityThe priority given to a request for a skillset agent in a QUEUE TO SKILLSET or QUEUE TO NETWORK SKILLSET script element. This priority is used only in queuing a pending request in the pending request queue corresponding to the required skillsets. This allows pending requests with greater priority in a skillset to be presented to agents before calls of lesser priority. Call priority has a range or 1 to 6, with 1 having the greatest priority. Six priorities are used to fully support the many queuing variations provided by existing NACD functionality. Call priority is maintained at target nodes for network call requests.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1253
January 2008
Call Request Queue SizeSets the maximum queue size for network skillsets. When the set maximum is reached, the queue rejects calls. For Network Skill-Based Routing, Call Request Queue Size (CRQS) is configured in Contact Center Manager Administration. If the NACD fallback or the Queue_to_NACD script command is used, CRQS must be configured in LD23 on the switch. See also Flow Control Threshold.
call sourceThe site from which an incoming network call originates. See also call destination.
call treatmentA script element that enables you to provide handling to a call while it is waiting to be answered by a contact center agent. For example, a caller can hear a recorded announcement or music while waiting for an agent.
call variableA script variable that applies to a specific call. A call variable follows the call through the system and is passed from one script to another with the call. See also global variable, script variable.
CallPilotA multimedia messaging system you can use to manage many types of information, including voice messages, fax messages, e-mail messages, telephone calls (including conferencing), calendars, and directories.
campaignSee outbound campaign.
CATChannel Allocation Table
CCRcustomer controlled routing
CDNSee controlled directory number.
1254 Contact Center Standby Server
Standard 10.12
central processing unitThe component of a computer that performs the instructions of computer programs. Also known as a processor or microprocessor.
centum call secondsA measure of call traffic density that represents one call in one channel for 100 seconds in 1 hour.
CLANSee Customer Local Area Network.
CLAN subnetSee enterprise IP network.
CLIDSee Calling Line Identification.
clientThe part of Contact Center Manager Server that runs on a personal computer or workstation and relies on the server to perform some operations. Two types of client are available: Server Utility and Contact Center Manager Administration. See also server.
closed reasonsAn item configured in Contact Center Multimedia to indicate the result of a completed e-mail contact. Agents choose a closed reason, and this information can be generated in a report.
commandA building block used with expressions, variables, and intrinsics to create scripts. Commands perform distinct functions, such as routing a call to a specific destination, playing music to a caller, or disconnecting a caller.
Communication Control ToolkitA client/server application that integrates a telephone on a user’s desktop with client- and server-based applications.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1255
January 2008
Communication Server 1000 Telephony ManagerA Nortel application used for Private Branch Exchange (PBX) management.
Computer Telephony IntegrationAn application that enables a computer to control telephone calls.
Conditionally Toll DeniedAllowed access for calls placed through Basic/Network Alternate Route Selection and Coordinated Dialing Plan.
Contact Center Agent DesktopAn agent tool that contact center agents can use to provide intelligent and personalized customer care. Agents use a personal computer to access the telephony and multimedia functions.
Contact Center ManagerA client/server contact center solution for varied and changing business requirements. It offers a suite of applications that includes call processing and agent handling, management and reporting, networking, and third-party application interfaces.
Contact Center Manager AdministrationA browser-based tool for contact center administrators and supervisors used for managing and configuring a contact center and its users, defining access to data, and viewing real-time and historical reports. The Contact Center Manager Administration software is installed on an application server. See also Contact Center Manager Administration server.
Contact Center Manager Administration serverThe server on which the Contact Center Manager Administration software is installed. This server acts as the middle layer that communicates with Contact Center Manager Server and makes information available to the client PCs.
Contact Center Manager ServerThis server is responsible for functions such as the logic for call processing, call treatment, call handling, call presentation, and the accumulation of data into historical and real-time databases.
1256 Contact Center Standby Server
Standard 10.12
Contact Center Manager Server callA call to a CDN controlled by Contact Center Manager Server. The call is presented to the Incalls key on an agent’s phoneset.
Contact Center Multimedia serverA client/server contact center application that expands inbound telephony capabilities to include outbound voice, e-mail, and Web communications.
Contact Center Standby ServerThe server that contains an up-to-date backup version of the Contact Center Manager Server database for use if the active server fails. The database is kept up-to-date by the Replication Server.
Contivity VPN SwitchA Nortel product that provides routing, firewall, bandwidth management, encryption, authentication, and data integrity for secure tunneling across managed IP networks and the Internet.
controlled directory numberA special directory number that allows calls arriving at the switch to be queued when the CDN is controlled by an application such as Contact Center Manager Server. When a call arrives at this number, the switch notifies the application and waits for routing instructions, which are performed by scripts in Contact Center Manager Server.
CPHcalls per hour
CPUSee central processing unit.
CRMSee Customer Relationship Manager.
CRQSSee Call Request Queue Size.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1257
January 2008
CSLCommand and Status Link
CTDSee Conditionally Toll Denied.
CTISee Computer Telephony Integration.
customer administratorA user who maintains Contact Center Manager.
Customer Local Area NetworkThe LAN to which your corporate servers, third-party applications, and desktop clients connects.
Customer Relationship ManagerAn application that provides the tools and information that an organization requires to manage its customer relationships.
D Data Execution PreventionA set of hardware and software technologies that perform additional checks on memory to help to protect against malicious code exploits. In Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1, Data Execution Prevention is enforced by both hardware and software.
database viewsA logical representation of the database used to organize information in the database for your use. Event statistics are accessible through database views.
DBMSDatabase Management System
deacquireTo release an acquired switch resource from the control of the contact center.
1258 Contact Center Standby Server
Standard 10.12
deactivated scriptA script that does not process any new calls. If a script is in use when it is deactivated, calls continue to be processed by the script until they are completed.
default activity codeThe activity code assigned to a call if an agent does not enter an activity code manually, or when an agent presses the activity code button twice on the phoneset. Each skillset has a defined default activity code.
default skillsetThe skillset to which calls are queued if they are not queued to a skillset or a specific agent by the end of a script.
denial of serviceAn incident in which a user or organization is unable to gain access to a resource that they can normally access.
DEPSee Data Execution Prevention.
Designer PatchAn emergency fix packaged to address specific individual Contact Center software problems. Designer Patches are viewable from a patch viewer application. Designer Patches are included in the next scheduled Service Update or Service Update Supplementary. See also Service Update and Service Update Supplementary.
desktop userA configured user who can log on to the Contact Center Manager Server from a client PC.
destination siteThe site to which an outgoing network call is sent. See also source site.
DHCPSee dynamic host configuration protocol.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1259
January 2008
Dial-Up NetworkingSee Remote Access Services.
Dialed Number Identification ServiceAn optional service that allows Contact Center Manager Server to identify the phone number dialed by the incoming caller. An agent can receive calls from customers calling in on different DNISs and, if the DNIS is displayed on the phoneset, can prepare a response according to the DNIS.
DIDDirect Inward Dial
directory number The number that identifies a phoneset on a switch. The directory number (DN) can be a local extension (local DN), a public network telephone number, or an automatic call distribution directory number (ACD-DN).
directory number callA call presented to the DN key on an agent’s phoneset.
display thresholdA threshold used in real-time displays to highlight a value below or above the normal range.
disposition codeAn item configured in Contact Center Multimedia to indicate the result of a completed outbound contact. Agents choose a disposition code, and this information can be generated in a report.
Distant Steering CodeUsed by the switch to route calls to their intended destination.
Distance Vector Multicast Routing ProtocolThe multicast routing protocol used when multicast data recipients extend beyond a single network. This protocol advertises the shortest-path route to the networks on which a multicasting source resides.
1260 Contact Center Standby Server
Standard 10.12
DMSDigital Multiplex Switch
DNSee directory number.
DN callSee directory number call.
DNISSee Dialed Number Identification Service.
DoSSee denial of service.
DPSee Designer Patch.
DSCDistant Steering Code
DTMFDual Tone Multi Frequency
Dual Tone Multi FrequencyA method used by the telephone system to communicate the keys pressed when dialing. Pressing a key on the phone's keypad generates two simultaneous tones, one for the row and one for the column. These are decoded by the exchange to determine which key was pressed.
DVMRPSee Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol.
dynamic host configuration protocolA protocol for dynamically assigning IP addresses to devices on a network.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1261
January 2008
dynamic link libraryA library of executable functions or data that can be used by a Windows application. Typically, a DLL provides one or more particular functions, and a program accesses the functions by creating either a static or dynamic link to the DLL. Several applications can use a DLL at the same time.
E EBCSee equivalent basic calls.
EIUEthernet Interface Unit
ELAN SubnetSee embedded local area network.
e-mail aliasAn e-mail address that forwards all e-mail messages it receives to another e-mail account. For example, the mailbox [email protected] can have the aliases [email protected] and [email protected]. E-mail addressed to either of these aliases is forwarded to the [email protected] mailbox. To route e-mail differently depending on the alias to which it is addressed, create a recipient mailbox as an alias in the Contact Center Multimedia Administrator application and then create routing rules based on the alias.
e-mail message contactAn incoming e-mail message handled intelligently using rules to route a contact according to a skillset, send an auto-response, or close the contact.
e-mail ruleDetermine how an e-mail contact is routed based on information about the e-mail message (inputs) and configurations in your contact center (outputs).
embedded local area networkA dedicated Ethernet TCP/IP LAN that connects the Contact Center Manager Server and the switch.
1262 Contact Center Standby Server
Standard 10.12
Emergency keyA key on an agent’s phoneset that, when pressed by an agent, automatically calls their supervisor to notify the supervisor of a problem with a caller.
enterprise IP networkYour entire IP network including the ELAN subnet and the Nortel server subnet.
equivalent basic callsA measure of the telephone switch CPU real time required to process a basic call. See also basic call.
event1. An occurrence or action on Contact Center Manager, such as the sending or receiving of a message, the opening or closing of an application, or the reporting of an error. Some events are for information only, while others can indicate a problem. Events are categorized by severity: information, minor, major, and critical. 2. An action generated by a script command, such as queuing a call to a skillset or playing music.
expression1. A building block used in scripts to test for conditions, perform calculations, or compare values within scripts. See also logical expression and mathematical expression. 2. A category of disk drives that employs two or more drives in combination for fault tolerance and performance. See also relational expression.
F FCTHSee Flow Control Threshold.
filter timerThe length of time after the system unsuccessfully attempts to route calls to a destination site before that site is filtered out of a routing table.
firewallA set of programs that protects the resources of a private network from external users.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1263
January 2008
first-level thresholdThe value that represents the lowest value of the normal range for a statistic in a threshold class. The system tracks how often the value for the statistic falls below this value.
Flow Control ThresholdThe number of calls required to reopen a closed network skillset queue. This value must be less than the Call Request Queue Size. For Network Skill-Based Routing, Flow Control Threshold (FCTH) is configured in Contact Center Manager Administration. If the NACD fallback or the Queue_to_NACD script command is used, FCTH must be configured in LD23 on the switch. See also Call Request Queue Size.
G global settingsSettings that apply to all skillsets or IVR ACD-DNs configured on your system.
global variableA variable that contains values that can be used by any script on the system. You can only change the value of a global variable in the Script Variable Properties sheet. You cannot change it in a script. See also call variable, variable.
GOSSee grade of service.
grade of serviceThe probability that calls are delayed by more than a certain number of seconds while waiting for a port.
H HDXSee Host Data Exchange.
Host Data ExchangeA rich scripting language provided with Contact Center Manager to control treatment of calls.
1264 Contact Center Standby Server
Standard 10.12
HTTPSee Hypertext Transfer Protocol.
hundred call secondsSee centum call seconds.
Hypertext Transfer ProtocolThe set of rules for transferring data on the World Wide Web.
I ICMSee Intelligent Call Manager.
IGMPSee Internet Group Management Protocol.
Incalls keyThe key on an agent phoneset to which incoming ACD and Contact Center Manager calls are presented.
Integrated Services Digital NetworkA set of standards for transmitting digital information over ordinary telephone wire and other media.
Integration Package for Meridian LinkA feature that integrates an IVR system with a switch.
Intelligent Call ManagerA high capacity contact center TCP/IP interface to the switch that enables the exchange of messages between the switch and a remote host computer.
Interactive Voice ResponseAn application that allows telephone callers to interact with a host computer using prerecorded messages and prompts.
Interactive Voice Response ACD-DNA directory number that routes a caller to a specific IVR application. An IVR ACD-DN must be acquired for non-integrated IVR systems.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1265
January 2008
Interactive Voice Response eventA voice port logon or logoff. An IVR event is pegged in the database when a call acquires or deacquires a voice port.
Internet Group Management ProtocolThe multicast routing protocol used in a network that does not require the delivery of multicast packets between routers or across networks. This protocol transports the following information between host group members, hosts, and routers:
client requests to join a group
messages about group membership sent by hosts to routers
Internet Protocol addressAn identifier for a computer or device on a TCP/IP network. Networks use TCP/IP to route messages based on the IP address of the destination. For customers using NSBR, site IP addresses must be unique and correct. The format of an IP address is a 32-bit numeric address written as four values separated by periods. Each value can be 0 to 255. For example, 1.160.10.240 can be an IP address.
intrinsicA word or phrase used in a script to gain access to system information about skillsets, agents, time, and call traffic that can then be used in formulas and decision-making statements. See also call intrinsic, skillset intrinsic, time intrinsic, traffic intrinsic.
IP addressSee Internet Protocol address.
IPMLSee Integration Package for Meridian Link.
ISDNSee Integrated Services Digital Network.
IVRSee Interactive Voice Response.
1266 Contact Center Standby Server
Standard 10.12
IVR ACD-DNSee Interactive Voice Response ACD-DN.
IVR eventSee Interactive Voice Response event.
IVR portSee voice port.
L LANSee local area network.
Line of Business codeSee activity code.
LOB codeSee activity code.
local area networkA computer network that spans a relatively small area. Most LANs connect workstations and personal computers and are confined to a single building or group of buildings.
local callA call that originates at the local site. See also network call.
local skillsetA skillset that can be used at the local site only. See also network skillset, skillset.
logical expression1. A symbol used in scripts to test for different conditions. Logical expressions are AND, OR, and NOT. See also expression, mathematical expression. 2. A category of disk drives that employs two or more drives in combination for fault tolerance and performance. See also relational expression.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1267
January 2008
M M1Meridian 1 switch
M1 IEMeridian 1 Internet Enabled switch
mailboxSee recipient mailbox.
Management Information BaseA data structure that describes the collection of all possible objects in a network. Each managed node maintains one or more variables (objects) that describe its state. Contact Center Manager Server Management Information Bases (MIB) contribute to the overall network MIB by:
identifying Nortel/Meridian/Contact Center Manager Server nodes within the network
identifying significant events (SNMP traps), such as alarms reporting
specifying formats of alarms
Master scriptThe first script executed when a call arrives at the Contact Center. A default Master script is provided with Contact Center Manager, but it can be customized by an authorized user. It cannot be deactivated or deleted. See also network script, primary script, script, secondary script.
mathematical expression1. An expression used in scripts to add, subtract, multiply, and divide values. Mathematical expressions are addition (+), subtraction (-), division (/), and multiplication (*). See also expression and logical expression. 2. A category of disk drives that employs two or more drives in combination for fault tolerance and performance. See also relational expression.
mean holding time1. The time that the agent is involved in serving a call. It is the sum of average talk time. 2. The time required for postcall processing when the agent is not available to handle other calls. 3. Intercall interval (including union break, if any).
1268 Contact Center Standby Server
Standard 10.12
Media Application ServerA programmable media endpoint in a SIP signaling network that acts as a SIP user agent to accept and control sessions and the IP media (audio and video) services associated with those sessions. The Media Application Server delivers programmable customized intelligent media services to those sessions using text, voice, and video initially, with extensibility to other media and information types as the applications grow.
mean time between callsThe average time between presentation of calls to an agent.
Meridian Link ServicesA communications facility that provides an interface between the switch and a third-party host application.
Meridian MailA Nortel product that provides voice messaging and other voice and fax services.
Meridian MAXA Nortel product that provides call processing based on ACD routing.
MHTSee mean holding time.
MIBSee Management Information Base.
MLSSee Meridian Link Services.
MMSee Meridian Mail.
MOSPFSee Multicasting Extensions to Open Shortest Path First.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1269
January 2008
MTBCSee mean time between calls.
Multicasting Extensions to Open Shortest Path FirstAn enhanced version of the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing algorithm that allows a router to forward multicast IP traffic within an autonomous OSPF (v.2) system.
Multimedia databaseA Caché database used to store customer information and contact details for outbound, e-mail, and Web communication contacts.
MSL-100Meridian Stored Logic 100 switch
music routeA resource installed on the switch that provides music to callers while they wait for an agent.
N NACD callA call that arrives at the server from a network ACD-DN.
NATSee Network Address Translation.
NCCSee Network Control Center.
NCRTDSee Network Consolidated Real-Time Display.
Network Address TranslationThe translation of an Internet Protocol (IP) address used within one network to an IP address used within another network. One network is called the inside network and the other is called the outside network.
1270 Contact Center Standby Server
Standard 10.12
network callA call that originates at another site in the network. See also local call.
Network Consolidated Real-Time DisplayA real-time display containing data from more than one Contact Center Manager Server. This data is consolidated by Contact Center Manager Administration.
Network Control CenterThe server on a Contact Center Manager system where Network Skill-Based Routing is configured and where communication between servers is managed.
network interface cardAn expansion board that enables a PC to connect to a local area network (LAN).
network scriptThe script executed to handle error conditions for Contact Center Manager Server calls forwarded from one site to another for customers using NSBR. The network script is a system-defined script provided with Contact Center Manager, but it can be customized by an authorized user. It cannot be deactivated or deleted. See also Master script, primary script, script, secondary script.
Network Skill-Based RoutingAn optional feature with Contact Center Manager Server that provides skill-based routing to multiple networked sites.
network skillsetA skillset common to every site on the network. Network skillsets must be created at the Network Control Center (NCC).
night modeA skillset state in which the server does not queue incoming calls to the skillset, and in which all queued calls are given night treatment. A skillset goes into night mode automatically when the last agent logs off, or the administrator can put it into night mode manually. See also out-of-service mode, transition mode.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1271
January 2008
Nortel server subnetThe subnet to which the Nortel servers, such as Contact Center Manager Server, Network Control Center, Contact Center Manager Administration, Contact Center Multimedia, and CallPilot are connected.
Nortel VPN Router SwitchA Nortel product that provides routing, firewall, bandwidth management, encryption, authentication, and data integrity for secure tunneling across managed IP networks and the Internet.
NPASee Number Plan Area.
NSBRSee Network Skill-Based Routing.
Number Plan AreaArea code
O object linking and embeddingA compound document standard that enables you to create objects with one application, and then link or embed them in a second application.
ODBCSee Open Database Connectivity.
OEMOriginal equipment manufacturer
Office hoursHours configured in the contact center where e-mail messages can be routed using one method when the contact center is open, and another method when the contact center is closed.
OLESee object linking and embedding.
1272 Contact Center Standby Server
Standard 10.12
Open Database ConnectivityA Microsoft-defined database application program interface (API) standard.
Open Shortest Path FirstA routing algorithm that provides least-cost routing, multipath routing, and load balancing.
Optivity Telephony ManagerA Nortel application used for switch management.
OSPFSee Open Shortest Path First.
OTMSee Optivity Telephony Manager.
outbound campaignA group of outgoing calls from the contact center for a specific purpose, for example, customer satisfaction surveys.
Outbound Campaign Management ToolAn administrator tool accessed through Contact Center Manager Administration for configuring outbound campaigns.
outbound contactAn outgoing voice call intelligently routed to an agent according to a skillset within a defined time interval. The call can be dialed by the agent or the switch.
out-of-service modeA skillset state in which the skillset does not take calls. A skillset is out of service if no agents are logged on or if the supervisor puts the skillset into out-of-service mode manually. See also night mode, transition mode.
out-of-service skillsetA skillset not taking any new calls. While a skillset is out of service, incoming calls cannot be queued to the skillset. See also local skillset, network skillset, skillset.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1273
January 2008
P patchSee Designer Patch.
PBXSee private branch exchange.
peggingThe action of incrementing statistical counters to track and report on system events.
pegging thresholdA threshold used to define a cut-off value for statistics, such as short call and service level. Pegging thresholds are used in reports.
PEPPerformance Enhancement Package. Now known as Designer Patch. See Designer Patch.
Performance Enhancement PackageNow known as Designer Patch. See Designer Patch.
personal directory numberA DN on which an agent can be reached directly, usually for private calls.
phonesetThe physical device, connected to the switch, to which calls are presented. Each agent and supervisor must have a phoneset.
phoneset displayThe display area on an agent’s phoneset where information about incoming calls can be communicated.
PIMSee Protocol Independent Multicast.
Platform Vendor IndependenceA software-only contact center solution, which operates on any hardware platform that meets specified requirements.
1274 Contact Center Standby Server
Standard 10.12
Position IDA unique identifier for a phoneset, used by the switch to route calls to the phoneset. Referred to as Telephony/Port Address in Contact Center Manager Server.
primary ACD-DNA directory number that callers can dial to reach an ACD group.
primary scriptA script executed or referenced by the Master script. A primary script can route calls to skillsets, or it can transfer routing control to a secondary script. See also Master script, network script, script, secondary script.
prioritiesTwo sets of priorities affect queuing and call presentation: agent priority per skillset and call priority. For both sets of priorities, the lower in value of the number indicates a greater priority in presentation. All idle agent queues and all pending request queues always queue by priority as its top precedence. All other queuing options, such as age of call and agent idle time, take a lower precedence than priority. See also call priority and agent priority per skillset.
private branch exchangeA telephone switch, typically used by a business to service its internal telephone needs. A PBX usually offers more advanced features than are generally available on the public network.
Protocol Independent MulticastA protocol that provides efficient routes for multicast traffic that must cross the Internet to reach members of sparsely distributed multicast groups.
PSTNSee public switched telephone network.
public switched telephone networkThe international network of private and government-owned voice-oriented public telephone networks.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1275
January 2008
R RAIDSee Redundant Array of Intelligent/Inexpensive Disks.
RANrecorded announcement
RAN routeSee recorded announcement route.
RASSee Remote Access Services.
Real-time Statistics MulticastAn interface that provides real-time information to third-party applications in either multicast or unicast format.
recipient mailboxA container on the e-mail server that hold e-mail messages. Standard mailboxes are monitored by the Contact Center E-mail Manager, which routes the e-mail to an agent or group of agents (skillset) based on an analytical search of the sender address, the recipient address, the subject and body of an e-mail message for predetermined keywords, or a combination of these. The e-mail server must be compliant with Post Office Protocol 3 (POP3) and Standard Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP).
recorded announcement routeA resource installed on the switch that offers a recorded announcement to callers.
Redundant Array of Intelligent/Inexpensive DisksA category of disk drives that employs two or more drives in combination for fault tolerance and performance.
redundant serverA Warm Standby server, used for shadowing the Multimedia database on the Multimedia server and providing a quick recovery if the primary server fails.
1276 Contact Center Standby Server
Standard 10.12
relational expressionAn expression used in scripts to test for different conditions. Relational expressions are less than (<), greater than (>), less than or equal to (< =), greater than or equal to (> =), and not equal to (< >). See also expression, logical expression, mathematical expression.
Remote Access ServicesA feature built into Windows NT and Windows 95 that enables users to log on to an NT-based LAN using a modem, X.25 connection, or WAN link. This feature is also known as Dial-Up Networking.
Replication ServerA server that backs up the active Contact Center Manager Server to the standby Contact Center Manager Server in real time.
reporting supervisorThe supervisor who has primary responsibility for an agent. When an agent presses the Emergency key on the phoneset, the emergency call is presented to the agent’s reporting supervisor. See also associated supervisor.
Resource Reservation ProtocolThe protocol used by routers to allow host systems in an IP network to reserve resources for unicast or multicast dataflows.
round robin routing tableA routing table that queues the first call to the first three sites in the routing table, then the second three sites, then the third three sites, and so on, until an agent is reserved at one of the sites. See also sequential routing table.
routeA group of trunks. Each trunk carries either incoming or outgoing calls to the switch. See also music route, RAN route.
routerA device that connects two LANs. Routers can also filter messages and forward them to different places based on various criteria.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1277
January 2008
routing tableA table that defines how calls are routed to the sites on the network. See also round robin routing table, sequential routing table.
RSMSee Real-time Statistics Multicast.
RSVPSee Resource Reservation Protocol.
ruleSee e-mail rule.
S sample scriptA script installed with the Contact Center Manager Server client. Sample scripts are stored as text files in a special folder on the client. The contents of these scripts can be imported or copied into user scripts to create scripts for typical contact center scenarios.
SCMSee Service Control Manager.
scriptA set of instructions that relates to a particular type of call, caller, or set of conditions, such as time of day or day of week. See also Master script, network script, primary script, secondary script.
script variableSee variable.
second-level thresholdThe value used in display thresholds that represents the highest value of the normal range for a given statistic. The system tracks how often the value for the statistic falls outside this value.
1278 Contact Center Standby Server
Standard 10.12
secondary directory numberA DN defined on the agent’s phoneset as a Centrex line for incoming and outgoing non-ACD calls.
secondary scriptAny script (other than a Master, network, or primary script) referenced from a primary script or any other secondary script. Statistics are not pegged for actions occurring during a secondary script. See also Master script, network script, primary script, script.
sequential routing tableA routing table method that always queues a call to the first three active sites in the routing table. See also round robin routing table.
serverA computer or device on a network that manages network resources. Examples of servers include file servers, print servers, network servers, and database servers. Contact Center Manager Server is used to configure the operations of the contact center. See also client.
server subnetThe subnet to which the Nortel servers, such as Contact Center Manger Server, Network Control Center, Contact Center Manager Administration, Contact Center Multimedia, and CallPilot are connected.
serviceA process that adheres to a Windows NT structure and requirements. A service provides system functionality.
Service Control ManagerA Windows NT process that manages the different services on the PC.
service levelThe percentage of incoming calls answered within a configured number of seconds.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1279
January 2008
service level thresholdA parameter that defines the number of seconds within which incoming calls should be answered.
Service UpdateA Contact Center supplementary software application that enhances the functionality of previously released software by improving performance, adding functionality, or correcting a problem discovered since the original release. All previous Service Updates (SUs) for the release are included in the latest Service Update. For example, SU02 contains the contents of SU01 as well as the fixes delivered in SU02. SU03 contains SU01, SU02, and the fixes delivered in SU03. See also Service Update Supplementary and Designer Patch.
Service Update SupplementaryA stand-alone Contact Center supplementary software application installed on top of a specific Service Update (SU). It does not contain the contents of previous SUs. The next SU includes SUSs built on top of previous SUs. For example, SUS0301 is installed on top of SU03. SU04 contains SU03 and SUS0301 (and any subsequent SUSs built on top of SU03). See also Service Update and Designer Patch.
Session Initiation ProtocolAn application-layer control (signaling) protocol for creating, modifying, and terminating sessions with one or more participants.
Simple Network Management ProtocolA systematic way of monitoring and managing a computer network. The SNMP model consists of four components:
managed nodes, which are any device, such as hosts, routers, and printers, capable of communicating status to network-management systems through an SNMP management process called an SNMP Agent
management stations, which are computers running special network management software that interact with the Agents for status
management information, which is conveyed through exact specifications and format of status specified by the MIB
Management Protocol or SNMP, which sends messages called protocol data units (PDUs)
1280 Contact Center Standby Server
Standard 10.12
SIPSee Session Initiation Protocol.
SIP TerminalThe SIP Address of the TR87 controlled terminal dedicated to this agent. This is the phone number that the agent controls, combined with the domain of the agent in the SIP URI.
SIP URIThe SIP Address for the agent as configured on the target SIP server. The SIP Address uniquely identifies the agent on the SIP network.
site1. A system using Contact Center Manager Server that can be accessed using Server Utility. 2. A system using Contact Center Manager Server and participating in Network Skill-Based Routing.
skillsetA group of capabilities or knowledge required to answer a specific type of call. See also local skillset, network skillset.
skillset intrinsicA script element that inserts information about a skillset in a script. Skillset intrinsics return values such as skillsets, integers, and agent IDs. These values are then used in queuing commands. See also call intrinsic, intrinsic, time intrinsic, and traffic intrinsic.
SL-100Stored Logic 100 switch
SNMPSee Simple Network Management Protocol.
source siteThe site from which an incoming network call originates. See also destination site.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1281
January 2008
standbyIn skillset assignments, a property that grants an agent membership in a skillset, but makes the agent inactive for that skillset.
standby serverA server that contains an up-to-date version of the database, for use when the active server becomes unavailable.
SUSee Service Update.
supervisorA user who manages a group of agents. See also associated supervisor and reporting supervisor.
supplementary ACD-DNA DN associated with a primary DN. Any calls to the supplementary DN are automatically routed to the primary DN. A supplementary DN can be a toll-free (1-800) number.
SUSSee Service Update Supplementary.
switchSee telephony switch.
switch resourceA device configured on the switch. For example, a CDN is configured on the switch and then used as a resource with Contact Center Manager Server. See also acquired resource.
system-defined scriptsThe Master_Script and the Network_Script (if NSBR is enabled). Users can customize or deactivate these scripts, but they cannot delete them. These scripts are the first scripts executed for every local or network call arriving at the contact center.
1282 Contact Center Standby Server
Standard 10.12
T TAPISee Telephony Application Program Interface.
target siteSee destination site.
TCP/IPSee Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol.
TDMSee Time-Division Multiplex.
telephonyThe science of translating sound into electrical signals, transmitting them, and then converting them back to sound. The term is used frequently to refer to computer hardware and software that perform functions traditionally performed by telephone equipment.
telephony switchThe hardware that processes calls and routes them to their destination.
Telephony Application Program InterfaceAn interface between the switch and an application that allows the application to control the telephone on a user’s desktop.
thresholdA value for a statistic at which system handling of the statistic changes.
threshold classA set of options that specifies how statistics are treated in reports and real-time displays. See also display threshold, pegging threshold.
Time-Division MultiplexA method of transmission in which a signal is separated into multiple segments at the transmission source, and then reassembled at the receiving end.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1283
January 2008
time intrinsicA script element that stores information about system time, including time of day, day of week, and week of year. See also call intrinsic, intrinsic, skillset intrinsic, traffic intrinsic.
Token RingA PC network protocol developed by IBM. A Token Ring network is a type of computer network in which all the computers are arranged schematically in a circle.
traffic intrinsicAn intrinsic that inserts information about system-level traffic in a script. See also call intrinsic, intrinsic, skillset intrinsic, time intrinsic.
transition modeA skillset state in which the server presents already queued calls to a skillset. New calls queued to the skillset are given out-of-service treatment. See also night mode, out-of-service mode.
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet ProtocolThe communication protocol used to connect devices on the Internet. TCP/IP is the standard protocol for transmitting data over networks.
treatmentSee call treatment.
trunkA communications link between a PBX and the public central office, or between PBXs. Various trunk types provide services such as Direct Inward Dialing (DID trunks), ISDN, and Central Office connectivity.
U user-created scriptA script created by an authorized user on the Contact Center Manager system. Primary and secondary scripts are user created scripts.
user-defined scriptA script modified by an authorized user on the Contact Center Manager system.
1284 Contact Center Standby Server
Standard 10.12
utilityA program that performs a specific task, usually related to managing system resources. Operating systems contain a number of utilities for managing disk drives, printers, and other devices.
V validationThe process of checking a script to ensure that all the syntax and semantics are correct. A script must be validated before it can be activated.
variableA placeholder for values calculated within a script, such as CLID. Variables are defined in the Script Variable Properties sheet and can be used in multiple scripts to determine treatment and routing of calls entering Contact Center Manager Server. See also call variable, global variable.
Virtual Private NetworkA private network configured within a public network to take advantage of the economies of scale and management facilities of large networks.
Voice Extensible Markup LanguageAllows a user to interact with the Internet through voice-recognition technology.
Voice over IPVoice traffic transmitted in digital format using the IP protocol.
voice portA connection from a telephony port on the switch to a port on the IVR system.
VPNSee Virtual Private Network.
VXMLSee Voice Extensible Markup Language.
W WANSee wide area network.
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1285
January 2008
Web-on-holdA set of URLs that a customer sees after requesting a text chat session, and before the agent connects to the Web Communications contact.
wide area networkA computer network that spans a relatively large geographical area. Typically, a WAN consists of two or more local area networks (LANs). The largest WAN in existence is the Internet.
workload scenariosSets of configuration values defined for typical patterns of system operations. Five typical workload scenarios (entry, small, medium, large, and upper end) are used in the Capacity Assessment Tool for capacity analysis for Contact Center Manager.
1286 Contact Center Standby Server
Standard 10.12
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1287
Index
Numerics1000t servers 431001t servers 431003t servers 431-Wire iButton driver
installing 225, 42740593 event code 985701t servers 43702t servers 43
Aaccounts, default 186, 396, 660, 980Active Server 20Active Server, checking disk partition
configuration on 258, 536agent licenses 62application ID 107, 284, 558Application Log
changing default size of 1029recommended settings for 1029
Bbacking up database 261, 538
checklist for 920to remote directory 264, 541to tape 262, 539variables affecting speed 913
backup tapes 265, 542, 918rotating 919
backup types 912backup.log file, checking for errors after remote
backup 276, 481, 491, 500, 703, 854,931, 943
backupsdatabase 908full 909options for 261, 538
RAID 910setting up remote directory 932setting up tape 929
business group 107, 284, 558
Ccaller accounts, adding 113, 315, 588capacity requirements, calculating for database
backups 924CCMS server name
changing 1073, 1148, 1182, 1206, 1220, 1232,1239
ChangeSOAPSrv utilityrunning 1153, 1183
changingCCMS server
name 1073, 1148, 1182, 1206, 1220, 1232, 1239
NGenDesign password 187–189, 397–399, 661–663, 980–982
NGenDist password 187–189, 397–399, 661–663, 980–982
NGenSys password 399, 663, 982passwords 399, 663, 980–982size of event log 1028
Changing the IP addresses 901Check Dongle 240, 442checking
partitioning on the Active Server 258, 536RAM size 259, 537
checklistpost-installation 181server installation software 102, 250
CLANsetting TCP/IP parameters
for 291, 452, 508, 565client license, pcAnywhere 312, 585computer name 290, 451, 507, 564
matching with DNS host name 301, 574synchronizing 1075, 1112
configuringNMS 1033SNMP 1031–1033
Contact Center Manager Server
1288 Contact Center Standby Server
Index Standard 10.12
accessing utilities in 1036optional features in 19options for uninstalling software 1044preparing for remote directory
backup 494, 936uninstalling server software 1044utilities in 1036
conversionmaterials required for 253, 531
Corporate licensing 55critical event, severity level 1027customer number 106, 283, 557
Ddaily maintenance and backups 909database
backing up on original Release 3.0 or Release 4.0 server 261, 538
backing up to remote directory 264, 541backing up to tape 262, 539configuring by importing data from Platform
Recovery Disk 967options for uninstalling software 1044recovery of 955reinstalling software 1057removing 1050restoring 1040segmentation problems found
in 212, 279, 553, 923, 973uninstalling software 1044
database backups 912and daily maintenance 909best practices 910calculating capacity requirements for 924creating and sharing remote directory
for 268, 493, 545, 936files created during remote directory 933network requirements for 265, 542options for 261, 538partitions for third-party 1037, 1038performing on Active
Server 272, 477, 548, 699, 850preparing network computer for remote 935setting up remote directory 265, 542, 932
setting up tape 929tape drive requirements for 918tape vs. remote directory 928variables affecting speed 913when to use 908
database events 1030database expansion
usage column entry meanings in 1037Database Expansion utility 1037
about 1036reserving partition for non-database
use 1037, 1038database information, importing from Platform
Recovery Disk 958database integrity check
performing on Active Server 255, 533database restore
from remote directory backup 484, 706, 857, 963
from tape backup 482, 704, 855, 961from third-party backup 975options for 261, 538variables affecting speed 913
Database Restore utility 1040Date and Time Settings
window 290, 451, 507, 564DBSpace utility 924default user accounts 186, 396, 660, 980disk partition configuration
checking on Active Server 258, 536worksheet 259, 537
disk partitioning 47DNS host name
matching with computer name 301, 574documents in Contact Center 29dongle keycodes
entering 240, 442
EELAN
setting TCP/IP parameters for 291, 565ELAN IP address
switch 106, 283, 557emergency license file 91
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1289
January 2008 Index
entering a keycode 239, 441ESPL web site 33Event Browser 1026event code 40593 985event filtering, overriding 1031event logging 102, 250event logs
changing size of 1028default size 1028
Event Viewer 1026, 1030events
critical 1027database 1030information level 1026major 1027MAS debug 1030minor 1027overview 1026server 985severity of 1026wraparound of 1028
experience required 28extended partitions 48
Ffeature licenses 62full backups 912
when to use 909
Gguidelines
third-party backup software 946
Hhardware
and the Microsoft Hardware Compatibility list 47
head-cleaning kit 918High Availability platforms 43host PC, configuring pcAnywhere 115, 316, 589
Iinformation event, severity level 1026information, platform recovery disk 280, 554installation methods for Contact Center Manager
Server 101, 249installing
1-Wire iButton drivers 225, 427LinkPlexer 236, 438PEPs on server 868Service Update Packs on server 868
IP addressesfor RSM server 109, 286, 560routers 107, 284, 558switch 107, 284, 558
IP multicast addressesmodifying 214, 416, 681valid for multicasting 218, 421, 685
IUSR_SWC accountresetting to reflect a new computer
name 1153, 1184
Kkeycode
entering 239, 441Keycode Tracker 240, 442knowledge required 28
Llatest updates to software 33license
Open Networking 62Open Queue 62Outbound 63Report Creation Wizard 63Standby Server 63
license filechanging 75corporate license file 58nodal license file 59reading 59
license identifierCS 1000/Meridian 1 server 64
1290 Contact Center Standby Server
Index Standard 10.12
CS 2x00/DMS server 64Mixed Corporate Node 65SIP server 65
license identifiers 66License Manage
port number 78License Manager 66
shutting down 75licenses
agents 62Licensing Modes window 290, 451, 507, 564link set name 107, 284, 558LinkPlexer
installing 236, 438local security settings, setting up on Standby
Server 496, 938
Mmaintenance, server utilities 1035major event, severity level 1027MAS debug events 1030MIB files 1033
format of NGen MIB 1033Microsoft Hardware Compatibility list 47Microsoft updates 978minor event, severity level 1027modem
configuring for remote access 295, 456, 512, 569
Modem Dialing Information window 290, 451, 507, 564
MPL web site 33mRcv.ini file
modifying 222, 424, 689sample of 223, 425, 690
multicast ratesactivating changed 220, 422, 687changing 219, 422, 686
Multicast Receive utility 222, 424, 689configuring 222, 424, 689
Nnetwork computer, preparing for remote
directory backup 267, 544, 935network connection
testing 281, 555Network Management System. See NMSnetwork node ID 107, 284, 558network requirements, for remote database
backups 265, 542Networking Components
window 291, 452, 508, 565Networking Settings window 290, 451, 507, 564NGen MIB, format of 1033NGenDesign account 187, 397, 661, 980
changing password for 16, 186, 187–189, 396, 397–399, 660, 661–663, 980–982
configuring for remote access 190, 400, 664NGenDist account 186, 396, 660, 980
changing password for 187–189, 397–399, 661–663, 980–982
configuring for remote access 190, 400, 664password on server 16, 186, 396, 660
NGenSys account 186, 396, 660, 980changing password for 399, 663, 982configuring for remote access 190, 400, 664
NMS, configuring 1033Nodal licensing 53Nortel Contact Center Security Template 1019
applying in a domain 1024
Ooperating system
configuring for remote access 305, 578optional features 19
Ppackage licenses 61
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1291
January 2008 Index
partitioningchecking on the Active Server 258, 536disk 47
partitionsreserving for non-database use 1037, 1038size of 47
passwordschanging NGenDist and NGenDesign on
server 16, 186, 396, 660default 186, 396, 660, 980guidelines for 979maintaining 399, 663, 980–982when to change 979
Patch Managerstarting 875
Patch managerusing 876
pcAnywhereprotecting settings 983starting for first time 113, 314, 587
PEP Viewer utilityusing 1046
PEPsinstalling on server 868
Personalize Your Software window 289, 451, 507, 563
Platform Compliance Checkabout 43
Platform Recovery Diskcreating on Active Server 277, 551importing database information from 958information on 280, 554saving to remote directory 212, 279, 553, 973using to configure database and software 967
platformssupported 42
post-installation checklist 181primary partitions 48PVI
requirements 43
RRAID backups 912
when to use 910
RAM sizechecking on Active Server 259, 537worksheet 260, 537
recoveryfrom remote directory
backup 484, 706, 857, 963from tape backup 482, 704, 855, 961of database contents 955options for 261, 538
Regional Settings window 289, 451, 507, 563related documents 29remote access
and NGenSys 190, 400, 664configuring modem for 295, 456, 512, 569configuring NGenDesign for 190, 400, 664configuring NGenDist for 190, 400, 664configuring the operating system
for 295, 305, 456, 512, 569, 578remote database backups
preparing for 268, 545preparing the network computer for 267, 544worksheet for setting up 266, 543
Remote Desktop Connection 48remote directory
backing up the database to 264, 541creating and sharing 268, 493, 545, 936for Platform Recovery
Disk 212, 279, 553, 973setting up for database backups 265, 542
remote directory backupscompared to tape backups 928computer requirements for 265, 542files created during 265, 542, 933preparing Contact Center Manager Server
for 494, 936preparing network computer for 935setting up 932testing the configuration of 944worksheet for setting up 934
remote directory restoretesting the configuration of 944
remote restore settings, completing on Standby Server 497, 940
Replication Server 20required experience 28
1292 Contact Center Standby Server
Index Standard 10.12
requirementsnetwork for remote backups 265, 542remote computer for database
backups 265, 542server installation software 102, 250tape drive 918third-party backup software 946
restoringdatabase 1040
RSMmodifying settings 214, 416, 681testing 222, 424, 689
RSM server, IP address 109, 286, 560RSM service, activating modifications
to 220, 423, 687RTD Multicast Configuration
utility 215, 418, 682RTD Multicast Controller utility 215, 417, 682
SSCCSDBSpace view 925SDP service
starting and stopping 215, 417, 682secure caller accounts 113, 315, 588security 977–985security auditing 985server
user accounts on 186, 396, 660, 980server software
reinstalling 1057server utilities 1035service ID 107, 284, 558Service Update packs 868
removing all installed from server 876, 1046Service Update packs, installing on server 868service version 107, 284, 558severity, of events 1026size
event log, changing 1028SNMP
configuring 1031–1033configuring to forward traps to NMS 1031
softwareoptions for uninstalling 1044
Stable Queue 49Standby Server 20, 258
disk partitioning 47hardware specifications 43installing
Standby Server 334, 602preparing for database backups 489Replication Server
maintaining 883stopping 775, 833, 893
Replication Server Monitor 885setting up 38Stable Queue
adding partitions 898expanding 899
Standby Server database 22switching over 717using 37Warm Standby configuration
removing 775, 833, 893setting up 472, 694
statisticsLicense Manager 95
super PEPs. See Service Update packssupported platforms 42SUs. See Service Update packssuspicious activity 985synchronizing
computer name 1075, 1112
Ttape
using for database backups 262, 539tape backups
benchmark statistics for 913compared to remote directory backups 928setting up 929
tape drives 918requirements for 47, 918
tape rotation 919TCP/IP parameters
setting for CLAN 291, 452, 508, 565setting for ELAN 291, 565
Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server 1293
January 2008 Index
testing configuration of remote directory backup and restore 944
third-party backup, using to recover the database 975
third-party softwareguidelines for backup 946
Time To Live value, modifying 214, 416, 681timing 101, 249Tracker
components 240, 442TTL. See Time to Live
Uuninstalling
server software and database 1044updates
Microsoft 978usage column entry meanings 1037user access rights, configuring
pcAnywhere 113, 315, 588user accounts on server 186, 396, 660, 980utilities
accessing 1036Database Expansion 1036, 1037Database Restore 1040in Contact Center Manager Server 1036Multicast Receive 222, 424, 689Platform Compliance Check 43RTD Multicast Configuration 215, 418, 682RTD Multicast Controller 215, 417, 682
Vvirtual memory
checking settings 294, 295, 455, 456, 511, 512,568, 569
Wweb site addresses 33Windows Event Viewer 1030Windows user account
creating on network computer 267, 544setting up on Standby
Server 269, 494, 545, 937workgroup name
adding 292, 453, 509, 566Workgroup or Computer Domain
window 292, 453, 509, 566worksheet
disk partition configuration 259, 537RAM size 260, 537setting up remote directory backups 934
1294 Contact Center Standby Server
Index Standard 10.12
Reader Response FormStandby Server Release 6.0Installation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server
Tell us about yourself:
Name:
Company:
Address:
Occupation: Phone:
1. What is your level of experience with this product?
New user Intermediate Experienced Programmer
2. How do you use this book?
Learning Procedural Reference Problem solving
3. Did this book meet your needs?
Yes No
If you answered No to this question, please answer the following questions.
4. What chapters, sections, or procedures did you find hard to understand?
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
5. What information (if any) was missing from this book?
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
6. How could we improve this book?
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
Please return your comments by fax to 353-91-756050, or mail your comments to Contact Center Documentation Research and Development Prime, Nortel, Mervue Business Park, Gal-
Reader Response Form
Reader Response Form
Contact Center Manager ServerInstallation and Maintenance Guide for the Standby Server
Nortel Networks
Mervue Business ParkGalway, Ireland
Copyright © 2006-2008 Nortel Networks. All Rights Reserved.
Information is subject to change without notice. Nortel Networks reserves the right to make changes in design or components as progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant.
The process of transmitting data and call messaging between the Meridian 1 and Standby Server is proprietary to Nortel Networks. Any other use of the data and the transmission process is a violation of the user license unless specifically authorized in writing by Nortel Networks prior to such use. Violations of the license by alternative usage of any portion of this process or the related hardware constitutes grounds for an immediate termination of the license and Nortel Networks reserves the right to seek all allowable remedies for such breach.
Publication number: 297-2183-219
Product release: 6.0
Document release: Standard 10.12Date: January 2008
To provide feedback or report a problem in this document, go to www.nortel.com/documentfeedback.